.18^. ^, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) £/ ;^4^^ i?.. C <' V#/^' fc ^^ /^ !.0 I.I 1125 i !r IS 12.0 1.8 1.25 1.4 1.6 -• 6" - ► ^ ^ ^. / / > N>* "^ J^' /s« Photographic Sciences Corporation 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER. N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 y'' w. CIHM/ICMH Microfiche Series. CIHM/ICMH Collection de microfiches. Canadian Institute for Historical Microreproductions / Institut Canadian de microreproductions historiques \ >. Technical and Bibliographic Notas/Notas tachniquas at bibliographiquas Tha Instituta has atiamptad to obtain tha baat original copy avaiiabia for filming. Faaturaa of this copy which may ba bibliographicaliy uniqua, which may altar any of tha imagaa in tha raprodiiction, or which may significantly ehcnga tha usual mathod of filming, ara chaokad batow. D Colourad covars/ Couvartura da coulaur r~1 Covars damagad/ D Couvartura andommagia Covars rastorad and/or laminatad/ Couvartura rastaurte at/ou palliculte I — I Covar titia missing/ D D □ La titra da couvartura manqua Colourad maps/ Cartes gAographiques fi couleur Coloured ink (i.e. other than blue or black)/ Encre de couleur (i.e. autre que bleue ou noire) r~~1 Colourad plates and/or illustrations/ □ Planches et/ou illustrationa en couleur Bound with other material/ Reii* avec d'autras documents Tight binding may cause shadows or dictortion along interior margin/ La re liure serrie peut causer de I'ombre ou de la distorsion l« long da la marge intirieure Blank leaves added during restoration may appear within tha text. Whenever possible, these have been omitted from filming/ II se peut que certainaa pagea blanehea ajoutiaa lore d'une restauration apparaissent dans la texte, mais, iorsque cela Atait possibie, cea pages n'ont pas iti filmias. Additional comments:/ Commentairas supplAmantaires; L'Institut a rr.icrofiim* la meilleur axamplaire qu'il lui a iti possible de se procurer. Lss ditaits de cet exemplaire qui sont peut-d..re uniques du point de vue bibliographique, qui peuvent modifier une image reproduite, ou qui peuvent exiger una modification dans la mithode normaia de filmage sont indiqute ci-deskous. The I to th r~n Coloured peges/ D Pagee de couleur Pagea damaged/ Pagea endommagtes Pages restored and/oi Pages restauries «t/ou pelliculies Pages discoloured, stained or foxe< Pages dicolories, tacheties ou piquAes Pages detached/ Pages ditachies Showthroughy Transparence Quality of prir QualitA Inigale de I'impression Includes supplementary matarii Comprend du ma'iiriti suppl^mentaire Only edition available/ Seule Edition disponible r — I Pagea damaged/ I I Pages restored and/or laminated/ rri Pages discoloured, stained or foxed/ I I Pages detached/ r~7] Showthrough/ I j Quality of print varies/ r~~| Includes supplementary material/ r~| Only edition available/ The pcsa of til filmi Origi begi the I sion othe first sion or ill The shall TINl whi( Map difffl entii bagi right requ metl Pages wholly or partially obscured by et-rata slips, tissues, etc., have been ref limed to ensure the best poiisibie image/ Les pages totalemant ou partieilement obscurcies par un feuillet d'errata, une pelure, etc., ont it^ fiimies A nouveau de fa^on d obtenir la meilieure image possible. This item i« filmed at the reduction ratio checked belovi^/ Ce document est filmA au tat.x de reduction indiqui ci-dessous. 10X 14X 18X 7r*X f 26X 30X y\ I2X 16X 20X 24X 28X 32X The copy filmed here has been reproduced thanks to the generosity of: National Library of Canada L'aocemplaire filiTi6 fut reproduit grAce A la g6n6rosit6 de: Biblloth^que nationale du Canada The images appearing here are the best quality possible considering the condition and legib'Mty of the original copy and in keeping with the filming contract specifications. Les images suivantes ont 6t6 reproduites av^c le plus grand soin, compte tenu de la condition et de ta netteti de •'exempiaire filmi, et en conformity avec les conditions du contrat de filmage. Original copies in printed paper covers are filmed beginning with the front cover and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impres- sion, or the back cover when appropriate. All other original copies are filmed beginning on the first page w>ch a printed or illustra;:ed impres- sion, and ending on the last page with a printed or illustrated impression. Les exemplaires originaux dont la couverture en papier est imprimAe sont film^s en commenpant par le premier plat et en terminant soit par la dernidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration, soit par \<3 second plat, selon le cas. Tous les autres exemplaires originaux sont fllm^s en commenqant par ia premidre page qui comporte une empreinte d'impression ou d'illustration et en terminant par la dernidre page qui comporte une telle empreinte. The last recorded frame on each microfiche shall contain the symbol -'^> (meaning "CON- TINUED "), or the symbol V (meaning "END"), whichever applies. Un des symboles suivants apparaftra sur ia dernidre image de cheque microfiche, selon ie cas: ie symbole — ► signifie "A SUIVRE", ie symbole V signifie 'FIN". Maps, plates, charts, etc., may be filmed at different reduction ratios. Those too large to be entirely included in one exposure are filmed beginning in the upper left hand corner, left to right and top to bottom, as many frames as required. The following diagrr^Yis illustrate the method: Les cartes, planches, tableaux, etc., peuvent dtre film^s d des taux de reduction diff^rents. Lorsque le document est trap grand pour fitre reprjduit en un seui cliche, 11 est film6 d partir de Tangle supirieur gauche, de gauche d droite, et de haut en bas, en prenant le nombre d'images n^cessaire. Les diagrammes suivants illustrent la mSthode. 1 2 3 1 2 3 4 5 6 N« 1^ National Library Bibliotheque nationale of Canada du Canada i^ THE HIGH SCHOOL German Grammar WITH APPENDICES, EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION AND VOCABULARIES BY Vv^. H. VAN DER SMISSEN, M. A. Lecturer on German, Universitv College. Toronto. AND - W. H. ERASER, B. A. Lecturer on It.u.n .n. Sp.n.h. UN.vERsn-v Colleoe. Toronto; l.te French AND German Master, Upper Canada College. Authorized by the Education Department of Ontario. TORONTO: THE COPP, CLARK COMPANY. LIMITED. 1890. PF3)) Entered according to Act of the Parliament of Canada, in the year one thousar.d ei^ht hunted and eighty-eight, by Thk Copp, C.hk Company. Lmitkd. 1„ the fflce o the Minister of Agriculture. printtsd bt Thb Copp, Clark Compaw, Lt». TORONTO. -8M Q^L PREFACE. In presenting this Grammar to the Public fh. . ,.k be overburdened n'^H ^ .! '^'"""' "'^>' "<" « 'he outset toodffiturr^lTufe Ct^^^^^^^ as for instance the declension „f '"P^"''"" '""'J^"' before bein. dis mlsed T "'''''"■"'™^' '^ '""7 '^^ated tmtion of e^ch ruTe "°" '^"^"'"^^ "« ^^^ '" "'"- I" the Exercises, especial care has been taken th^f n„ pt: Tot t!;r t r™"^^ T'^' '" -'^^- - -^^^ Iess;ns ' " -'-espondm. lesson, but also of pa.t ' shor s-s ::tp"; :l\~' '^ ^^-^^^ - -" |es..^_ These or. exerc-s^Ct::— ruVt sons should ],e omitted by the el -m^L ,' '^'■ -ot in an, case be taken 4 ^^^::Zi!^'' '"' ^'°"" duditrpriv^Jv'oiiT'tr'"'"' '"^ '"'^•^"'^^' ">= -^^ (-- oositioL,rsd piiSt :lt:"7''' ''^''™'='p^'p^^^^^ -h the fundaJenta. pri::i;ts'": X^ X' ^ th" -p.et.on of Lesson XXII, the pupi, ^^b/ 4"'e,Ti ^^ I IV PREFACE. for reading easy German texts. The Modal Auxiliaries, how- ever, could not be introduced in their proper connection until the strong verbs had been disposed o(, and where they occur in reading texts must be treated as anomalous forms until Lesson XXXIII is reached. Special care has been taken to call attention to and explain those points in which German differs from English usage, particularly with regard to the prepositions and their puzzling idioms, the use of participles and the construction of participial clauses, the order of words and construction of sentences. The Historical Sketch in Lesson LI I does not claim to be more than rudimentary, and such terms only are employed in explaining phonetic laws, as are likely to be familiar to junior pupils. In the Vocabulary, only such meanings of words are given as occur in the exercises ; for the principal parts of strong and irregular verbs the pupil is referred to the proper section of the Grammar. Similar references are given under the prepositions and pronouns. The Index has been made as full as possible, and it is hoped that it will be of no little assistance to both teacher and pupil. In writing this Grammar, the authors have freely consulted, among others, the grammars of Heyse, Whitney and Brandt, Vernaleken's "Deutsche Syntax," and the various works of Sanders, especially his great " Dictionary," his " Sprachbriefe," and his "Satzbau und Wortfolge der deutschen Sprache." For some of the examples in Lesson XLIX, as well as the sen- tences in Exercise G, the authors are indebted to Buchheim's ''German Prose Composition." University College, Toronto, May, 1888. CONTENTS. -•o*- Preface ...... Introduction. — Alphabet ..'**' Examples of Pronunciation General Remarks on Pronunciation . Quantity of Vowels .... Accentuation Orthography German Script LESSON I. II. III. IV. V. VI. VII. VIII. IX. X. PART I. Present Indicative of ^o6cn, to have . Use of Cases. — Definite Article liefer Model. — Imperf. Indie, of (joaf It, to have mm Model. - Indef. Article. - Present and Imperf. Indie, of ffin, to be ... Declension of Substantives : — gWalCt Model, or -I, -m, 11, -r Stems • . . '. Present and Imperfect of tBertfll, to become. — Construction of Principal Sentences Declension of Substantives: — i3oI)l| Model. — Question Order Conjugation of rjoBftf, to have. — Place of Participle and Infinitive .... Weak Conjugation : IfllJeil. - Dependent Sen- tences—Prepositions with Accusative only Weak Verbs (continued). — Declension of Substantives : - ^otf Model, or Plural in -ft PAGE 17- i8. 20. 22. 25- 28. 32. 36. 41- 47- PAGE iii I 6 8 9 10 II »3 §§ 1,2 3-5 6,7 8-is 16-18 19, 20 21 23 24-26 27-aA 35-37 LESSON XI. XII. XIII. A XIV. V. B. XVI. C. XVII. :i XVIII. XIX. : XX. XXI. li XXII |! XXIII. XXIV. XXV. i XXVI. XXVII. D. CONTENTS, Personal Pronouns .... , Possessive Adjectives. Use of Artici»is .. Construction of Sentences : — Place of Ob- jects, Adverbs, etc. - Prepositions with Da- tive only Additional Remarks on Pe'-sonai I'ronouns and Prepositions Conjugation of ff|n, to be. Declension of Substantives : Weak or n Stems: j^nabf Model Mixed Declension. - Double Plurals. - Pre positions governing Dative or Accusative Anomalies of Declension Declension of Substantives: Recapitulation — Proper Names. — Prepositions with Gen itive Proper Names. - J'oreign Substantives . Gender of Substantives. — Interrogative Pro nouns and Adjectives. — Indirect State nients and Questions .... Gender of Substantives (concluded). - - Gen eral Rei'iarks. - Double Gender Relative Pronouns. — Irregular Weak Verbs Declension of Attributive Adjectives; Strong Form. - Conjugation of Strong Verbs Passive Voice ... ... Declension of Adjectives : Weak and Mixed — Strong Verbs : bcifteu Model . Possessive Pronouns.-- Strong Verbs: Hciften Model Declension of Adjectives (concluded) : Table, General Remarks. — Strong Verbs: fdjtC^Cn and fccdtfll Models Comparison of Adjectives. — Strong Verbs : friercn Model Demonstrative Pronouns. — Strong Verbs : finflCJi Model Indefinite Pronouns. — Strong Verbs: fpin= nctl and ^clfcn Models .... On Certain Adjectives and Pronouns . PACK 52. 38-42 5«- 43. 44 64. 45, 46 70. 47 St 72. 52-59 80. 87. 60 65 66 69 89. 95- 70-75 76-78 97- 79-88 105. in. 89-91 92-99 iiS. lOO-III 126. 112-114 134- iiS-irS 142. 119. 120 147. 121-124 154- 125-131 162. 132 144 171. 178. 145-159 160 162 iJSSON aXVIII. XXIX. XXX. XXXI. XXXII. XXXIII. XXXIV. XXXV. XXXVI. E. XXXVII. XXXVIII. XXXIX. XL. F. CONTENTW. Numerals : — Cardinals and Ordinals, — Strong Verbs: f)irfll|ftl Model Indefinite Numerals.— Strong Verbs: effrii Model . . . Derivative 1,'umerals. — Time, Measure, Date. - Strong Verbs : f|f)lagf 11 Model . Adverbs. -Strong Verbs: faacn Model Adverbs (continued): Formation and Com- parison. — Table of Strong Verbs and General Remarks on the same Adverbs (continued) : Idioms. Irregular VAGE ss Strong Verbs Modal Auxiliaries Modal Auxiliaries (continued): Idiom Compound Verbs On Certain Prefixes Reflexive and Impersonal Verbs . Prepositions governing the Genitive Prepositions (continued) : -- Idioms Conjunctions. — Interjections Conjunctions. —Additional Remarks XLI. XLII. XLIII. XLIV. XLV. XLVI. XLVII. XLVIII. XLIX. L. G. PART II. SYNTAX. Syncax of the Cases. - Nominative and Genitive Syntax of the Cases. Dative and Accusa- tive Indicative Mood : Syntax of its Tenses Sul)junctive and Conditional Moods Imperative and Infinitive Moods. Infinitive Mood (continued) The Participles . . . . ,, Concord and Apposition Apposition (continued): Appositive Ad jectives. —Syntax of the Preposition Word-Order . 4 • • , Complex Sentences ^-Clause-Order . i8o. 163-16 1S9. 168-18 iy6. i82-i8< 204. 1S7, I St 210. 1S9-19/ 217. 195, i9( 225. !97-j9<; 233. 20O-2Or -39- 203-208 246. 209-21'? 249- 214 22c 257. 221-23^ 264. -25-23^ -73- 235-24C 282. 241 2S6. 242-24; . 291. -4'^255 • -99- 256-262 • 304- 263-268 • 311- 269-272 318. 273-27S • 3'-S- 279-284 ■ 334- - 285-289 • 341. 290, 291 . 34S. -9-301 • 3^- 302-306 / CON 1 EM'S. PART III. WORD-FORMATION AND HISTORICAL SKETCH. ""•^'' PAGE §S LI. Word-Formation : Derivation and Composition 364. 307-321 UI. Historical Sketch of the Language, Grimm's Law, 374 322-326 Umlaut APPENDICES. A. Substantives of 2/hlcr Model with Umlaut B. Masculine Monosyllables of .'piinb Model C. Feminines of (2ol)n Model . Z>. Irregular Foreign Substantives . £. Neuter Monosyllables vof Jpimb Model /^. Weak Masculines not ending in -e G. Substantives of Mixed t)eclension G* Double Plurals with Different Meaning /^. Plurals of Abstract Substantives . /. Exceptions to the Rules on Gender /. Double Genders .... at: Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut in parison . . L. Strong Verbs net given in the Lists Com Exercises in Composition Abbreviations Vocabulary: Index j Germ an- English ( English- Gerr:.an 381. I^ 381. 22 382. 22 382. 22 382. 2X , 3^3- 5; 383- 6i 384. 64 384. 66 385. 80,89,90 388. 389. 389. 91 125 19a PAOJ 404 405 423 440 INTRODUCTION. (FoK Rbfbrrnck ohlv.) 22 33 33 ax, 5/ 6i 64 66 89,90 91 PAOJ 404 405 423 440 Characters. 91 a 3) b « c 5 f @ 9 THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Name. a/i bay tsay day ay gay Sound. like a in G/ther; neier as in Lll., when pron. like /. long, like a in g^-me; .short, like e in p^-n; when final or in unaccented prehxes, like short a m Louisa. as in English. always hard, before all vowels and before 1, m, n, v, like^- in ^ive; at end of words and sylls., or before otner con- sonants, like Germ, d- m words from French, before c and i, like s in pleasure. Observe the dif . ference between % and U. 53 and %'^ h, h, \) and 6 and (S; c and e. D and 0. G and 6; e and c. f and f. & and i^ THE GERMAN ALPHABET. laracters. i Name. Sound. * 3 i 3 i hah ee yot f k u/l 8 J ell ?i{ m ^w 51 It .^/z ^ |1 I Mr i tR r I ^7v ench words it has the sound of sA, as m French; c^.§' when in one syll. =- x. THE GERMAN ALPHABET. Characters. Sound. m ft fi6 * like Eng. r/C-,- when divided between two lines, IS written f-f ; not found at begin- ning. * pronounce both p and f distinctly. as in Eng. ; in foreign words only. like s/i in Eng. ; but when the g is in a distinct syll., pron. separately. like soft s/i/> in Eng. at the beginning; other- wise like sp. like soft s/i^ in Eng. at the beginning; other- wise like sf. like ss- f5 replaces [f after long vowels in the middle of a word, and always when final Hence ^Juf^ (long u), gen. guje^; hut^clnh (short u), gen. ^-(uffeg; and bei^en, bi§, ae. mifen. Diphthongs are always followed by ^. Not found at the beginning. like fs. It stands for 33. Not found at the beginning. I EXAMPLES OF PKONUNCIATION. EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. Simple Vowels. « long., ear, 6.U„,„; short ..f„U,W„„„,S„„„ in formative svlls foil h^r ^ ^ of „cr,a,„c„, „„■„,.,, «,,„,4 £;,;;,; ;;«-^y". 3ong:™,M>:,m,c;short:f,m,,„itH;tcn. O ong.. Ja„ r„o,„ ^„(,„. ^^^^^^ ^^___^ «ong:^„,b„,«„u,; short: 3:«,,tte, bum., „;«• ?) long: ^^„am% %.^'r, short: 3)it,rte, ®,jfte'm Double Vowels (all long). ««:§.«, «„(,etaat. I gc:mcc,I«r,S,et. On : Soot, 2Koo«, Sm. MoDiFrED Vowels (Umlauts). «|ong: aiir,f«,„c,^rS„cn; short: ^iitte, fi3m,„e, fja, O ong: 0(,J.„e,etrlime; short: (iinnte, ®iit,e iffnen U^ong:PtU«r,ftM; short: §iitte,faac„,4„ 9! ^i : 2«ot, i)oln, d)hin. ®i : mcin, ^citcr, hkihin. -*« • v«*«*v, AOuMuit^ tauten. Diphthongs (all long). ^n: ^cute, ncM, ?eutc. 3c : bre, ^icr, ticf (in somr foreign words, pron 2mU), wiMHHwiMaMiiMn,. . „ EXAMPLES OF PRONUNCIATION. 7 Simple Consonants. ^^^^H"/') ah,&xah,oh. c soft (== /j) g^^^j^ (Teremonie, aicero. ^^^''^n^o diah,m,m. <. (« ^// m French words) . (SJeuie, ©age, ^age. 6 mute 1 ^^^t' ^'*'' ^^"^^'^ ^"^^^^"' ( diatiil mum, ( (= ^// in French words) . . ^aroufie, ^ournat. r ' • 1^*^^^/ murrcn, ^aar, etern, . . ^ ®rbe, ^rebiger. f initial and medial (== s in ^ ,. '^.''''^^ '^^"'^e. i-iefer, Sattel, -pdufer. g f nal (= . in ye.) .... ^,,g^ ^.^^^ ^^^ ^^.^^^^ ^^^^^^^ i m foreign words before i ^'"'^^ nationaf, ^Patient. j,,inGerm.words(=/). . t,on, «ater, ^Better. in^foreign words(= z.) . . 9?ouem6er, biuibieren, 3rbt.o!at. ( (after fc^ and 3 = Eng. ...) . @cblt.efter, fc^n^er, atnei, ^luerf. Ximtial(=^.) i-eryc^, ^eno^^on. '''■)••. 3ierbe, ju, atran^ig, gorn. r^n^ltr .tw :!/r-f ^- ^- th^r equivalents binations,.o.of;M;^;-^;::rK^^^ « GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION. Consonantal Digraphs and Trigraphs initial (= ^) „,, (-4' guttural) . . gj^i,,.,g^ gjj^^.^,^ * j "medial and final (guttural) | ^'^t Sor^ee, ^ot^, Su^ 33re,^ I in French worH. , - ... ./^!*'^' ''^\ ^''^''' '^^^^'' P\ in French words {=. s/i) . (in same syll. = x) W (= sh) p initial (= s/ii softened) . f^ initial (= s/ip softened) . ff (preceding vowel short) . G^arlatan, (f^icane. 2)a(^^, Dr^g, £at^g, STi^fe. ^ferb, ♦pfennig, p^feix. ®(^af, Sr^nee, (gj^iff; but pron. g separately when it belongs to a different syll.,as:i)auo--d)en, ©an^= cfien. SKinb, fic^en, Sfengel, (5tu6e. I>uren, (i^ruc^e, (S|iorn. maffcn, fiiffcn, raffen, 2J?effe. « final (preced,„g vowe, ,o„g) 5«„ij, g„^, j^„^ fe^. fVuge.). final (preceding vowel short) -J S'"'' fe^"- Saffes), Mog (gen < 3Joffe.S),3Iu§(gen.3^Iuf[j8). A. GENERAL REMARKS ON PRONUNCIATION .he'vl!:, "r;;::":" f .^ '=°""' ^"^ ""-^ pronunciation of especiallv .h't f „ ""P°"'"' P°'"* '" •>« attended to- o;^:tcroft,:^^7:'«;::;tj---,aveasHad°; from the teacher. ^ "' "'""'' """^t ''^ '«^™e«> s. I fen. ^tff; but jJy when different Ltion of led to J i shade k after es. r, or iarnec* QUANTITY OF VoVVELS. g 3. The only difficult consonant-sounds are: r, with strong guttural roll. fc initial, and medial before vowels, which is like s in daijy, or z in ^one. S final = ss in English. 1^ (and g final), which must be learned from the teacher. ^.tJ^^ P'-<'"""ciation of the following consonants, though -^t difficult, dwfers from the English pronunciation : b final =J>. c before d, e, t = fs. h final = t. g never like ^ in ^«-esture. g final see above. I = 7 m j-et. ^ ==/in Germ, words. in == z', except after f d; and *. 3 = /«f. I 5. There are no silent letters in German, except h before onsonants after t (see below), and between vowels" thus e m (Snake, Jtnabc must be heard. B. QUANTITY OF VOWELS. Long: Double vowels and diphthongs are always Ion? Simple vowels are long before a single consonant, b fore^" r "bXrndt^rV ' "^" ""' """" '' ' ~- ' the vowel short before a single consonant. ^ '' '""'^ nofeThli ?""t '°"°"''^ ''^ " """■'^'^ ^o"^""^"' (b«t see svl !ll° ' '", ""'"''• ^"' »"''™='tive and terminal be t f^ ' "''^ -""^^ ™*^'^ "'^f-^ "*' -nd all vowels ro ACCENTUATION. •mooo -J „rtf,, -beside.'; Cm-I "rui,-- °V. ^'"f''!^''^! ^""X. 'I'aufi, 'pone'- (Bf„h .1, i .' "' ""' ' ^•'"■"' 'Easter'; .-Ho.i.,4 j^;-^^^^^^^^^^^^^ vowe>. accolding . Ije '^a^ll'^f;!'; rl"""'' "'"'»"'' =" "'* '-« «.'^.t.t;\?e:!:::t:;:t:;rs's\Lr^^^^^ 3- The vowel „ is always ulg bX" " "" "™"^' ^'"'"• Exercise in- Quantitv of Vowels. (Accent on (l„t ,yll. „( di„y;i,., Stalt, @taat «,„ «crt raiif ' '»', fl«, ^eer, C. ACCENTUATION. The principal accent is on the ra^Ua/syU. i„ simole Germ words, wliether primitive or derived '^ .erf- :Z.™" '■ ■'*^'-'"- ■" -" "-e .he principal accent „„ the # ■. ORTllOGKAPHY. II nt on the 3ut one: of form it, when I -ie are a. se|>a u.!^r- '"'' '''-' '-'- ^-^^^^--' ^-"-^- sy„s.are always 2. In compound substantives, adjectives and verbs, the first component generally has the principal accent; in other con.poun Is (prepositions ad . verb.al conjunctions, etc.). generally the last conlponent ^P"^""^""^' ^^■ flc-f Jr '/er-""' '"'"' "' ""'" """^^'= ^''^ ""' ^"'^- ^«^-' Exercises in Accentuation. 1. Simple words: Dh'lniiiimg, tiljrlidjfcit, (?)>(, J^infterniS autia fbnr I:;;; s:r ''' ^""^' '^^^^^"'"' ^^^"''^' ^^^^'^^^^SS itj?::: 2. Compound words: %nmns, aiifflttjcil, Srimcublid tntofdfii «„t „ ^; ^r''^"- ®"'*"'"'' 'f'™'''fl''>^' ?rofeffovn., lUflobif, Samitir ^„f(n, religiot% ajJoinimcnt, nioiutmnttaf. / "i"Mu;ieieii, D. ORTHOGRAPHY. capt! irL'^'"^^^- ''-' ^"^°^^^"^^ --^^'^ - -^"- with i_. Words beginning a paragraph or sentence (after a period), and the first word of each line in poetry. 2. All substantives and words used as such, as: ber 2Betfe the wise man ' ; ba^ Stcrbcn, ' dying,' etc. ' ' Note. -Substantives used as adverbs are not written wifh r.n'. i as: movflciKS, al)eitbi\ wnttei. ^M^h capitals, 4- Ordinal numeral;, and pronouns in tlfl^-. - . . . , ^« <^.o|e, .K.ede.c. the .L.^IJ/^J-^.S T2 ADDITIONAL KliAlARKS. the Fifth'; 3hrc m.mt. 'Her Majesty'; Seine ^urA laudit,* His Serene Highness.' "^^^ • E. RECENT CHANCES IN ORTHOCRAPHY f, -S, rit^r^r ^ " '"^ ^^^-"™ "^ -^'^-'»^' I. in derivative sylls. ; .fUmifltum, IhmiiXm, etc. ^. after ( medial and final : ^m, Slat, tot, lucrj, etc. 3. before ^ .^z^ /^^ ^ ^A^ ^. ^, /^^ x y ty^o-ty DIPHTHONGS. /^ .x^r^^yj- ^ ^///> ^^ L/tA fp // /'-^.^v>;^ /^-y>'^^ CONSONANTAL DIGRAPHS AND TRICRAPHS. ,.-^ THE GERMAN SCRlPt. Observe carefully the Difference between i CAPITALS. '5 SMALL LETTERS. • and *\ ^ fcnd ^y ^ and ^^ ^ and^^. SPECIMEN OF GERMAN SCRIPT.* and I. CO >^-C>... ."rL.^ y^j^ ,:^; P y- 9 /-yy- .. ^;.-. ^^.^„ .jr..^.;,f (f' ^ -»•*' -»^-^ r« >»•-/» r /' /o'' <-^ (2^ ^ ^^ r^ n*- '^..- ^^'... .X;.^.r^ C^'^.. .^ . ^^^;^. / 6. '-if?^;. y * Ti wuht^rofEriv?;:''' "^ ""''""" "' '"' ""■ ""••^^^ ■"-"=•' i6 THE GERMAN SCRr?T. -^•»--r-«-»-«. .»£_ <^ q£^J:L^ '■*--K^ •»-*-1 ', or, ooey yes, |a no, nein not, nid^t 17 i8 LESSON ir. [§§3 EXERCISE I. 5 2" fie sir " ^-'tl 1- ''""' "''' f'^ ^'•^^» S 7. ®t ^at ®nffct, n6et id^ i,abe aSei,,, ^ "• brefd ''s^h! """.k""^ '''""''■ ^- ^°' "'W ^he has some w^e hlh^' / ^' *ater. and wine? 6. He has onlv nr^ea. """• '^ ' ""^ ™"^ ^"^ «°-. i'"' I have ORAL EXERCISE I (Th= „„„„. «,„ .„,,,, ,^, ,„„„ ,^ ^^^ ^__^^^.^^^ ^^_^ ^^^ 4. WaThlt :;;;•' ^- was habe„ wi.? 3. Was haben sie ? LESSON II. USE OF CASES. - DEFINITE ARTICLE. Gefma^T °! '^' Cases. - Every declinable word in vjerman ha.s two nunihpr« fK^ c- 7 , and in earh nn.-!i '"^^''' ^^^ Smgu/ar and the /'//.r^/, subjective and answers the question w/w? or wAatt as • W-A^ (or «,/«/) ,s there ? The boy (the booI<). Oblctivf S'7"T°'"'' '° "" ^"8''»'^ l'»-ssive, or -W or,;!:^;:' '—^'o '^equesaon ./.„; ./ bool< of the boy "^-''book? The boy^s book, .he The />a/«v corresponds to the Indirect Object in Enrfi.h Sriorr r"™ '" """""■ '-■^^ "*^ '- "'' ooy (dat.) the book, he gives it to the boy (dat.). DEFINITE ARTICLE. 19 ^ The Accusative corresponds to the Direct Object in Eng lish, and answers the question whom ? or what ? as : IVhon {what) do you see? I see the man (the house). 4. Declension of the Definite Article. MASC. Norn, ber Gen. be§ Dat. bem ** Ace. ben Singular. FEM. /bte bcr ber bte NEUTER. bag beg bem bag Plural. ALL GENDERS. bie, the ber, of the ben, (to, for) the bie, the 6. Rule i. The Definite Article, like every determinative word, agrees with its substantive in Gender, Number and Case, as: ber D^ann, 'the man' (masc); bic ^rau,' 'the woman (fern.) ; bO0 i^inb, ' the child ' (neuter). 2. Articles and other determinative words should be re- peated before each substantive in the singular, as : 5Der 3«ann unb bie ^rau ; ber Server unb ber ©c^uler. Vocabulary.* (N. B. Always learn the definite article with each German substantive.) dog, ber §unb boy, ber ^mhi teacher, ber Sebrer teachers, bie Sebver scholar, pupil, bcr Sd)uler scholars, pupils, bie ®c^uler stick, bei- Stpcf mother, bie 9)hitter pen, feather, bie g=eber flower, bie Slume horse, bn§ ^ferb book, bag 33uc^ girl, bag 5)iab*en girls, bic gjt'abc^en knife, bag 9J?effer knives, bic 9}ief[er who, lucr? only, nur The being' „:^;;:::,r ™'"'"' '" *' '*«"* >"■"-- -^ »" v„cnb,„aH.., I I 20 LESSON III. [§f6 EXERCISE II. A 1 §at fie bag 33uc^ ober bic ^eber ? 2. Bit ^abcr ba« ^uc^, aber fie ^at bie ^eber. 3. 3)er Secret ^at bie 9Jie[fer ber ©c|)uler. 4. SDem Secret ber 9J?abc^en. 5. ^ie Sc^uter ^a6en ^? A"" '«. f ^'' ^"^'" "^^^ ^"^ ^^^^^' 6- ^^ ^«&e ben 6torf, bag Su4> unb bie ^eber ; aber ber ^nabe \)ai nur bag §8uc6 unb bie ^eber. ' ^ ^. 1. Have we not the book of the mother? 2 We have the book of the mother. 3. Have the pupils the dog and the horse, or have they only the horse ? 4. They have the horse but they have not the dog. 5. Has the mother of the girls the flower ? 6. She has not the flower, but she has the book of the girls, and they have the pen. 7. To the mother and to the teacher. ORAL EXERCISE II. 1. Was hat der Hund.? 2. Wer hat den Hund? 3 Wer hatSchuler? 4. Was haben die Lehrer? 5. Was hat das Madchen? 6. Hat er den Stock? r i LESSON III. 2)iefcr model. -imperfect indicative of ^o6cn, to have. 6. Declension of bicfer, this, that. MASC. Nom. biefcr Gen. biefcg Dat. biefcm Ace. biefcn FEM. NEUTER. ^LL GENDERS. btefc bicfcg, this biefc, these biefcr btefcg, of this biefcr, of these biefcr biefcm, (to, for) this biefcn, (to, for) these bicfc biefcg, this biefc, these In the same way decline jener, that; jeber, every; ItJcId&et, which ? t ^ y, 7] IMPERFECT OF f^abiW. 21 Remark. — The accusative of declinable words differs in form from the nominative in the masculine singular only. 7. Imperfect Indicative of ^atcn, to have. Sing. \^ j^attc, I had bu ^attpfl, thou hadst er ^attc, he had fie l()atte, she had eg \j0^ii%, it had Plur. n)iv flatten, we had if)r ^attct, ye had fie \jOXXl\\, they had \jOAiz ic^, had I ? ^atteft bu, hadst thou ^oMt er, had he ^atte fie, had she ^atte eg, had it \l0Xi^XK h)ir, had we ^attet tf)r, had ye fatten fie, had they brother, bcr 33ruber garden, ber ^^xi^Xi gardens, bic ©iirten bone, ber ^noc^en bones, bie ^nod^en reader, ber Sefer readers, bie Sefer man, ber 5Jiann son, ber (2o^n father, ber SSater Vocabulary. A. EXERCISE 1. ^c^ I)atte biefe ^eitung. 2. woman, bte %xo.\x sister, bie 6c^tt)efter daughter, bie ^oc^ter daughters, bie ^od;ter newspaper, bie 3eitung house, bag ^OiVA two, 510 ei three, brei four, t)ier fi I. 2)iefer §unb '^o^Wt ^noc^en. 3. 3)iefer ^^\|X^x ^at bier ed;iiler, aber jener Secret Ijat mir brei. 4. 2)er ^ruber biefer grau \,oAi^ jeneg ^au§, unb er ^atte mid) jene ®arten. 5. ^ebeg Sitd; f)at Sefer. 6. aBelc^eg S3uc^ fatten biefe 9}labd;en ? 7. ^er ©cbit^efter unb bem 33ruber. B. 1. Which newspaper had the father of these girls? 2. The dog had these bones, but he had not this stick. 3. Which stick has this man? ^1, Which man has this stick.? 5. 1 his father had three daughters, but that woman had only 22 LESSON IV. The son of that woman had this dog and horse. 7. We two, (j. haHn^^i 1 r, ■'" ' ""•' i'""*"ogandhorse. 7 We nad the book of those niinllB q t^ ^u l . ^^- /. vve mose pupils. 8. To the brother of those girls. ORAL EXERCISE III 1. Welches Madchen hatte die Zeitung? o Welches fi„Ph hatlen die Madchf^n ? •? w i . , v\ eicnes ±5uch 4 Welch! F.1 '^.^^^^^^^^^edasJkichdieserSchuler? 4. Uelche Feder hatte dieser Knabe ? r> Welchen RnnH hatte jener Mann .P 6. Was hat dieser LelJ? "' LESSON IV. mn MODEL-INDEFINITE ARTICLE.-PRESENT AND IMPERFECT INDICATIVE OF fchi, to be. «• Declension of vuitt, my. Singular. MASC. Norn, jiietn Gen. mcincS Dat. meinrm Ace. meincii I'EM. iitcine incinrr metncr meine Plural. ALL GENDERS. Jiteinc, my meincr, of my meincH, meinc, nj^^ . r^. NEUTER. ineincl ineiiicitt Uitohj ^ 9 The following words are declined like mein-^T'i^'^ fern 'his US'; iB,, ^her, its, their'; unfcr, ^our. ^^ ' ' The indefinite article ein, eiue, cin is also declined in the same way, but has no plural, thus : ^^ciined m the MASC. • pEM. Norn, ein eine Gen. einc^ einer Dat. einem einer Ace. einett eine Remark. -r- This model differs from theTiefer mod.l . i m having no distinctive ending in the l^tr^^. ""^ neuter, or in the ace. neuter. Thus. whn. t „! 1 '?'* y NEUTER, ein eineg einem '3 PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF fetlt. 23 mam but biefcS iHtd), we say tin (fcin, mein, etc.) mann and also tm (fein, etc.) ^^^d^. 10. Present and Imperfect Indicative of fcm, to be. ^'''■'''''^- ImperfJt. Stng. Id) bin, I am ;^ j,,,^ j ^^^ bu bift, thou art bu tuarft, thou wast ^'^ ^^*' h^ ^s er Juar, he was ^'^ ^^ she is lie luar, she was „ '•'^ '^*' 't 's e^ toav, it was Plur. tDir finb, we are i,i, ,,,,,„^ ^, ^^^^^ i^r feib, ye are if,, j^,,,,^^ ^^^^ fte fmb, they are |ie jparen, they were bin ic^, am I } etc. " ~ n^ar icb, was I .? etc. 11. Time before Place. Rule. -In German sen- tences, expressions of time always precede those of//^r^, as : This man was here to-day. ®iefer '^)\m\\ umr ^cutc !;icr. 12. Place of the Negative nif^t. Rule. - The nega- tive nirfjt precedes that member of the sentence which it negatives. Hence : (gr Hmr geftern nid^t E)ier, he was not here yesterday. 13. Agreement of Pronouns. Rule. - Pronouns agree in gender, number and person with the substantive to which they refer, as : ^cr C>ut (masc.) ift ni(f)t c^roi er ift flein, the hat is not large, // is small ; but bie „Beitinu3 (fem.) ift nid)t grofj, fie i[t f(ein, the newspaper is not large, it is small. The English pronoun // must therefore be rendered by er " "" ^'^'"'"'' '" " '"^sc. substantive, by fie when it refers to vhen it refers to a neuter. when H LESSON IV. lUi^ 14. Observe : In the sentence ♦ the boy is good,' ^oo^ is 2i predicative adjective. Rule. — Predicative Adjectives are not declined. 16. A substantive following the verb to be is of course subject, not object, and must therefore be put in the nominative, and not in the accusative, as : ©r ift cin (not einen) 2Kann, he is a man. - Vocabulary. friend, ber (^reunb gentleman, ber §erv bird, ber 3[.?ogeI wagon, ) ° carriages, bte '^ixfi.zx^. city, bic ©tabt ^^^^^' \ bal i^Ieib garment, ) weather, bag ilBetter old, alt pretty, j^iibfc^ cold, fait small, little, flein tired, miibe beautiful, fine, fd^5n strong, ftarf idle, trdge warm, ioarm windy, h)inbig very, very much, fe^r yesterday, ^e'ftern pleasant, agreeable, angenefjm to-day, fjeute great, large, big, tall, gro^ still, yet, noc^ (referring to time) for, benn ■' If ■I EXERCISE IV. A. 1. din 3?ater unb fein ^inb finb je^t hier. 2. ©ne mtttcr unb ibr ^inb luaren geftern ^ier. 3. mtm 33ruber \irer ift miibe, benn feine ©center iraren fe^r trage. 8. Unfere Stabt ift fetjr fcbbn, aber fie ift nic^t fe^r gro^. 9. OJ^einem , SSater unb meiner ^utt<»i- »7J Declension; — 3na(er model. *^ ^. 1. I am the sister of those girls. 2. Where are my booir fc(>dn. ^.1. The father of this girl was my teacher. 2. Our father and mother are old and weak. 3. The gardens of my brother-in-law are very beautiful, but his carriages are not at all beautiful. 4. My uncle is not at all satisfied with his daughters. 5. These apples are not yet ripe. (}. The teacher of these pupils was not very rich. 7. With the wings of this bird. 8. The weather is hot in the summer, but it is cold in the winter. 9. The eagle is a bird. ORAL EXERCISE V. 1. Wann ist das Wetter kalt.;* 2. Mit welchen SchUlern smd die Lehrer zufrieden ? 3. In wessen Haus sind die trader dieses Madchens > 4. Wo waren sic im Herbst ? 5 Sind diese Madchen trage oder fleiszig ? 6. Ist die Blume schon ? LESSON VI. PRESENT AND IMPERFECT OF tncrbcit, to become. - CON. STRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 19. Present and Imperfect of Present Indicative, Sing. \6) hjerbe, I become bu hJirft, thou becomest er tt)irb, he becomes Plur. \o\x iDcrbcii, we become i^r h)erbet, ye become tticrbcn, to become. Present Subjunctive. ic^ tDerbe bu ircrbcft cr iDprbe h)ir hjerbcn ''ix toerbet fie irevben Lt ••I CONSTRUCTION OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 29 Imperfect Indicative. Imperfect Subjunctive, Stng. \^ hjurbf or njorb, I became ic^ tt)iirbe bu iuurbcf* or tuavbft, thou becamest bu iDurbeft er hjurbf or U)arb, he became er tuurbe Plur. h)ir tmubcn, we became tpj^ jyijrben \¥ iourbet, ye became . \^^ tourbct fie hJurbcn, they became |ie toiirbcti Observe : i. the persistent e in the subjunctive endings ; 2. the Umlaut in the imperfect subjunctive ; 3. the second form (Joarb, etc.) in the singular only of the miperfect indicative. 20. Construction of Principal Sentences. — Place OF Verb and Subject. v^l'^^.'Z ^" ^""."^L"' '""^^"^^« containing a statement, the verb IS the second idea in the sentence, as • SUBJKCT. VKRB. .KKDICATK. SUBJECT. VERB. PKEDICATE. f 6m ^ter. gr ift franf. A am here. He is iH. Obsi,:rv,: x. The verb is the second idea, not necessarily the econd W, m the sentence. Thus the subject with 'I attributes and enlargements constitutes but one idea, as subject and attribute. veL. adv*erb. ^er^jater biefe^ 2el;rerg mor ^ier. 2 The svhject (or subjects) with attributes and enlarge ments may come either in the first or in the third place af SUBJECT. VERB. ..VERB. .,VERB. VERB. sub;eCT.' '^^ bm ^,er; or: §ier bin \^^ 3. ^\i^ predicate adjective is placed last, when a simple tense, as the verb is in ,'Uf\ y / j^'i 30 LESSON VI. [§20. ! 1 I am satisfied with my daughters. ^^ ^i» init meincu loditcrn jufricbcn. Remarks. — i. Any other member of the sentence may occupy the first place, but in that case the subject is thrown a//t'r the verb, which still occupies the second place. Thus; ADV. PUKASE. VERB. SUBJECT. PREDICATE. ,^m ^yriibling fiub bic ©ortcii fc^ijn. 2. [n English, on the contrary, the subject precedes the \crb, which is, in such cases, in the /"////v/ place, as : ADV. PHRASE. SUBJECT. VERB. PREDICATE. In the spring the gardens are beautiful. 3. This fixed position of the verb as the second idea i?i every German principal sentence should never bejorgotten. 4. The conjunctions uub,, a6er, ober, bcimdo not count as members of the sentence. Vocabulary. sleigh, ber Scfilittcn thunder-storm, biv3 ©ctuittcr attentive, aufmerffam green, c^riiu new, ncu young, jimg inattentive, uuaufinerffam unpleasant, ) disagreeable, \ dissatisfied, unjufrieben after, narfi (with dat.) therefore, on that account, bcybalO never, nie so, fo why, Juavum ? again, iuieber well, iuot)I EXERCISE VI. A. 1. ^^a* bcm Wciuittcr muvbe Dtv5 SK^etter fc^^n unb tt)arm. 2. ©eftent iuurbcn mcinc ^l^hittcv unb ifire e^^ivefter franf, a6er W finb fie iuof;I. 3. e in ^kter f)at ein ^m^ unb'einen ©at'icn \x\ui cv \)^\i auci; M^ixi^w unb 6daitten. 4. Tag better w] CONSTKUCT.ON OF PRINCIPAL SENTENCES. 31 ^ambuvii 10. §ie,.„„rm ,„ .^,amburg, aber fie n,aten nie in ^. 1. The brother of these pupils became our teacher 2 Teachers often become dissatisKed with their pupils 3 !„ the sprmg our garden becomes beautiful. 4. Our brothers m-law.were m I'aris; they are now in London. r>. This tree becomes green very quickly. 6. The pupils of this teacher became very attentive. 7. My daughter^ are not contented wuhthetr cloaks. H. In the autumn (the)* apples become ripe. ' 9^ rhe father of these girls becomes old and weak. 10. wfth poor It Vh " T-- ' ' ; ^'^ "^-^"-"^ "^''- ''"' "« •'-- Th! , t .I "'^ ' " ' '*^-' • " '-^ '"8« =>"d strong. 13. The cloaks of those g.rls were new, but now they are gettinsr (say : become) old. -^ getimg ORAL EXERCISE VI. liires Onktls? ,i. Wann waren seine Brlider in Hamburg? 4. Wann werden die Apfel reif ? 5. Wird der Baum L Sommer grun ? (i. Wann wird das Wetter kalt > * Words in ( ) are omitted are omitt^rl in r' , '" /'"^"'^' ^"* "°^ '" ^«™a" 5 ^ords in [ ] are omitted m (.erman, but not in English. 32 LESSON VII. [§§ai. LESSON VII. DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES :-So|n MODEL- QUESTION ORDER. 21. Declension of j ^^^ ®"S"/ ^^^ son; < ber 0unb, the dog. Plural. bie ©o^ne, the sons ber ©of)nc, the sons', of the sons ben unb(r)0, the dog's, ber ^unbc, the dogs', of the of the dog dogs Dat. bcm|)unb(c),tothedog ben ^unbcit, (to, for) the dogs Ace. ben .^unb, the dog bie §unbc, the dogs 22. In this way are declined : I. Most masculine monosyllables: generally add Umlaut (V i. [§§ai- •3] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. ! 2. Masculines in -a* -ii* -in i„. .• Umlaut. ^' 8/ -IlMg: MW-^r add 3. Many feminine monosyllables with a, M, or «u in the root: ai«,ajs add Umlaut (for list, see App. ") 4. Substantives in -„i8 and -f,l : «.e„^ add Umlaut =dH if r^ "'"'"■ '"°"°^>'»»bles (all those in -r) • „„„, add Umlaut, except Jloft, gfior, »„ot (SBbte or 8„ote) AprE^ 6. Foreign masculines, with accent on last syll. in -„r ' laut (for exceptions, see App. D.) Further ex.Tmples: 5Die $oiii), the hand : &W n g d a fi„»t, . m (Observe again . Feminines have all case, of ,he sing, alike.) Ta« Segraeni«, the burial, funeral- .%•„»■ m . m -t ■ G. »egra6niffc«, o. ^S^S^nm %uf7o\ I'^'tT' (Observe ,Ke douMng of the fi„a, -, when a termination U added., Set aiionat, the month : Smjr. n a Wn„„t r- m J, 23. CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. J Examples : ••Has the dog meat.' a. Which man is'ou, «at ber§„„b (J.eifc^? SBdc^e. 2«a„„ ^ alt? 34 LESiSON VII. [§23 (■■\^ * * -12 8 3. Who is in the garden? 5. What has the teacher ? aBer ift in bcni &avtm ? )Ba^ ijat ber Mjx^v ? i 2 9 1 2' 8 4. ^^'here is my father ? 6. When was the pupil here ? ^ii^D ift meinmter? 4Bann ioar ber e#Ier i;ier? Observe from these examples : 1. That the construction of Direct Interrogative Sentences is exactly the same in German as in English, as far as the position of Verb and Subject is concerned. 2. That in both languages the question-word always begins the sentence. Vocabulary. (An Asterisk (*) after a word signifies that the plural has Umlaut.) Tuesday, 3)icne'tag marsh, swamp, ber Bimpf* enemy, bcv ^"^-einb day, bcv Jag finger, ber ;>-ingev -^ carpet, ber kip\iid) Friday, gn-ei'tag ^ curtain, ber 3^^or'6ang * foot, ber ^-uj3* " week, bie 'Eod)^ ' general, ber &mcvaV room, ba^3 Siiinner young man, youth, ber Siingaing thirty, bvei^ig emperor, ber SM\cv five, fiiuf acquirements, bie ^euntniffe long, lang Iff king, ber Monig Vv Wednesday, ber 9J?itt'luocf) Monday, ber 9J?Dn'tiig officer (military) ber Dffi^ier' town, city, bic ©tabt*^ Sunday, ber Sonn'tag Saturday, j ^^-'I'^onn'abenb, ( or Sam»'tag new, neu magnificent, prcic^tig red, rot seven, fieben white, ivet^ where, hjo? twelve, ^toolf [§23 acher ? l;rei- ? 3il here ? iiler i)kx'^ sentences Far as the ys begins Imlaut.) §83] CONSTRUCTION OF DIRECT QUESTIONS. • 35 EXERCISE VII. A. 1. ©in ^abr Ijat stoolf monaU unb in jebem Wlomt finb brei^ig ^ragc. 2. ®ie ^:)dnt)e biefer MaMjcn finb Kein. 3. 3)ie ©arten m bicfcn Stdbtcn tuurben tm gritf;(tno f*on. 4. ®ie Sage [inb im ^omnicr laiig, aUv im 2Bintcr lucrbcn fie furg unb fait. 5. ®ie d)lutUx meinc^3 Ju-eunbc^ it)ar gcftcrn in ber etabt 6. 2)ie ^enntniff e be^ 2ef)rcr^5 finb qxo^. 7. 2)te ^DrF)dnoe bicfe^i Bimmerg fmb tt)ciJ3, abcr bic 2ep|3ic^e finb rot. 8. ®ie ©cBiydaer biefer Dffigicre finb ©enerale. B. 1. The horses and dogs of this young man are hand- some. 2. We have two feet and two hands, and each hand has five fingers. 3. The emperor and the king were enemies but now they are friends. 4. These trees are old, but they are still beautiful. 5. The curtains and carpets in this room are new and magnificent. 6. Every week has seven days- Sunday, Monday, Tuesday, Wednesday, Thursday, Friday Saturday. 7. The sons are tall, but the father is not quite so tali. 8. The funeral of the king was magnificent. 9. My father has two apple-trees in his garden. 10. Where are the frogs } In the spring they are in the marshes. ORAL EXERCISE VII. 1. Wo waren die Briider seiner Mutter gestern ? 2. Sind die Vorhange weisz oder rot? .">. Was hat sein Vater im Ganen? 4. Wer war gestern in der Stadt.? 5. Wessen •Schwager sind Offiziere ? 6. Welche sind die Taee der Woche? ^ 36 LESSON VIII. i§*4 LESSON VIII. CONJUGATION OF Wfi to have. - rlacE OF PARTICIPLE AND INFINITIVE- Paradigm of ^alr^ ^ have. Principal Parts. Pres. Infin. }^ahtn IMPF. iNDic. l^atit Past Part, ^^m 24. Indicative. ic^. f)aht, I have bu ^aft thou hast er f)ai, he has h)ir f)ahc\\, we have i^r i)ahi, ye have fie l^abcn, — ey have ic^ ^attc, I had bu ijatk^t, thou hadst erratic, he had h)ir f>attcil, we had t^r Ijattct ye had fie fatten, they had I have had, etc. ic^ ^a6e bu ^aft er f)at h)ir ^aben i^r f)aht fie baben Presi;nt. Subjunctive. id; f)aht, I (may) have, etc. bu i^abcfi er f)aht U)ir ^bcn i^r ^abct fie I;abctt Imperfect. id) f)attc, I had (might have), bu ^iitteft [etc. er ^fitte h)ir fatten i^r i)atUt fie {;otteiT Perfect. (Pres. of iiaben -f. P. part.) ^ gel^afit I (may) have had, etc. ic^ f)aU bu ^abeft er l)ahi h)ir f)ahtn i^r ^abet fxe i;aben geJoM 9a4j Indicative. I had had, etc. bu i)atU^t er f)aiU hjir fatten fie fatten Pluperfect. (Imperf. of ^oben + P. Part.) 3; Subjunctive. I had (might have) had, etc ^Qt^aht bu ^atteft cr l^dtte Wiv fatten fie fatten Future. (Pres. of tocrben + infin. of ijaben ) I shall have, etc. i shall have, etc. ge^altt i^ merbe bu tDirft er hjirb toirhjerben i^r toerbet fie toerben ^a^en ' ^afien I shall have had, etc tc^ tperbc bu n)irft er h)irb h)ir h)erben i^r toerbet fie toerben Simple. (tmpf. Subj. of hjerben -j- Infin of ^oben.) I should have, etc. buh>firbeft r"^^^^ i(^ toerbe bu hjcrbeft er h)crbe toirlDerben i^r tuerbet fie tuerben Future Perfect. (Future of ^abcii -f- P. Part.) I shall have had, etc. id) hjerbe bu n^erbeft er hjcrbc h)irtt)erben r^^^M^Un i^x hjerbet fie hjerben Conditional. Compound. (Simple Cond. of \)aben + Past • Part.) I should have had, etc. Bc^aat ^aBen ic^ ttJiirbe > *• ti «. * buh>UrbeftP'*'»*^*«'«« 3*- LESSON VIIL f§§ is- ^abtn er lt)urbe it>ir toitrben i^r njiirbet fie iuiirben Imperative. f)a6c (bu), have (thou) l)aht (ibr), have (ye) Conditional. 1 gc^Qbt l^o6en er.umrbe h)ir ipuvben t^rjuiirbet f fie luurben J liifinitive. (ju) rjnben, (to) have 8c5n6t(3u)r;aben,(to)hav6 had Participles. Pres. ^abenb, having p.^,, gcbabt had. 25. Use of Auxiliaries of Tense — r ftni,.^ f the nerfpof f«.,. r i, cube. — i. .pahttl forms Perfect of that verb ^ "' "* ''"^ '"^ '°"" '^e P.u?ert^t:/:Hltter + "'^^^*-°^--^ ^J. aB«l.cn forms the Future and Simple Conditional Fu?ure'''"'"* °' tt^'bc + Infin. of any verb form the JsimX^o„^,^La;:^^^'" + '"«"• °^ -^ -- ^°™ 3. The Future of hnbcn 4- p Pq-.. ^r ^ J . , , . , vii'-'^ii -t" i". i^art. of any verb Tnot con. jugated with fein) form the Future Perfect The Simple Conditional of F,a6en + P. Part of anv verl. (not conjugated with fein) for. the^Compound CoT 4. edn replaces ^aben in the Pe>-fect Tenses of m.n , Intransitive Verbs rs^^^ s . ^ r^ "^^">^ is come ' ^ ^^'^ Compare the English 'He ^ CONSTRUCTION OF COMPOUND TENSES. 39 26. Construction of Compound Tenses. — Place OF Participle and Infinitive. J^u/e of Construction, - In every principal sentence the Participle and Infinitive come at the end; but if both be present, the Participle precedes the Infinitive, which is always lasij as ! 1 SUBJECT. {Engl) My teacher 1 SUDJECT. {Germ.) Warn Scf)rer 1 2 SUBJECT. VERB. {Engl.) We shall 8 8 VERB. PART, has had 2 8 VERB. OBJECT 8 INFIN. have 4 OBJECT. money. 4 PART. gc^a6t. 4 OBJECT. a storm. SUBJECT. {Germ.) 2Bir 2 VERB. 8 4 OBJECT. INFIN. hjerben einen ®turm ^aficii. * 2 8 4 6 SUBJECT. VERB. INFIN. PART. OBJECT. {Engl.) The beggars would have had no shoes. * 3 8 4 6 {Germ.) 2)te Settler h)iirben !eiue ©c^ui^e gc^olit ^aficii. Remember : In compound tenses, the auxiliary is the verb, and occupies the second place in a principal sen- tence (see § 20, Rule i, above). Vocabulary. evening, ber Sl'benb money, ba§ ©elb beggar, ber S3ettrer guest, ber ©aft* holiday, ber gei'ertag harbour, ber §afen * fish, ber ^if^ gio^,^ ^^^ ^anb'fc^u^ AJ5«Jv, tU JVIUU74 ^ , tlv y luu/t fox, ber %\x^i basket, ber i{or6 * nut, ^h 5Ru^' 40 tESSON Vltl. m^* \ out of, au^ (gov. dat.) to become of, au^ . . . feerben poor, arm bad, fc^lcc^t to-morrow, moxQcn the day after to-morrow, u'ber. morgcn much, biel already, fc^on when, loann j r V. to be right, Jiec^t ^abni sailing-ship, ba^ ee'gelfc^iff chair, ber ©tu^l* storm, ber Sturm * stocking, ber etrum^f* shoe, ber 6d;u^ table, ber Ziid) animal, bag iier to be wrong, Un'recT^t ^abcn , pleasure, bag 3[5ergniigen wolf, ber3Bolf* EXERCISE VIII. ^. 1. ^c^ ^aBe M ®elb gel;abt, aber je^t bin icb arm 2 ^te » t.crben im ^erbft reif. 3. 41 ber l^abe ein'; 3:tf(J «nb ^tiif,Ic mfeinem3immerf,a6eu? 4. ^bre Zbf^^^^^^^^^ t^urben fd^lec^t, benn fie n>aren fc^on alt. 5. Sr^ ?£ ^reunbe ju ^aben. 6. ^a^ tvnxh, a«g bem So^ne beg iZ2 T ^f -«c^ Se^- ^. Sc^ n,erbe ^einbe unb aul ^reunbe abe„ 8. ®ie ©a te tn unferer ©tabt murben muoe, benn bag LtUx mx fe^r ^a^. 9. a^erben t.ir ^ep^ic^e unb ^orr;ange in unftm 3tmmer ^aben? 10. (£r batte ^reunbe ge^t. 11. eie Trben tn btefem Sa^ve biel 3?ergnugen ge^abt ^aben. U. ^ie Se eg 5?omgg aben ^ferbe unb Sagen, aber bie 3:oc^ter gl3et te baben fetne ©c^u^e unb feine etriim^fe. 13. 2Bir batten ^ec^t gebabt, aber er ^atte Un^ ^t ge^abt. 14. m meinen ^reunben ^abe ic^ biel 3]ergnugen ge^abt. 15. llnfm ^Z e toetben ge^ern .iel ^ergnugen ge^abt ^aben, bemba 2Beft rl Won unb Warn. ^"«i iwt thi'^; I'J^^- ''"'"P'l'P^ "« '" *e harbour. 2. We had thirey fishes ,„ ou. baskets. 3. He would have friends. 4 The evening was fine, but the weather became cold. 6 We have had two storms. 6. Where are our guests ? Thevbecan,. urea ana are now in the garden. 7. To-morrow we shall have lat.) . . . hjerben •«J f^ARADlGM OF lobCH. rrow, u'ber« 0. ^ arm. 2. nabe einen panbf(f;uf;e rtng*;ne^m, ^ Se^rerg ? mbe ^abcn. >a^ SBetter in unferm :ie toerben Die Sol^nc beg 33ett.: Bir l^atten 'it meincn e O'reimbc Setter Wax We had ;nds. 4. 5. We ' became lall have 4t a holiday, for it is Saturday. 8. We were in fh. ^ yesterday, and the trees are already green 9 Wh ,?"'r had? He has had apples and nuts To n i ' ^' fcxes are animals. ^^ ^''^'' ^^^^^^^ ^n^ ORAL EXERCISE VIII 1. Wer hatte Recht unci „er hatte Unrecht ? 9 W Waru„,wurden die G..e „,«,eP «. Welehe Oeilld: "sind LESSON IX. PREPOSITIONS WITH ACCUSATIVE ONLY. 27. The stem of a verb is whnf ;c i..f^ i .ion of .he Present Infi^liH : . , or- Ht'd^ T'"" f>ab-c„, stem |j„(,;l„M„, stem fW ^ '^'''''' "' = Note.- Weak verbs are also called J,e,ou,ar or Modern. 31. pREs. Infin. lobcn Paradigm of Tofifn, to praise, i^riucipal Pa.-ts. Impf. Indic, lobtt Past Part. gero6* i:H A 4^ indicative. LESSON IX. Present. ris» Subjunotiv*. tcf) lobe, I praise (am praising, id; lobe, I (may) praise do praise) bu Ii?b(e)ft thou praisest, etc. er Iob(c)t he praises tyir lobcil, we praise ibr lob(t)t, ye praise fie Irbcn, they praise bu lobcft thou (mayesti praise er lobe, he (may) praise toir lobtn, we (may) praise i^r lobct, ye (may) praise fie lobctt, they (may) praise Imperfect. (Same form for both moods.) id; lohit, I praised (was praising, etc.) bu (obtcjl, thou praisedst er lobtc, he praised h)ir loblcn, we praised ibr Mitt, ye praised fie lobtrn, they praised Perfect. ( Pres. of l)abfii -f- P. Part of loben.) ic^ f)aU gcfolit I have praised (been ic^ ^abc acloH praising) bu baft gelobt, thou hast praised, etc. bu ^abeft gelobt, 2c. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of babcn + P. Part, foben.) ic^ i)atU gcJoat, I had praised (been ic^ f^dtU atioht ic praising), etc. ' ' . Future. (Present of tPCrftctt + Infin. of lobcn.) id^ trerbe (okn, I shall praise (be ic^ toerbe Uhtn praising) bu n?irft lohn, thou wilt praise, etc. bu h?erbeft loben, k. §31] HAKADIGM OF loben 43 Subjunctive. Indicative. Future Perfect. i Future o{ Ontn, + P. Part, of roben.) tc^ t»crbe flcrolit babcn, I shall have irf, h,. ^ , r praised . '^^ ^^^^^ Q^^obt f)aben biiiuirftnclobtbabcn, thou wilt have praised, etc. o„,„ Conditional. Simple I'll iDcrbeft gelobt ^a6en, 2c. Compound. ' Simple Cond. of (jabcii + P. part. of lobcii.) irf' tmirbe ncfoM haOcii, I should have praised, etc. Infinitive. W lohm, (to) praise. * i^fioht Uu) babm, (to) have praised (Impf. Subj. of nm-bcn -f- infin. of (Ollfll.) . icb iDiirbc (ofini, 1 should praise(be praising) etc. Imperative. Ipbc (bu), praise (thou) loOc cr, let him praise lobm iDir, let us praise fobt(if)r), praise (ye, loben fio, let tlu in praise zj , r ^ Participles. ^^■c's. (obcnb, praising n^,. . ,, j^ ^ '5 y rt-j-A {jelobt praised the foHoX Zns ' ites T?r rT'' '^ ^'^ terminations of '• Note HRain the persistent c of the Pres. Subj in Gef::,'::';C''""" '°™^ °' "><= -^^ •-- '° "^ avoided praise 'praise T p^i I do praise ) I am praisino- id) Tobe ?) ) am I praising.? [- lobe ic^ ? do I praise .? I 44 LESSON IX. (he praised not) ) j . . (praised he not?) ) _ , he was not praising [ ''j''' was he not praising? ^ ^'^^f he did not praise ) ^''^ did he not praise ? ) "^"^t? I have been praising, etc., ic^ babe gelobt, etc. • Had I been praising? l^atU id) gelobt?, 4. The only true Imperative forms are those of the 2. sing, and 2. pkir., robe, (obt. For the other persons, tlie pres. subj. is used, as : lobe er, let him praise ; loben iuir, let us praise ; loben fie, let them praise; — the verb preceding the pronoun! Construction of Dependent Sentences. 32. The Verb in a Dependent Sentence comes /asf, asr ^d) olaube, ba^ er ®elb f^ai, ^ I believe that he has money. Remember: that the auxiliary is the verb in compound tenses. 33. In compound tenses the Participle and Infinitive immediately precede the verb ; if both be piesent, the Parti- ciple precedes, as in principal sentences, thus : '^d) glaube, baj3 cr @elb ge^olit ^at, I believe, that he has /lad money. ^rf; o^iawU, baB er 0elb ^akn toirb, I believe that he will /ia7'e money. ^cf) Olaube, baf^ er ©elb gc^nlit fiaben irirb, I believe that he will have //^^ money. Note. -The place of the Subject, in a Dependent Sentence, is usually the same as in English. 34. Prepositions governing the Accusative only. »i^, butc^, ffif, gcgcit, ot)m, iim, hiibcr. W8, (i) till, until (r/me), as: I shall not come until to- morrow {U§ inorgcn). 34J PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE ACCUSATIVE. 45 (2) up to as far as {place), as • He travelled with us as far as (6i0) Montreal. . ^"'\^'^^, '"' "^ '''' ^^"--^^^ ^^^ ^-- (^-di fiir, for; as: That is for my friend (f«r meinen ^reunb)- the scissors are not a toy for children Tfiir i!inber). ' gCBClt towards, against (not necessarily denoting hos- t^l'ty), as: The enemy advanced towards (or against) the bridge (pcgcn bie 53rucfe). »!inc,^without ; as : We cannot travel without money (o^ne urn, (I) around about; as: We drove around the town (urn bie etabt). (2) at about (/.W), as: He came at four o'clock (m Uter m;r); it happened at (or about) Christmas (nm aBc{f)narf;tcn). • toibcr against (.//..///.;, ,,,smj% as : He swam against the stre.™ (imbcr bcu Strom); the soldiers were fighting against the enemy (tolhn h,n ^einb). ^ .ithTe"eu;e?of';h^"' '^"'/"^ '^^^ ^^^"^-"^ -"^-^ed the Neuter of the unemphasized Definite Article, thus: burd; ba^ = burrfjg (burrf/^) far ba§ ^ f jirg (^^jy,^) umbas; ^ um^ (um'g) believe, nlaubcn ^ope, l;offcn buy, faufen laugh, racf;cn live, leBen learn, lemen Vocabulary. love, HeBen make, do, madden say, fagen send, f^tcfen play, fpiefen sell, ucrfaufcn 46 LESSON IX. [§§34- 'V weep, cry, iDeincn bishop, bcr 5i3rfd)of* German, Deutfcf) servant, bcr Wiener industry, diliij;ence, ber J^Icifj youn^riady, Miss,bcvJ (3-rduIein cardinal, bcr ^tarbtnal noise, ber Sdrm Latin, ba^ Satetn palace, bcr ^|Ja(n'ft* pope, bcr ^j:^avft * Idiom : to take a walk, NoTic. — A past tense after mciui place, square, ber ^(a^ "* ring, ber Siing walk, bere^ajier'gang* time, bie ^ctt good, kind, gut merry, merrily, luftig sad, traurig that (conj.), ba^ because, it)ei( if, iucnn why, Junrum' ? eiucn Spajicr.inng madjeit. ('if') is put in the subj. mood. EXERCISE IX. A. 1 . '3^tc 5larbuia(e uiib i^ifcbofe luaren geftern im ^alafie be« %a)^\k^: )i. T}tv3 Js-raulcin luirb bicfe 9itnge faufen, benn fie fmbjcbon. 3. I^er m<\kx luihbe bicfc^ (>5cnialbc ntcfit iicrfaufen. 4. ;V(; )inlrbc bicfcit ^){ing faufen, ioeun \(h retell uuirc. 5. ^^ai cr c^ flcglnubt? ^r bat c^3 gcgtaubt, iyeif fctit ^iVater c^5 gefagt \^at 6. Tie ecfniler hah^n ind gdrnt goinicM. 7. SBir loBen ben ^iungling, lucil cr flcifjig ift. 8. ier .ftoiug iuirb feine Gene* rale gcgcn ben iycinb [ttncfcn. 9. 9J?cine @c(noeftcr tuirb .f^anb= fdf;ulie fnufcn, benn ihrc ."ganbfrfuihe fiub fcT/ei^t. 10. mx Mrben rjciitc cincn evnstcvgang Hxdj bie ©tabt inc d;en, it?cnn ba^3©etter fc(um luare. 11. 3io tuiirbcn aiicf) cincn 3pn^iergang gemac ImOen, U^nn fie ^cit gcBabt Uiv^y, V2, Sie iuivb fagcn, bafj id; ))k<:\}i ()aOc. 13. ^dj I;a6e iinmc gcBofft, bafj cr rernen luiirbe. It. 3ie licH ibrcn ^i^atcr nnb ifuc ^JDhitter, benn fie finb gut. 15. er iuuvbc ba^=. Wcmalbe nicbt gclobt IniDcn, benn e^ hjarnicT^t fc^on. B. ]. What were they doing yesterday.? They were playing in the garden. 2. This gentleman will praise his servants, for they are industrious. 3. We have taken a walk about Ml ENDINGS OF WEAK VERBS. 47 ^e town. 4, The squares in those cities are very fine 5 Where were the daughters of the officers > They were living m a convent. ,, Without industry we shall not'learn ™uch 7. Tl e boy was play.ng with the dog. 8. The gentleman has sold h.s horses and carriages. 9. What are thf young ladfes do,„g „ow.» U, Why was she crying., She 'vas'crjt. re ::;: rr ; , 'uj'"' ^^ '^"s'™^ "^^ '^e are merry 12. We shall have learned much in a week. 1.3 I am laughmg because the child is playing so merrily. U Wb' ^15 W r"™f ''"■""'' '°-""'"°" - ^half learn beggars. ^"^ ' '''"'' '"^ ''°*'"S» '- "'^ ORAL EXERCISE IX. L Weshalbhatsiegelacht? 2. Wer machte so viel Larm ? Was hat die Frau gekauft ? 5. ^Veshalb hat sefne Schwester Handschuhe gekauft ? .. Was werden wir n^orgen macl n LESSON X. WEAK VERBS (continued). DECLENSION OF — ^Otf MODEL, OR PLURAL IN 3?x. Endings of Weak Verbs in Simpl Present Imperfect. Ind. andSuhj, -(c)tc -(c)tcft -(c)tc — (c)tcii ~(t)kt — (e)tcn SUBSTANTIVES : -cr. E Tenses. Imperative. •Sm^, 2. — e /^/t/r. 2. —(t)i Infinitive. ~m Participles. Pres. ^tnh Past. 0e~(c)t 48 LESSON X. mss^ Imperative. J'/ur. 2. rebct (i^r) Remarks. — i. Observe the following endings : (a) Final -t of the 3. sing, occurs on/y in the Pres. Indie. (/^) The 2. sing, has -ft except in the Imperative. (c) The 2. plur. has -t throughout. 2. Verb-Stems in -b or -i (t^), or in -m or -n preceded by another consonant, retain -c throughout a/^er the stem, as : rciipn, to speak. Imperfect. Sing. 1. id) rebcte 2. bu rebcteft etc. Thus : arbeiten, to work : id) avbeitcte ; atmen, to breathe • ou ntmc|t ; regnen, to rain : e§ regnct. 3. Verb-Stems in a sibilant (§, f,^, g, y, j) return -e in the 2. smg. Pres. Ind. and Subj. only, as : tanjen, to dance : bu tangcft ; reifen/to travel : bu reifcft. 4. Verb-Stems in -cl and -tv drop e of the stem before termmations in -c (i. e. in i. sing. Pres. Ind., i. and 3. sing. Pres. Subj., and 2. sing. Imper.), and, excepf in the Subjunc tive, never msert e after ( or n, as : Pres. Ind. Sing. 2. bu rebeft 3. er rebct Phir. 2. ibr rebct Pres. Ind. id) tabic bu tabclft er tabcit iuiv tabcin \\}x tabclft fie tabctn tobcfn, to blame. Pres. Subj. tabic tablcft tabic tnblcn tablet Imperfect. id^ tabclte, etc. Imperative. tabic tabcit P. Part. getabcit tablcn ^^^ S. Foreign verbs in -{crcu (-trctt) do not take 7h7prefi< OC- in the P. Part., as : ftub-ieren, to study : P. Part, ftubtcri [f§35^ 37] DECLENSION : 2:)orf MODEL. 49 (not^gHubiert); bom6arbieren, to bombard: P. Pan. 6om= 6. Verbs with the prefixes 6c- cr- rmi. .„* jer-also omit the prefix at-n\he'pL''^t'T' P- Part. Jca^it; «„W,pe„4 berften^.t '•' "^ '"'^^""' 36. Declension of ii0j 3)orf, the village. Singular. Nom. bag 2)Drf, the village Gen. beg ®orf(e)g, of the village Dat. bent ®Drf(e), (to, for) the village Ace. bag Sorf, the village Plural. bie ^ijrfcr, the villages ber 3)iirfcr, of the villages ben 3:)i)rfcrn, (to, for) the villages bie ©orfcr, the villages Dativ^'""' -er of the Piural, with the additional -„ of the 37. In this way are declined : - Most neuter monosyllables (exceptions in App.E ) 2. bubstantives ending in ~i{\))\m. 3. Pive neuters with prefix @e-, viz. : bag ©emac^, the apartment bag rsi.f^..nff .1, W. «t, the temper, dis. SS^t^^t to^ O^Wrec^t, the sex ^ ° ®'f'''^'' ^^^ « '^4) 4- Two foreign neiife*-'! -J- . v.=, m ■ , ba^ §ofrita. (or Spitaa the h^pi^:, ^'''"""'' *^ "^™^'"' i II rii' V 50 LESSON X. f§37 5. The following nine masculines : ber mUw\d% the villain bcv 9ianb, the edge, margin bcr ©cift, the spirit bcr ©ott, the God bcr 2c\h, the body bcr 93iann, the man, husband (Lat. 77>) ber ^ormunb, tiie guardian ber Salb, the forest bcr Ul^iirm, the worm (also Torn, Crt ; see App. E.) Further examples (Sing, like 2ol;n) : ®ag Scl)Iof5, the castle, palace: /"/ur. n.g.a. ecftliiffer D. Sdilbifcrtl. ' ^a^3 $hicf>, the book : TV/^r. x. (;. a. t^Mm\ d. ^Mcfjcm. ^cr mam, the man, husband: /7//r. n.g.a. Mnncr, d .'^JJdnncrii. i ^a§ J^inb, the child : /Vur. n.g.a. iltnbcr, d. ^inbcrn. ^ag §aug, the house : JVur. n. g. a. i^aufcr, d. i^icb courage, spirit, bcr Mnt woman, wife, ba^ ®eib yellow, gclb enough, i-jcnug well (adv.\ gut a long while, lange too, 5u EXERCISE X. A. 1. ^^m .t)crb[t lucrbcn bi^- ilMdttcr gclb, bcnn bag Setter ift fart. 2. ^c^ table bicfe ^JMbc^en, jueil fie ifire ^itufgabe nic^t ftubiert r;aben. 3. ^m m'mUv ftubicrten bie Siinglinge; im §37] DECLENSION ; Xovj MODEL. SI ©ommer arBeiteten fie. 4. „^n ruberft nic^t fdmeK cjcnuq mein tober. b. ®cr Scf^vcr fagtc, ban bio itiubcr gu mel 2dnu nmc^tcn. 7. 2)er <(lonu3 rcbete mtt ben C^encialcn, unb lobU ben ^ut ibver 9fegimcnter 8. ^ic i^ornuiuber biefcr ilinbcf fi.ib ^i^bfetuicfiter benn jie (;a6en ba^3 Gioentiuii bei- .Uinber Derfcfnuenbct <) 'T^ie' ^iirmer leben in bcr Grbc, abcr bic .^i^i^e leben im ^amv ' To ^^0 ftnb bic Gier ber ionhmx ? ®ie finb in uufcvon Siovku 1 1 * ^cf) ioerbe miibe, lueil id) gcjieu ben Strom vubre. 1^! :Dev Siaikx l)at bie G3enerale getabelt, abcr iBrc ^HcBinicntcr 6at cr Gclobt. B. 1, The general has bombarded the town «^ The woman was buying books and clothes for her children 'i The gardener is shaking the apple-tree. 4. The children were learning songs. 5. The boy is industrious ; he has studied well. 6. The apartments of the palaces are ma-^ni- ficeiTt. 7. It rained yesterday, but it will not rain to-day 8. We have rowed a long while against the stream. 9 These men travelled through towns and villages, lo. The hospitals in London are large and fine. 1 ] . The leaves of these trees are large and beautiful. )•>. This gentleman would buy my houses, if he had money enough. ORAL EXERCISE X. 1. Weshalb warden die Blatter gelb.? 2. Wessen Regi- menter hat der Konig getadelt.? 8. Was sagte der Lehrer? 4. Wo leben die WTirmer.? 5. W^as lernten die Kinder? 6 Wurde dieser Herr das Haus kaufen? 53 LESSON XI. £§§3S' 38. LESSON XI. PERSONAL PRONOUNS. Declension of Personal Pronouns. First Person. Sing. N. ic^, I G. meiner (mein), of me D. mir, (to, for) me A. tnid^, me Plur. N. tt)ir, we G. unfer (unfrer), of us D. un^, (to, for) us A. ung, us Third Person. Singular. MASC. N. er, he G. f einer (fein), of him D. il^m,(to,for) him A. i^n, him FEM. fie, she i^rer (i{;r), of her i^r, (to, for) her fie, her NEUTER. ca, it [einer (fein, eg), of it if)m,(to,for^ it eg, it Second Person, bu, thou beiner (bein), of thee bir, (to, for) thee bic^, thee i^r, ye, you euer (eurer), of you eud;, (to, for) you eu(^, you REFLEXIVE (ALL GENDERS). fid;, (to, for) himself, herself, itself fic^, himself, herself, itself Plural. FOR ALL GENDERS N. fie, they G. i^rer (i^r), of them D. i^nen, (to, for) them A. fie, them Remarks.— i. The forms mein, bein, fein, i^r, unfrer, eurev are poetical or archaic. 2. The form eg of the 3. sing. gen. neuter is only used in cer- tain phrases, as : ^cb bin H miibe, I am tired of it. fic^, (to, for) them- selves , themselves 10] IDOMATIC USES OF e5. 53 3. The gen. and dat. of the 3. sing, neuter do not occur, except when referring to persons (e. g. 9Jiabc^en, ^rauUin). 4. The Pronouns of the 3. sing, must agree in gender with the substantive to which they refer, as : ^aft bu ben ^wi'^ Hast thou the hat > Hast thou the flower } 2BoiftbQg«bc^en? Where is the girl ? Yes, I have it. 9?ein, ic^ babe fie rac^t. No, I have it not. ^A ift im %(xxi^x\.. She is in the garden. 5- The Pronouns of the 3. person are ^^z" used after Preio^ stttons, when referring to inanimate objects, but are replaced by the adverb bo(r), there, before the Preposition, the r being inserted if the Preposition begins with a vowel, as : 33ift bu mit biefem ©ut^e gufrieben? ^a, irf; bin bamit gufrieben. Art thou satisfied with this book ? Yes, I am satisfied with it {therewith). How much did you pay for this hat > I paid two dollars for it, bafilr {therefor). What have you in your purse.? I have money in it (borin, thereixi). ^^« Idiomatic Uses of eg. I. Before the verb, representing the real subject, which follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as : Who is it •> It is my cousin ; it is my cousins 2Ber ift eS? m \\i mein ^Better ; eg finb meine ^ettern. @g leuc^tet bie ©onne, the sun shines, i. e., it is the sun that shines. m leuc^tcn bie eterne, (it is) the stars (that) shine. 54 1 1 < LESSON xr. [§§39- Remark -G^? in tl construction is often rendered by 'there' in English, as: ^ There is a bird in this cage. (?jl ift z\\\ ilUn^ct in bicfcm l\\mx. There are three books on this table. iH fiiib bvci m^hix auf bicfem 2:i)c^. (See also c^ gicbt. Less. XXXVII.) 2. When the real subject represented by c§ is a personal pronoun, uuh the verl) /.; h', ,<, follows th. verb which agrees with the re.l subject in person and number, as; It is I' m h'xw e^. ^u (Jift e^. It is you, \ o^i-j^ ^eii, eg^ Sic finb e^. It is we, It is they, Is it you ? luir finb e§. fie finb c^. flub 8ie ea? 3. After the verb, representing a predicate or a clause and corresponding to the English 'one' or 'so,' as; Is your father a soldier.? Yes, he is one (c§). We are free, end you shall be so (c0) too. 40. Use of Pronouns in Address. I. ^M is used only in addressing persons with whom We are very nitunate, or towards whom we use no ceremony also HI addressing the Supreme Being, as : «?«> bift bu, licbcr ,n-cunb? Where are you, dear friend ? 2Ba§ macf)ft uu, mciii .Uinb? What are 3'ou doing, my child? "^ -^'Hi/ '^ vi^oti! vVc praise Thee, o God! 42) REFLEXIVE ANr RECIPROCAL PRONOUNS. 55 2. 3ftr (plur. of bu) is used in nddressing a number of ner sons, each of whom we should address by ^ as : 2i5a^ mac6t i^r, ^inber? What are you doing, children? 3. In all other cases we use for 'you' in German, whether IT °'^i"'" ^^'' P'''"^"" °^^'^^ Third Plural : 8ic ^fircr 31)ncn, Sic, distinguished by a .apM letter, LfZo ^ 43.) ^ '*'*" 41. Paradigm ok Jaficn with Reflexive Pronouns. ^ Present Indicative. Sing. 1. ic^ ro6e mij^, I praise myself thou praisest thyself himself 2. bu h)6[t blr^, 3. er ^ fie \ \M fi(^, J'liir. 1. loir loben nn§, 2. if;r lobt cuf^, 3. fie loben firfj. he ^ . she .^praises -s^ herself it ) ( itself we praise ourselves ye praise yourselves they praise themselves So throughout the verb, as ; 42. Reflexive and Reciprocal Pronouns - jdhfi. 1. The Pronouns of the First and Second Persons express reA^jre action without a special form, as shown by the^Z paradigm, but those of the Third Person have the form S 2. These pronouns are also used in the Plural to express reciprocal action, as : cApress We met each other ; they will see each other ...j^ ^ir Dcgeaueten yxu ; fie h)erbcu firfj iuieber|e^en/ ''''" If- 5C LESSON XI. C8«> I But when, to prevent ambiguity, it is necessary to dis- tinguish reciprocal from reflexive action, we use ciiioilbcr as the reciprocal pronoun for all persons, thus : We love each other (one anotlier), mx liebpn chittnbfr. " (2Bir lieben unS might mean ' we love ourselves:) 3. To emphasize and strengthen the reflexive pronruns, and give them an exclusive sense, as well as further to distin' guish them from reciprocal pronouns, the indeclinable word fclOft (or fclbcr) is used, as: Know yourselves, (^rfcnne. cuc^ fctDfl. (©rfcnnct ciir^ might mean ' know one another-:) He has injured himself, ©r \i^i fid; fe!6ft befc^abigt. Remark. — This word fclbft is in apposition to the subject (or object, as the case may be), as : SDer ^onig fclbft ift nid;t immcr glucfac^. The king himself is not always happy. It is also used adverbially (= Eng. ' even '), as Even the kmg is not always happy. (SclOft ber iBnig ift nic^t iinmcv gliicflic^. Vocabulary. behave one's self properly (of children), arttg felu meet, begci-^ncn (dat.) visit, bc[ucj)cn pay, bc3af;J(en have finished (with), fertig fein mit belong (to), gcfjoren (dat.) be ashamed of, fic^ fc^dmen (gen.) seat one's self (sit down), fic^ fel;en punish, ftrafcn work, labour, bie Sfrbeit parents, bie ©Itern (no sing.) patience, bie (SJetuIb gentleman, master, Mr., ber hat, bonnet, ber §ut * [^err John, :5of)amt Charles, ^arl [§4a to dis- aitbcr as mber. onruns, ) distin- le word M REFLEXIVE AND RECIPROlaI. subject n), fidj sing.) r., bcr Kerr PRONOUNS, s; away, gone, fort here, [;icr ever, at any time, jc, jcmar^ never, nic, ntcmal^ artist, bcr Sim\t1'..t Mary, mzx\i uncle, bcr D'i}('m dollar, bcr a:r;alcr EXERCISE XI. 4. Unfer D^ei.n I,at mi sifiic^et oefauft. 5. .©at. ©etuft T„ m,t ba. ^,ct gdauft (,abe, 8. Wovgcn «,„be„ toir nmti tt «9r,<,ba, .mbl„,tlKrbo„u„freei,et„kfuer has bought her a ring. 3. Were the fishes in your batl^^ Yes, they were ,njt. 4. Who has told it [to] her > 5 John have you my shoes .» No, I have them not. 6. We sit down because we are tired. 7. Even the beggars of thTs c ty have shoes and stockings. 8. Who has bought this h.^'' .1 bought It niyself in the c.ty, and paid four dollars for it. "lO. 5« LKSSO.V XII. t§§43 U Charles and his teacher love each other very much. 11. Mother, have you bought me apples or nuts? 12. Mr. A., here is a chair for you ; sit down. 1 8. Has the teacher blamed him? Yes, he had not done his exercise. 14. Do you believe that this milk is good ? Yes, it is very good. 15. 'J'he teacher is ashamed of her, because she has not finished (with) her work. ORAL EXERCISE XI. 1. Wiirden sie einen Spaziergang mit mir machen ? 2. Weshalb loben Sie sich so viel } 3. Was sagten Sie mir ? 4. Sind Sie mit meiner Arbeit zufrieden ? 5. Was werden wir morgen machen .'' H. Werden Sie morgen Ihre Eltern besuchen? LESSON XII. POSSESSIVE ADJECTIVES. -USE OF ARTICLES. 4.'J. Possessive Adjectives. First Person. .Second Person. Sing, mcitl, my bcitl, thy I'/ur. unjcr, our cMcr, your Third Person. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Sing, fcin, his (its) t^r, her (its) fdll, its P/f/r. t§r, their Poss. Adj. of Polite Addr ..^s : ^^r. Remarks. — i. The Possessive Adiectives ars the Genitive Cases of the respective Personal Pronouns, declined after the mcin Model. (See § 8, above.) 2. Unfer and cuer may drop p of the stem wh-^n inflected • or they may drop c of the termination, unless the terminaHon is -c or -er, as : unfcrc or unfvc ; unfcrc^, unfrc^ cr unfcv^. 3. Observe the correlatives of the Pronoun.s n{ Address: bu — bcin tfir — met 44] USE OK THE ARTICLES. 59 Thus we say : bu ^aft bcine Hufgabe gelcrnt, ) lift ijaht eure „ ^^ C you have learnt your nf fK» d Adj. of m., Pl„.a^ as pLoun of Address " "^"^ ^"' ^"^^• 4. Observe also the correlatives of the Third Person • Referring to subst. .... sin,, fein (whether animate » , •^^'''- " «5r ) or inanimate tosubsts. plur.(all genders) i^r Thus we say : ^er £unb [jai fcincit .^noc^en berroren (lost) 5)ic 33anne „ i^rc flatter uiey quality the ///■^j.5.^,(.(.,/N . <.k_ .. ^^ / i x jTPnrl,.r ^f /i 1 -^ /''•»''"-^^«; , tlie shwi (as above) on the 'n °^ ;"^-"»;-"'™ to which they refer (the^« 2)n« yjinbrf)eit Ihlit {^rc a>hitter. Hie girl loves her mother. For Possessive Pronouns, see Less. xxm. **• UsF. OF THE Articles. th^ir''"*"''*/" '"'''''••'""ves used in the full extent of 6o LESSON Xlt. [§44 {d) Before nouns (sing, or plur.) denoting a whole class, as: ^cr 9}?enfc^ tft fterblid;, Man is mortal; 3Dic 255gel f»abcn defter. Birds have nests. (b) Before names of materials, abstract nouns, etc., ascd in their unlimited sense, not partitively, as : $)ttg ®Ia§ i[t burc^fic^tig, Glass is transparent; ^00 (^3oIb i[t iucrtiioKer al§ bag Silber, Gold is more valuable than silver ; but : Wolb imb ©ilbcr \}oSianb, Give me your hand. {d) With parts of the person, clothing, etc., the Dativa of the Personal Pronoun -|- Definite Article replace the Pos- sessive Adjective, as : Gin Stein fid iljui auf ben itlopf, A stone fell on his bead; Gin '^Zagc( bat mxx ben I'Koc! jerriffen, A nail has torn my coat. Note. —If the subject is the possessor, the reflexive pronoun is used, as : Sr l)at fid) in ben 5i"Hcr gcid)nittcn, He has cut his finger. Vocabulary to cost, fojteit hurt, wound, t)erle^en cry, weep, lueinen draw, jcidnten doctor, physician, ber Slrjt * axe, bic 2(rt* mountain, hill, ber 53erg lead-pencil, bet 33Ieiftift iron, ba-3 Gifen window, btvo j"\-enfter wing, ber ^'^•lugel purse, ber ©elbbentel hope, bie .*5offnung merchant, ber ^aufniann master, ber 3)teifter Mont Blanc, ber ^JJont SBlanc music, bie ^Jhifif coat, ber ^Kod* Schiller-street, bie ©dbiHers ftrafje tailor, ber ®d;neiber cloth, ba§ ^uc^) exercise, practice, bie llbung hot, bei^ light, leic^t dear, reuer as, when, oXi often, oft farewell, (ba^) ^ebetvobl EXERCISE XII. A. 1. tlbung macbt ben ^IKeifter. 2. ^ie llfufi! imb bie 9D?a(erei finb 5^ilnfte. 3. i^inbev, babt ibr enre iHufgaben gemac^it? %^, \X)\x baben fie gemarfU. 4. Der ^JJipnt ^^lanc ift ein 53eri3 in, ber i^cljiueij. 5. ^ft biefee %yx^ teuer ? :^a, es foftet brei Xbaler -*- jl^v^ CA/y^^' '^ *M tvx , §44] USE OF ARTICLES. 63 bie m. 6. 2)ic g^utter fc^icft i^re ^inber gur Sc^ule. 7. ^abm eie @oIb m ^f)rem ©elbbeutel? ^5c^ i^abi kin ©olb, aber id) ^abe Silber. 8. ma^ lernt bag 2)?abc^en ? ®ie lernt tf)re 2(uf. gabe. 9. Xer ^^Bater fd;uttelte feinem ©of)ne bie .§anb unb [agte tN £eben)oi)I. 10. ^ie g^Iugel ber SSbgel finb fe^v leic^t unb ftarf. 11. §at ber ©c^nciber ^bren ?fiod md) .§au[e gefc^icft? 12. dim, er ^at if)n nod; nid;t oefc^ndt, aber er tuirb ifjn inorgen fc^iden. 13. Unfere Gltern rciften in 3^eutfd;lanb unb in ber ©cbh)ei^ 14. ^;^m Suli ift bag 3Setter oft feF)r \)d^. 15. ®ag (Sifen h)irb rot, loenn eg fjei^ loirb. 16. manbm ©ie, ba^ id; Siec^t f^ahi"^ 17. Karl oerle^te fid; bie ^anb, alg er mit einer STjt arbeitete. 18. '^d) ioiirbe ®oIbat toerben, n?enn id; alt genug JDcire. 19. iB3ir iourben ^reunbe ge^abt baben, toenn h)ir reic^ getoefen Joaren. ^. 1. Gold is yellow, but silver is white. 2. Mary is studying music and painting. 3. Are your parents still living in Frederick-Street.? 4. No, they are now living in Schiller-Street. 5. Mont Blanc i a mountain in Switzerland. 6. The girl is crying; she has hurt her hand. 7. Is your father a doctor .? No, he is a merchant. 8. Glass is trans- parent, and we make windows of it. 9. What are you doing with your lead-pencil .? lam drawing a flower with it. 10. The emperor is satisfied with his generals. 11. -I blame you,* because you are not industrious. 1;,^ What are you drawing now.? I am drawing a bird. 13. Why are you crying, my child.? 14. The doctor shook his head, for he had no hope. 15. Would you buy a horse, if you were rich .? 16. Miss B. has sent her Mother a present. 17. The girl will visit her parents. ORAL EXERCISE XJ". 1. 1st das Gold weisz.? 2. Weshalb weint das Madchen.? 3. Werden Sie sich ein Haus kaufen ? 4. Sind Sie Soldat? 5 Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 6. Was machen Sie mit Ihrem Gelde ? 64 LESSON XIII. [§§ 45- LESSON XIII. CONSTRUCTION OF SENTENCES: PLACE OF OBJECTS, AD- VERBS, etc. - INDIRECT NARRATION. - PREPOSITIONS ) GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY, 45. Rules for Position of Objects, Adverbs, etc. Rule i. (a) Pronouns first of all, unless governed by a preposition, when they come after all other objects, ad- verbs, etc. (^) Adverbs or Adverbial Expressions of Time precede everything except Pronouns without Prepositions, thus : 1 '2 3 4 6 (Germ.) ^^d) fdncftc i^m flcfteru (bicfc fflSor^c) einen SBrief, 12 3 4 5 {EngL) I sent him a letter yesterday (this week); but: 12 3 4 5 {Germ.) ^cf) fd)id'te gcftcru einen 53rief an i§n, 12 3 4 6 (EngL) I sent a letter to him yesterday; 12 3 4 6 6 {Germ.) "^dj haht C0 ^cutc inciucr ©c^tuefter gefc^icft, 12 3 4 6 6 {Efig/) I have sent it to my sister to-day. Rule 2. Of Nouns, persons (unless governed by pre- positions) before things, as : 12 8 4 5 {Germ:") ^sd} fcf)icfte ocftern mcincm JBatcr einen ©rief, 12 3 4 5 {Engl.) I sent my father a letter yesterday; but: 12 8 4 6 {Germ) ^d) fdndte ijcfteru einen ©rief nn tmwm ^tiUx, 12 3 4 5 {Engl.) I sent a letter to my father yesterday. I 46] PLACE OF OBJECTS, ETC. <55 nofnTas": ""' '''°"°""^' J^rsonai h.ior. all other Pro- ^c^ ^ak j^m bad (Demonstr. Pron.) qeaeben I have given him that. ir^ Object,"!:"""^' '™"°""^' ^"•-' «^J-' ^^'»- 12 8 4 5 {Germ.) ^d} babe eg i^m gecjcbcn, 12 8 4 6 (^//^^/.j I have given it to him. iectsTn'th; ^?'''"^' 'V''^' '^'"' ""^ ''^^^^'^^ f°"o^ Ob- jects ni the order nanr d, as : 1 2 *i (^«^/.) He has studied the book very diligently at home. Remember: .. That in compound tenses all these objects 2 That any of these members of a sentence may occupy the • IZ the ^etb, a^: ""'''' ^"^ ^ ^°' °'^^- '^ '» "^ ">-»" 1 2 3 4 5 ©eftcrit [c^idtc irf) i^m einen ^Brief. * 2 3 4 5 ^icfc mo^c fr^itftc id) einen mtf an iijrx, 46. Prepositions governing the Dative only. 5(u§, rtu^cr, feci, mit, ) ''''^^' ttiic^, fctt, tipit, ^n [govern the Dative Case. m, (.) out of (;««^/.«), as : He came out of the house im Btm §aufe). ■ ' ^ LESSON XIII. [§46 (2) of {made of), as: This house is built of wood (ou8 (3) from {origin), as: He comes from England (ou§ (Snglanb) ; from the town (aue bcr Stabt). (4) from {cause), as : I did it from fear (aud ^^^urd^t). au^cr^ (i) outside of {rest), Si's,: The table is standing out- side of the room (ou^cr bciit (dimmer). (2) ex'cept, besides, but, as: I had nothing except (besides, but) my stick (nu^cr meincilt Stocfc). 6ci, (i) (near) by, as : The chair stands (near) by the table (ki bcm or beim 3:ifc^c). (2) at (the house, etc., of, = Fr. c/iez), with, as : He lives at the house of (or: with) his uncle (or: at his uncle's), cr Juobnt bci fcincm Onfel. (3) about (one's person), with, as : I have no money about (with) me (Ijcimir). mit, with, as : He is coming with (along with) his friend (mit feinem j^-rcunbc) ; he struck the dog with a stick (mit eincm Stocfc) . nai^, (i) after {tijne, order), as: He arrived after his brotjher (imrf) feinem 23ruber). '' (2) to (with names oi places), a.s : He is going to Quebec (uot^ Quebec); to England (not^ (Snglanb); home- (wards) (imrf) i^i^ufe). (3) according to (often follows its case in this sense), as : This is wrong according to my opinion (not^ meincr llieinunoi, or meiner ^Jietnung nor^). feit, since, as : He has not been here since the war (fcit bcm Alriecjc) ; jcit bunbevt "^akcn, for the last hundred years. \ §46] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE DATIVE ONLY. 67 foil, f .) froni, as : He has just come from dinner (»„« !,.„ ■ ^' -°'' *..er';. "" ''"'"^ °' °" '"°"'^^ ("-a- "»f«'f (3)_by (with personal agenl after the passive voice) as • Children are loved by their oarenis <-h-.. r ' g[,i;„,) ' parents (fcjj, |(,rt„ 3U, (i) to(/.^..,„),as; He went to his friend, or to hi, friend s (ju fciurm Jrcuilbt) ; he spoke to me (51, (2) to (//„„., if not proper names ; see „„*. above) as- He was going to the town (,„ (,„, or ,„r Stlw)' (J) at (witli proper names of tou.ns onlv), as : He lives at Ottawa (5,, Dltalua); at liome '(,„ ,C-,a„fc) Remarks , Sici, I>on and ,,u (and sometimes'm,f;cr) are contracted with the Dative Sing. Masc. and Neuter of he w«//.,„,j«/Definiie Article, thus : 6ci bf,n = bchn i,„„ bcm = Boin, ju bcm = sunt ; ,u is also contracted with the Dat Sine Fern., thus: ju bet = 3iir. *' 2. The -c of the Dat. Sing, is never used when a prenosi- t.on (except ,„) stands i,efore a substantive wi.i,„ut an artlTe pronoun or adjective preceding, as: a>,« m,. of wood; ^ 5re>B on purpose; but „,rt, .§„„,>, home ; ju.paufc, at h;me 3. Observe the following ; {Germ.) Xer ^Brtcf mciiicg Dnfet^, {Engl.) The letter of my uncle ~ My uncle's letter. {Germ.) '^,u ^lief tiou meincm €ufcl, {Engl.) The letter from my uncle. The English preposition jaf. with a substantive must -en ra y be rendered in German by a Genitire case .J^S. PreposU^n.. whenever it can be turned into the English Po t : «ve ca.a, as above ; otherwise by s,m, as : ^^m 68 LESSON XIII. [§46 He was speak' \c,' of his mother (tiotl feincr 3Jiuttcv). 4. Observe also the foiii>wing: (£//j;/.) Show the book to me == Show me the book, (Germ.) ^iu;\cn Sic mir ba^ '}^\\d) i Dat. without Preposition). The EngHsh preposition to with a substantive 1 lust be rendered in German by the Daiive ivitliout a prepositioi, when- ever the subst. can be turned into the Ena^lish Indirect 01)jec- tive, as above ; otherwise (generally) by the preposition ju, as: He spoke to me (ju mir). to answerf-antiuorten honour-^cl;rcu show^gcigeu picture,vba'o ^ilb letter,^bcr 'iHief Germ any, ..^cutfrfilanb presenty bar arm. 2. SBir babcn iin^o giuci .s^dujer in ber 3tabt gefauft. 3. 2Bo ift beine 9tufgabc ? 5^icr ift fie. 4. Sir 11 .icbten mdj bem g}?ittag§e[fen cincn S^agicvgang mit unt'crcn Cniftcn. 5. Wkin Skater bat mir ein ©eicbciif gcfdncft unb id; bin tbm bafiir febr banfbar. 6. 33ift bu mit beincr ^Hrbcit fcrtig ? 9Jein, idi bin noc^ md)t bamit fertig. 7. %^\x trcrbcn morgcn mit ^f;neu nad- ^Diontreal reifen. 8. ^axl levnt feit bier ^O^ionateu 5)eiitfcb. 9. „(Se|t euc^ unb feib ftill," fagte bie ^iutter 311 i^ren ^od)tern. 10. ^Biirben Sie bid fur biefe 8u4>er bejabien ? ^c^ tourbe fiinf X^aler bafiir l-cjaf^len. 11. [§48 §46J PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVfi. tcv). position). must be ion when- ct Objec- 3n ju, as: iffen baufbar arm. 2. D ift beine ittag§e[fcn r f)at mir 6. SBift itit fertig. . 8. ii?art tilt/' fagte fur biefe •len. 11» 69 flnuflcn, .7. aicfcr Warn, lobt fid; ui met 18 fli V;,' ... me,„. 3*,ucf.cv finb ;. ^„.f,. J,,. »a. luii b it t met 3' c,'uTtr.r;^'f' '"':^' '• '' •■^ ^^ '"^ °^ ^'^--t a. wur sen '.t |j from Germam . 4. ' Buv mem f es r"fi Th^'f r '" '™""-"- ■^- '"-^ ^-u I,; o , 7. Iharlt. you have answered well, sit down. 8 Mv son a ways sends me the n.-uspaper fron, Chicago. 9. MyVrie,™ .bowed me h,s pictures. ,0. Buy me thi: ring ■ iUsTa/ nificeat. 11. Who .s in the gnrde,> .' It is she ' V T?' ■eve that Carles has bought himself a hit H re i the" letter from my uncle. ,4. I am .shamed of you. becl!,se ' are not mdustrious. 1.5. My father ould send me t" Vh city, if I were old enough. '° ""^ ORAL EXERCISE Xlll. sein bT^^I' f ^T '" ^'^' "^^"^^ '' 1st es Karl odor seinBru r? 3. Seit wann lernen Sie Deutsch ? 4 Wer Im mirdieseZeitu, -creschirki -^ '. w ^^^" • 4. wer iut Mitta-sessen ? T- ''?f .''• ^^ '^^ "^ 'chte ich nacb dem nma.sessen? b. Wo hai mein V ci dieses Buch gek. fi ? • ■* 70 SUPPLKMF.NTAKY LKSSON A. [§§47 J!! ^m SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON A. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON PERSONAL PRONOUNS AND PREPOSITIONS. *7. Pronouns in Address. I. The pronouns Hu .-^nd i(,r are the usual pronouns ot address in /'or/rr .lud thu ,/nw,a, \l)\- being used for one person or more, as: lliiD Moirii "^liMiid noil) bcffimm' id) tir, The goblet is thine, And this ring too I'll keep for thee. (Schiller, ,,'Dcr Xaud)tv.") ?n|lt, llaUv, (\nu\(\ foin bac nvaiiiaiiie 2pic(. Gf [)at citrf) brftaiibi'ii, uuk^ foiiici- lu'ftd)t, Hub roimt i^r bpv< Sm-]n\is OHiiiftcii iuii)t ',n()incn, ii, f. ui., Knough, father, of this cruel sport. He has ventured for you what none will venture, And if you cannot subdue the desire of your heart, etc. {/M.) 2. gr and Zit (3. sing.) were formerly regularly used as pronouns of address towards inferiors, with the verb agreeing in 3. sing., and thev are often found so used in the classics, being spelt with a capital Their use w.y/ imply contempt; so Faust says to his servant Wagner who is otherwise addressed as „i()r" ; ' //^;;Az;-y address, correspon- dmg to the polite use of 8ic (3. plur.), by people of the lower orders. 48. The forms incinc?g!cid,cn, bpiiic^^rcil^rn, etc, = 'a person, or persons, like me, you,' etc. (vulg. ■ ;he like of me '), are used as indeclinable substantives, either as object or as predicate, as : Wiv lucrbcn ^-incfifilcii^cn nic uuibcr feljeu, We ne'er shall look upon his like again. ®n bift iiid)t mcinc^Blcirfjcii; You are not (a person) like me (my equal). (For the use of be§fllcic{)cn, berg{eicl)cn, see §§ 97, 139.) . xr^^'r/" addressing persons 01 rank, the proper title, as : ^bve ©miben, Your Honour'; Sure (abbrev. (Slt>.) Ct-j-ccHeriv 'Your Excellency'; ^nve PREPOSITIONS WITH DATIVK. @ic a hi f comp,„„entary titles that gave rise to the u e of no^lIoLi; "" °'^""" '''''''■ '''' ^'' ^-- 30ro, ^ero/arc 60. Prepositions with Accusative. I. The preposition fonftcr takes the accusative, but is of rare occurrence fleil .V>nnim(, heavenwards ; flrn yjoibcil, northwards, etc. 3- Odnc has a dative in the phrase of,.u'-^^'- =-•'-!.. .otion or dat or ace it Ju Ii n M- c.), ,f this preposition is one governing ace It vMll always take the accusative when combined with bi«,as? Gr gmg bis ati'S 2(,or, he went as far as the gale. 61. Prepositions with Dative. The following additional prepositions take the Dative only ^«mnen within (of ,.,.), as : S&Uuun ,.ri Snnen, withir. two days. Notes.-,, a.nnen sometimes governs the ^.«//,w. ^ 2. Sinn.n is used of time only: ,m,crf,a(l, (see § ) of ,/«.. and time. I nlXr \ Contrary to, as : / '^-'^'""'f*' ^^'>'nmin mmm (^ilrtJibcr), •* ^""'^"f*^ ' ^contrary to my inclination. 4. OeoeilUfier, opposite (to), follows the case, as : tm Xlm-e- flcnenitbcr, opposite the gate 5. ®emaft, according to. agreeably to, precedes or follows its case as- feinmminm mm (or geiimO fcinem SBiinfrfie), Agreeably to his desire. 6. @Icl(^, like, precedes or follows its case, as: @te ladjelte n(cicf) einem Gngel (einem ©ngel gleicfi). one smiled like an angel. 7- 9i6(!)f},or I 3uno(|f| i "^''^ *"" <^^ of/r<7;r//w//y (= neben), as : ^SMBBIRj; n LESSON XIV. m^i % (Sr faf? naci)ft mir (or mir siiuac^ft), He sat next to me. (2) of succession, as : 9?arf)ft bem i'f'beii liebt cr bie (g()re, Next to life he loves honour. Note.— 3iinarf)ft usually follows its case; tiac^ft is the commoner of the two as pre- position, especially in the senses under (2). 8. 9Ie6ft \ 9. Somt i" ^"Sether with, along with,as : ®er ,^frr fam ucbft feincm ^^vnnibe, The gentleman came along with his friend. ®er l^ater famt jeiiicri tiiibein, The father together with his children. Note i. Distinguish iiebft, along with, and neben (alongside of, near). 2. 3nmt is used of objects naturally belonging together, as above. 10. 06 is poetical and obsoiete for iibcr, and denotes : (i) above {oi position), as: Ob iJcm 3((tave, above the altar. (2) about, concerning, as : (Sntriiftct ob biejcm greoel, indignanl about (at) this cutrage. Note. — In the lauter sense it also takes a genitive. LESSON XXV. CONJUGATION OF fcilt, to be. - DECLENSION OF SUBSTAN- TIVES. -WtAK OR -It STEMS: - ^liadc MODEL. 62. Paradigm of fcill, to be. Principal Parts. Pres, Infin. fcin Impf. L\dic. mar Past Part, gelttcfeit Indicative. id; Wx\., I am bu Mft, thou art er if t, he is U)ir finb, we are tbr fcib, ye are fie finb, they are Present. Subjunctive. id; fci, I (may) be, etc. bu feieft er fei njir feic.i i^r feict .fie feicn i2] i'ARADlGU OF feirt. Indicative. id) toor, I was 73 bu toarft, thou wast er tuar, he was toir hjaicn, wt- were il;r toaret, ye were fie \mxcn, they were Imperfect. ^"''i""^^*'^^- ic^ tDiire, (if) r were (might be), etc. bu tuiiicft, thou wert er tottvc, he were Jfir uiiircn, we were if;r iDaret, ye were fie iDJiren, they were I have been, etc. id) 6in Perfect (Pres. of fci„ + p^ p^j.^^ bu bift er ift it)ir finb i^r feib fie finb I had been, etc. id; luor bu luarft er Wax tt)ii luareii ii^r iuaret fie loaren bu feieft ' iictticfcn ^^ ^^^ t»ir feien i^r feiet fie feien PlUPERFECT. (Imperf. of fcin + p. Part.) I (may) have been, etc trf;fd ^cmcfcn I had (might have) been. ^ fichicfrn ic^ JDiire bu tuareft er \vaxt Juir luiiren if;r hjoret fie hJttren [etc. flctoefctt Future. (Pres. of toerteri + Infin. of feii, ) I shall be, etc. r , „, ' I shall be, etc. ic^ tuerbe bu I fcin tc^ hjerbe ) bu h)erbeft J fcIn 74 LESSON XIV. [§§ 5*- ! i i Indicative, cr Juirb \mx irerben ibr lucrbct fie Juerben fcin feitt I shall have been, etc id) ii>crbe bu loirft er a'irb U)ir iuerben \^x iucvbct fie iperbeti gcmrjen )etn gcmefen fetn Simple ;Impf. Subj. of uievben + Infin of jeiu.) I should be, etc. id; iDiirbc i bu tourbeft er hjiirbe . . h)ir tuilrben ^ \{}v luuvbet fie iDurbeu Imperative, fei (bu), be (thou) feib (\^x), be (ye) Subjunctive. er tucrbe ~) w'lx iuerben | ibr ioerbet j fie iDcrben J Future Perfect, (Future of fein + P. Part.) I shall have been, etc. id) lt>erbe bu ioerbeft er merbe \mv loerben it)r loerbet fie Ujerben Conditional. Compound. (Simple Cond. of ffin -f- Past Part.) I should have been, etc. id) luurbc bu luiirbeft er iuiirbe luir unirben it;r luiirbet fietoiirben ^ Indicative. (ju) fein, (to) be gcmtfcn (ju) fein, to h^ve been. Participles. Past. nettJCJnt, be*'»> gcmefen fein Pfrs. fetenb, being Remarks. — i. Observe the absence of the Subju.40^»v«-e in the i. and x. sing. Pres. S3] USE OP Icln AS AUXILIARY OI' TENSE. 75 used :ith mos X' '-""""'" ,"" '''"' "^^ ^ ^«^^" '' ve.bs .e„r.::;:,?i ftn^ir'crr ''"'- ™^ "'^ '^^ 53. Use of |>u, as Auxiuakv of Tfnsf (<^) With those expressing a change of condition, as • fterbeii, die . ,, ecnefei, recover (f,o.i„„ess) rSC:. , oicben, move, go, proceed. f4,r";„r^' ''^''^"- •« --'"^ ^^«^«-'- - meet; r.A Ii '• . '' ^^' (22, 4). • ^ ' 2' ^"^ ^^^^^^^ ^" -ni« and -fa( 4. No Neuters (but see §§ 62, 63). Further Examples : Like ^mU : 'V. ber iBote, messenger g. d. a. SBoten ber .f)a[c, hare ber 3fiefc, giant ber 9tu[[c, Russian w. ber 53ar, bear ber g^iirft, prri-.re ber ,^elb, here ber git'cnfcf), man ber Stubent', student ber eolbat', soldier Remark 1. Ter .^i)err, gentlema Plural. N. G. D. A. ^Boteit |afett §afen ^^^^^« 3itefen ^»ff^« Stuffeit LikeCsJraf: G.D.A. 53arpn n. g. d. a. ^arcit l^'^f" ^iirficn £^^^f« §elben 5J?enfcbeii gj^enfc^en ©tiibentcit ©tubentctt ©olbatcn eorbaten In the sm g., uut -en ill pjm-^ n, master, lord, adds -n only 7^ LESSON XIV. [§§ 57- ?il Singular. N. G. D. A. ^(umc 2Bi|fcn[dBaft Like 53Iume : Plural. N. G. D. A. ^^lutnen ^irc^H'ti (Sd;onl;eitcn 2Bi[fcnfc^aftcn Remark 2. Feminines in -c(, -er add -n only in the Plur., as: Si7ig. bie ^-cber, pen Plur. ^-cbcrn bic ©abel, fork ©a6eln bie ed;ii)eftcr, sister ednuoftern Remark 3. Feminines in -in double the u in the plur., as: Sing, bie (^rcifin, countess Plur. (sjrdfinncil admire, 6ctDunbern hasten, cilen hunt, jagcu dwell, reside, live, tuo^ncn astrologer, bcv ^Iftrolog' lady, bie ®ame influence, ber Gin'flu^* heathen, ber ^eibe comet, bcv ^omef landscape, bie 2anbfd)aft Vocabulary. monarch, bcv SHonarc^' news, bic 'Jfad;rid;t nephew, ber l)icffe planet, ber planet' Prussian, ber '^rcu^e raven, ber 9Ia6e valley, bas %^oX happy, gliidlic^ when, al^, luenn when ? loanu ? 58. ^A/hen = menu ahoays with Present, Perfect and Future ; and also with Imperfect and Pluperfect, of a habitual or repeated occurrence (= whenever), as : I ahoays xo%<\, when (i. e. whenever, njcim) the sun rose. When = a(^ with Imperfect and Pluperfect otily^ of a single, definite occurrence, as : 1 rose yesterday, when (al6) the sun rose. 79 •A 59] DECLENSION : — ^lltaBc MODEL. When ? interrogative = mnnii ? as : When was your father liere? i!S8amiH)or3{)r«aterljior? NoTK. - Kemeraber ihat lllfim also = "if." 50. When a conditional or " if " sentence precede, the pr,nc,pa sentence on which it depends, the princfpai scte ce usually .ntroduced by the particle fo, which is not to be ttanslated mto English, or counted as a ,nen,ber of tl^ sit Klea ,«e , .o). as : age,,,, irt, ,«elb „a.,e, f„ ,„„,., tl, Rn';m^l ;;,;;:'"""' EXERCISE XIV. 9«,It 3. SD.e atrme mt$ 3(icfc„ finb fe(,r ra„q ,„b ftarf 7 aiuihd, fe,n, turn,, ie ,„it ifitcr awdt fertia finl, g W fv 3tuffe„ §eibe„? 9iei„, fie finb Ghrif ,r 1 Mein 9ifff " , i'Muu;cn. 10. ii)ie 5{naben Batten b ef 9^t'r,i«ii-> ,« r. - .. -««te. I;.r„n. x,. ^i«,«4)crrcn maben arm wcrbct, «,«,„ fle i^j i tt 80 LESSON XV. [§§60- ©clb fo uerfc^tocuben. 18. Unfcrc 9?effen finb lange 6ei un^ i9. 1. The castles of the count are magnificent. 2 The churches of this city are large and beautiful. ;i. When will your brother be at home ? 4. Are these soldiers Prussians ? No they are Russians. 5. The bears live in the forests', b. llie boys have two ravens and three hares. 7 The ladies^ have been in the church, but they are now at home. a_ Who was right ? 9. For a boy of (uon) five years he is very large. 10. I should be happy, if I were rich. 11 He has not been at home to-day. 1 2. Wh.n she was in the city she lived at her aunt's. 18. Would th , girl be contented, if she were with her mother.? 1^. The students became tired because they had studied too much. ORAL EXERCISE XIV. P \7.'''J'V^' ^'^' "' ^''"^•" gemacht.? 2. Hatte ich Kecht.? 3. Wer elite mit der Nachricht nach Paris? 4 Haben Sie jemals Hasen oder Fuchse gejagt .? 5 Wann wird mein Pruder xu Hause sein ? 6. Wiirde ich glucklich sein, wenn ich reich ware > LESSON XV. MIXED DECLENSION. -DOUBLE PLURALS. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING DATIVE OR ACCUSATIVE. 60. Declension of bcr mmt, the name. Singular. Norn, bcr :?kmc, the name Gen. bc^5 5Zanieng, of the name Dat. bem teamen, (to, for) the name Ace. ben 9iameii, the name Plural. bic ^amen, the names ber 9?amen, of the names ben 9?amett, (to, for) the names bie SRamen, the names 63] DECLENSION : - ^aUK MODEL. ber iQaufc, heap ber ©ame, seed ber ecf;abc, harm, injury [pl. 3rf'abcnJ ber iliMfrc, will 8i O-kvk: -e in the No.. Sin,, and -c„, in Gen. Sin. 2. -en all other cases. "^ NcK »T..'^ ^«;^-'-'n except in 2dmbe (see below). I he Non,. S,„g. sometimes has «. . oer ^ud;ta6c Jetter (of the \l i^.wu w , phabet) ^ .^!' i^^'^?"^> thought, idea ber ^riebe, peace * M ber ^unfe, spark ^f^ ber mauU, faith, belief, creed ., ^^^ ;:iMuc, will Also one neuter: bn« .Jaj, the hear. (Ace. Sing. §er,) ^^^. "^ ^"-^ ^'"^'- ''■^- ^'^'' «■ °"<')i - C^r(c); 63. In this way decline also : I. Certain masculines, as • 2. Certain neuters, as : III iTu': "'' '5-^^' ^"rt oa^ 33ett, bed (A full List of these substantives will be found in App G ^ 3^Foreign (Latin) masculines in unaccented -or as "^ ber ^rofef or, the professor- c. si^rof.fior* • /./ a? -" ber 3:0!. 0,, the doctor: g. ^oftor^; I^/ur. ^oWxtn. r? 82 T.KSSOV XV, [8§fi4 :; iUnt>, tie, bond (brr '^^anb, volume bio 'l^a)\\, bank (commercial) bic ^l\an\, bench ba^^ ('>iciid>t, face, countenannp ba-o (^JcjidU, vision bcv Vabcn, shop bcr :i?abon, shutter ba\< X^lnb, land, country ba-? 'i?anb, province biV-> ^i'^>>rt i '^-'''^^f''' "^^'Ttls considenui scf^aratcly word ' ) '^^-''^^'^^' ^^'^^rds considered ccnncctcdly \ (as makin::: sense) Rkmark. — I'he plural Vaubc is also used in [)oet;cal ?au- jiuage: and in the compound bic ^)ticbcvUinbc, the Methcrhmds (^= Lower Provinces). «5. Prepositioxs covkrmnc. ihe Dativk or accusa iivk. The following nine prepositions govern the Dative when they indicate louilify merely, or aiTswer the question 'where?' or Mn what place?'; the Accusative when they imply motion, i/inrfio/i or tendency (figurative motion) towards, or answer the questicin 'whither?' or 'to whp* place or person ? ' : «»»' «»Mf' Wxicv, in, iicbcii, titicr, iinter, nor and jtotfc^ctto r non- Iiorizr>iital 65/ I'KKI-CSITIONS WITH DATIVK OK A-CUSATIVK. 83 an, I. (of />Ai,r, (a)^•h] yy .iponfa(lj;.(:(;„tfo>,as: 'i'i^ .u lure. /ur„^rs on tl... wall (n„ s.irface brr ^ji;a,tb). I „„^. ■) With Acc, ((., towards, 0,1, as: 1 /'^'//A'- the picture; on the wall (an bic iiyaiib). 2. (of //W, ,/,,/„ with MAT. r,vr V, on, ,ipon/as.. I wn '.orn on the ei^r,,teenth of Au^a.st (0,,, He will arrive on Monday (nm Wonla(V> J"^ ^'^^ ^" ''^ "^^ ^'^^ ''^^'--^ ^^^^^'---^^ auf, (of//./rr): (a) With :)AT., on, upon (o;/ top of), as : The hook //;■.»• on the table (ouf bcm CTifdu. () With ACC into, as: The gardener ,w. into the garden (m bcu ©artenX ( surface horizontal >\?l ^ ^^>^ "^X-^^ o .. \.^.^ IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) /. ^ {./ f^ 4^ M.t. 87 J ^ittc, fteEeu Sie mir biefcii 3tul;l bintcv ben Dfen. 21 ®ie v^tubenten (crnm bom ^:|]rofc)|-ov bie %mmx bcv(s3ottev ber 9iomev. _^. 1. The children were playing before the house. 2.' What IS the name of this professor? His name is Srhmidt 3. Hang the picture of my father over the door. 4 Every human being has two eyes and two ears. 5. Why do the professors praise their students? (i. The professors praise the diligence of their students. 7. The difference between my brother and me is not great. 8. I laid the pens upon the table, but they are no longer there. 5). Our neighbours sent their children into the wood to search for flowers. 10 Our cousin lived happy and in peace with iiis neighbours 11 The pupils would look for the words in a dictionary, if they had time. 1 0. Your eyes are tired, because x ou have studied too much. 18. These words are hard to learn, for every u;ord has ten letters. 14. Place this chair, if you please, be- hind the ste. for me. 15. li Charles is not ready, we shall go (reifen) without him to Germany. ORAL EXERCISE XV. w^uT ^'l'^ ^^' ^"'"^ ^'^ ^"^ ^'^ Universitat schicken .^ 2. Weshalb hat die Mutter die Doktoren gehoit.? 3 Was lernten die Studenten von den Professoren .? 4. Werden Sie ohne mich nach Chicago reisen } 5. Wo reiste der Koni^ der Niederlande .? 6. Wann werden die Kirchen offen seint ^6. SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON B. ANOMALIES OF DECLENSION. Substantives without Pt^ural. The following classes of substantives are uscl in the singular only • like'^^Ze^^^^"' unless they denote a class (as: bie r^Vlfade, painters ^etnn(i)e, the first four Henries, i. e., kings of that name). ^ /' / S8 SUPPLEMENTARV LESSON B. t§§6fr- ^-' 2. Names of materials, etc., unless they denote different kinds of the same material (as : ©vafcv, Salsc different kinds of grass, salt), or when they have a special meaning (as : @c(ber, . urns of money; ^^3npiere, docu- ments). 3. Abstract Substantives, unless they have a concrete {particular) meaning, as: Iiujeiibcn, virtues; ®d)i)nl)ritni, beauties, etc. Note.— Many nouns of this sort, when used in a coiicrete sense, use the plurals of other words, generally compound, as: ber Sob, death ; bi? SobeSfaHe, deaths (i. e. case* of death). A list of these is given in App. H. For the plural of nouns of measure, etc., see Less. XXX. 67. Substantives without Singular. The following classes of substantives are used in the plural only: 1. Names of certain diseases: Die S8(attevn, the small-pox; bie Spfiolern or ;)?otcln, the measles, 2. The following names of festivals, etc.: 2Bci{)nad)ten, Christmas, gaftcii, Lent; Ofteni, Easter; ^in'i»flften, Pentecost (Whitsuntide). 3. Those plural by meaning, viz.: Stlpcii, Alps; Seiuf (fiber, trou- sers; 33ricffd)aftcn, documents; (Siufiliifte, income, revenae; eitcrit, parens; ^crien, holidays; ©Ucbmofieit, limbs; .^)cfcn, dregs, yeast;' Soften, Uiitoftcu, expenses ; ?eute, people ; 3JZo(fcn, curds. 68. Irregular Compounds, i. Substantives having -manit as the last component form the plural: (a) Regularly, when denoting male individuals or occupations, as: (Sliemiiimer, husbands; (Sf)renm6nner, men of honour; @taat«imomicr, statesmen. (b) By changing -mnnit into -leuU, when used collectively or in a general sense, or to include both sexes, as: ^rbeitjilcutc, working-people; (Sljclcute, married people; ApaubckMcutC, trades - people ; ?anblcutf! country-people; ^ailb^lcutC, people of the same country; 9Ktet8lctttc' lodgers (male and female). ' Notes. — i. With words of common occurrence, such as «aufmonn, merchant, fiof* mann, courtier, the plur. with -leute only is used. 2. The form with -Icute is the plur. of the fem. compound with -frau (e. g. ©Befrau married woman), as well as of that with -mann. ' 2. Die 0[)innad)t, the fainting-fit, and bic iBoUmacI)t, the power-of- attorney (from a)?ad)t, pi. Win'^Xt), have the pi. ntad)tcn ; bte 2tntrt)ort, the answer (from bo^ Sort, pi. 2Bortc and ^Sorter), has pi. -en. [§§66- TOJ SUMMARY OP DECLENSION OF SUBSTANTIVES. g^ abater .odd (§,6) in the s rT ur^n;:;""'^ ^""^^ ^'^^ model, § .:, ,. no Umlaut,, Lep Cam wh ch"i ' " " ' '^^""' w^a/t in the plur. (-en). ^i^iam, which IS more commonly 2. Weak feminines are often found with th^ ^m -en, especially when used without ar"e .f! "''^ ^'"' ""^^ ^^*- '" erben, on earth (ln.taufb,rIbeonThLr iT ' P^'^^^'^^"' ««= «"f In Onaben, in mercy e c '^^ ' ^" ®^^''^'"' ^" h°"°"r of; LESSON XVI. NAMES. - PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GENITIVE 70. Summary of Declension of Substantives I. WlaUv Model (Contracted Form.) ^. Strong Declension. Sing. Nom. ■ Gen. ^ Dat. Ace. P/ur. -(n) 11. @r^n Model. (Primary Form.) Piur. III. ©orf Model. (Enlarged Form.) Sing. piur. -(c)8 — -cr — cr — cm — cr Remarks. - 1. The term ' Strong Declension ' is applicable to all the three forms given above. -^l^piicable 2. The eo^n Model is sometimes called the Primary Form of the Strong Declension, and shows the -.of Gen fti:l:: ''^ '^"^* ^''''' '''' ''' ^-^-^ ^^- ' ^^- two 90 tESSON XVI. Hi 7^ 3. By contraction dropping -c of the termination), the ^iJialcr Model, hence called also the Contracted Form of the Strong Declension ; and 4. By enlargement (adding -r in the Plur., the Sing, remain- ing the same), the ®orf Model, hence also called the En- larged Form of the Strong Declension. 5. Feminines remain unchanged in the Sing. 6. The Umlaut may occur in any of these forms, viz.: generally in masc. monosyllables, regularly in feminines and in Enlarged Form ; never in neuter monosyllables of Primary Form. (See Lists, App. A., B., C., E.) B. Weak Declension. .6ar, Dfjr Model. Sing. — ^ Plur. - -(e)n -(e)l -(e)n -(f) -(e)tt — — — (e)« A. — n —It Remarks.— i. All three follow the ^nabe Model in the Plur, 9. The gjamc Model is a Mixture of the'^Jlaler and .<{lnabe models in the Sing., usually taking -g in the Gen., sometimes -n in the Nom. ■tit 7»J DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 9' ^J^ The 3tai,bax Model follows the min Model in the 4. The 0{,t Model follows the Sobn Model in the Sing s.a";e?;e .'^"^"'^' "'"' '"' '^^ °-'--n oi a Sub The Nominative Singular, The Genitive Singular, and The Nominative Plural roitdtr ihf :L:t^ — ^irr °' *^ "-- -- "« following: ' '^ """ ''ssistance of the Remakks.-,, All Feminines are unchanged in the Sing, the Weak Declension (.ft„„Oe, ®r«f and «.u,e n^ocie^ .e^w?a:?;e:i;Sri::^^;:uS^"""- ^--' '» 4- The Nom., Gen. and Arr Pi,,.. cu. ana acc. Plur. are a/ways alike. 5. The Dat. Plur. a/wajys ends in -n. (Djlinelhefollo vvjng substantives thrn.o-h^,ft . Declension of Proper Names. T2. Geographical Proper Names; I. If «^zrr used without an article, etc. (see ^ aa \ •ieclmed like common nouns, as : ber^Jific m g JVi 'V^'' ending :i;TTi: "tt f' ':■ '''-'-^ ^^^^ ^^^^ -^' - ng except -| m the Gen. Sing, (unless they end in a 9^ LESSON xvr. 74 sibilant), as : ^eutfcftf :inb, Germany, g. ^cutfc^Ianbg ; ^vanU rcid), France, g. ?vran!rdcIiS ; 9tom, Rome, g. ^Homg. 3. If they end in a sibilant (g, \^, J, J, y), the Gen. is replaced by the preposition tioit, as: Die Sefeftigungen Han part's?', the fortifications of Paris. 4. %^\\ may replace the Gen. with other names also, and is always used after titles, as : ^ie 5lbnigiu Don Gncilanb, the Queen of England ; ber SBilrgcnneifter bott Toronto, the Mayor of Toronto. 5. When the Name of a Place is preceded by a common noun, they are in apposition to each other, but the proper name is not inflected, as : %\»^}\ Sons bon), the City of London, g. ber StabtSonbon. Da^ ^bnigreic^ ^reu^Ctt, the Kingdom of Pru'ssia, g. beg ^bnigreic6§ ^reu^en. 6. Proper Names of Places are not used in the Plural. 73. Proper Names of Persons are now inflected in the Gen. Sing, only, as follows : I. If preceded by an article, etc. (which shows the case) they remain unchanged, as : The letters of Cicero, bie -Bncfe bc0 ©iccro. --/^ 2. If not preceded by an article showing case, etc., those ending in a sibilant, and Feminines in -c, add -(e)n§ in the Gen. ; all others add -§ only, as : 3)lay, G. 33ia£Cn8 ; Souifc, G. £Dui[c;i3 ; ^arl, g. ^axU. Remark. — Surnames and classical names in a sibilant now commonly take an apostrophe instead of -en8, as: Dpi^' JBcvfe, Opitz's works. 74. Family Names are used in the Plural with added -8, as in English, but without article, as : the Schmidts, 6c^mibt^ (meaning the members of the Schmidt family). Further Remarks on the Declension of Proper Names and of Foreign' Substantives will be found in Supp. Less. C, below. 7S] PREPOSITIONS GOVERNING THE GFNITIVE, 03 75. Prepositions Governing the Genitive. ^' "^^^^^ "" ir' 1. »flei;, on account of, on behalf of, for the^'f of- t<^. (sometimes >/^z£/j its case), as : I remained at home on ^ ' account of (for the sake of) my child, (mcgctt mcim ^mbrii). NoTE.-533e0cn always /o//ows the Gen. of the Pers. Prons which are then written in one word with the preposition, and have special forms ending in -t, as: meiuclniqini, for my sake; il)n1uir{irn, for her (their) sake; unfcvhucflcn, for our sake, etc.; also with the Relative and Denionstr. ttr '. bm(ii)(iucgen (Sing. Fern, and Plur. = 'for the sake of whom, which, that,' etc.). 2- ^totb, during, as: We went out walking during the rain (ma^rcitb beg Siegeng). 3' ^MJi, or anftatt instead of, as : He will come instead of his friend (ftntt, or oilftott |einc0 au[e. i;. ^^hvj ift bcr ^Jiame bes; 93iivger= meiftcr^:^ uon i'onbon? 7. tUicin %ier f?at mi? 2effing^ !;liserfe unb .f)cinc0 ^icber jum (ik'burtetiig gefcbcntt. 8. 3(uf mciner SHcifc befudUc id; bie ©tiibtc 9onbon, ^ari^, Berlin unb ^Kom. 9. Tie ?^-liiffc (SanabivJ finb giof^, aber bie ^-tiiffe Wried)cnlanb^ finb tlcin unb furj. 10. 2Bir lucrbcn bie 'i3hunen fiir So))t>ie auf J^ 2:ifa)^ ftcacn.. 11. ?yviebvidH3 Dhittcr fdicnft ibm j^fopftod^ 9BcHe^~Tenn beute ift fein (^K'burtetag. 12. T)a^ 2Baffei be^ 8anct Sovenj ift f'lar, aber ba^ Ul^iffcr bcr 2i)m\i ift trub'' 13. 2|uifc, bole '3opl;ic unb ©lifabctt) unb Juir lucrbcn eincn S^^ajievs gang iin Slsaltie madicn. 14. ^^irfer 8c^^otte rebet uiel oon Bumps' ©ebicbten. 15. abrenb ber ^cftlic^fciten fc^r fcfion. 11. SBe^o^alb ftubieren 3ie bie 9ieben beC^ Tcmoftfienc^? 18. 2lm -yrcitacj ober Sonnabcn^ mcrbcn \v\x nacf) i^ingfton reifen urn 2|uifc unb 'OJtargarcte ju befud)en. 19. ©eorg ift je^t bei feinon !i>ctter ?>'rit^ auf Befud;. 20. 2(m Sonntag h>aren toir megen bc<^ Sturmcs §u .s^aufc. 21. ^d; ^abe in ber ®d;iueij nic^t biel ii?ergniigen gcbabt, lueil id; auf ber ^lieife Iran! luar. B. 1. Chg.rle3, bring Freddy and Max, and we shall play in the garden., 2. We have looked for Wiiiiam's book every- where, 3. The stjeets of Paris are wide and beautiful. 4. ^ / / A Tfl] DECLENSION OF PROPER NAMES. 95 Who has bought these gloves for Emma? 5. The city of Ottawa is the capital oi Canada. 6. We live in Canada, but our parents live in Germany. 7. We have presented flowers to Ehzabeth and Mary. 8. You have Goethe's woH^ThT your library. 9. I bought Schiller's Wil/iaw Tell at (bci) a bookselT^s in Hamilton. 10. We learn in this book the names of the gods of the Romans. 11. Ti,e Schmidts visited us yesterday. 12. What is the cafiit^l of Switzerland.? 13 My father sent me instead of Max, because Ma.v was too tired' 14. Ihe city of Berlin is the capital of the kingdom oi Prussia. 15. Would you be happy, if yo. were rich ? ORAL EXERCISE XVI. 1. Wer ist Konig vci Preussen .? 2. Wo wr.r Saras Cou- sine.> 3. W^as hat Ihr Vater Ihnen ;:um Geburtstag ge- schenkt } 4. SJnd die Strassen Torontos immer schon ? 5 Weshalb waren wir am Sonntag zu Hause .? 6. Was i-',t die Hauptstadt Canadas ? ~"^ 76. SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C. PROPER NAMES. -FOREIGN SUBSTANTIVES. Further Remarks on Declension of Proper Names. 1. Proper name, of towns, governed by a preposition in the genitive do not take -%, as : iiniueit A>n,„burg, not far from Hamburg 2. N..mes of persons, even if preceded by an article, etc., take -0 in 3- Feminine names frequently take -(e)ll in the dat. and ace, especialh If they end in -t, as : tm\% d. a. l^ouifoH. ^ 4. Family names (and even Christian names) formerly added -(f)n in the dat. and ace, and are usually so found in the classics, as: ®octl)P, n. A. @oct()ei! ®rf)iacr, " ®d)iUcrii tar(, » ^(n.|„ ?effi"0, " ?effinge« iN OTE. - This inflection is now obsolete and not to be imitated. yi-i.-UA g6 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON C [§§76' 5. In the case of proper names in the genitive, preceded by a common noun as title : (a) If the governing word fol/ovjs, the proper name takes the ,'enitive ending, the title remaining undeclined and having no article, as: itijilig ^eini'iri)d ^i)I)nr, King Henry's sons. {li) If the governing word precedes, the title has the article and the genitive ending, the proper name remaining undeclined, as: bie So()ne NoTK. — Tlie title Jpcvr takes n in the genitive in both these cases, as: ^errit ©cfimibtfl .fiaiiS, or bass ^ou9 bc3 .i^errn (5cf)mibt. 6. In the case of a Christian name without article, connected with a family name ■)receded by Hon (indicating noble rank) : (a) Wlu-n the governing wo. d follows, the family name only is de- clined, as : J^vicbrirf) uoii >2rf)illcvg ©cbirfjtc. {l>) When the governing word precedes, only the Christian name is declined, as: Xic C'')i-btd)tc j^i-icbvtri)g uon >2d)iUer. 7. The names of the Saviour, SriiiS (Il)viftii?, usually both follow the Latin declension, thus: n. 3cfitg ei)ii|tu?, g. 3efii C£l)rifti, D. 3efu (Sdrifto, A. 3efum (Sl)riftuiii, Voc. -si'fu e()viftc. NoTU. — Other biblical names, if without article, also follow the Latin inflection, espe- cially in the gen,, as : 1>m Gunii,]eltuiit St. iDiattt^cit, the Gospel of St. Matthew. 77. Declension of Foreign Substantives. 1. Most foreign substantives fol low one or other of the regular form& of declension, all feniinines being weak. 2. Most masculines and neuters from the Latin, ending in -u8, have the classical i)lural, but with no case-inflection in either number, as-, bev yjfobU?, the mood: N.ci.n.A. Sing. ifJiobua, Plur. iWobi ; bei imi, the case: n.r.. \^. k. Sing. ^"nmcn, Oa(< iUduieial , the Notes. - i. These words formerly followed the full form.; nf T ,f;„ a i • matican^rr.. (e. g. «crO„m, etc.) retaining these forms ^if ^''" '"'^"^""' ^^^'«- guageftr^'n. th' ""'"^^ °' "''"* '^^^^^'"^^•■"" ^-- --^- lan- guages take -i m the gen. «,ng, and add -^ to form the piur as • PnrhS Note. - Italian words are also found with their proper foreign plur., as Soli, (JontJ. 78. The Article v/ith Names of Per.sons. Besides the cases specified in ^ 7^ i nhnv^ fK« • , • names of person.s : ^^' ' '^'' '^' ^•'^'^'^ '^ "^''"^ ^^^h I. Colloquially ^x,A familiarly, as: ilcr itillt btC l\niif(> ' ^_^2. Jhen they denote a ./..., as: ein il^eUi„flton, a j.^^W/^,) Wel- 3- Before names of paintings, etc., named from a pers., etc as- em W'oj^ir"^ ^<) Rafae, ,. .e.u. .u ^^, thL (^J ^^ LESSON XVII. G€NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. - INtT^CATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 7a The Gender of Substantives is determined in German : r. by Meaning; or n. by Form (Ending, etc.). 80^ I. Gender a,s dethrmined bv Meaning. I. Masculine are names of : Sa) Males, as : bcr %\^m, the man ; bcr ^elb, the hero. I 98 LESSON XVII. [§§80 rii Remark : But diminutives in -j^cn and -Icitt are neuter, as : bail 9}?annlein or ^.Itdnnd^en. ,(^) Seasons, months and days, as: ber .^erbft, the autumn; ber ^anuar, January ; bcr ^Jiittirodi, Wednesday. (c) Poi7its of the cofnpass, as: bcr 5?Drb(en), the north. (^) Precious stones and mountaifis, as ; bcr 2)tamant, the diamond ; bcr 33rodfen, the Brocken. 2. Feminine are names of : -{a) Females, as: bic %xa\x, the woman; bic ^^cd^ter, the daughter. Remark : But ba§ SBeib, the woman, is neuter ; also diminu- tives in -r^cit and -fcill, as: bag ^orf)terrf)en, the h.^tle daughter; baS 5!)idbchen, the girl; bag l^rduldn, the young lady. (J)) Trees, plants, fruits -^wdi flowers generally, as : bic @id)t>, the oak ; bic 'Jfcffel, the nettle ; tic 33irne, the pear (but bct 3().>fcl, the, apple); bic 3iofe, the rose. if) Cardinal Numerals used as substantives, as : blc (Sir.§, the (number or figure) one ; bic Sed;^, the six (at dice, etc.). 3. Neuter are names of : {a) Metals almost always, as : bag 33Iei, lead; bag @ifen, iron. Note.— %tx 3ta()(, steel, is Masc. (/;) Collectives almost always, as : bag S^^ol!, the people ; bag .'peer, the army ; especially when beginning with @c-, as : bag ©ebircje, the mountain-chain. {c) Countries and provinces almost always, as : (bag) ©uro^a, Europe ; (bag) (Sanaba ; islands, cities, towns, villages, etc., always, as : (bag) .^pamburc^ ; (bag) ^Ttom, Rome. Remarks. — i. Names of countries and provinces in -ci, -au and -5 are feminine, as ; bic ^J'iirfd, Turkey ; bic Scpitjcij, Switzerland. 82] INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. 99 2. Names of countries, etc., when not neuter, always have the definite article (see § 44, 3). {d) Infinitives, letters of the alphabet, and other parts of speech (except Adjectives used of persons, and Cardinal Numerals; see 2, c, above), used as Substantives, as- bag Sacben, the (act of) laughing; bag %, the (letter) A; \su ^c^ the I; bag i5]emi unb "^^i IVotx, (the) 'if and (the) 'but.' Give the gender of the following Substantives, assigning the rule in each case: %^xx[, (S^oib, Gvbbt'orr, Soditci, Giiropa, m^, I'onbdn, lura ati.bui (mby), 2BaUad)ei (Wallachia), Uurciljt, ^iiben (South), ©efb' 81. Interrogative Pronouns and Adjectives. The Interrogative Pronouns are : 1. loclt^cr? which?— Defjni IE. 2. mcr? who.? ; 3. ttia§r»what?i— ^^^'^™^^- 82. aOcIr^cy? is declined after the biefer Model, but, as Profioun, lacks the Gen., thus : ' ' Singular. FEM. NEUTER. Joerrf;c tuelcf;cg MASC. Nom. iuc(rf)cr Gen. Dat. lueld^cm Ace. Jucldicn Plural. ALL GENDERS. ti'cld;c, which Jt)eld)cr lycld)cm iueldicn, (;(o,for)which iueld;c Joeld^cg ioelcf^c, which Remarks.- I. ^V'ldier ? asks 'which of a number?' of persons or things, and agrees in gender with the noun follow- ing it, as : iK>eId;cr toon bicfen SKauucrit iff f)ier gemefen ? Which of these men has been here .? aScIc^cg i)on biefeu ©iit^crn I^abcn Sie ge^abt ? Which of these books have voii had.? I ICX) LESSON XVII. [§§8a- 2. The neuter sing. tuelc^CS is used before the verb 'to be,' irrespectively of the gender or number of the subject (com- pare the similar use of es, § 39, i), as : Which is your sister (brother)? illkld)cg i[t '^bxi '3d;it)eftev (^^r Sruber) ? Which are the children of the count? ^r5}eld;c§ finb bie llinbeu bc§ G)rafen ? 83. Jfi^cr ? and lua£l ? are used in the Sing, only, and are declined as follows : MASC. AND FEM. NEUTER. Nom. luev, who? iua^3, what? Gen. lyef)o« (or iuco), whose, of iuc[feu (or n)e§), of whom ' what Dat. tvem, (to, for) whom — -^ Ace. luen, whom h.ia^3, what Remarks. — i. 9Bcr is used of persons only, for all gen- ders and both numbers, as: S/ng. M. aiHT ift biefer 9Wonn? f. jene Jprnu? n. biefe^ ^inti? F/ur. iBer finb bicfe 9Kliiincr? etc. 2. 9Bo^ is not used of persons. 3. 2Bo§ is never used in the Dative. In the Dat. or Ace. with prepositions, ti)a<§ is replaced by mo (luor before vowels), placed />e/(?/r the preposition (compare § 38, Rem. 5, for similar use of b(l), as : 3Borauf fi|cn [§§8a- b'tobe,' ect (coni- , and are R. ? n)e§), of r all gen- ;. or Ace. 5 vowels), m. 5, for tting ? peaking ? in. ed before account, as above. 86j. INTERROGATIVE PRONOUNS AND ADJECTIVES. lOt 6. gBttg is sometimes used (as interrog. ^rt'z'.)for tcarum, why? (For the use of iimg for ettoa^, see under ettoa^, § 149, /.) 84. The Interrogative Adjectives are : 1. ttJcli^cr, toefr^c, mit^t^? which? what ? — Definite. ,^2. ma fiir cin, tou fur cine, ttiog fur cin ? j what kind of " J'Jur.tOa&^UV? \ -INDEFINITE. 85. JHJcrr^cr, as Interrogative Adjective, follows the biefer Model throughout, as : Singular. FEM. NEUTER. h)e(d;er h)elcf;e^ lDeld;cr ioeld^em hJeIrf)e tt>e(c^e^ Examples : Which man was here ? 9!BeIi^cr gjknn tear ^ier ? What books have you "i JKScIi^c i^ucf;er ^a6cn (2ie ? Remarks. — I. ^BelrfnT is also used in exclamatory sen- tcnces (= what!), sometimes without termination, as : Jfi>cl(^(i'6) Iscriptiiflen ! What pleasure ! 2. The stem treld; is also followed by ein, and is unin- flected, as: 2Bclr^ cin Sturtn ! What a storm ! 86. In declining tt)a§ fur eiu, JtJa^ remams unchanged, while ciu agrees with the substantive, ><; : N. M. 9Ba6 fiir cin C^ut ? a. 2Ba^ fiir emeu .§ut? What kind of (a) hat ? D. 2Ba§ far eiuem ^^\xi ? To what kind of a hat ? MASC. Nom. ioeldjer Gen. h)e(d;e^ Dat. h)eld)em Ace. h)eld;en Plural, ALL GENDERS. tt)eld;c, which tt)eld)er, of which toeldKu, (to, for which) hjelc^e, which 102 LESSON XVII. 8^ G. F. 2Ba6 fiir eincr 33Iume ? Of what kind of (a) flower, etc. In the Plur. ftiog fiir is used without article, as : N. A. gSaS fur ^inber ? What kind (sort) of children ? D. Ja>o^ fur mnbcru ? To what kind of children ? The cin is also omitted before names of materials and other words used partitively, as : Bog fiir C^ol^ •? What kind of wood ? JK?tt§ fiir 2i? ttcr? What sort of weather ? 87. Indirect Statements. Direct Statement or Quotation : He said:' I am tired.' Indirect Statement or Quotation : He said (that) he was tired. 1. An Indirect Statement is always a subordinate rlause. 2. In Indirect Statements, the Verb is usually in the Sub- junctive (especially if the verb of the principal clause be in the Impf.), and has the same tense which it would have, if statement were made directly, as : ©ie fagten, bafi eg luabr fcl (i.e., fie fagten: „^% ifl ira^r/- pres:), They said that it was true. @r anth)prtete, bafi ev geftern angefommen fei (i. e., er anth)or= iiiz : „"scf) bin gefteru angefonimen/'/^^-), He answered, that he had arrived yesterday. Note. — In English, on the other hand, a past tense is always fol- lowed by a past tense, as in the above examples. 3. The conjunction bcfj may be omitted in such clauses, which then have the construction of a principal sentence (i. e., verb in second place), as : ©r fagte, cr fci geftern angefomtrten. 68] INDIRECT STATEMENTS AND QUESTIONS, lOj 88. Indirf.ct Questions. Direct Question : Who is there ? Indirect Question ; He asked who was there ? 1. In Indirect (or Dependent) Questions the con- struction IS that of a dependent clause (verb last). 2. If the verb of the principal sentence be in the Impf that of the question will be in the subjunctive, and have the same tense which it would have in the direct question, as : Sagen Sie mir gefariigft, luo jcner .^crr iuof;nt (Dir Qu • 2Bo U)of)nt jener .t)err?/;ri-.), Tell me, if you please where that gentleman lives ? ' er fragtc mid;, \oMm Mm biefcit .sperrcu mein 33ruber ict He asked me which of those gentlemen was my brother '(Dir Qu. : Seld;er, etc., ift %\jx 33ruber .? pres.) VCCABULARY. V The article will be supplied by the pupil, according to preceding rules, where not given. to use, braud^en march, marfd^ieren save, retten answering, b— 2(ntit)orten paying, b— ^e3af)Ien jewel, precious stone, b— ©belftein asking (of questions), b— ?^ragen Italy, ^talten fire-place, b— ^amin' elm, b— Ulme blue, Diau light, easy, leic^t useful, nii^Itd^ buying, b- • 7 ^adlibill''' I !" ^^^ "corning, moriieng or bc^ 9J?orgen§ force. ) ill the afternoon, nadjmittaije^ or be§ Oiarfimitiagg The Cardina' Points of the Compass (= bie bier §immelg= gcgenbcn): North, (bcr) ^Jiorben; Soutli, (bcr) eiiben ; East, (ber) Often ; West, (bev) iBeften. Names of the Months : ber S«nuar, ber ^ebruar, ber SKarj, ber 2(prir, ber max, ber ^u'ni, ber ."su'Ii, ber 3tuguft', ber ©e^* •j tember, ber Dttober, ber 9iobember, bcr Tejeniber. Idiom : I saved his life, lit. I saved to or for lilm the life, 3* rcttcte < I) III ta» i'cbc ii. See § 44, 6 (A). EXERCISE XVII, A. 1. 2Ber ^ai ba§ iBilb t>Du meinem ^JZeffen iiber ba€ ^amin geljcingt? 2. 3Ba^ fur eineii ^ifr^ l)at '^^oham auf bem 9Jiar!te gcfauft ? 3. 2(uf luelc^e ^an! lucvbcn toir xuvi fe^en ? 4. 28el= c^em 5lnaben ge^brt bicfe^S Wkf]cv ? G^5 gebi)rt iiBitbelm. 5. ^eneg 3)iabdieu auf ber ©trafse ift ba^3 T:brf;terdH'n unfere^ 9iac§bar§. 6. i\?a^ mad;en 6ie {jcinbbniid), tDenn Sie einen ^eiertag fiaben? 7. 2)e<^ gjJorgen^:^ ftubierc id>, unb be§ ^Radnnittag^ rubre ic^ auf bem ^luffe. 8. iBUcf^e^ finb bie Xiamen ber fieben ^Tage ber 2Bod)e? 5!Kontag, u. f. iu. 9. 3Bem fdjideu ©ie biefen Srief? 10. 3d; fd;ide i(;n bem Sucbbaubler. 11. SSorilber ^aben bie .^errcu gclad;t ? 13. Jl^ev ift bie Jrau mhcn meiner Sfante auf bcr l^anU 13. Sfia^S fiir 5(ugen l;at ber ©tubent? ©eine STugen finb blau. 14. 3Sorau§ mac^eu unr©d)iffe? 9Bir mac^en fie au§ eifen unb 2ta^l 15. ^^'arl ift mit bem Semen feiner 2tuf= gabe nidjt fertig. 16. Borauf Ijabcn bie ed;uler fic^ gefe^t? eie ^aben fi^) auf bie Sriide gefe^t. 17. 2Bag fiir ©belfteine l)ahm eie ba ? 18. ^d; haU einen ^iamaut(en), einen 9^ubin, unb einen ©maragb. 19. ®a§ §eer ift bon ^ranfreic^ nac^ ^talien marfc^iert. 20. 5fJa^)Dleon fd)idte bem ©rafen einen 2)ias mant(en), lyeit ber ©raf ibm bag ^zh^n gerettet batte. £. 1. Which of your sisters are learning German ? 2. For whom is this diamond ? It is for the countess. 3. Which 8^ GENDER OF SUBSTANTIVES. 105 are your pens ? 4. The asking of questions is verv easy, but the answering is very difficult. ^S.^The north, the'south, the east, and the west are the tour cardinal points of the compass. 6. Which of these students is Mr. Braun .? Z f heXoy buys himself pears and plums in the market. 8. My uncle has ^ three children- a girl and two boys. 9. June, July, and' .> August are very hot in Canada. 10. Buying is pleasant, but paying is very disagreeable. 11. Iron and steel are 'very useful. \% The rose and the Hly are flowers, but the oak and the elm are trees. IH. I blame Mary because she wastes her m^ney. 14. What would you do with your money, if you were rich? 15. We always hoped that William would learn / German. ORAL EXERCISE XVII. 1. Wo hangt das Bild von Ihrem Neffen .? 2. Wer ist das Mn.dchen vor unserm Hause .? 3. Weshalb schickte der K6n:g dem Burgermeister einen Diamant(en).? 4. Was fur Augen hat der Student.? 5, 1st das Fragen leicht.? 6. Was wurden Sie machen, wenn Sie einen Feiertag hatten ? LESSON XVIII. QE-NDER OF SUBSTANTIVES (concluded).- GENERAL REMARKS. -DOUBLE GENDER. 89. Gender of Substantives as determined by Form. I. Masculine are : (a) Substantives in -irj, -ig, -ing, -m, almost always, as : ber iiranir^, the crane ; bcr ^onig, the honey ; bcr ^yrembHng, the stranger ; bcr ^tem, the breath. (p) Those in -c{, en (not infinitives), -er, generally \ (names of agents in -c 8 Iways^ , SiJffer, io6 LESSON XV III. 8g- ■ the spoon ; bcr (iJarteil, the garden ; ttt ©drtner, the gardener. (^) Monosyllables — generally (^but with many excej> tions), as : bcr ^rieg, the war; ber %^<^, the day, etc. 2. Feminine are : {a) Substantives in -fi, -\t\i, ^fclt, -^aft -m% Axi, ahuays, as : bie €)rf)meic^elci, flattery ; bie Scions |cit, beauty; bit ^anfbarfctt, gratitude; bte greunbfi^aft friendship ; bie .•ooffnung, hope; bie (S^rafin, the countess ; bie ^reunbiu, the (female) friend. Note. The termination in is used to fomi feminine names from masculines, usually with Umlaut, always so in monosyllables. ib) Those in -t (especially after a consonant), -enb, generally, as : bte Sltaft, strength ; bte 3ufunft, the future ; bte ^ugeitb, virtue. {c) Those in -e, generally (but with many exceptions), as : bie .^ol;e, height ; bie (SJrb^e, size. {d) Some in -nifil (see also under neuters), as: bie 3Silbni8, the wilderness. ie) Foreign Substantives in -age, -ie (French); -if (Greek); -citj, -tiit, -(t)iott, -ur (Lat.), always as : bie Gouroge, courage ; bie ^JJelobie', the melody ; bie gjiufif, music; bie ^lubieitg', the audience; bte UniDerfitiit', the university ; bie SiZation', the nation ; bie '^cXViX' , nature. 3. Neuter are : (a) Substantives in -i^cit and -letn (diminutives), al- ways (without regard to sex\ as : bai 5[)?annJejn, bag %xi\x\wx, bal aJliib^en. H GENERAL REMAKK3 ON GENDER. lo; (p) Those in -turn, almost always, as : bad Gfriftcnhim, Christendom, Christianity. (c) Those in -nig, -fol, -fcf, generally, as : bag GrefgniS, the event ; bal 3c^icffar, fate, destiny ; bag mu \t\, the riddle. (d) Those beginning with the prefix @c- unless other- wise determined by meaning, termination, or derivation, as: bad OJciiuilbc, the painting; bag @cmad>, the npartment; but: bcr Gebattcr, the godfather ; bic OjcDatteviii, the godmother; bte ©efea|(^aft the company; bcr ©edrnm^, the usage (from bcr ^xawd), masc. monosyll.). Give the gender of the following substantives, assigning the rule in each case: il^ciUDcu, .^>iit, itifdjo, itilnftlcr, ^'aiiMdjaft, tiffin (vinegar), «(innc 0)rld,enf, ^iiuiblei::, ^hmhxx% ^iird)t, .^nfcn, ©eimtter, finger, Slpfel, ^orb, Uuiocrfitnt', SIftrolog, £eppid|, ^^^(jilofop^ie. 90. General Remarks on Gender. 1. Gender agrees, as in English, with sex, except in bag ai^eib, in Diminutives in -j^cn and -kin, and in certain compounds (see below). 2. Inanimate objects, which in English are all alike neu ter, may be of any gender in German, as determined by Meaning or Form, as : bcr §ut, bic 33(ume, bag ^ud^. 3. Each substantive of which the gender is not determined by the n-les should be learnt with the Definite ^^rticle as the sign of its gender. 4. Compounds are of the gender of the last component bic ipeibe, heath ) bcr ©d)ilb, shield bag Sd;ilb, sign (of an inn, etc.) 6c^ilbcr bcr <2ee, lake bic ©ee, sea bcr l^or, fool, G. be^ 3:^oren Z^oxtn bad Z^ox, gate, G. be8 ^^orc8 zifoxt ] Plural. S3anbc S3onber \ See § 64, above. Sanbe Sauern SBaucr ^eibe.i ©c^ilbc ©ccen Vocabulary. (The pupil will supply the article in German where not given.) to visit, study (at a univer- sity), befucften {-\- Ace.) collect, gather, fammeij! peasant, country-man nv^^^^ 93auer bee, b^ 33iene relate, tell, crjafjten paint, tnalen (female) neighbour, b4f9^cici^! barin - ,A \ bedroom, b — Scblofjimtner ' '1 '-• •/■■ :Hjb'i' e ^ T ^ pi m its ^o DOUBLE GENDER. loy little^son, b6K,@5t).t(^en sun, b — Sonne city-gate, town-gate, b — (Stabtt^or ingratitude, b— Unbanfbarfeit way, road, b - SBeg wind, b— 3Kinb rage, fury, bic ^vX sign, ba«( 3fif^«" terrible, terribly, furc^tcrlid^ strong (^heavily, of rain, etc.), ftvxrf willingly, with pleasure, gem # boat, bfl« 59oot friendship, b-^C. ^rcunbfd^aft inn, b— (SSafthau« district, locality, b— ©e'genb history, story, b— 0e[c{)id;te waiter, b— .^cUner piaro, ba^ ^laoier' vice, ba^ Cafter ksson, b— Settion' people, bie I'eute (pi.) love, b~ fiicbe mathematics, b— !0?at^ematif (sing.) so, fo 8. A week ajfo to-day, ^f ute » p r a d) t lafjeii (Dat.).' 3. A week from to-day, ^eute ii b e r ad)t %a^t (Ace). EXERCISE XVIIL A. 1. D^ne (bie) ^rcunbfc^aft, (bie) i)offmmg unb (bie) SieBe iDuvbe bag Scbeu fcl^r traurig fein. 2. Unfere ^l^ettcrn luareu ^eute Dov acTit 3:agen bei ung. 3. (I)ic) erf^meid^elei i[t fcin ^eic^eu ber ^rcunbfdiaft. 4. Si(f)elm, >xm beine geftion. 5. Sag fur 33anbe ftnb auf bem 2:ifc^e in ^l;rer SBibtiotbef ? 6. (gg finb funf S3anbe bon Sdjifferg 2Berfen. 7. Tie 2But beg ©turmeg ift furd)terlic^, aber bag Sdnff ift [d)on im ^-^afen. 8. Sernt %hx timber gcrn 9Jiathematif ? ??ein, aber er lernt gem 2)eutfc^ 9. 2BeId;em gjidbc^^en gel^orm biefe 9iinge, ber mo^m ober ber ©ara ? 10. Tie Tantbarfcit ift etne ^Tugenb, aber bie Unbaitf6ar= feit tfi em 2after. 11. ^avl ed>mibt befuc^^t im Sinter bie Uni* berfitat, aber im ©oinmer JDof^nt ec bei feinen ettern auf bem Sanbe. 12. ^eneg ^raufein \)Am;* k.u^ ...c-:.w... la res' f ~ e^ <1 r ^ ' '"' ^' ' "■■•""" [vy* 5u[ntv?;u. irf. 3)ic[e §anbfc^u^e ge(;oren nidU mir, fie gc^dren metnem ^ / /f no oun^ m meaning, and include the antecedent, as : aBcr nic^t ^oren Jt)iIT, mu^ fU^ren, (He) 'who will not hear, must feel. 99Bag td^ ^f)nen gefc^irft ^abe, i[t nicbt biel What (= that which) I have sent you, is not much. 4. afier never has an antecedent, since it includes the ante- cedent itself ; therefore never say : ^er mam, tott i)kx toar, but: ®er mann, merrier ^ter War, (The man who was here). 5. 99B0§ never has an antecedent, unless the antecedent be a neuter adjective or pronoun, such as nic^t§, nothing • ctm^ somethmg; aUc^ everything , or a phrase, in which ca.es h,al always replaces bcl, as : Nothing (that) I say, etc., md)t§, toa§ ic^ [age, etc. All (that) I have, etc, 2[ae^, tnol id; ^aBe, etc. The best (that) I have, etc., Xa^ ^efte, lt,a0 id) ^abc, etc. He does not learn his lessons, which (i. e. ' the not tOttl fe^r [c6abe tft. 6. Ever = 0U($ or immcr after Joer or t»a§, as : 9Ser eg aur^ (immcr) gefagt ^at, Whoever has said it. 7. The Relative loag, like the Interrogative, is not used after prepositions in the Dative or Accusative but is re placed in the same way by ma(r); with prepositions governing the Genitive, ltic0 is used (see § 83, 3, above). Observe. - The re/afive must never be omitted in German as It so frequently Is in English, hence : ' {Engl.) The man I met, {Germ.) ^er 3Kann, mclr^cm (bem) id^ Bcgegnete r: 114 LESSON XIX. [§§97- ; sn E! < j 97. ^edgleti^cn and hergletf^en are indeclinable words, the former referring to a masc. or neuter noun in the sing., the latter to fera. or plural nouns, as : @in 9)iann, bc§gleicf)en (dat.) id; nie begegnetc, • A man, the like of whom I never met. ^aben i3ie jcmal^ bc§gleic^en getjbrt ? Have you ever heard the like of that ? Gtne^rau, bcrgleid;en, etc., A woman, the like of v.hom, etc. ^inber, bcrgleic^en, etc., Children, the like of whom, etc. 98. Construction of Relative Sentences. I. Every relative sentence is of course a dependent sen« tence, and as such must have the verb at the end, as : The wine, which I have sent you, is very good. ^er 2>]ein, bcu id) J^bneu gcfr^irft ^abc, ift febr gut. 3. The Relative must immediately follow its antecedent, when the latter (whether subject or not) precedes the verb of a principal sentence, or when the separation from the ante- cedent would cause any ambiguity, as : !Dcr W\.a^ 33uc^ ntd)t gcbraud)t, ivel^eg u. «. t». 3. In sentences with tuer or n.>o§, the relative clause will be counted as the first member of the principal sentence, which will therefore begin with the verb, e. g. : 2Bcr ni4>t f)i)rcn \x>\\\, muj fii^len, He who will not hear, must feel. Note. — In German, every dependent sentence or clause is separated from the sentence on which it depends by a comma. The relatives tt)eld)er and ber must therefore always be preceded by a comma. Ml IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. The 115 ®®- Irregular Weak Verbs. r. A Few U'eak Verbs, besides adding the termination -te to form the impf., and -t to form the P. Part., also change the Stem Vowel m the Impf. Indicative and P. Part, but not m the Impf. Subjunctive. They are : Infinitive. Brennen (intr.), to burn, be consumed with fire fennen, to know, be ac- quainted with ncnnen, to name rennen, to run (at full speed) fenben, to send tucnben, to turn Impf. Ind. Impf. Subj. £-onnte brcnnte P. Part. gebrttnnt fannte fcnnte gefannt nonnte rannte ( [onbte ( fenbcte ( tonnbte ( tDcnbcte ncnntc rennte fenbcte trcnbcte gertttunt Oevonnt I gefonbt 1 G^fenbet I geiDanbt 1 getDcnbet Observe: i. The double forms of the last two verbs of which the shorter are in more general use. 2 The three following verbs have also a consonant change witfi Umlaut in the Impf. Subj. : ^ ' Infinitive. Impf. Ind. bnitgen, to bring ^^ar^te bcnfen, to think ^^^^^ biinfcn, to seem (impers.) ( ^"^"^^^ (beud;tcn, bciud^ten) ) (t'rtud)te) I biinfte Remarks. -I. Compare the English: bring, "brought- think, thought. ^ ' 2. The forms bauc^te, gebciuc^t, are as yet more common than beucfUe, gcbcucf;t, but the latter are according to the now official orthography. Impf. Subj. bvoi^te biit^te bcuii^te (bduc^te) bunfte P. Part. gebrai^t gebor^t gebfudjt (gebaud)t) gebilnft I Ii6 LESSON XIX. [f99 -i 3. Besides the Inf. beuc^ten, there is also a Pres. Ind, 3. sing, beucijt. Note. — The German Perfect often replaces the English Past or Imperfect (see also Less. XLIII.), as : I sent you the book yesterday, 3cl) ^atc 31)ncn flcfteru bai< iyud) gcfc^irft. I was working yesterday the whole day, 3(f) ^obc gcftern beu flanseu Xag geartiettet Vocabulary. consider, bcbcnfen (trans.) acquaintance, bie33efanntfc^aft order, bespeak, beftellen postman, ber ^oftbote think of, bent'en an (+ ace.) title, ber %M or bcnfen (+ gen.) recognize, erfennen like to hear, gem fjoren divide, share, teilen burn, consume with fire (trans.), Derbrennen wish, iuiinfdfjen apply to, fid) irenben an all, everything, -JIKe^ unhappy, unfortunate, uns gliicf(id; improbable, unn)af)rf(i)einlid) just now, ibcn, foeben diligently, industriously, flei^ig easily, readily, lei^t really, loirflid; (-|- ace.) Idiom : It Is a pity, @« ifl fd)afce (adj.). EXERCISE XIX. A. 1. !I)er.^aii£r fattbte einen Sote.n mit ber gflac^ridit nad^ 33erlin. 2. 'Bcv nidjt fur mic^ ift, ift ioiber micb. 3. ®ie 2eute, bei bcnen id^ auf ^efud; getDefen bin, finb ®c&ottm. 4. §at bet tettner mu^ gebvaAt, h)aa loir braud(>en? 5. Der ^oftbote t)at mir bie 9iad)rid)t gebrad)t, loorauf id) loartete. 6. ^d) er!annte \t)ixtl\d) beu ^errn nid)t, ber gefteru luit meinem ^Setter in ber ^ird)e Wax. 7. 2)ag ^ferb be^3 C3cneral§ raunte urn ben ^reil. 8. ^er "trembling,, beffen Sefan.ntfd^aft id) tu madden tDitnfcbe^ mirb morgen l)ier fein. 9. ®a^ ^euer brannte im Dfen unb ber* II §9»] / IRREGULAR WEAK VERBS. h; brannte ba§ ^ofj. 10. $©enn er imglucflic^ mar, mrxW er ft* immer an mic^, ber ic^ fciu g^rcunb luar. 11. ^c^ barf;te Beute an bie ©efc^ic^le bie eie mir geftern erja^Itcn, unb ic^ ^abe febr baruber gelac^t. 12. §at ber Wiener bie Sucker nacf; §aufe 0ebrarf;t bie tc^ beim 33uc^f,anbler gcfauft \)aU? 13. 2«enf(6 baft bu le h,M)t^ tpa^ bu bift? 14. Wxr baben bag §0(3 fc^on t)er= brannt, bag mir bor ac()t ^agen gefauft f^aben. 15. 3)ie[eg i^inb ergalilt immer ju .f^aufe, mag eg in ber ©c^ule ^ort. 1(5 Meg joag er ^^, teilt or mit mir, ber ic^ fcin ^reunb bin. 17. 03(auben Jie bie @e[c^icf)te, bie Aperr 33raun m^S ,r,ablt Ijat? 18 ^ie ^rau, beren ^od;terc^en bei ung auf 33e[uc^ ift, mirb morgen nacb ^^Z^[7J'-\J^' ^"' ^'' "^ ^^^ ®*«^* 9^^^^-* ^«&en, ift fe^ unn)a{,rfcr;einric^. 20. @g regnete geftern, mag febr fcbabe mv ba iDir auf bem Sanbe luaren. ' ^. 1. Do you hear what I say to you ? 2. My father al- ways burnt the letters which were no longer useful 3 He has not told me what he wishes. 4. The man, in whose / hou, , we lived, is the brother of our neighbour. 5. Here is '. the ueat which you have ordered. G. The honey which the countryman brought us yesterday is not good. 7. Do you know the artist who has painted this picture? 8. People who are not industrious do not become rich. 9 We readily beheve what we hope and wish for. 10. :^hat^ were you thinkmg of when you met me yesterday ? 1]. H^ye you all you need? 12. I believe that I know the man who is in front of the house. 13. I always burn the newspapers I do not need. 14. The students to whom these books belong do not study them diligently, which is a pity. 15. I do not know the song, the title of which you have just named. 16 What was burning .? The gardener was burning leaves. ORAL EXERCISE XIX. ^ 1. Was machen Sie gewohnlich mit den Zeitungen, die Sie nicht mehr brauchen ?. 2. Wer hat Ihnen diese Nachricht us LESSON XX. [§§ioo gebracht? 3. Woran denken Sie ? 4. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie einen Feiertag haben ? ."?. Glauben Sie jede Ge- schichte, die Sie horen ? 6. Was erzahlt das Kind ? LESSON XX. DECLENSION OF ATTRIBUTIVE ADJECTIVES:- STRONG FORM. -CONJUGATION OF STRONG VERBS. 100. Declension of Attributive Adjectives. The boy is good — Predicative Adjective. The good boy — Attributive " Remember: That Adjectives used as Predicates are not varied (see § 14). 101. Every Attributive Adjective either is or is not preceded by a defertninatiire word (i. e., article or pronominal adjective), which shows gender, number and case by distinc- tive endings. 102. First Form. — If not preceded by any such deter- minative word, the Attributive Adjective follows ihe Strong Declension, which is the same as the biefer Model through' out, thus : Strong Declension of gut, good. Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS Nom. gutcr gutc gutcS gutc Gen. gutcg gutcr gutcs guicr Dat. c3utcui flutcr gutcm gutcn Ace. gutcn gute gutcg gutc toa] STRONG ADJECTIVE DECLENSION. Substantives with Adjectives. 119 Singular. Nom, Gen. Dat. Ace. MASC. good wine flitter ifi^ein fluteg (cit) 2Bein(e)^ gutcm 2Bein(e) guten 2Bein FEM, good soup 0Utc (Suppe Quter Suppe 0utcr 6uppe 0utc rcit-c, hi vcit-cft ; id; prci|-c, hi V>vci)-C[t; and in the 3. Sing. I'res. Ind., and 2. Plur. Pres. and Impf. Ind. after t, i, as. cv rcit-Ct, i^r vcit-ct, '\i)X ritt-et ; but cv vreif-t/ ^^J^ V'^cif-t. ^^)^ Vrief-t. :>.. Tlie compound tenses of a Strong; Verb are formed pre- cisely like those of a Weak Verb, some being conjugated with f^abcn, others with fcin ; hence it is only necessary to know the Inf., Impf. and P. Part., and in some cases the 2. Sing. Imper.,in order to conjugate a Strong Verb throughout. 108. Paradiom of Compound Tknses of fingClt, to sing (with hahcn) ; foOcn, to fall (with feiu). Indicative. ^ Subjunctive. Perfect. id; ^abc cjefungen, I have sung ic^ ^abi ^cfungett bu ^aft cjcfungcn, thou hast sung, etc. bu babeft gefimgen, etc. id) bin gefatten, I have (am) fallen, etc. id) fci gefalien, etc. Pluperfect. (Imperf. of { ^;.^^ ^- + P. Part, of ^ ^^^^ J ; id» f)atte gcfungen, I had sung, etc. id^ fjattc gefungen, etc. id) wor gcfatfen, I had (was) fallen, etc. id) ttjiiirc gefaffeu, etc. Future. (Pres. of luci-bcu + Infin. of | "Jjj,^ J ) tc^ tDcrbe fingen (fatten), I shall sing ic^ hjerbe fingen (fatten) (fall) bu H?irft finaen (faKen), thou wilt sing bu iuerbeft fmge*- ''fatten), (fall), etc, etc. 1 "Ol COMPOUND TKNSKS OF fillflCtl, faaCrt. 12^ Indicative. r* i> Subjunctive, Future Pkrf'ect. ' 'f'" > / fallen i J icf>^h)a-be iicfiuuien l;aben, I shall have irf. jocrbe gefungen l)ahtn bu tuirft ticfungcn hahcn, thou wilt have sung, etc. tc^ tueibc gcfaricji fciil, I shall have (be) fallen, etc. c„.„ Conditional. Simple. (Impf. Subj. of tucrbcii + Infin. of ftngen, faacii) tc^ Jourbe fingcn (faacn), I should sing (fall), etc. bu tucrbeft gefungen ^fl&cn, etc. icf; toerbe gefallcn fcin, etc. COMPOUNl\ (Simple Coad. .f \ ^f ^''" '- + P. Tart, of fiitgcn, fnl(cn) ic^ iDiirbe gefungen baben, etc. ic^ n)urbe gefairen fcin, etc. Infin. Perf. gefungen (gu) l^aben, to have sung gefaffcn ju fein, to have (be) fallen ^ 109. Compound Verbs. — Compound Verbs are con- jugated like the simple verbs from which they are derived- those having one of the insepara le particles bc-, cr- mti- ent- gc- tier-, gcr- do not take the prefix ge- in the P Part ' as : 6c-|ingen, P. Part. 6c-fungcn (compare fie-jaWen, P. Part' IlC-3af)lt, § 35, Rem. 6), .nd in the Inf. take gu /^e/ore the prefix; other compounds take the prefix ge- and the particle JU ^e/weeri the prefix and the verb (Part, or Inf. respectively). 110. The Strong Verbs are divided into classes, accorHing to the 'Ablaut, ' or Vowel-changes, of the root (see § 105 Ren above). These classes, with the verbs belonging to eacii, ar.' given m the following Lessons (XXII-XXXI). 124 LESSON XX. [Silt 111. Shorter Forms of the Conditional. The Impf. and Plupf. Subj. are frequently used in all Verbs instead of the Simple and Compound Conaitional respectively, thus: id; \)aiit = id) h)urbe ^abcn ; \(h fiinge = ic^ ti)urbe fingen ; \6) ^ttttc ^ti)aU = '\d) iDuvbc Qdjabi l;aben; ic^ ptc gcfungcn = id} iuiivbc gcfungcn Ijahm. Note. — These shorter forms are always to be preferred in the Passive Voice (Less. XXI), and in the Modal Auxiliaries (Less. XXXIV). Vocabulary. help (serve) one's self, fid; bebitnen acknowledge, confess, be!en= nen catch cold, fid) erfcilten nominate, appoint, ernennen fill, fUlkn spread out, fid) toerbveiten bough, branch, ber 2tft* ink, bie Xintc or 2:inte company, bie 0)cfcllfduaft governor, ber C'kniDerneur' concert, ^a^ .Slonjert' queen, bie ^^onigin paper, ba^ ^^a^ier' advice, counsel, ber dlai singer, ber ©anger, bie Hn|d)e 3lj"e» c5"e«« 9"*en SWorgciv). EXERCISE XX. A, 1 . ?Ii}?dn 2)ifeffcr ift t^on ciuteni^ bartem ©table, 2, .f)Dbc Saume Ijohtw, gehjb^nlic^ gro^e Ifte. 3. 2i3ag fiir ^ferbe ^oben S">1 SHORTEE FORMS OF CONDITIONAL. 125 ©ie gefauft? 3cf. f,aU td^iMtje imb toeifee !pfetbe defauft 4 9)ienf<^o, u^tma, i„ jccm §«ufe. 7. .Jaben Sie rtmniS re fantcs. 8. fpiev ift gutcr Safe unb fri *«« i ob t to Be .ene„ eie fi*. 9. 28er bu bift ,eiot beU Sefeaf* f.. " o' 12 jcf, ^nBe fluted ^Uap.er, nber meinc gebet ifl f*tec6t. 13 Jiie fl.nbcr lu'bten me.neu DnM, .„ei( er nie miibe tourbe, itmen MSne ©efd^d, en ,« ersaMen. U. Sie ^„6en e„blic| befannt, bcftS Unre4.t^«ben. 15. 3* (;a6e mid, evf«rtet; toenn i* jeV tow X: 'te?*l\'"-"- "'•• 3^ ^"^' w°" » ' '«« '^ roL ^ "'^ '■"■' '° "'"■^^■" ""f"' Se^rer «„« ^. 1. Have you black ink or red ? I have black. 2 Rich people are not always generous, and generous people a're not always nch 3. Wh.at kind^of neighbours have you ^ We have fr,endly neighbours. 4. Please fill my glass with pure fresh water. 5. High mountains and beau.Ld valleys spread out before our eyes. 6. I have something in,portant to say . This mother buys her children something useful. 9. Have you whtte paper or blue > I have white, but my brother has blue. 10. I hke to hear the singer, who sang at (in) the concert yesterday. 11 Mv si^tPr H,'^ „„► • s ^ V»V me because she was hoarse if If h T T^ u'" '""''''' she would have su„r- "• " ""^ ''"' "°' •=-" '— ■ ^^ ) - t/Vv^O /', 126 LESSON XXI. [§lia ORAL EXERCISE XX. 1. Weshalb liebten die Kinder meinen Onkel ? 2. Wer wohnt in jeneni Hause? 3. Was hat die Mutter ihren Kin- dern gekauft ? 4. Was fiir Papier haben Sie fiir mich gekauft ? 5. Warum sangen Sie nicht ? 6. Womit haben Sie mein Glas gefiillt ? 1 -'i I LESSON XXI. THE PASSIVE VOICE. 112. The Passive Voice is formed by means of the various tenses of the auxiliary verb tticrbcn, to become (see § 19) -f- the Past Participle of the Verb to be conjugated, as in the Paradigm below. Principal Parts of merben : Infin. ttJcrbcn Impf. imirbc (toarb) Past Part. geiDOrbcn Note. — The perfect tenses of Uierbcil are formed with feilt (see § S3. «), Perf. 3cl) bin gciuovben; Plupf. id) tuor fletuorbcii, etc. For the formation of the future and conditional, see fcin (§ 52). Paradigm of the Passive Voice of loibeit^ to praise. Indicative. Subjunctive. Present. (Pres. of lucrbcn + ^- Part, of loben.) I am (being) praised, etc. I (may) be praised, etc. icf) trerbe bu mirft er t»irb \mx toevbcn il;r iuerbct fie iuerben gclobt id) yt>erbe bu tuerbcft er hjerbe luir iuerben tf)r iocrbet fie iuerben gc(o6t §II2l PASSIVE VOICE OF lobeu. 127 Subjunctive. Indicative. Imperfect. (Imperf. of uierbcii -f- P. Part, of lobeii.) r was (being) praised, etc. 1 might be (being) praised, ic^ h)urbe (iuarb) bu trurbeft (tyarbft) er luurbe (toarb) h)ir tDurben i^r luurbet fie luurben gc(06t id) toiirbe bu tourbeft er Juiirbe tvix iDiirben il)v tuiirbet fie iuiirben [etc. gefulit Perfect, (Perfect of luerbeit -f P. Part, of lobeit.) (Part, of uierbru omits gc-) I have been praised, etc. id) bin bu bift ertft h)ir finb i^r f eib fie finb > gefoBt iuorben I (may) have been praised, ic^ fei bu feieft er fei l»ir feien i^r feiet fie feien 1 [etc. I I gefoM loorben Pluperfect.- (Plupf. of uierbeii + p. part, of (obcn.) I had been praised, etc. I might have been praised .^n.arge(aatu>orben id; ^are 9erol.h.orbm [1 bu tDarft gelobt irorben, etc. bu tucireft gelobt tr)orben, etc. Future. (Future of njcrbeii + P. Part, of (obcn.) I^shall^be praised, etc. i shall be praised, etc. lu; ..cr.c griooi luerben ic^ h)erbe gcfobt t.crben bu imrft gelDbt lucrben, etc. bu luerbeft gclobt lucrben etc li i 128 LESSON XXI. iza Indicative. Subjunctive. Future Perfect, (Fut. Perf. of uifiben + P- Part, of lobcn.) I shall have been praised, etc. I shall have been praised, etc. id; tucrbc plobi iuor^cii [ein - icf) iucrbe flcloftt tuorbcn fcin bu \v\x\i gclobt morben fein, etc. bu iuerbcft gelobt tuorben [ein etc. Conditional. (Cond. of lucrbeii + P. Part, of loben.) Simple. I should be praised, etc. id} iuiirbc ^tloht lucrbcn bu iuUrbeft gelobt iDCvben, etc. Infinitive. (Infin. of luerbcu + P- Part of tolien.) J^res, to be praised ficloBt (^u) iucvben Perf. to have been praised gclobt iuorbcn (511) fein Compound. I should have been praised ic^ Juiirbe gdofit iuorben fein bu toiirbeft gelobt njorben fein etc. Participles. (Part, of tucibeii + P- Part of loden.) jRres. being praised gclofit lucrbenb Pas^. been praised gclobt iuorben Remarks. Subj. (see §111 longer forms wit Imperative. (Imper. of UH'ibcn + P. Part, of tobeu.) be praised, etc. iuerbe gcIoBt toevbe cr gelobt irerben wix gelobt iocvbet gelobt iuevben fie gelobt -I. The shorter forms, i. e. Impf. and Plupf. and Note), are commonly used for the luiirbe in the conditional. §iia] PASSIVE VOICE. 129 2 Observe the omission of the 9c- in the P. Part, of iuerben (morHcn for gc-h)orben) when used as auxiliary of the passive 3. The personal agent with the passive voice (which is the s^^^Mtoi the active verb) is denoted by the preposition tion (Engl, by), as ; j f i' S)er unartige ^nabe irirb tion feinem 2eF)rer beftraft. The naughty boy is being punished by his teacher. 4. The auxiliary participle loorben is omitted whenever the state of the subject may be regarded as still continuing, thus: ®ag .filing ift ^zhawi, The house has been (is) built (and is still standing). 5. The Engl. ' I am,- I was/ etc., as part of the passive Araxihary 'to be,' must be rendered into German as follows: {a) By the proper tense of tocrbcil when they are equivalent *o 'I am being,' ' I was being,' etc., as : The child is (i. e., is being) punished by its parents, 3)a^ 5!tnb hJiri) bon feincn (^rterii k'ftraft ; The dinner was being served, when we arrived, 3)aa gjattag^effen ttiurbe fermert, aU h)ir anfamen; o^' when the verb, being turned into the active voice, is in the Jsresant or imperf. tense respectively, as : f The boy is (was) always punished by the teacher. Passive: \ ^^^"^ ^'^ ^^ (^^s) naughty, 1)er ilnabe toirb (louvbc) immer bom Secret 6e= ^ ftraft, luenn er unartig i[t (mar) ; The teacher always punishes (pres.) or punished Ac^he: \ _ (^"iP^-) the boy, when he is (was) naughty. njenn er unartig ift (ipar), tm ^ iiaucn. I30 LESSON XXI. [§§"a- I Hi I I Passive. Active : (b) By the proper tense of fein (with or without n)orben, see last Remark), when they are equivalent to ' I have been, *I had been,' etc., or when the verb, being turned into the active, would be perf. or pluperf. respectively, as : f I am (= have been) invited to tht 1 ^c^) ilu jur 0efcUfcf)aft eingcloben OoDr.'.; : j ( They have invited (perf.) me to the party, t '^QXi |at mic^ gur ©e[eKfc6afl cingctobcu. ( The dinner was (= had been) served, when we Passive: •< arrived, ( ©ae ^Uiittag^efjen \mx fcrbicrt, alv^ Joir anfamen; . . ^ , ( They had served (plupf.) the dinner, etc., t '?)Uxi \^^iW biv3 'ilJiittaij^efjcn fcrtiicrt, u. f. it). The following examples will serve to show more clearly the proper use of the various fc ..is of the passive : " (a) Tic Sciben lucvbcu jel^t ge[d)Ioffen, The shops are being shut now (^present). {b) Die Scibcu finb bicfe ^l\>od;e fritter qefc&Ioffen loorbcu, The shops have been shut earlier this week {perfect). (c) ®ie Sdbeu fhlb je^t gefc^Ioffen, The shops are (and remain) shut (past state, continuing in the present), {a) !Der Solbat tmivbc ben ciner ^ugel ticrttiunbct. The soldier was wounded by a ball (a ball w^ounded him, imp/.), (b) ®er 3olbat toor toon einer ^ugel uertuunbet morbcn. The soldier had been wounded by a ball (p/uper/.). (c) !Der ©olbat Itiot fd^hjet beritjunbet. The soldier was I. 2. ly «?ii\T^a»-<:illF ^afz-^li*^ i (and still suffered from his wound : past state, continuing in Xh^past). iiSi LIMITATIONS OF THE PASSIVE VOICE. I3» ' (a) 1)icfc ^^riicfe hiurbe Dor jebn ^af>ren gebaut. This bridge was built ten years ago (they built it then, that is the date of its being built, im/>/.) {b) 3)ie[c iBriicfe luttr bor je^n ^atjren cjcbaut. This bridge was built ten years ago (and is still standing: past state, continuing in th^ present). Exercise on the Preceding Rules. A. Turn the following sentences into German: 1. This house was built by my father. 2. My window is broken (flcbvOC^cn). 3. The child is washed (gclDaid)Cii). 4. This man is esteemed by everybody (iebeniiaun). 5. The garden must be sold. 6. The enemy was beaten (gcj(f)Iagen). B. Turn the following sentences into the passive : 1. liffiovaitS macl)en n)ir 9«effer? 2. 9Jobert ©tetjciifon I)at bic 5Sictorin^53ractc bci 2)ioiitrcat gcbaiit. 3. HWciii SBrnbcr l)at mir biefc Uf)r gcfrfienft. 4. 2)ie g-cinbe bom- bavbiertcu bic '^tnbt. 5. ©cr ?ef)rer f)atte ben ^nabeu beftraft, tueit ber tnabc fein iBud) berlorcn (lost) t)attc. 6. 2)ein ilSater Jyirb bic^ (oben. 113. Limitations of the Passive Voice. I. Only the direct object of a transitive verb can be- come the subject of the passive verb ; thus we say in the Active : Mt\\\ 3Satcr liebt mir^ ; and in the Passive : %^ trerbe toon tneinem 58ater geliebt. But the sentence : * I have been promised help by him ' = 0iUfc ift mir Don i^m Derf^roc^en (promised) foorben, since in the Active : ©r \^oX mir ^iilfe t)erf^rorf)en (promised), ^iilfc is the direct, but mir the indirect object. Hence it fol- lows, that 2. Intransitive verbs can only be used impersonally in the passiv 2, thus ; 132 LESSON XXI. !*§ "j- I am allowed == ^g tuirb mir crloubt (Lat. mihi per- tnittitur) ; He has been helped = 0^8 ift i^m gel^olfcn h)orben. This impersonal passive is also used in expressing an action without specifying any agent, as : (^0 tumfcc gcfteru 3lbcnb Did flcton^t, There was a great deal of dancing yesterday evening, NoTK. The pion. c3 in these constructions is omitted if any other mennber of the sentence precedes the verb, as: 3Mtr toirtJ cdauM ; ®cficrn 3lbi'nb tourtie, etc. 114. Substitutes for the Passive Voice. I 'J'he passive voice is much less frequently used in German than in English, particularly in the longer forms. It is often replaced, especially with intransitive verbs : (a) By the indefinite pronoun lUttU (Fr. i 7, see Less. XXVII), with the verb in the active voice, as : SOJan glailtit tf;m nid;t. He is not believed ; 9Wan !aun tf)m nic^^t troucn. He cannot be trusted. ip) By a reflexive verb, as : ^er (2d()luffcl iuirb fid) finben. The key will be \ound; and particularly with laffen, as : 3)a^ (ii^t fit^ Ieid)t madden. That can easily be done Vocabulary. to conquer, overcome, ero'bern believe, gUiuben (intr.^ -}- dat. of person) wait (for), tt)arten(auf 4- ace.) workman, bcr 9tv'beiter visit, visitors, ber ^efuc§ mill, bie 5Rul^le beef, ba§ ^inbfleifd^ courage, bie .^a^^fcrfeit untruth, falsehood, bie UnV Jt)abrt)eit as, at^ lU] THE I^ASSIVE VOICE. m /^ X once, ein'mal carefully, forg'fciltig this evening, IjeUiC Hbenb severely, ftreng as soon as, fobalb' little, menig Idioms: As a child, when (I etc. was) a child, al« ftinb; Thlg house Is for sale (lit., to sell, to be sold), bicfe* Jpaui ift ju oerhiufer; to have visitors, Sefud) ftabcn. EXERCISE XXI. A. 1. ^iefe§33iIbn)urbei)onmcinered)Jt)e[tcrgemart,unbe^ift Diet gelobt Juorben. 2. J)ie3tabtiftliomG5encral bombarbiertunber* Dbert iDorbcn. 3. W\v h)crbcn beftraft loerben, locnn iuir unfcre £ef= tton nidjt forgfciltig lerncn. 4. ®ieSabcn finb gefc^Uo] jen, benn f)eute ift (ein) ^etertag. 5. ^ft ba§ .t>a»^ nebcu ber mii^U berfauft? 6. ^ait)of)l, eg tDurbe geftern tjon ^fjrem 9teffen gefauft. 7. 33Dn h)em ttjurbe ba^ ^inb gercttct, al§ baa i^"^ brannte? 8. (gg iDurbe Don eincm ^(rbcitcr gcrcttet, lueld)er iuegen fciucr 3:a^fer!eit Don ben Seutcn gclobt lyurbe. 9. 2Bare ber ilnabe larf; ^aii[e ge)4ncft toorben, loenn er nid;t unartig geirefen ioiire? 10. g^eben bem ^aufe unfercg S^Znc^bars toivb :ine ^ird;e Q^hant 11. Gg hjurbe geftern 2(benb Diel bei una gefungen unb gefpielt, benn h)ir flatten 53e[ucr;. 12. ^[t ba§ ^inbfleifd) gefc^iicEt .uorben, tuelc^eg ic^ befteirt fjabe? 13. ®er Sef)rer fagte, ba^ er mit meiner mieit gufrieben fei. 14. X)a§ ^ilb ioare bon b;u ^iinfttern nic^t gelobt hjorb'-n, loenn eg nic^t fe^r fc^on ge^efen iocire. 15. 3llg ^inb h)urbe ir^ immer Don meinem SSater ftreng beftraft, tocnn irf) eine llnioa^rF>eit [agte. 16. Sffiirb eg ung eriaubt ^,^*{inlm$tufgaben gu Dcrbrennen, \vm\ \m bamit fertig finb? 17. ©g trirb ^eute Diet gef))ielt, aber nientg ftubiert, jueil ioir morgen feine ©c^ulc l)ahm. 18. @g ift mir nidjtg baDon gefagt ioorben. ly. 2Bir tDurben nid;t gelobt, Joeil Wix nxd^t flei^ig iuaren. 20. SoOalb bie Seltionen getcrnt finb, iverben iyir einen ©pa^iergang madjQn. B. 1. Our parents love us. 2. We are loved by our parents 3. By whom was this letter brought? 4. It was brought bj a messenger. 5. Our house isv.built, and we are already living in it. 6. Is the dinner served ? No, it is being served i i 134 LKSSON XXII. K"5 now. 7. Was the soldier in the hospital wounded, or was he ill ? H. He had been wounded by a bullet. 0. The carriages of the count will be sold to-day. H). His horses are already sold. 11. Why is this boy not believed? 1:2. He is not believed because he once told an untruth. 13. It is agreeable to be praised. 11. My sister is learning the song, which was sung at (in) the concert yesterday. ORAL EXERCISE XXI. 1. Wer hat dieses Rindtleisch gebracht? 2. Wann wird uns erlaubt werden, im Garten zu spielen ? 3. 1st das Haus neben der Kirche verkauft ? 4. Wird heute Abend viel stu« diert werden? 5. Von wem wurde der Knabe nach Hausa geschickt? 6. 1st dieses Bild zu verkaufen? LESSON XXII. STRONG DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES: WEAK AND MIXED. VERBS: Bcijcn MODEL. 116. Declension of Adjectives: Second Form. If preceded by the Definite Article or by any deter- minative word of the bicfcr Model, the Attributive Adjective follows the Weak Declension, and takes -c in the Nomi- native Sing, of all Genders, and in the Accusative Sing. Feminine and Neuter; otherwise -••n throughout t^us- Weak Declension of gut, good. Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. gute Gen. gutCtt Dat. gutcn Ace. gutm gutc Qutcn gutcn gute 9utc gutcn gutcn 6ute gutcn gutcn gutcn guteu § »I5J WEAK DFXJLKNSION OF ADJIXTI VES. 135 Subs IAN iivKs with Adjectivks. NKUTKR. the good child ba^ Qiitt ^linb bc« gutcit itinbcv3 bcm (\i\tm .sjiiibc bn^ gute fiinb Singular. MASC. KKM. the good man the good woman Norn bcr gutc 5!)iann bie gutc ^-vmi (/en. bc-^ gutcn ^JJ?anne«5 ber gutcn Jyrau Dat. beni giitcn 'DJJanne bcr gutcn ^xu)citcrn, ilinbern Ace. meinc o^xxi^n ^rUber, erfnueftcrn, Alinbcr 117. Compound Verbs with Separable Prefix. I. The prefixes fie-, er-, < ic. (see § 35, Rem. 6), hence called Inseparable Prefixes, are never separated from the verb; other prefixes (chiefly the Prepositions) are Separable but only in Principal Sentences with Simple Tense' as : r , ^er ^bnig fr^irftc ^loei iBoten ou8. The king sent out two messengers. 9}?ein ^^niber reift nun-gcu od, ■ My brother sets out (== departs) to-morrow. Note.- These Prefixes contain an idea distinct from that of the verb and hence ,f retained before the Verb in the cases above, would thro^ the verb out of its place as Second Idea of the Principal Sentence. 2. The j|c- of the P. Part, and 511 in the Infin. follow the prefix, makmg together but one word, as : SDie 33otcn beg .^onigg finb aBflcreift, The messengers of the king have departed. 10 /-^ yr,.. - 1^1 138 LESSON XXII. [§§"7 ^Jiein i^ater ttjun|cf;t morgcn abjurcifen. My father wishes to depart to-morrow. 3. The principal accent is on the Verb when the Prefix is Inscpardblc ; on the Prefix when Separable, as: bcfu'rf)en, t)er= tau'fen ; but aue'frfncfen, ab'veifen. 4. The principal parts of Separable Compound Verbs should therefore be given as in the following examples : Infin. Impf. p. Part. fln'greifcn, to attack cjttff ... an auc^egrtffen ab'fc^neiben, to cut off fcfjnitt . . . ab abcjcfc^nitten 118. Strong Vei^bs: lict^cn Model. Infin. Imff. P. Part. Germ. Model : bci^en Epigl. Analogy : bite Ablaut : ti bit gebiffen bitten t I LIST. Notes. — i. Compounds are only given in the Lists when the slmpU Verb is not found in the strong form. 2. R. = Reflexive; N. = Neuter, i. e., conjugated with jeill only^ N. A. --- Neuter and Active, i. e., with feill or l)abeu; W. indicates thai the Weak for- is also used without difference of meaning. _bei^en, bite (er)bicid;en (W. N.). turn pale (bc)fleifH'n ( R.), apply one's self jjleicficn, resemble, be equal to gldten (N.), glide flycifm, grasp, seize fneifen, pinch H gebiffen erblic^ erblid>en beflt^ befliffen Olid^ getjlirf^eti m geglitten Qtiff gegriffen !ntff ae!ntffcn ^. (cib^iL suffer m gelitten Ii8] STRONG VERBS : Ocif^CH MODEL. 139 ^feifen, whistle ^cifec n. tear fcr)Iei(f>en (N.), sneak fd)Ieifen, grind fd)mei|?tMt, fling Jiteiilen, cut frf;vciten (N.), stride ftrcicfien, stroke ftreiten, contend toeic^en, yield tin fdimifj fdinitt fd;ritt ftrid;. ftritt )oid; fiepfiffcn Seviffen gerittm gefd)Iid)en gefdiliffen Ge[d)mi|fen cjefdmiticn Oefc(n-itten QcftridH'n geftritten cjeJoidien REMARKS.-I. The root vowel being Shortened in the Impf ' the following consonant, if single, is doubled; and stems' in -D (Idntciben, [cibcn) change b into ti. 2 Those whose stem ends in -f^ change J into ff in the 3. The following Verbs are weak when they have a different meaning, as below : bleicBen (trans.), bleach (,(eic6te f4)Ieifen, drag ; raze (to the ground) fd,(cifte lt)eid;en, soften, soak juetdUe Oe6feid)t Ge[d)Ieift gcmeidit 4. ^egleiten, to accompany,' is no compound of qkiten 'o glide, but of loiton, td lead (weak, = 6c-BC-lcitcn) ; i>crrciben to make disagreeable, spoil (not from Icibcn, but £eib) is weak. ^ Vocabulary. to set out, depart, ab'reifen cut otf, aO^fdmcibcn pai.)t (not pictures), an'^ ftreic^en slip, slide, nue'gleitcrt comprehend, understand, 6e= Oveifcn seize, ergvcifen 4; 140 LESSON XXTI. [§118 fear, ficb furc{)ten (Dor-f-dat.) tear (to pieces), jerrei^cn pass (time, etc.), ju'bringen Cinderella, 3tf4>enputtel barber, ber 33arbier' idea, notion, bcr 33cgrtff steamer, steam-boat, baio ^am^ffrf)iff thief, ber ^kb grass, bag ©rag hair, bag ^aar hay, bag -t^eu huntsman, hunter, bcr ^dger illness, bie .f^ranfi;eit fever, bag i^-iebcr slipper, bev ^sautoffet rain, bcr 3{cgcn rheumatism, bcr S^tbcumatigmug piece, bag ©turf little piece, bag BtM6)tn traveller, bcr 2Banberer tooth, ber 3^^^'^* toothache, bag 3«^"^C^ evil, angry, cross, bofc joyous, merry, frofjltd^ smooth, slippery, cjlatt golden, of gold, golben violent, heavy (of rain), ^eftig naughty, ill-behaved (of children), un'artig true, iuaf;r furious, toii'tcnb on that account, bcgtDcgen of it, babon the day before yesterday, i)Dr'= geftcrn Idioms : To be on the point of (be aboutto), im aScflviffe fciii. You are tired, are you not? (Sic finfc miifcc, nid)t loahr'? So are we, aBiv finb ei aud). George has torn my coat, &eovs hat miv ben 9lorf jcrrfffen. EXERCISE XXII. A. 1. ®cr ©cnerat 9JL ritt auf eincni fc^lt)arsert ^ferbe burc^ bie ©trajicn ^orontog (i^on Toronto) . 2. 2Bie 'i)ahm ©te bie ^i\t auf bcm Sanbe 5iu3cbrad;t ? 3. 3(n tDag fiir cincr ^ranfbeit ^at ^br 3Satcr fo tange ndittcn? 4. 6ie fiub miibe, nicf)t tua^r? 2Bir finb eg auc^>. 5. %U mcin 33rubev jung i»ar, mtte er fcf)Iecf)te ,3a{)ne uub litt fcl;r an S(^[)n\vd). 6. ^er fctiiuarje §unb un= fev(e)g ^JJadibarg ift bijfc ; er f^at borgeftcvn ein !lcineg ^inb gcs bifjcn. 7. Unf(c)re altcn 3iarf)barn bcgleitcten img nacf; bcm §afm, alg tDir abvciftcu. 8. 3So l»of)nt ber Sarbter, ber 3f)ncn bag §aar gefcfmittcu hat' ^Mm\ alteg ^e[|cr f^ncibct [H^t gut, benn ber Wiener l?at eg gt.ytern gefd;Iiffen. 10. Stig ic^ tor §ii8] STRONG verbs: bei^cu model. 141 ber ©d;ule iiber bie glatte ©tra^e fc^ritt, glitt ic^ aug imb jerrife mir ben neuen SfJorf. 11. 2(l§ ber 3)teb im 33egriffe Wax, ing §aug §u fc(ileicf)en, ergriff ifin ber 2)iener. 12. Unfer alter 9iac^s bar Htt (ange an (am) ^ftfjeumati^mu^, unb Wax be^tvegen immer ju ^aufe. 13. ^er ©eneral ritt mit feinen Offijieren iiber bie SBriid'e. 14. ^er bofe ^nabe auf bem Slpfelbaum ri^ bie reifen 2(^fel / bom Saume unb frf)mi^ fie auf bie Grbe. 15. 5!Jiein junger g^Jeffe, T- ber auf ber Uniijerfitdt Wax, \)at am ^ieber gelitten, aber er ift je^t n?ieber Wo\)l 16. 3(frf)en^uttelg ©cfjtuefter fdjnitt fid) (dat) ein ©titd t>om ^u^e ah, tueil er 5U gro^ fiir ben golbenen ^antoffel Wax. 17. ^c^ bin fd)nett nac^ §aufe geritten, iueil icf) mid; t)or bem hJiitenben Sturme furd)tete. 18. ®er 9Sanberer fc^ritt froben '^iJlwm burd; ben griinen 2Salb unb ^fiff ein frbfjlic^e^ 2ieb. 19. ^iefe^ 9)ieffer ift nidt fd)arf; tuann tinivbe e§ gefc^Iiffen? 20. ilarig fd>oncr, neuer diod tintrbe V»om .*ounbe gerviffen. ' B. ]. Where is the old knife that you ground? 2. When Mary was young she reseml^led her mother. 3. The bears sneaked (pert.) into the wood, but the hunters followed (perf.) them. 4. Where does the painter live who painted (perf.) our house } 5. The industrious countryman cut (perf.) the grass yesterday, and is making hay to-day. (>. Why are you crying, Charles ? I am crying because George pinched (perf.) me. 7. The rain spoiled my (dat. -|- def. art.) journey to the country. 8. The steamer has whistled already. Now I shall say farewell. 9. Little Charles is a naughty child ; he has torn his (dat. of refl. pron. -f- art.) new dress. 10. Old people often suffer from rheumatism. 11. Have you understood what he said ? 1"2. The gardener was burning the boughs, which he had cut from the trees. 13, I have quarrelled with my old friend, because he was wrong. 14. This blue ribbon is too long, please cut a little of it off for me. 15. Why is Charles crying ? He has been bitten by a dog. lit! 142 LESSON XXTII. [§"9 ORAL EXERCISE XXII. ]. Was fiir einen Hund hat Ihr Nachbar? 2. Wie wurden Sie die Zeit zubringen, wenn Sie reich waren ? 8. Was machte der Wanderer, als er durch den Wald schritt? 4. Wo wohnen Sie jetzt ? 5. Wann werden Sie Heu machen? 6. Weshalb sind Sie so schnell nach Haiise geritten? LESSON XXIII. POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. -STRONG VERBS: Blct6ett MODEL. HO. Possessive Pronouns. 1. The Possessive Pronouns are used when no substantive is expressed, as : The hat is mine {Pronoun) ; but : It is my hat {Adjective). 2. They are formed from the stems of the corresponding Possessive Adjectives by adding certain endings, as follows : {a) Endings of biefcr Model (without article), as : Sifisrular. MASC. Norn, meincr Gen. meinCiS Dat. meincm Ace. lueincn Plural. ALL GENDERS. meinc, mine meincr, of mine meincil, (to, for) mine tiieinc, mine FEM. NEUTER. meiuc mein(c)8 meincr meineS meincr meincm meinc mein(c)8 Observe : In the Nom. and Ace. Neuter, -? of the ending may be omitted. Go for the other persons : MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Sing, beincr beinc beincd, thine feiucr i^rcr f)t»i% fcin t^rc jeinc^, his, its il^rc0, hers (its) §"9] POSSESSIVE PRONOUNS. 143 MASC. N. bermeine G. be^ meiiicn D. bem meincn FEM. bie meinc ber meincn bev meincn A. ben meincn I bie meinc Plural. ALL GENDKRS. bie meincn, mine bcr meincn, of mine ben meincn, (to, for)mine bie meincn, mine MASC. FEM. NEUTER. Plur. un[(e)rcr un[(e)re unf(e)rc8, ours eu(e)rcr eu(e)rc eu(e)rci, yours *^'^f'' '^¥^ if>rc§, theirs iXs¥n ^brc ^{,rc«, yours) {b) Preceded by the Definite Article, and hence with end- mgs of Weak Adjective, thus: Singular. NEUTER. ba§ meinc beg meincn bem meincn bne meinc So : ber, bie, ba§ beinc, thine ber, bie, bag eu(e)rc, yours ber, bie, bag feinc, his, its ber, bie, bag if,rc, theirs ber, bie, bag i^rc, hers, (its) (ber, bie, bag ^brc, yours) ber, bie, bag unf(e)rc, ours ic) Preceded by Definite Article, with ending -fa 4- Weak terminations, thus : »8 T" vveaK Singular. ^''^'^' FEM. NEUTER. Nom. ber meinige bie meinige bag meinioe Gen. beg memigen, etc. ber meinigen, etc. beg meinigen, etc. Plural. ALL GENDERS. Nom. bie meinigen, mine Gen. ber meinigen, of mine, etc. So : ber, bie, bag beinige, thine bcr, bie, bag feintge, his, its and so on for the other persons. Ml NOTI In unfrige and eurigc the -e of the stem is always omitted. 144 LESSON XXIII. [§§ "9- I ^■ Remark, — i. These forms are interchangeable, without difference in meaning, as : I have my book, but I have not yours, ^c^ f)abc mein 53u*, aber id; t}aU md)t < bag ^^re ( bag 3^rigc. His letter is here, but ours is not here, ( un|(c)rcr \ ©ein 33rief ift ^kv, aUx < bcr uiif(c)rc >■ ift nicl;t ^ier. ( bcr unfrigc ) 2. When a Possessive Pronoun is used as predicate, it may be replaced by the Possessive Adjective without ending, as : This book is mine, ®ivfe§ 33urf) ift mctlt. 3. Observe the following idiomatic uses of the Poss, Prons. : {a) ^cf) ioerbe b. 8 9WcinigC (neuter sing.) tJ)UU, Is shall do my part, my utmost. (^) ^ic ^Jieinigen, bie Seinigen (Plur.), My, his friends, family. (r) A friend of mine --- filter tiott meinen ^reunben. This friend of mine = ^icjcr mein ^^reunb. 120. Strong Verbs: bl«6cn Model. Germ. Model : Eng. Analogy. Ablaut : Infin. blcibeu wanting Ct LIST. bleibeu (N.), stay, remain (ge)beibcn (N.), thrive leibcn, lend, borrow Impf. blicb ie blieb gebieb P. Part. geblicben ie gebtiebcn gebi^ben geliefjen T20] STRONG VERBS : bUlUtl MODEL. meiben, avoid ■ ^ *)reifen, praise . reiben, rub . , fc^eiben (N. A.), part (intr. and trans.) f^'ieb itvljei^i, shine ; seem, appear fc^reib en^ write fc^reien, scream, shout fc^hjeigen, be silent fjjeien, spit L leiflm (N.), mount, ascend treiben, drive /Deifen, show, point out ; ijei^cn, accuse Vocabulary to copy, ab^^reiben hangup, auf'^angen ascend, befteigen (trans.) prove, dernohstrate, be* ft)eifen appear, erfd;einen shine, glitter, glangen descend, f»erab'ftei0en guard, keep, ^iiten rule, reign, govern, regicren write (to), frf;retben (dat. or an-)- ace.) climb, ftetgen (auf -f- ace.) pardon, excuse, berjeitjeti remain behind, jurud'bleiben cold, bie (grfdltung family, bie ^amilk herd, flock, bie <0erbe fc^ien fc^rieb fc^rie fc^toieg ftteg trieb h)ie^ 145 gcmieben geprtefen gerieben 0efd;icben gefc^ienen ge[rf;rieben gefc^rteen gefc^biegen gef^ieen Seftiegen getrieben geit)ie[en Sejie^en heat, bie §i^e last, ber Seiften pepper, ber ^feffer shepherd, ber S chafer shoemaker, cobbler, ber ©c^ufter silence (act of keeping s.), ba^ ©c^lDeigen speaking (act of), bag ©^rec^en throne, ber 2hxon pasture, pasturage, bie 3Beibe fifty, funfgig, funfgig bright, brightly, ^elT loud, loudly, laut correct, rtc^tig round, runb fftft It mm ^•h strong, severe, ftar! Xdiom: Up to the present time, still, npcf, immer. 1 1 II 146 LESSON XXIII. [§§120 EXERCISE XXIII. A. 1. (S^ {ft mrf)t mU^i (violb, \\)ik^ c,VmX. 2. ©predKii ift ©tiber, ec^tuciv3en ift Wolb. :i. Scbufter, bleib' bei beincm Sciften. 4. eeit arf)t ^ai^en bin i* iucgen ciner ftarteu (Irfciltung 311 .•paufe gcbliebcn. 5. einc bon mcincn (Soufinen ift jclit bei ung auf 33efucJ), abcr fie bleibt uirf^t lauge. <>. ^1^0^:^ fiir ^Tiere finb in jenem ^Balbe'c' (S« finb ^iiven. 7. ^ie mwiin unb ibrc %o6:)Ux iueintcn fjeftio;, a^5 fie Don einanbev fd;ieben. H, ^})iein Df)eim blieb iueflcn be: gvof^en ,f>il)e mit feinev )^amilie auf bem ^anbe. 0. .Slarl (;at aw feinen 3.Uiter iiefd>vieben, unb id) bin im ^^ecjriffe o IjaUw ©ie ^bren .Sput aufge(;angt? I^d; \}aU i^n neben ben :5f;ngett gefjcingt. 1 ;i. 31U luir auf ben ikvg ftiegen, fc^ien bie ©onne fc^on ^ell. 14. ^[BeldK Don biefen ^^Biic^evn ioiinfdien ©ie ? ^;3cl) umnfdK bie nieinen. 15. mx luiirben auf bem Sanbe geblieben fein, loenn unfere ^-reunbe aud; geblieben iuaren. 1 H. ®ie ^erben tuurben auf bie 2Beibe getrieben, aU \m Dom SBerg f)erabftiegen. 17. g^ ift ung beimefen ioovben, ba^ bie (Srbe runb ift. 18. ^^or funf^ig ^jjafjven beftieg bie ^onigin ^^ictoria ben^bron, unb fie regiert nod) inuuer. 19. 2Burben ©ie nac^ (Surojja reifen, ioenn ic^ ^umrfbliebe, urn '^^jx 8. I have black eyes, but yours are blue. 9. In what yeai did Goethe's 'Faust' appear? 10. Waiter, please bring me the vinegar and the pepper, 11. This lead-pencil is mine, where is ■"1 TABLE OF AL-JF.CTIVE ENDINGS. ,47 your.,? 1--'. Your aunt .iml mine arc nei^.hbours. ];) The pro essor s.e.ned not ,0 h. at home, for l.i.s window.; and shutters were not open. I I. I should write to him if he wrme to „,e. I... , .,„ „.riti,,, to ,nj tuother and c'harles was wntmg to h,s when the post.nan bronglu us the letters' ORAL EXERCISE XXIII. 1. Seit wann sincl 8ie schon .u Hause Meblieben ? 2 Was -chtendie Schafer, als wir vom Ilerge herabstiegei^? 1 ^^ ann bes leg d,e Konigin Victoria den Thron ? 1 Wa ur Iinte haben Sie? 5. Fur wen ist dieser lange BrieP b. Welches sind die Namen der Alonate ? LESSON XXIV. DECLENSION OF ADJECTIVES (concluded): TABLE, GENERAL REMARKS.-STRONG VERBS: Wi^tU AND fcr^tcit MODELS. 121. Table of Adjective Endings. I. Strong. Smgular. MASC. N. — cr G. —eg (en) D. —em A. —en NKUT. —eg -eg (en) —em PEM. — e — er ~er — e Observe: -en for -C;^ in Gen. Sing. Masc. and Neuter before strong substs. Plural. M. F. N. — e — er —en —eg — e MASC. — e — ?n —en —en II. Weak. Singular, FKM. NKUT. — e — e —en —en Plur. M. F. N. —en -en -en —en —en — e — e OiiSERVK: Persistent -:i, except Norn. Sing, of all genders, and Ace. Sing. Fern, and Neuter. f 148 LESSON XXIV. TIT. M IXED. Sifiji^u/ar. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. M. F. N. Nom. — er — e — e8 —en Gen. —en —en —en -en Dat. —en —en —en -en Ace. — en — e — e« —en [§§ lai- Objkrvk: Same as Weak (II), except Nom. Sing. Masc. anc} Non». Ace. Sing. Neuter. 122. General Remarks on Adjectives. 1. Participles used attributively are employed and declined as Adjectives, as : (^eliebter !!8atcr, beloved father ; ba^ tueinenbe Alinb, the weeping child ; mcine geeijrte 9Jiutter, my honoured mother. 2. Adjectives and Participles used as Substantives vary their declension according to the rules for Adjective Declen- sion, but are spelt with capital letters, as : tier ilranfe, the sick man, patient ; Fern, bie Slranfe, the sick woman; Plur. bie .%anfen; cin 5^ranfer, a sick man, patient; pi. ^ranfe, sick people, patients. Remarks. — i. Many words, the English equivalents of which are Substantives only, are Adjectives in German, as : bet ^"^rembe, the stranger, foreigner, PI. bJc A'vemben, but eui ^rem= ber, PI. i^rembe ; ber I^Kcifcnbe, the traveller, eiii I'Keifcnbcr, etc. These Adjective-Substantives, when Mnsc. and preceded by the Definite Article, have the same inflection as the Weak Declension. 2. Names of languages from Adjectives are not declined when used without the article, as : ^tv> 'Jlni^onchmcs, nothing pleasant. Ohskrvk : The Adjective is here used as substantive, and therefore spelt with a capital. 12. After the Indefinite Numerals in the Plural (see Less. XXIX) allc, all ; ciiuj]c (ctUcbo), some; mand)C, many; niclu-cio, several ; folcK\ such; Hide, many; iucuii'^c, few, the Adjective may have either the weak or the strong ending. 13. After the interrogative iucUtc in the plural, the strong declension is also found in the adjective ; and the exclama- tory iucUt is generally uninflected before an adjective, which then always has the strong form, as : m^cld) iivofiCS ^lHn\^niii)cn ! W hat (a) grert pleasure ! 123. Strong Verbs: }tl)ic^cn Model. Germ. Model : Efig/. Analogy. Ablaut : (ijer)bric^cn, vex flie^en (N.), flow gic^en, pour Infin. fducfjcn (shoot) te LIST. Impf. shot Derbro^ P. Part. fen shot l>eibvoffen geffoffen gecjoffen "ij sTK()N(i VKKiJs: fd;icf}cn modkl. ^5 ntimmeu, glow flimiiicn (VV.N.A.), dimh fvie(f)cii (N.), creep flCnicfuMi, enjoy ricduMi, s.nell (tr. and intr.^ (cr)[dmUcn ( W. N.\ sound, resoun 1 faufcn, drink (of beasts) [rfucjicn, shoot fd^Ue^cn, lock, shut fiebcn (VV.), boil (intr.) fpriefK'n (N.), sprout triefcn (N.), drip Remarks _ i. Observe, as under the bci^en ModeI(.< i,8 Keni. 12) the doubling of consonants and the interchan-.J 2. ^Kiic^en/to avenge,' is weak but has also P. Part, c^.vodjm 3. Saufcn has also foufft, fiiuft in the Pres. Indie. 2 "3 Sing" S- Jn fiebm the weak P. Part, (geficbct' is rare. tlotnm trod; rtcnoH crfdnUt foff fott fprof? tioff iicfloiiinicii ilchodHMi iioi'.offcn floiodu'n cr|"du>Hcu in')dH>f|cu gcfottcn gctroffcn 124. Strong Verbs : fcrf)tcn Model. 2.3-S. pR. Tnd. Infin. 2. S. I.MPER. Germ, Model: fcdUen fidUft fid)t fid^t Engl. Analogy .- wanting Ablaut .' c i Impf. p. Part. focf;t oefiid)ten LIST. fcd)tcn f!""ht flcdUon, weave, twine fliditft, flic^t, fli*t fIod>t cjer'IodUcn i 152 LESSON XXIV. [§X24 (er)HJfcI)cn (N.), be- (erlifd;e[t) erlifc^t erlofc^ erlofrfjen come extinguished (eviifd;) melfen (W.), milk (milfft, mil!t, mil!) mol! gemolfen (iiui(lft,quillt, quelle) quoH gequolten (fd^mil^eft) frfimiljt fdimolj gefcfjmoljen (fc^milj) (fc^it)iaft) fd)lt)iat fcfihJoK gefdjhJoHen (fd)t»ill) Rf:marks. — I. Rare forms are enclosed in ( ). quellen, gush forth fd;meljen (N.), melt (intr.) |d)JueUen (N.), swell 2. The simple verb lofd^en, 'to extinguish ' (ti.), is weak (lofd;te, geli3[d>t), as are also its separable compounds, e. g., aus^'Iijfdjen. 3. '^dimeljen (intr.) has also the forms (fdjineljeft), fd)mel5t (fdimelje). 4. (Sd)mcl5en, 'to smelt' and fd)tt)ellen, 'to cause to swell' (trans.), are weak. Vocabulary. extinguish, put out, aue'IbfdK'u snow, ber ^i^'^zt water (flowers, etc.), begie^eu eight, ^6::ji prescribe, Derfd)reibeu flow past, Dorii'bevflie^en close, shut, ju'fd)lief?en exhibition, bie Sdie'ftelhmg health, bie (*iiefuubf)eit drink, beverage, ba^ ©etrdn! cow, bie ilut^-''' maid, maid-servant,bie S^Jagb * thereon, baran raid-day, noon, ber 9JJittag past, by, boriiber pain, ber Sdnnevj Idioms : 1. To go past the house, am "^aufe eof ubefgel)tu. %, In German, <\y\i iT^eutfd) or im !X)eutfd)en. celebrated, famous, benit^mt blind, blinb healthy, healthful, gefiirtb dear, lieb Limburg (adj.), Siiuburger dead, tot Toronto (adj.), 3::orDntoer ;-< 6 124] stkong: vekhs fcditcn model. EXERCISE XXIV. '53 2. ^* (.abe ,„c„un Uricf g^fc^toffcn u„b ,„erbc i(,„ "7" t 5^ tO™<,e,, X Sc8 3Jio.flc„. ftcigc, Me Heine. Sogcl jum ©m P«u e .ovuber. 6. Xn Jug be. S,a„tc„ it cfl^ ( , b " « vWneben. ». Sie ^eitunaen ajaMen .id .on er lo J " 3n.,teaung 10. Jer Sba^MuoK .„„ §i„^e[ unb (ofcfrba, 8t.mmenbc S^er an«. ! I . Unfere Solbafen fcKoffon bi Stabt! b,e iiu^c fl n,o((e„ unb ,eiit beaiefjcn fie bie 4««n,en. 13. mt" f*ue.flt, ,^t gntcn Se.,tc, benn bie .ftvnnfcn (eiben jeM Zt ecf;majen. 14. SMrbe bev Scorer 66fe luciben, menn ber^S! feme Stufgabe ,«„ fe? ,5. ®er e*nfer ^nt ben Sieifenkn bm » 8 member g obt ge.mefen. 16. SSiirbe e« 3?,„e„ bie 3!eKe U^KMben, tocnn rd, suriicfbliebe ? 17. ,§a6en Sk bie t-ra^n arunien ge e^en, b,e luir ben. .fi.anfcn f<(ncfeny 18. ®et Scf, ,e" fi;...orM.„b ba« SBaffo.- troff i,„n ben .^nfern, ali bie Sol Seaeii 9Ji.ttag toavin fdnen. 16. a)er SJlinbe, ber ne6en ml too^,.t flocit jioei iJovbe f(ir .neine Wuttet. 20. ®et iiinge .mb ' « alte Su-mbe. bie in. a^albe jagto,., ^aben biele Tg " S'r";. ~\^'" '"'■'" f"'^ ^'^ *'"'"^» "^fl^ff^" toorben^ Sic fmb Bon. Giartnet bcgoffen loorben. -B. h The golden slipper ,va.s too smallfor Cinderella's sisters. ■>. Paris gloves and Li,nl,urg cheese are tamons every- where. ■). The huntsinan shot a hare and brought it ho,ne. 4. Our neighbours are not at home, for their doors and windows aij closed. .5. I do not believe every story I hear (.. Please, dear mother, tell us little children something, new and pretty. 7. If Charles tears his new book, his ..rother / / ■ > I U It ' ' .■ , . ■ ■ . . Ii 54 I.ESSOX XXV. [§§ 124- Hi' »-■ I will be very angry. S. He seemed not to hear what I said to him. 9. These flowers are for the patients in the hospitals. 10. (The) green is agreeable for those who have weak eyes. 11. The horse is drinking the water which we have brought him. [:L Pure fresh water is a healthful beverage. 13. A week ago I was at (in) a concert, where this singer (/.) sang. 14. When the weather becomes cold, the dogs like to creep behind the stove. 1 5. The travellers enjoyed the beauty of the landscape, when they were ascending the high mountain. It). Please tell lue how this word is written in German. ORAL EXERCISE XXIV. 1. Haben Sie Ihren J3rief s ;hon geschlossen? 2. Wie lange ist Ihr geehrter Professor schon tot ? 3. Was hat der Doktor der Kranken verschrieben ? 4. Weshalb wurde der Lehrer bose .'' i^. Wer hat diese Vogel geschossen ? o. Was hat der Jager mit dem Hasen gemacht, welchen er im Walde geschossen hat ? m < 1:1 i( : LESSON XXV. COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. - STRONG VERBS: fricrctt model. 125. Comparison of Adjectives. In German, as in English, the degrees of comparison are formed by adding to the Positive : -Ct to form the Comparative, and -(e)ft " " " Superlative, as : mu, new neucr, newer neu(c)ft, newest reic^, rich vcidicr, richer reid^ft, richest angenehtit, .agreeable annc'-^chmcr, mor angvjue^mft, most agreeable ^_- 1 1 CL r \. V ci bk X36] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. 155 Remarks. — I. Monosyllabic adjectives with a, 0, u (not ttu) generally take Umlaut (but with many exceptions, given in App. K.), as : lang linger langft !ut;j furjer furjcft 2. The syllables -cr, (e)|i are added to every adjective, without regard to its length, as in the case of angeneijni (given above, but see § 16 1, note). 3. Adjectives used attributively in the Comparative or Superlative degree are declined, and add the usual endings ^/hr the syllables -er, -eft respectively, as : ber rcic^erc Wlam ein reic^ercr mam mein alteftcS ^leib liebfter ^reunb 4. Participles are compared like adjectives, as : gcliebt, beloved geliebter geliebteft 5. -c of the Superlative ending is retained only after b, t or a sibilant (f, f 1^, 3, J, y), as : alt, Superl. altcfi ; but grofe always has Superl. grij^t. 5. Adjectives in -c, -cl, -en, -er drop e of the stem in the Comparative, as : trage, trdger, trdgft ; ebel, ebler, ebelft. 12«. The Comparative. 1. ' Than ' =» aU after the Comparative. 2. The compound form with mef>r (Engl. ' more ') is never (except with ^he adjectives given in § 161) used in German (as it is in Engl, with polysyllabic adjectives), unless when two adjectives (i. e., two qualities of the same object) are being compared, as : (Sr ift me|r fc^h)acl^ al^ franf. He is more (i. e., rather) weak than ill. 156 LESSON XXV. [§§126 3. Comparison of equality : I am (just) as rich as he, I^d) bin (eben) io reicf) mt er. 4. ' The . . . the ' before comparatives = |e, htfio or um fo — JC (bcfto or um fo), as : The longer the nights, the shorter the days, ^c (bcfto) Idnger bie 9idrf)te, jc (bcfto) fiirjcv bie Xage. 5. When the comparative is declined, the omission of c of the stem takes place just as in Adjectives in — cr, as: ben reid)er(c)n 'DJiann, etc. Note. — The syllable -cr may occur three times successively at the end of the same adjective, viz. : i ° as part of the stem, e. g., l)t'ifcr, hoarse; 2 ° as inflection of comparison, e. g., I^eif(e)rci', hoarser; 3° as ending of strong adjective declension, e. g., eiil ^eif(e)i-erer ^Sanger, a hoarser singer. 127. The Superlative. I. The Superlative is not used, even as Predicate^ in the undeclined form, but : {a) If the substantive is expressed, or if the substantive of the preceding clause can be supplied, the (weak) adjective form with definite article is used, as : This river is the broadest in America (i. e., the broad- est river), 2)tcier ?^lu^ ift bcr drcttcftc in ^itmerifa (bev breitefte ^lu^). The days in June are the longest (days) in the whole year, ^ie ^rage im ^uni ftnb bie liingftcn (^age, under- stood) im ganjcn 3«t,'i'c« This earthquake was the most severe that we have had. Tiii'foiS (Srbhehcn ift bn* ftrf^tnfl-r Vr»j4dfii>a vnti' [§§126 127] COMPARISON OF ADJECTIVES. jcfto or urn days, fCv bie Xage. )Sion of c of as : ssively at the [)eifcr, hoarse; ° as ending of 'X, a hoarser 'caU, in the Dstantive of k) adjective , the broad- Imerifa (bev 1 the whole L^age, under- lat we have 157 r^) If no substantive can be supplied, the advert form pi"' ^eded by am is used, as : The lake is broader than the river, but the sea is the broadest (observe nof ^ the broadest /a^e, river or sea) per ®ee ift breiter a(# ber ^lu^, aber bie See ift am The days are longest (i. e., ^ at the longest,' not 'the ongest days') in June, :;^m ^uni finb bie STage an The earthquake was most severe on Monday »(m aVontag tuar bag Grbbcbcn am ^cftiaftcn (not' 'the severest earthquake '). ./sT\7 T^-!-?^'""''''"' '"^^ ^" strengthened by prefixing aUct- 2 In the preceding examples, the superlative ascribes a quality to the object in the highest degree /;. comparison (expressed or implied) with, or relatively to, a number of other objects, and is hence called the Relative Superlative but the English superlative with most often merely ascribes the quality in an eminently high degree, without instituting any comparison. When so used, it is called the Absolute Superlative, as: Your father was most kind (i. e. = 'exceedingly kind ' not = 'kind^.-/') ^^ ' The Absolute Superlative is rendered in German by an ad- verb of eminence, such as fcftr, very; U^, auBcrft, exceed- ingly, prehxed to the adjective in the positive as • %^x 'Mitx juar fcfjr (fjijj^ft, (iu^crft; Vour father kind. Gwtig, was luost (very, exceedingly, extremely) 158 LESSON XXV. [§§ «7- 3. The superlative is commonly used in German of two ob- jects (which is not admissible in Engl.), as : 2)er (gri)^ere or) griijtc Don biefen jtvei ^nabcn. The taller of these two boys. 128. Comparison of Adverbs. lUi Adverbs are compared like adjectives, the superlative form being that with am, as : angene^m, agreeably angenefimer, more agreeably am angene^mftcn, most agreeably 129. gut, good ^od), high na^(e), near Irregular Comparison. Bcfjer ht\t (different root) tjij^jer i?oct)ft (drops c in Compar.) naf)er nci^ft (nearest, next; in- serts t in Stiperl?) t)iel, much mc^r mcift (different root) n^enig, little (of quantity) mtltber minbeft (different root) Notes. — i . 9J?cl)r is used as adverb of quantity only. For the Subst. ttiel)rctc8, PI. mcl)rfte 'some, several,' see §§ 152, 175. 2. SBentg also has the regular forms tueniflev, rociiigft. 130. Defective Comparison. The following Comparatives and Superlatives are formed from adverbs, etc. (some of which are obsolete) : (au^en, without, adv^ au^er, outer ciufeevft, outermost utmost, extreme / r 1. r -x / t. V ^ ( «^eft, soonest (c^e, before, conj:) (etjer, sooner, adv:) | ' ' ^^^^ (binten, behind, rtrt'z;.) l^'tUer, hinder (jinterft, hindmost (inncn, within, adv,) inner, inner innerft, innermost I3i] COMPARISON OF ADVERBS. 159 {la^, late, obsolete) (mittel, middle) (nib, below, obsolete) {iihiw., above, adv.) (unten, below, adv.) te^t, latest, last mittler, middle mil.aft, middle nieber, lower nieberft, lowest ober, upper unter, lower (born, before, adv.) Berber, fore oberft, uppermost unterft, lowest, undermost Dorbeift, foremost 131. Strong Verbs: fricrcil Model. Infin. Impf. p. Part. Germ. Model: frfer.n fror j^efroven Engl. Analogy: freeze froze frozen Ablaut: ic, etc. q j Modd7§^ )^' '°"^ ^ '' "*"''' ''^^^'"g"'«hes this Model from the ld)ie6eu LIST. A. (Infin. ic, ji.) biegen, bend fjog bieten, bid, offer t>ot fliegen (N.), fly (on wings) flocj flie^en (N.), flee (escape) f(ol; frieren (N. A.), freeze, be cold fror Ije^en, lift, raise ^ob, ^ub (er)!iefen, (er)fiiren, choose erfov liigen, lie (tell a falsehood) log (i)er)Iicren, lose berlor frf)ieben, shove, push [c^ob fd^iDoren, swear (be)triigen, deceive, cheat n)iegen, weigh, have weight (intr.) jie^en (N. A.), pull (tr.) ; move (intr.) §og Remarks. — i. ^ieaen, bteten. fnecren gebogen geboten geflogen gcflo^en gefroren gef;oben erforen gelogen t)erloren gefc^oben fd;)UDr, fcbtDuv ge[d)tt)oren betrog betrogen iuog geti'ogeu gesoflen fliebcu, lichen, have also the forms (now used only in poetry) with cu for ic in th< i6o LESSON XXV. [§131 2. and 3. Sinjjj. Pres. Ind. and 2. Sing. Imper., as: bcucjft, bcuv\t, bcug ; flcud^ft, flcucl) ; jeudjft, jcuc^. 2. 2lsicneu, to rock, is weak (tmegte, geimegt). 3. Observe the change of ^ into g in jie^en, jog, gejogen. i??. (Infin. c, 0.) fc^^eren, shear fc^or ge[rf)oren lueben (W.), weave toob geiuoben iudgcn, weigh (trans.) h)og geiuogen (be)U'cgcn, induce, persuade betuog bctuogen Remark. — 'iHluegcn, 'to move (set in motion)' is weak (benjcgtc, beiuegt). ' Vocabulary. metal, ba^3 ^Jletafl' to offer, an'bictcn abolish, annul, cancel, aufs f)cben put off, delay, postpone, au^': fcbicbcn remove (neut.), auc/giebeiv prefer, lu^i'^icbcu (dat. of pers.) fly away, iueg'flicgcn roof, biTg Tad) colour, bie '^•axbi hunger, ber ^linger cook, ber ^od) * red ' subst.), bag 9?^t sparrow, bev Sperling part, portion, bev ^eil shore, bank, bag Ufev on that account, therefore, bcebalb yet, still (in spite of all), borf) straight, gerabe (adj.) exactly, just, gerab*: (^adv.) as soon as, fobalb Idioms : 1. I prefer gol«l to silver, 3d» ^jclu' tai Wolb bcin (Stlbcr oor. 2. I like the winter in Canada, 3d) Ifabt ten Winter in @anaba gci'ii. EXERCISE XXV. A. 1. Sin ©perling in ber §anb ift beffer olg ^mi auf bem ^arf)e. 2. gjiarie ift jitngev aU l^ouife, aber jie i|t bod; grijf;er. §i3il STRONG verbs: frictcn model. i6i 3. |>unger ift bcr 6efte ^od). 4. ^er jungc (^jeneral SB ift ein ta^frcver .^clb ala fein 58ater. 5. Tie Sieifcnben [cftoben ba« Soot Doni lifer unb ruberten iibcv ben m% H. ^Hufflejc^oben ift mc^t aufgefyofcen. 7. ilBeld>e^ Den biefen 3}Jabc^en ift ba^ gro^te ? 8. ^e ^Df)er ein ^^^oget fliegt, je flciner f*eint er gu lucrbcn. 9. ^er ^rembe l)at mir mel;r fiir mein ^:>au^ angebotcn aU ©ie, aber ic^ glaube uirf)t, bafe er fo gut hqai}Un iriirbe. 10. ^e flei^igcr tuir finb, befto mebv lernen W\x. 11. ^m ©ommer ^ahe ic^ ba^ Sanb ganj gem, aber im SBinter jie^c id; bie Stabt Dor. 12. ^TJir lln= glucfad)en ift ber ^-u^ erfrorcn, alg id; nad; .§aufc ritt. 13. 6os balb h)ir unfer *oau^ Devfauft l;atten, ^ogen Juir au^. 14. 211^ ic^ auf bcm Jiianbe ioar, luog id) mc^r aU id; je^t iuiege. 15. @g ift tDaf>r, ba^ bie reic^ften ^cnU nicbt tmmer bie glucflid;ften finb. 16. ®er 9{egen, loeld^er un^ bie ?Reife Derleibet hat, Wat me^r nu^Iic^ al^ angene^m. 17. ^ie iWutter ^cb bie BiMi Don bem ©lag auf, \vM)^§ ilir unartigeg Jlinb auf bie @rbe gefc^miffen l)atU. 18. liefer ^nabe Ijat feine GItern betrogen, unb be^ljalb ift er ungliidlicb. 19. ^rieren ©ie, §err ^>rofeffor? ^e^t nic^t, aber ic^ fror, alg ic^ auf ber ©tra^e ivar. 20. ®er ^ciger ^at ben 35ogel gef^^offen, gerabe al§ er auf ben ^aum flog 21. 2^on juem tourbe ^^r §aug gefauft? 22. $8on einem J^remben, ber feit Dierjeljn STagcn bei meinem ^Setter auf «e= fuc^ ift. B, 1. Lead is a heavy metal, but gold is the heaviest. 2. This painter is not so famous as his father, but his pictures are just as fine. 3. George lost his parents when he was still very young. 4. Those students have lost a great deal of time, but now they are studying more industriously. ^5. l%e bird flew away, just as the huntsman was on the point of shooting it. • 6. When is the weather coldest in Canada ? In the month of January it is coldest. 7. Which bird flies fastest ? 8. The useiui is better than the beautiful. 9. What kind^of a dog has the huntsman lost.? 10. Iron is heavy, lead l62 L'^SSON XXVI. [§§ 13a- is heavier, but gold it, heaviest of all 11. Green is a more agreeable colour for the eyes than ret! 12. If the stick is too long, cut a piece of it off. 13. The upper part of the city of Quebec is much finer than the lower. 14. The weather seems to be warmer to-day, but it froze ^perf.) yester- day. 15. When I was younger, I weighed more than my brother, but now he weiglis more than I. i{y. The upper part of the city of Quebec was built earlier than the lower part ORAL EXERCISE XXV. 1. 1st der junge General ein tapferer Mann? 2. Ziehen Sie das Land der Stadt vor ? H. Weshalb ist der Kn^be so traurig? 4. Wann hat der Jager den Vogel geschossen? 5. Welche Studenten lernen am meisten - b. Welches ist besser, reich und ungliicklich oder ?rm und gliicklich (zu) sein ? Vki LESSON XXVI. DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. - STRONG VERBS: fingcn model. 132. Demonstrative Pronouns. The Demonstrative Pronouns are : 1. bet, bic, bo0, that 2. biejcr, bicfe. bicjcs, this, that 3. jcnet, jcnc, jcnci, that, yonder 4 berjenige, bicjcnigc, baSjcnigc, that 5 bcr namUr^c, bie namlir^c, bog niimHr^c, the same 6. bcr|e(b(ig)c, biefelb(ig)c, bttg|clb(tge), the same 194] DE^40NSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 163 7. ffll(^(er), foli^Ce), foIr^(e8), such, such a 8. bcgglei^en, bcr ^Icic^eu, of t it Kind (of tijose kinds) Remark. — rhese may all be used either as Substantive or Adjective 1 'onouns, except beetle' i;cn see § 139, i, below). 133. I. J)ii, bic, ilttg, used adjecvively (i. e., before a substantive), s declined lik^- the Definite Article (which is merely the demonstrative adjective weakened and un- emphasized), as : ^er' manv that man. '^tx mann', the man'. 2. When used substantiv ly it is declined thus : MASC. Nom. ber Gen. beffen Dat. bem Ace. beu FEM. bie bcrcn bev bie Plural. ALL GENDERS. bic bercr (bereit) bencn bie Sin^ alar. NEUTER. bag bcffen bem Note. — The turm biren (Gen. PI.) is only used as = 'of them,' as : How many children have yo ? I have oven of them. 93? ie t)ielc ^inber ()nlieit ate ? 3cf) {)abc tJrreit beu. 134. :^tc|er and jcncr both follow the bt« ♦"er Model (see § 6), but bic§ is used for biefc^ in the Neuter Nom. and Ace. Sing, when used substantively, as : ^ic3 ift 1, .n 33ud», . (Sr batte bies nt*t ge^ort. This is my book. He h d not heard this. btefcr = this (the nearer of two obje^^ ^s, hence also =) the latter, as: jencr = that, yo^ 1er (the more remote of two objects, Hence also =) the former; ._.-,.- _ .- ^. — ... .~,-,\- - jj-vp^.*, This treo is large, but that (oi ) is larger. i64 LESSON XXVI. [§§ 134- 3ntcr 93aum, yonder tree (pointed out as remoiS). ^arl unb ^Bilbclm finb "sHriibcv; bicfcr ift fleif^ii^ jcncr ift tvage, Charles and William are brothers ; the latter is diligent, the former is idle. 1JI5. 1. ^Cl'jClliflC is declined in both parts, like the Defi- nite Article followed by the adjective form jenig with we-^k endings, thus : \ Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. I Nom. bcrjenigc bicjcnicjc tJoSjcmgc bicjcnigcn Gen. bcgjcnigcn bcrjcmgctt bcSjcnigen berjenigcn etc. etc. etc. etc. 2. %tx or bcrjcni(tc is used : {a) before a genitive case, as : ^d; \)^\it 31}rcn .v)ut unb bciti jcnigen) v5§vcg 'SruberU, I have your hai and that of your brother (your brother's); Note. — The demonstrative may also be omitted in this construction, as in English ; or the simple bcr may be used. (^) before a relative clause, as : ^cr(jcmfic), wcJr^cv gufrieben ift, ift glucfUc^, He who is contented, is happy. ^tcCjcnigc) ?^rau ift am fd)Dnften, tucli^c gut ift, That woman is most beautiful, who is good. '^x §au§ unb ba0(|cnigc), movin unr iuofjnen, Your house and that in which we live. Note. — In sentences like the first, where bei(ient(io) is used substantively, the demonstrative and relative together may be replaced by the compound relative Wer, thus : . Ser jufrieben ift, ift qludltrf). 130] DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. • 16$ tiU\. ^crfdbe (bcrfclbiflc") =» ' the same,' as : the same hat, bcrjclbc !o\\t ; and is declined like bcrjenige, \n two parts, written as one word, thus : Singular. Plural. MASC. FEM. NEUTER. ALL GENDERS. Nom. bcrfclbc bicfclbc bogfclbc biciclbeit Gen. bcgfclbcn bcrfelbcu bcSfelbcn berfelben etc. etc. etc. etc. (For examples of its use see § 143, 2-4, below). Note. — (^elbig is sometimes used without article, with strong end- ings: felbigcr, -e, -e8. 137. ^cr ttamltf^t sometimes replaces bcrfelbc. l.*J8. I. ein ; foli^ gutcr 2Bein, or folc^cr gutc 2Bein. Note. —The adjective has the J/rt;//^ endings when fold) is uninflected, otherwise it has the weak endings, except in the plur., where it some- times has the strong. 2. @old^ with fin is often replaced by fo, as: (So ein ©cin ; cin fo guter Scin. 139. I. ^c^gleic^en is used as an indeclinable neuter sub- stantive 1 never as adjective), thus : %i) batte bcggleic^en nie gebijrt, i had never heard that sort of thing (anything of that kind). i66 LESSON XXVI. [§§ 139- Note. — ©e^ll^ctt^en is also used adverbially, =« 'in the same way, also.' 2. ^crgleic^en is used both substantively (referring to a fern, or plur. noun) and adjectively. In the latter case it is invariable, standing before substantives of any gender and number, as : ^crgleic^en ^ein, $)crgletc^cn SOBeinc, Wine of that sort. Wines of that sort. Note.- The phrase : iinb berflteid)en mc^v (abbrev. u. bgl. m.) is used forunb jo )uciter (11. f. ra.) = etccetera. General Remarks on Demonstrative Pronouns. 140. The English ' that ' is rendered in German : x. As Demonstrative Pronoun : {a) Most generally by iJCr or bicfcr, when there is no contrast with any other object, thus : That man, bcr' 5!)ianu or btcfcr 9Jlann. (Jb) By bcr or bcrjcitige before a genitive case or a relative clause (see § 135, 2, above). {c) By fcilcr, when the object is distinctly pointed out as remote (== yor, yonder), or as m.ore remote than another, thus : ^cncr ©ttum, That tree (over yonder). ^iefc§ ^m^ unb jcncg. This house and that one. 2. As Relative by bcr or tuclt^cr (see § 95), thus : The book that I have, :Da^ 33u4 bttg (luclc^eg) id} \:i(xU. 3. As Conjunction by bttj, thus : I shall tell your father that you are diligent, ^d^ hjcrbe beinem %aUx fagen, ba^ bu flei^ig bift. 141. The neuter pronouns bo8, bicf(c8), jCttCS are used iKC cs^ sec 8 39, i> ii"*^ uitiu;t»/ i> «-> xvem. -/ i^^-tv/iv tnv, wii-- »43l DEMONSTRATIVE PRONOUNS. 167 'to be/ representing ^he real subject, which follows the verb, and with which the verb agrees, as : ^06 i[t mein SBruber, That is my brother. 2)icf(f&) ift ^^re ©d;Jve[ter, This is your sister. ^encg finb feine 33ttrf)cr, Those are his books. 142. Xcr and jencr, when referring to inanimate objects, are often rephced by the adverb ba(r), 'there,' before pre- positions i^compare § 38, Rem. 5) and biefer by ^ier, as : ^(ft l)aW \M^ bomit ^n ibun, I have nothing to do with that (f/ier^hh), ^tcrmit mu^ ic^ fc^Uefeen, With this {/lerewith) I must close. Note. — This substitution is not made before a relative, as : 3ii) bad)te an ta& [not bavaii), toag ®ic fasten, I was thinking of that which (what) you were saying. 143. Use of Demonstratives to replace Personal Pronouns. 1. The neuter gen. bcffcn replaces that of the neuter pers. pron. (feiner) referring to things, as : ^c^ erinnre mic^ bcffcn nicfit, T do not recollect it (yeiucr = him, of him). 2. The genitive of bfr and that of bfrjclde are frequently used to replace the possessive adjective of the 3. person, in order to avoid i mbiguity, as : 2)er ©raf tt)ar mit feuicm (beg ©rafen) ^ager unb bcffen •(be-g pagers) ^uubcii (or mit ben .t)unben begfeldcn) auf ber ^agb. The Count was at the hunt with his (the Count's) huntsman and his (the huntsman's) dogs. Note. — a«it fcittcn .s)itiibeit would mean 'with the Count's dogs.' 3- ^crfdbe is used in other cases also to prevent ambiguity (al so uiCfCj: in the same way;, as [68 LESSON XXVI. t§§ 143 fDJein 33ruber ift bci mcinem ^rcuubc, unb berfelBe (or bicfcr) acfitet i^n febr ; or: ci-(intnn 'iirubev) ad)tet bcnfcit'en \ii)i', My brother is at my frier -'i, and he (the latter, the friend) esteems him ( iny brother) very much ; or : he (my brother) esteeniS him (my friend) very much. 4. ^crfclbc also replaces the personal pronouns, to p/event repetitions like ibn — v>biien, 3ie — fie, etc as : Diefcr ^iln'tn ift c^xif, \d^ tarn ^sbncn iJenfclden (for i^n ^^UCn) em^feblen, This wii e is good, / can recommend it to you. 144. Strong Verbs : jtn(|cn Model. Germ. Model: Engl. Analogy: Ablaut: Infin. fingen sing t LIST. binben, bind briugcn (N.), press finben, find fliiujen, ring, sound (0e)(ingett (N.), succeed (impers., with dat. of pers.) ringen, wring (the hands, etc.) fd^Uingen, twine ; swallow fclnoinbeu (N.), vanish frf^mugen, swing fingen, sing finfen, sink fpringcn (N. A.), spring, leap ttinlfcn, drink (of human beings) ttjiitben, wind 'tfiiTgcn^ force Impf. f«ng sang a banb brang fanb !Iang gclang rang fcblang frf)tt)anb fd)iuang fang fan! f))rang Iran! U)anb P. Part. gefiingen siin^j i gebunben gebrungen gefuttben gcflungen gelungen gerungen gefrf)lungm gefcbiuunbcn gefc^hjungen gefungen gefunfen gefpvungen getrunfen geiuunben flCilDunacn 143 M4J STRONG verbs: fiitgcii model. 169 to press in, penetrate, ein'= escape, entflie^en [tringen invent, evfinben remember, [idi erinnern (-}-gen. of thing) drown, be drowned, ertrinfen spring upon, Ioi^'|>ringen (auf -f- ace.) mean, suppose, meinen oblige, t)cri)mben vanisli, Uci-)d;i»ini)en Vocabulary. on board, am ^.^orb grammar, bte Wramma'tif dealer, ber .SMnblev lion, ber ^bWi diver, ber ^auc^ier telephone, ba^ ^elep^on' clever, gcfdiidt prudent, cautious, lHn'[id)tig unfortunately, Icibev below, untcrbalb {-\- gen.) never yet, nod; nie EXERCISE XXVI. ^. 1. a)ieg ift mein ^^ettev au^ ^JJiontrcal ; feuuen ©ie if^n? '-i. 3alt)Df)I, biefcn fenne id; Qan^ c3ut, aber nid)t Wax, Wx mir (3c]tcvn ben ^i>rtef gebrad;t hat 3. din bijfcr ^inabe fdituancj fid) auf )>cn ^p^dbaum UP, (Garten feiiuH5 ^l^ad^bare iinb fd^miji bte ^jt^fel auf bie @rbe. 4. ^u biefem ^elbe l;aben bic 33auevn fd^ou ba^ (sjrae Gefd;mtte«, «^x in jenem tucrDen fie e^ crft morgcn fc^neibeii 5. ,^iebet t^., M€ md) baffon." 6. ^enee finb meine Munbe abev bie^ fmb biejenigen, MdK bev ^ager Dor acbt 4 agen Dcrloren bat unb bie t* gefunben I;abe. 7. evinncrn 2ic fid! beffcn, m<^ id; ^bnen bout alien 2d)(of5 ain Ufcr be^ 2ee^ crgdhlt babe ? 8. ^ e m tDiirbe id) feinen ifjaler leiben; ber luiirbe nie be^ablcn. 9 I^ie ©d)afer trieben i(;re .^erbcn iiber benfelben ^crg auf )oeld)en lt)ir ftiegen. 10. Tev lieifenbe ftieg Dom ^^ifcrbc unb banb ba^felbe an emeu fleuien i^auni 11. ^a^ ©duff ftief^ an einen ^-elfen, ba^ Saffer brang ein, unb ba^ Sd^ff fanf. U, .sd. babe tnid; be. fltffen, 2atcm ju lernen, aber e^ ift mix v'rd^t gelungen. 13.. ^Iier ^M 170 LESSON XXVI. [§§ 144- F)at. IT). ®a^ ift au^ meincr beutfd)en ©rammatif gettorben? ®ie fc^cint ganj i)erf(f;n)unben 311 feiu. 17. ®ag finb fc^onc (grbbeeren ; \vo ijaUn ®ie biefelben yetiuft ? 18. (Sie finb fd;on, nic^t iua()r? oold) ^rad;tige 33eeren finben Sie nicf»t bei jebem .t>dnblcr. 19. 3d fjeij^e^ 3Setter fjaben t»ir noc^ iv4t ge^abt. i2(). SSiaS iDurbc bir geantlx)Drtet, al^ bu nad) bem .tranfen frag* tcft? 91. Man fagte .lir, er fei ein mn\Q beffer. ^. 1 , The patient is just as weak to-day as he was yester- day. 2, Such happy days I have never yet passed ! 3. Where do you generally pass the winter? 4. Where is my pen? Have you found it ? 5. This is my neighbour of whom you have already heard so much. (>. The ship has sunk, and the people who were on board have been drowned. 7. I was looking for my coat, but found my father's. H. I should be very much obliged to you, if you sang me a beautiful song. 9. Which is poorer, he who has no money, or he who has no friends? 10. How should we escape if the boat sank? 1 1. Charles has already finished (the) learning (of) his lesson ; he is cleverer than I thought. 1;2. The diver that jumped from the bridge has unfortunately been drowned. 13. It will have been a good lesson for us, if it makes us more prudent in future. 14. Is that a new song? No, it is the same that I sang a week ago at your house. 15. The St. Lawrence River is the broadest in Canada ; below the city of Quebec it is broadest. Ki. The patient is better to-day; he will be allowed to go out to-morrow. ORAL EXERCISE XXVI. I . Was ist aus dem Taucher geworden ? 2. 1st Karl ge- schickter als Johann ? 3. Was hat der bose Knabe gemacht ? 4. Ist der Reisende dem Lowen entflohen ? 5. Ist es Ihnen gelungen, Latein zu lernen ? 6. Wessen Hunde sind das? «45J INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. i;i LESSON XXVII. JNOEFINITE PRONOUNS. -STRONG VERBS: jpimtn AND §Clfcn MODELS. ■'*^* Indefinite Pronouns. The Indefinite Pronouns are : (d) Substantive-. 1. jnan(indecl.),o.ie, they, people (Fr.^/i-) | 2. jebcrmomi, everybody, everyone I 3. jcmonb, j somebody, anybody | oi persons ( some one, any one C only 4. ntcmanb, | "o^^dy, no one, no person ( not anybody, etc. 5. dtuag, something, anything 6. ni(^U, nothing, not anything 7. ciltcr, one, some one 8. fciner, no one, none J ) of things S only (fciefer Mod- el) persons and things if) Adjective {2\%o used substantively): 1. Cinigc, ctltl^c (plur.), some, a few, several 2. ieb(llicb)cr iXt^Xx^tx), each (one), every one 3. mani^rr^ manv (a one) 4. me^rcrc (pi.;, se -ral 5. tiicf, much, pi. tiiere, many «. mettiH, little, pi. menigc, few 7. ttJclt^cr, some u JwTt:.-P.\!"^^^-^^. ^~'-' Adjectives are also i~^^ «. .*.«.u«uc i.umerai Adjectives (see Less. XXIX). (biefer Mod- el) persons and things 172 LESSON XXVII. 146- SI- t 1 146. 9Won f spelt with small letter and one it, to distinguish it from ber ^Diann, the man, from which it is derived) is the Indefinite Personal Pronoun, and is used to make a state- ment without specifying any particular person. It is equivalent to Engl ' one, they, we, you (indef. ), people,' etc., (French on), or to the impersonal use of the passive voice, as : 9Wan fagt. One says; they, people say; or it is said. ^Jian fann CI unb Safjer nidit jiifammcn uti,fd;en. One (we> you) cannot uhx oil and water. Remarks. — I. Ones self (refl.) = fi(^ ; one's = fcin (poss. adj.), as • SWttit fcfiamt fi(^ fcincr ^et)lcr, One is ashamed of one's faults. 2. 3Jian cannot be replaced by any other pronoun, as : 9)?an toivb miibe, tucnu man (not er) ^u lange arbeitet, A man (one) gets tired, when he works too long. 147. 3clDCtm«nn is used in the Sing, only; it takes -g in Gen., but is otherwise uninflected, as : ^cbcrmonn^ Sacfie ift nicmanbe^ ®acf)c. Everybody's business is nobody's business. ®ic ^ibel ift eiu ^i3ud) fiiv icbcvmanu (ace). The Bible is a book for everybody. 148. 3cmanb and its negative nicmantl are used in the Sing, only, and are declined thus : Nom. jemanb niemanb Gen. jemanbcS niemanbe§ ( jemanbcm < niemanbem I iemanb(ctt) ( niemanb(cn) Ace. temanb(cn') niemanb(cn) ^5^1 INDEFINITE PRONOUNS. 173 I, 2. Note, - The uninflected forms are preferable for the Dat. and Ace, as : 2Bir I)obeii nicmonU (ace.) gctabclt, We have blamed nobody. SBerbeu etc e.^ icmanD (dat.) fagcu ? Shall you tell it to anybody? 149. I. (^itoai is sometimes abbreviated to hiag, as : ^c^ Will bit ItJOg fagen, I will tell you something. 2. After ctniO0 and itld^tg, an adjective has the strong neuter ending -c0 (see § 122, Rem. 1 1, above). 3. ©ttHOS and ni(i)i& are also used as Indefinite Numerals (see Less. XXIX, § 168). 160. (^incr (biefer Model)/ one, someone, anyone,' is used : In the Nom. Sing. Masc. = man. To supply the missing cases of man, as : @§ tf)ut cincm (dat.) leib, bon [einen ^-reunben gi^ fcfjeiben. One is sorry to part from one's friends. 3. Before a substantive, as : filter mciner ^reunbe (tion meinen ^-reimben), One of my friends. @in(c)g i)on biefen ^ucBern, One of these books. 4. To represent a preceding substantive, as : ^aUn ©ie ein ^ucb ? ^a, ia^ hahc cin(c)0. Have you a book > Yes, I have one. Note. - The c maybe dropped in the ending of the Nom. and Ace. Neut. 161. Mmv (biefer Model) is the negative of einer, and is used : 1. As equivalent to niemanb. 2. Before a substantive, as: «. Reiner t)on meinen ^reunbcn. None (not one) of my friends. 3. To represent a preceding substantive, as : ^ahm Bk cin '^ndj ? y^ein, ic^ habi fcm(c)«. -.OTE. — Like emcr, it may drop t in the Nom. and Ace. Neuter. 174 LESSON XXVII. 15a- 152. ©Inige (tili^t), mc^rerc, = * some, a few, several,' as : ^iniftC bon meinen ^reunbcn. Some (a few) of my friends. iSRc^rcre biefer 33u^er, Several of these books. 153. ^ebcr, jebhjeber, iegU(i)er (b:efer Model) or etn jeber, etc. (def. art. -|- adj. with mixed declension) are used, especially in the Masc, for jebermann, as : ^ie 33ibel tft ein SBurf) fur jcbcn. (^in) jcbcr tft fcine^ «Iu(fe§ 3c^mteb; Every man (one) is the architect ilit. smith) of his own fortune. 154. SKmt^cr, * many a one, many a peison ' (bi; ;:i: Model), is used to express indefinite plurality, as : 9JlotJ^cr bent't. Many a one (person) thinks. 155. iBt\d)tX (biefer Model) is used for ' some,' referring to a preceding substantive, as : ^ahw eie ^^rot ? ^a, id) f^abe mt^fi, 156. For tJtcl and ttJCttig see Less. XXIX, § 176. 157. When the Engl, 'anybody, anyone, anything,' = 'anybody, etc., af alV (indefinite and general), they are rendered by irgcnb jemanb, irftciib einer, irgcnb ctiDa^, as : Anybody (at all) will tell you, where I live, ^ygcnb jemanb (or einer) iuirb ^sl;nen fagcu, too ic^ troijnc. ^rf> bin mit irftCttb cttwa§ sufrieben, I am contented with anything (at all). 158. Strong Verbs: fpiniicn Model. Infin, Impf. p. Part. , Germ. Model: f^innett fpann gef^onncn Engl. Analogy: spin span (spun) (incomplete) Ablaut: i Q (59] S"*RONG verbs: fi^innen model. 175 LIST. (Note -The Impf. Subj. is also given, on account of variations occurring.) (bc)flim.m, begin Uaam beQamt Begonnei. rtnnen (N.), flow rann ranne gctonnm f*uimme„ (N. A.), swim f4,n,am„, 1 1 J"™' Befd;Wommcn fmnen,tliink {ann ffiune gefonnen (fle)mi„„en, win, gain gewann .) 9;;^*-; fl„„„,„,„ Note. — Observe the subjunctive forms with vowel of P. Part + Urn laut, instead of vowel of Impf. Ind. « 159. Strong Verbs: ^clfctt Model. T Pr. Ind. 2. 1. Sine, i RT. ^«^/. Analogy : wanting. Ablaut: c i - .. .. a 0, Uoru LIST. (Note. -The 2. 3. sing. Pres. Ind., 2. sing. Imper.,and Impf. Subj. are also given.) Bergen, hide birgft, birgt, birg barg bavge geborgen ''tlt'"'^' (birftef^,birft,6irfi) bavfl j^^Jj geborftcn (i)er)berben(N.), berbirbft, etc. uerbarb Derbur6e ijerborben spoil (intr.) ( btafcf) brafc^e \ brofrf) brofc^e worth giltft, gilt, gilt gait gafte gegolten brefc^;n, thrash brifdjeft, etc. > gebrofc^en ^*.*^ ■ -.*. 176 LESSOxV XXVII. {>eIK help ^ilfft, etc. ^alf fd(>elten, scold \d}\{t\t, fdnlt, fd)ilt fdmlt fterbcn, (N.), die ftivbft, etc. ftarb iDcrben, woo luirbft, etc. limvb Jucrbeu (N.), be- it)ivft, toivb, toeibc luarb t§i59 ^tfc gcfjolfcn fdniltc ge)d;olteu ftiirbe gcftorben iuiirbc gciuorben luiirbc iuiirfc geiuorben ijciDorfen come - - ^^ unube luerfcn, throw Unrfft, etc. iDuvf Remarks. — i. Most of these verbs have i) or ii in the Impf. Siibj. instead of ii, which cannot be distinguished in sound from the c of the Pres. Ind. ; thus ftcrbc and ftdrbe would sound alike. 2. 'iscrbcrbcn, when trans., is both strong and weak (uers berbtC/Dcrbcvbt). 3. 5Berbcu has umvb or iourbe in the sing. ; luurbcu only in the plur. (see § 19). 4. 'J'he imperative never has the final -c in these verbs, except iDcrbe. 5. Observe the omission of (c)t of 3. sing. J' res. Ind. in the verbs with stem in -t, -&. Vocabulary. to be or do (of health), fid) befinbcn reflect, deliberate, fid; be= ftnncu accomplish, leiften remain over, be left, ii'brig bUibcu hide, conceal, bevbergen requite, reward, Dcrgelten complete, finish, uoKcn'bcn throw away, lucg'lucifcn run away, vanish, ;;crrtnnen the conduct, "oa^i ^etragen poet, bcv ^id^tcr barley, bic ©crfte oals, bcv .s)-ifcv sailor, bcr ')Jiatvofe musician, bev 'jJiufifcr need, necessity, bie 9?ot* dove, pigeon, bic laube phte, bcr iTcKcr loss, bcr 3Scrlult' * §l59l STRONG verbs: ^etfeii model. ^77 emb tassment, perplexity, thereto, baju' bi. Jcno'iicnbdt longer, ni*t me^r heat, bev ^I^^eijen as, luie evil, t>i)[c Jcii«,rt; I e the country. ;j(f, bht fin Srranb toom 8ttnJ>e. EXERCISE XXVII. A. 1. 3Ser 311 i)icl vcbet, Iciftct Jucnig. 2. ^erjcnige, tvelcBer 311 Did rcbct, Iciftct Jycniii. 3. -Die^ finb nieine 3d)ur)e, nber jenc^ finb (bie) %\)x<{\\). 4. ^^sjer i-manius ^rcunb ift, ift uienianbc^ Jreunb. 5. Gin ptcr (Shrift ijcvgilt m\i^ iiiit ©utcm. (J. ©^ ift fo ebcn jeinanb hicv i3CJuc|en. 7. !©c' beg Don bicfen 58an.- bernjicben 3ie Dor, bag rote obcr bag blaue? H. 3Ben fu*ft fcu? ll^c^ fuc^^e bie arme Jamilie, bercn ^Intter geftorben ift. 0. .t)abeu 3ic fc^^on :3bren ill^cijen gebrofd^en ? ^Wan brifd;t I;eute ben geftern faufte, finb Derborben. 14. ^:))tan bilft gem einem, ber fid> felbft bilft. ' 15. CMermit fc^ide id; %Ui\\ bag (sjelb, mcUbeg eie fo freunblid; gelvefen finb, mir ju Iei{;en. IG. einb 3ie ein ^reunb Doni @d)lt)immen? ^eM nid)t inebr, aber id) fd)lt)ainm gern, alg id) junger n>ar. 17. ®er Unglitdliclie befann fief) Xo^wo^t, fc! att aber enblicl) ^x^ ben 3?anb beg 3!^ooteg unb fprang ing ':K?affer. 18. 3ft er ertrunfen? 9Jein, er iDurbe oon ben ^:)J?atrofen gerettet! B. 1. Good morning, Mr. Bell, how are you to-day? 2. Have you any money .? Yes, to be sure, I have some, but not enough for my journey. 3. Where is the tree to which the traveller tied his horse.? 4. People take cold easily when they are tired. 5, Schiller and Beethoven were Germans the <^. v«^, IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) -^^ :/ 1.0 I.I L25 lif I4£ 12.0 2.5 22 il 1116 23 WEST MAIN STREET WEBSTER, N.Y. 14580 (716) 872-4503 rnoiograpiiic Sciences Corporation - ^^ "^1% % '^ ^ /> 178 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. [§§ I60^ latter was a great musician, the former a great poet. 6. Mr. A. is a lazy ma'n ; he would not work at all, if necessity did not force him to it. 7. We found the money we lost a week ago. 8. Many a one begins what he will never finish. 9. Mary, my child, throw that apple away; it is spoilt. 10. Have you shot many pigeons ? We have shot only a few. 1 1. Except my brother and me nobody is at home. 1:>. The mother is scolding, because her naughty child h:>.s thrown a plate upon the ground. 1,3. Where is the River St. Lawrence broadest? 14. When the children had drunk, the cat drank the milk which remained over (was left). 15. The women OR (an) the shore screamed and wrung their hands, when the boat sank in which their husbands were. 16. Has the money which was lost been found ? ORAL EXERCISE XXVII. 1 . Wann w^rd man den Hafer dreschen ? 2. Warum ver- birgt der bose Knabe sein Gesicht ? 8. Wem hilft man gern ? 4. Sind Sie ein Freund vom Jngen ? 5. Was fiir ein Mann ist Herr Bell? (j. Weshalb schilt die Frau.? SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON D. ON CERTAIN ADJECTIVES AND PRONOUNS. 160. Adjectives used as Attributes only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as predicates : 1. Derivatives In -til, -Crtt (denoting material), as ; no(bcn, of gold, golden ; fillicm, of silver. These are replaced in the predicate by the substantive vi'ith coil, as: 2)iefe Ul)r ift tion >iSilbei-, This watch is of silver. 2. Many in -if^ and -U(^; as: biebifd), thievish; tierifd), bestial; l)cucl)= Icvifrf), hypocritical ; tiiglid), daily ; jaljrlirf), annual; Wivfltd), actual, real. 3. Those in -jjj from adverbs of time and place, as: f)initip, of to-day; ^tefig, of this place. i6a] ADJECTIVES USED AS PREDICATES ONLY. 179 161. Adjectives used as Predicates only. The following classes of adjectives are not used as attributes: 1. Those that are really nouns (though spelt with a small letter) such as: nngit, afraid; feinb, hostile; freiinb, friendly ; leib, sorry; not, needful- nu<5e, useful ; fdjulb, guilty. 2. The following among others: bereit, ready getroft, confident eiuciebeuf, mindful ^^^^Ij^, aware gor, cooked, done (of food) grom, averse gong unb gcibe, current (of money.etc.) irrc astray, wrong toilOaft, partaking Note - Both these classes of adjectives are incapable of comparison in the ordinary tTvel"''at ""^ "'"^^^^"'^^"'^'"^""'^''^^^^ '"■"^"'"^ ""^' ^"'•""» '"' Jften respec- er njurbc tneincm »ruber imnter titt(,r flrnm, He grew more and ,„ore averse to mv brother. S5aS tf)at mtr am tneiptcil Ulb, I was most sorry for that (re/aUve superl.). 162. Remarks on certain Pronouns. 1. The pronouns \vn; h)a8 are frequently followed by the demonstrative kv m the qffer clause, and always so when the latter (the seeming ante- cedent) is in a diJerent case from that of the relative, as: 9Bcr l)at, Urn mirb gcgebcn, To him that hath shall be (is) given. 2. The neuter pronouns c.^ btU^ lun.% jcbrg, atleS are often used in the Norn, and Ace. Sing, in reference to a mwtier of persons or things, espe- cially if of different gender, as: a^aiiiier, 2Bcibcr, f inbcr, ailcs fifirie uin ^ilfe, fo laiit t» fonn^c Men, women, children, all cried for help as loud as they could; ^viil) iibt fid), luo^ ciii iWciftcu uifi-bcii jdiK, Those practice early, who would become masters. Note. — Observe that the verb is singular. 3. 35?a« is sometimes used for Uianim? ('why.?'), as: aBttStDeiiiftbu? Why dost thou weep .> 4. The relative adverb lute ('as ') after fold) cill or fo elll ('such a') is usually followed by a personal pronoun, agreeing in gender and number with the antecedent, as : ®old) 00) eiu mam, (or ein mmn) »t)ie mir tOn nie qefanut ()atten, auch a man as we had never known. ' NoTE.-The demonstrative fold; or f is often omitted, as indicated in the above example. i8o LESSON XXVIII. l§§ 163- LESSON XXVIII. NUMERALS: CARDINALS AND ORDINALS. - STRONG VERBS: f|jrC(^Cn MODEL. NUMl iRALS. 1 63. Cardinals. 104. Ordinals. 1. ein^; cin (cr), -c, -(00) 1st. ber crftc 2. jtuei 2nd. „ iWiiit 3. brei 3rd. „ brhie 4. mer 4th. „ i)ierte 5. funf Ath. „ fiinfte 6. fedjg (ith. „ fecb^te 7. fieben \ 7th. „ fiebcnte 8. ac^t 8th. „ arf)tc 9. neun Otli. „ neunte 10. jef^n 10th. „ jebnte 11. elf nth. „ elfte 12. §tt)otf l:.'th. „ giDblfte' 13. bveijc^n 1 3th. „ breijcbnte 14. mevjet^n 14th. „ Dicrjcbnte 15. fiinfjel;!! or fimfjcbn 15th. „ fiinf= or fi'mfjel^nte 16. fcf^jcf^n llJth. „ fed)5el}nte n. flc65el)n 17th. „ fiebsc^nte 18. adUjc^n 18th. „ ad)t5el)nte 19. nninjctjn U)th. „ neungcfjntc 20. jtnatt'tg 20th. „ giuan^igftc 21. c'ti nnb ju^anjig 21st. , eiu unb 3tt)an3ig)te 22. 3H)ci unb Siuanjig 22nd. „ gtuei imb ghjanjigfte 30. 'brci^ig 30th. „ brcif5igfte 40. Dienij^ 40th. . t)ier3ig[te 50. funfjigoi • funfjig 50th. „ funfjigfte or funf= l§§ 163- 165J REMARKS ON THE CARDINAL NUMERALS. 181 VERBS: nfjel^nte mnjigfte >r fiinf: 60. ferftjig 70. fieb(en)5te 80. ac^tjig 90. neunjig 100. ^unbert 101. f^uubert (unb) eing 123. l)unbert (unb) brei unb jirangig 60th. 70th. 80th. 90th. 100th. 101st. 123rd. ber fedigigfte „ fieb(en)5igfte ., ad;t^igfte „ neunjigfte „ ^unbertfte „ ^unbert unb crfte „ ^unbert (unb) brri unb amanjigftc Cardinals. 200. 300. 1000. 1001. 1036.. 1887. •10,000. 100,000. 1,000,000. 2,567,849. jiuei ^unbert brei I;unbert taufenb taufcnb unb eing taufenb (unb) fed;^ unb brei§if j taufenb (unb) ac^t t)unbert (unb) fieben unb ac^tjig ( or ad)tjef)nf)unberi fieben unb ac^tgig 5ef)n taufenb f^unbert taufenb eine ^Jtillion' 5iuei gjJiaionen, funf ^unbert (unb) fieben unb fedigig taufenb, a6:}t ^unbert (unb) neun unb mer^ig. Interrogative Ordinal : ber toicHiclftc ? which (in order) .? what day of the month ? (See § 166, 3, Note 2). 165. Remarks on the Cardinal Numerals. ■ I. @tn only is declined throughout, thus : {a) Before a substantive after the mein Model (§ 8), like the Indefinite Article, which is the same word un- emphasized, as : (k\W mam, one man ; ein ^Kann', a man. 1 82 LESSON XXVIII. tSi«S Note. — The numeral eiii is sometimes printed with a capital, or spaced out (= Engl, italics) to distinguish it from the Article, as : SBtr Ijaben (fin' (e i n) 33iirf), We have one book. SBir {)abcu ctn 53ucf)', We ha^^e a book. (l) Used sul)stantively (see also § 150, above) without article, after bicfer Model (§ 6), as : ®iner bon meincn ^reunben. One of my friends. Unfer eincr. One of us {of our sort). {c) After an article or other determinative word, like an adjective, as : 2)er eine ^rubev. The one brother. 3}iein eincr ©a)u(), (The) one of my shoes. Note. — With the definite article it may be used substantively also, as : Jier eine iiiib ber nnbcre, (The) one and the other and even in the plural (= some, one party), as* ^tc cincn iaiiteii bieei, bic anbcrn jcncg, Some (the one party) said this, others (the othei party) that. (d) (Sing is the form used in counting. 2. 3h>ci and brci may have -er in the Gen, and -t\\ in the Dat. when not accompanied by any article, etc., as • 2lu0 glceicr ober breicr 3^ws^" 9Jfunb fommt bie 2Ba^r{>t:t, Out of the mouth of two or three witnesses cometh the truth. 9)ian faun nicf>t ^toeicn ^erren bienen. One cannot serve two masters. Note. — The CJen. -tX is necessary to show the case, but may be re. placed by t)on; but the Dat. -Clt before a substantive is rare, the -n of the substantive sufficiently showing the case. 3. ©cibc = 'both,' refers to two objects taken together, and is declined like an adjective in the Plur. ; N. beibc, G. beiber, etc. ; bic beibcn ; meine beibcn ^riiber. It often §i6sl REMARKS ON THE NUMERALS. 183 replaces jiuei after determinative words, as in the last example. The neuter sing, form beibcl is also found, as : 33eibf0 tft \va ;t, Both (things) are true. Notes. - i. Both / us = wir bcibe(n) (we two). 2. • Both * as conjunction = foluo!)t, etc. (See Less. XL.) 4. Other cardinals are not declined unless used substan- tively (see next section). 5. The numben 'rom 13 to zg are formed by adding -je^n (Engl, -teen) to t.ie units (but fecbje^n drops -8). 6. The multiples of ten (20—90) add -jij^ to the units, itoongifl, brcigig being irregular, and fedijic^ dropping -g. 7. The um'fs always i>f ecede the fens in compound numbers from 21 upwards, both being joined by the conjunction unb 'and ' ; hence 25 = fiinf uilb Jiuangig (Engl. ' five and twenty '); 156 == ^unbert fec^^ unb funfjtg, etc. 8. '^unbert and 2au|ritb are generally used without ein be- fore them, and the conjunction unb may be omitted after them. 9. 'One by one, two by two,' etc. = jc ciner, jc jtoei (or jc 5h)ei unb jmei) , etc. 10. The Cardinals may be used as substantives : (a) With a substantive understood (as «w//,? numbers only), with -c in Nom. Ace, -en in Dat., as : Sltte mere. All fours. 9)tit fecf)fen. With [a coach and] six [horses]. (d) As feminine substantives, of the spots on dice, etc., or of the figures i, 2, 3, etc., see § 80, 2, (0, with plur. in -en, as : 2)ic ®in8, the one-spot, figure one, plur. ©nfen. 1 84 LESJON XXVITl. Ii^§ 165- (c) .'punbert and ^aufenb are used as collective sub' stantives, declined after the .'ounb Model, § 21, (<^), as: '^m erften .j^ttltbcrt, In the first hundred. ^aufcnbc toon l^ccnfdien, Thousands of men. (^) gjiiniou is a fem. subst. of the weak declension. 1«6. Remarks on Ordinal Numerals. 1. The Ordinals are formed from the Cardinals by adding: (a) Up to 19, -U, except bcr crftc, britte, ad}tc. (l>) From 20 upwards, -ftc, which in compound numbers is added to the /asf cotnponent only. NoTK. — Xicr Qilterc is .the older ordinal for 'second ' 2. The ordinals after proper names (of sovereigns, etc.) are spelt with a capital letter, and must i with the article) be de- clined throughout, the proper name being undeclined, as : 5larl bcr (SvftC, Charles the First. ©corg bed 3>tevtcn, Of George the Fourth, etc. Note. --The Roman Numerals I., II., etc., after names of sovereigns must always be read as def. art. + ord. num. in the proper case. Thus: .'ociuviii) iV. = .S>oiiuid) Dcr JKiCvtc (Norn.) ; or ^eiurid) Dm ©icrtClt (Ace. ) ; but. : bcv '3:f)rou C'^ciurid) IV^ --= bcr %\)xm >S)ciiirid) ilcS SicvtCtt (Gen.); Hitter .s;-)dnvid) IV. = iintcr ^einrid) Jjcm ©icrten. 3. The ordinals are used adjectively before the names of the months, as : 3^er a^tjei^ttte 3tuguft', The i8th [of] August. 2tm 5n)ci iinb jitjansioftcn ^uni, On the 22d [of] June. Notes. — i. The figures i, 2, etc., before the months are to be read as ordinals, thus : 9lm 1. 3auuar = am crftcii Souiiav. Xorouto, (b.) 25.(^011) ^^3vit = Toronto, Ben (ace. of time, see § 184, i) fiinf uiib 5n:)au3igflcn 'itpfU. I?^§ 165 ve sub' 21, {b), 167I STRONG VEKBS: fVlcdiCll MODEL. 185 len. on. adding : numbers etc.) are ) be de- , as : etc. sovereigns e. Thus: n ©icrtcn iS Stcrten lames of June, o be read time, see 2. ' What day of the month is it i * Xcr hiicj:cr c ift l)oute ? or: ten mieoiflftcii \)ahtn mir beutc ? • It is the tifth,' G8 ift ()nue Jer fiinfte, or: mv l)alicn f)futc Hen fiinftcn. i67. Strong Verbs: f|ivc.';cit Model. T Pr. Ind. 2. 2. Sin<' ] l|t:l)Icn ftirhlft, ftu-blt, fticl^l imi o^ftiibrcn i^«^/. ^//^/c^r;^. .peak wanting • spake sp5ken LIST yl. (i, a, 0.) brcrfK'n (N. A.;, break bri^ft, etc. brac^ . gebvoAen ncl;mcn take „i,„„p-t, etc. naf,m genomn:en (er)|d.rcrfcu (N.), be cv[d;nrfft, etc. erfc^raf cr)d;i-orfm frightened fpredHm, speak ipvid^ft, etc. f),rac^ gef^^vod^eu tc^HMi, stmg (trans.) ftichft, etc. ^tad) geftodu^n Mcujm triflft, trifft, tiiff tvaf getroffcn Remarks. - i. Grfdu-cdcn, to frighten , trans.), is weak (cr= 2. Observe the dropping o( and doubling of in nd)\mn and the single consonant in the imperfect of crfducdcu and tveffen. LIST^ (ic, rt, 0.) (Tlie Imperf. Subj. is also given.) (0e)6arcn, bear, gebievft, etc. ^.hav gebare geboren bnng fortli (be)fei>kn, com- befie^lft, etc. befall befol;Ie befoblen mand 13 I 1 86 t,ESSON XXVTII. tSl«7 ■' <:\ \ (nn^)fcl)lcn, re- . cmpfic^lft, etc. cmvfal;! cm^fot^lc em^foblcn commend ftct)lcn, steal ftiel)lft, etc. Also: t'ommcn(N.), come ftabl -j ftofjle geftol^len |!^"""[|'?^"""; tommfam fame fletomuKu Remarks. i. The simple verb fe(;leu, to be wanting, to make a mistake, is weak (fchltc, c^cf»^l)lt)« 2. .Slommcn drops one m in Impf. 3. All verbs of this Model (^A. and h.) drop the final -c of the 2. sing. Imper. "VoCAr.ULARV. to add, abbievcn luiniing, ba'o v^ac^en irrive (at), an'fommen (in 4" James, '^s^\h>b dai.) obtain, get, bctoiiunen divide, biuibiercu celebrate, fciern multiply, multi^licieven subtract, fubtrabicvon happen upon, meet with, treffen care, attention, bic 3ld)t r;iilway-station, ber ^al;nt;Df holidays, bie ^^erten (pi.) fishing, ba§ ?^ifc^en f * mile (German), league, bic minute, bie llJJimitc government, reign, bie 5les gicrung Reformation, bie ^iefornuition' second (of time), bic 6efunbe voyage, bie Seereifc far, iueit about, imgefat)r twice, gtueimal as far as, bi^ 511 (dat.) prison, batS (^icfdngm^ Idioms: 1. He was born twenty-five years ago, (Sv if* oor fiinf unb {wan^iij 3ain'e*i n^t'i't'C"* a. Please take another apple (I.e., yet one more), Sittt, nc|^< men Zie nod) ciiieii ^pfel. 3. Take care, 9lc^nien Zit ftd) in %A)U §T67] STRONG VLKBi.: fprccfjcn modi:l. EXERCISE XXVIII. 1 8; A. \. sBic alt jmb 3ie '^ ^rf) bin in mcitiom neun unb Jioan. ai0 ten ^a() -e. :>. T^iefeg 3af,r bctamcn tuir am ad)t unb uoan. J'Gften ^;^uni ^erien. 3. ^eber gji-^nat auBcv bcm'.yekuar Ux cntn^ebcr breifjig obcr cin unb bveif^in ^aqe. 4. ^en mcr unb jlranjigftcn 9Jfai tuar id) bci incincni ^^atcr auf ^^kfud;, bpun an biefem ^age fcicvn tuir ben (>5cbuitvtag bcr Monigin. i Marl ber erftc I'on (Snglanb luar bcr ^^?ater Marl 11. unb ^atob 11 (5 :rao n)ar cmc [cf)lcd;te 5ffad>rid)t, nidU uui^r ? Unfcre 93hittcr crfdn-ae al. 3ic b.cfclbc (Hhtc. 7. ^cn fiinf unb :,)i>an3ig|tcn trafciMuir §errn lS<\k auf bem 33abnlun'c, gorabc ale cr iiu Sogriffc Juar ab= jurcfen. H. ^x^ ber Stabt bonbon finb nicbr al^ brci liDiiaionen Gnuuobner. an3ii3 cn(3lifd)c 5J>cilcn. II. (f-v nabm bie ^yifcfic jc jiuei au^ bem .^orbc unb Icgtc biefclbcn auf ben'^rifd) 12. Ta^ ei.5 bri*t, nobmcn 3ic fiit> in 5Xdit. ]H. .VSunberte bon ^aiJenfdjcn \)cihrid) VIII. bcgann bic ^Reformation in Gnc3{anb. 15. gji'einc beiben ^Hilber reiften am fiinf unb gJuan^ 5U3lten ^uni bon IHoerpool ^{^ unb famen crft am adU^el^nten \\x\\ in Quebec an. Ki. Sann fonunt ,^br (^ieburtotaa'^ ^m'ein unb stuanjigftcn ^)Jooember. 17. ^ic ^Kegicruncj .v>e'inrid> VIII loar cmc ber bcriibmteften in ber Ojefdudite Gnglanb^. 18 5(1^ loir einen epa^iergang nmd)tcn, l)aben ioir mebrcre unfcrer .^yreunbe angctroffen. 1!>. l\,n \vm ift ^^^bnen geraten uunbcn, cine 3ee= retfc 3u macfn^ny (5e ift mir bon mebrercn ^^'irsten gerdtcn loorben. B. 1. One general commands thousands (d:;t.) of soldiers •i. Mary has broken her pen, but she has taken Louisa's, li The ice is breaking ; take care, Fred. 4. This is my lead- pencil, not William's. 5. You have taken only one apple, please take another. H. When do we celebrate the Queen's Birthday ? On the 24th of May. 7. What day of the month is it to-day > I If 1 88 LKSSON XXVIII. 1§S 167- IM ' IP I < Today is the Hist of March, s. The thief was thrown Into (liie) prison, because he had stolen five hundred dollars. 9. Which do you prefer, (the) hunting or (the) lishing? I like both. 10. A bee stings, but a dog or a cat bites. 11. The d.iys are longest in the month of June, and shortest towards ( hristmas. 1 i. When our neighbours were at church, a thief went ( tonuncu) into the house and stole several hundreil dollars. 13. In the year eighteen hundred and eighty-seven Queen Victoria celebrated the fiftieth year of her reign. 14. The eldest son of the Queen of England was born the ninth of November one thousand eight hundred and forty-one. 15. Tell me how much thirty-two and eighty-eight make. IH. There are sixty seconds in a nunute, sixty minutes in an iiour. twenty-four hours in a day, seven days in a week, four weeks in a month, and twelve months in a year. 1 7. Would you make a voyage to FAirope if you were advised to do so? IH. Yes, I should like very much to make a voyage to Europe. Read in German: 2 nml 11 i|t 22, l) llhil 12 ift :5ti, 1 Uial H ift 32, 5 Uial 9 ift 4.^ (5 nml 7 ift 42, TX 10 ift 7<», sX U ift ss, '1X12 ift 10^, lOX 10 ift 100,-UXll ift 121, 12X12 ift 114. ^>U>bia-t 2,342, 2o,8yl mib 0Si>,34f.. @ubtral)icit 27,703 oou 3l,r.,-^l. lUhiltiplicicvt rm mit 478. Diuibicvt 2,581,640 mit ()1. ORAL EXERCISE XXVIII. 1. Wie weit ist es von Hamilton nach Toronto ? 2. Wann sind die Tage am kiirzesten ? 3 Wie viel macht das, wenn man :^37 mit ^> multipliciert ? 4. W le viele Tage sind in einem Jahre ? 5. Wann bekommt ihr Yenen ? 6. Wessen Bleistift haben Sie ? ,i» \ ; 1(59] INDE' .XITE NUMERALS. 1 89 LESSON XXIX. INDEFINITE NUMERALS. - STRONG VERBS: ffffit MODEL. 1 ««. I N I) K F I N I I |.; N U M K R A L ii. The Indefinite Numerals are : I. an, all ■-• flnil}, whole, all 'i. jcbrr, J i- jcbttJCbir, 1^ each (bicfcr Model) ■>. jcfldrtjcr, ) '». fcill, none, not one 7. ciniflc, / , fe. Ctlid)C, i '"'^"' '^ ^"^ ^>. mondjC, many H). mc^rcrc, several M. t»icl, much (pi. many) 1^. hJCnifl, little (pi. few) 13. ctttia0, som3 \ 14. gcmi0, enough Windeclinable) 15. inc(|r, more ^) Remark. — All these, except aii and gang, are used as In- definite Pronouns (see Less. XXVII). 169. I. M expresses number as well as quantity, and ^'enotes that c'7'e/y individual part of a whole is present.' 2. When declined, it follows the biefer Model, whether used with or without a substantive, as : affcr .^iife ; allc ^Hrbcit iuar bcrnebli* ; aUrg ^ruot ; all [the] cheese ; all labour was useless ; all [the] bread. 3. Unless used substantivelv, it always precedes the deter- minative word, and then generally remains uniiiflected in the •smg., and often in the plur., as : li m ' 190 LESSON XXIX. [§§ 169- mein t3klb, All my money. mat) iiiciuc ^n-cimbc, All my friends. 4. When used substantively and preceded by a .leterniin ative word, it still follows the sfro?i^ declension, as : 4:icf^5 (ba.^) aikB, All this (that). 33ei bcm aUcm, With all that. 5. It is not (as in English) followed by the definite article, but may be followed l>y the dc7notistrative bev; bic, ba^, as : 911(00 Gklb, All [the] money. f«ia(c8) b tt 6 Wclb, All that money. 9iac ^)}icnfclicn, A.l [the] men. 3tfk bic ^Tl^ienfcbcn, All those men. 170. I. (Mnil^ expresses quantity, not number, and repre- sents an object as complete and undivided, without reference to its parts. W'hen therefore the Engl. ' all' = ' whole ' it must be rendered by gau^, not by all, as : I have been working all (the whole) day long, %6> babe ben piqcu ^a^ gcarbcitet. 2. rv^ttli^ is declined like an adjectwe, and always follows the determinative word, as : l^cr oanjc ^<^<^, The whole day. m^\\\ ganjCS eiccntum, [The] whole [of] my propeily. 3. Before names of countries and places it may remain uu- intiected, if unaccompaniv_d by an article, etc., as: All (the whole of) America does not belong to the United States, l^^'au^ (or bo8 <^<^\\f) XH'mcrila gebbrt mcl)t 511 ben ^^scrciniittou 3taatcu. — But: %\t ganje adnucis, All Switzerland. 171. I. C^f^f^ ^^^^^^"^ Model) is used to denote each indi- vidual beloiiging to a wh* )lc, aj .^cDcr iHUim bat ^(jtc. Every tiee has branches. '751 INDEFINITE NUMERALS. 191 2. It is sometimes preceded by eiii, and then follows the »//av^ adjective declension, ^cbiucbev and jeglicfcer are less common forms, used in the same way. 172. Sitin is the negative of eiu. 173. I. (Sinige (plur., bicfcr Model) = 'some, a few/ denotes a sma// number taken collectively, and is used with- out article, as : ©iniflC %'ii<^,d fonncn nid;t fiiu^cu. Some birds cannot sing. SSor ciniflCll ^aken, A few years a<,^r. 2. It is used in the sin babe monrfjce Uiu^lud' jicbabt, I have had many a misfortune. 9Jtonr^C locate cjlaubcn, Many people believe. It may remain uninHected, especially before an adj., as : lVand)cr gutr, or maud; i^utcr l)iann. 175. 9Wcbrcre='se. oral a few,' taken !„di7'idua//y, as: 9Wf^rcre Ignite u>uvbcii franf, Sf.veral people became ill. «r^ mf 192 LESSON XXIX. [§§ X76- 'i ii ^ I -^ ' \ ! 17«. i^icl and ttJcnij^, in the sing., are inflected (^Diefer Model) when they denote number, and uninfiected when they denote quantity, as : 2erne nid^t melce, fonbern tiic(, Do not learn many (a ^ycat number of; things, but much fa large qjtantity^. They are usually, though not always, declined in the plural. TsjoTK. — The Engl. ' little ' = ' small ' is rendered by f Icill. 177. ('^tlOtt? is used before names of material, etc., ir the sing., like einic^c^o (see ^ 173, 2, above), of a small quart tity, as: (ftttJttS 23rot, Some bread (but not much). 178. Wcuug may precede or follow its substantive, as : C^klb gcnug, or gcnuj (^klb, money enough. Note. — As adverb, it always /^//^(yj- its adjective, as: 3)08 9?anb tft nid)t \in;^' romance, novel, ber ^Koman' swallow, bic 3dBtualbc telegraph, bev ^elegra^f)' misfortune, bag Ungliicf world, bie ^lUlt pardon, bie 39er^eiF)unii thin, bunn almost, nearly, bcina^e, faft immediately, (fo)i3leid) lately, not long ago, umlid; late, fpdt while, tinibrenb Idionm: 1. There Is, there wa», etc. (general statement), e* qiebt, t» flflb, etc. (obj. in ace. see Less. XXXVII). a. To «'iit one's hand, fid) in tit foant |■c^»nfi^cn Git., to rut one's si'l to the hand), :i. To bej; pardon, um iBcnicilnniii bitten. 4. To speak to (with), (prcilun + ace. of jK-rson. EXERCISE XXIX. A. 1 . ®a§ ganje ^anb cmpfinbet ben 'Iserdift cineg pteu unb nrofuMi 'Dfanncg. 2. G^ gicbt fd^bnc 'isijgel, Juclc^ie i^av nid)t fingcn. ;<. '^^ittc, gebcn Sic mir nod^ ciucu 2:i;alcr ; ic^ ijahi iud)t ©e(b i^cnuiv 4. '3J3t ©corc^ ben ^Jtt^fet, ben er i^cfauft Kit, obcr bcn= jenii^cn, lueldKn id) ifim cjei^ebcn I)abc? 5, 1;ev ?yrcmbc tvat m'n iiuf ben /^-nf?, aber (\U\d) bat er micb urn 'i^er^^eibuna, 6. ^Xsiabrenb ^brer 5Ibwefenbeit finb mebrere i'eutc ^^efommen, urn 6ic ;u §i8ij STRONG VEKUS ; cffcil MODEL. f^re^en. 7. (S3eorg fa.te nnv neulicJ, ban er ^-n^ uor einiqen ilsod, „ oeleben babe. 8. ^intm bicb in ^fcbt, ba^' Gi., morauf bu rtttft, Mt tcr|r bunu. M. -,cb bittc u.n ^^crjci^ung, baf, id, fo |J)at Gebnnncu bin. 10. sjt^enn bu lucincn Onfcl [iefjft, fo fane t^m, bittc, ba^ icb Dorbabc, ibn ,^u bcfuc^HMi. 11. g^ Heat ein ^cnan t>on Sir ^Vilter Scott auf bem ^tifdu' ; tcfcn Sic ben- febenV 12. ^Ba^ ift (^cfcbc^en? ^)^f cine Heine 3 cbmcftci- ift auf @Ia. getreten unb hai \xd) in b.n ."yuft BCidniitten. 18. ^iefel llinilitcf ge|d>a , m ben .>>rien, unb fie eil ba^2BeterfoI;eiBtDar. 14. (fine Sci^unilbe mad)t feinen Som^ tnnft. If,. Tuvd) ben ^ctegravben bort faft bic gan^e ®H>rt in bier unb jluansig etunbcn luMi bcm, lua^ in irgcnb'einem ganbe flc)dnebt. 17. 3(1. ein ^KcidHn- aue. feinc.n .s^aufe fan, bat ihn em 9lvnier uni em iuenig (sielb, aber er gab" bc.n Jlrnien feine IH. Da^o^^ferb beg ^Tfeifenben frafj ein Jocnig .v>eu unb ^afev" iMbrenb tern ^err bae mtageeffcn im (Maftbaufe a^ 19' 2)ai M.nb bat fd,on afle. ^^rob unb ^-{eifd; gegeffen, ee hat aud> alle ^Mi> getrunfen, bie int Wlaie tuar. 20. Ginon. ^itgner'unrb ntdit g.\]laubt, fclbft ioenn er bie :il5ar)rbeit f^ridit. ^. I. The wholej)f England is not so large as the Pro- vince of Manitoba. •>. Henry VI 11. of Enoland, Francis 1 of Prance, and C'harles V. of Germany were the o-reatest monarchs of the i6th century. 3. WhcTC did von find the 'iioney.? It lay in the grass. }. Kverv summer the birds eat the cherries in our garden. .^. 'I'he sick man lav seven weeks in the hospital, but he has now recovered " fjttt f^t^g (lU;r) gcft^Iogcn, It has struck six Co'clock). Note. — The impersonal Verb 'to be,' in expressing the time of the 'lay, is always singular, as in English. j 185. Expressions of Quantity. 1. A substantive expressing Quantity (Measure, Weight or Number), if Masculine or Neuter^ retains the form of the singular, as : SSier unb gioanjii^ ^ott madden ^rtjei guft, 24 inches make two feet. 3tt)ci ^jlUlb, Two pounds. 2:aufenb 9Wttun, A thousand men. — But: 3tuei ^'lafcl^cn (fern.). Two bottles. 3tyblf ©ttcil (fern.), Twelve yards. 2. The substantive, the quantity of which is expressed, is generally put in apposition with that expressing the quan- tity, as : 3U)ei 53ucf) ^n|jicr. Two quires of paper. S)reitaufcnb W.m\\ ^nfoutcric. Three thousand infantry soldiers, ^iinf ©la^ JBicr, Five glasses of beer. 9Jiit jiuet ^aar ®4mf)Ctt (dat.), With two pairs of shoes. 3. But if a determinative word precedes the substantive measured, etc., use the Gen. case, or tion with Dat., as: ^c^ ^abe fec^§ ^funb biefcS guten 3uc!er8 (or : tioit biefem guten ^)xdix) gefauft. i96] STRO.XG VERBS I fc^Iagen MODEt. ^Icfcr «rciftift ift nur eincn M lanc^^ This lead-pencil is only an inch long. ^d) habc cine gan^c 9J?ei(e (ace.) marrcf)iert, I have been marching a whole mile, ^^iefc^ ^afct' luie^^t ein bnlbca ^funb (ace). - This parcel weighs half-a-pound. 186. Strong Verbs: |,^Iai)cii Model. INFIN. PR.lND.2.3.sing. Jmpf. Bng/.Ana/ogy:s\B^y wanting ^^^ (incomplete) Ablaut : » .. H LIST. 20I put in the slew P. Part. 0»?fc^logen slain luirfcn(W.N.A). bake bacfft, bacft raOren (N.A.), ride (in fdbriX fa^rt a conveyance), drive ' orubcn, dig ^„....-, „., frfjaffen, create Uijftlc^en, strike tra(]cn, carry unut)fen(N.), grow rtJafdien, wash Also the irregular ; fte^en, stand and the usually weak : fragen^ ask tJ^OBft, trdgt h)arf)fcft, bac^ft l»afcf;eft, Judfd^t 6uf grub lub Wn trug f(ftunb)) Iftonb i Sebacfcn fiefa^ren gegraben gelaben Gcfc^affen gefc^Iagen getragen getoac^fen getoafd^en geftanben 1 franft, fraat fn. 14 Uragftjragt fragte/ 3^^^<^9* I' f 202 LESSON XXX. t§l86 RFMARKS.--.I. i&adcw is usually weak in the Impf. (badU), but str >ng in the P. Part, (gebarfen). Observe also the single f in Impf. 2. ^abrett is conjugated with fein when intr., with fjabcn when trans. 3. Sd^affen 'to work' and (t)ei)|d)atfen 'to procure' are weak. Observe the single f in the Impf. Vocabulary. to set out, depart, leave, ab'^ minute-hand, ber ^inutcn* fabrcn rise, auf ftetjen invite, ein'laben understand, toerftet^en ' dine, ^u 'Hiittag cffcn go for a drive, fpajicicn fabren absence, bic "ittb'tuefcnbeit little tree, ba^ ^duircf)en dozen, bas^ ^u^'cnb yard, tic Cillc multiplication-table, ba© (Sin^ ma I cine thread, ber 'i^ahtn * driving, ba^ ^^nlifcn driver, coachman, ber .^utf Aer hole, bay I'od) jeigev pound, ba^ ^|^funb post-office, bie S^o\{ riding, bae ^teiten sentence, ber >2a^ * hour-hand, ber 3tunbenjeigcr cup, bie Sta[fe tea, ber Iljec clock, watch, bie \\\)X train, ber ^^ug * two weeks, a fortnight, oievs jc^n ^age then, bami early, fviib slow, slowly, langfam at least, UH'nigften^ tirst, first of all, juerft night, bie '^^ladjt* Idioms: 1. The BuHton train, X^or ,3uf) | ^^(^f^y Soflon. 2. What time (o'clo«lt) is It ? W&ie oUl Ubr if* ei • EXERCTSEXXX. A. 1. Gin bretfaa,!''* ^a^^" ^^-i^t nid^t kxd)t 2. ^^r^utfrfjei fa^rt fo langfam, V^v'; sm nxd^t lun* bvet SSiertel auf j^molf an* fommen ioerben. B. '^u bev eiuen ^al\ii bev ^eU \\i &v 2a^ ixMJ bTKoNci viiKiii: \d)U\^m model. 203 todhrcnb e« in ber anbern ^dlfte g?acht ift. 4. 2Ba« gicbt e8 f^eute 9feue«y 5. ^iUwhalb babcn 3ic mid; cjcftcrn nic()t befud;t? er[ten« treil ee regnete, unb jiueiten^ lueil id; fclbft 33efud> fjaitc. 6. SDu baft Gut gelcfen, lieo nod> eincn ea^j. 7. 2yie biel triegcn eiey ^^cfMuicge ungcfabr bunbert unb fiinf^ig ^ifunb. 8 ^er 3ug fommt urn brei ^^ie^-tcl aiif minx m unb fiibrt urn fiebcn mmuUn jiacb 3ef)n ab. \k .bnen fpajicrcn fabren, Juenn etc mid, euUiibcn. 14. ^er .s^imb bcrbarg ben ^nod)cn in ein Vodv n?cldic^? er ^intcr bem xHpfelbaum grub. 15. ®ie 5J^igb ftcf)t friib (Dce) ^iJJorgcn^j auf, imifc^it bie .HIcibcr unb bcidt 5l^rot 16. ^obann ift cin fetjr cinfaltigcr Anabe ; cr bat nod; ni*t ba^ Gmmalctiu? golcrnt. 17. ^sjie bid m;r mx e^j, aU bcr ^JJiinuten- aeigcv auf ^cd)^ unb bcr Stunbcn.^cigcr j^uifcbcn brci unb Dicr ftanb? IK. Xcr ^^lucr frun bcu ^Hcifcnbcn, tine Did Ubr e^ fei (tuavc), unb bicfer jog fcinc Ubr an^ bcr 3:afd>c unb fagtc ibm c^ fei {;alb ciuc^. 19. iH^bicrc brci ^l^icrtcl, bier Sicbcntcl,' neun Xreijcbntcl unb elf -^tuan^igftcl; line mcl ift (mac^t) bae? 2u Xer ^;>unb luiirbe ben iinahcn glci. ; beifjen, UHMin bcrfelbe i{;n fringe 21. ©cf^en eie §ur OJefcIIfdunt bcr ,yrau IK ? 22. ^d) bin nid;t cmgelaben ; mem Srubcr nnirbe eingclaben, abcr icb nid^t. B. 1. In six days (Jod created Heaven and earth. 2. The patient drank two glasses of wine and three cups of tea yester- day.^ 3. This silly boy has not even understood what I said to h-m. 4. Here is good, strong cloth ; it costs two and a half dollars a (the) yard. 5. This tree grows quickly; it is at least four times as high as it was three years ago. 6.' This exercise is very easy; we shall have finished (with) it in half ' an hour. 7. The dealer showed us many kinds of ribbon, 204 LESSON XXXI. [$187 red blue, yellow, etc. 8. Which do you prefer, (the) riding or (the) driving? It is all the same to me. 9. Please tell me what time it is ? It is exactly tliirteen minutes after eleven. 1 It is nine o'clock, for the hour-hand is (stands) at (auf) nine and the minute-hand at twelve. 11. These three school-boys bought themselves a melon, which weighed almost five pounds. 12. The coachman drove first to the post-office and then to the bank. 13. Between April and September the little tree grew a foot and a half. 14. Precisely at five o'clock the Boston train left.lin^ at 9.45 we arrived. 15 Was this house built before you came here? 16. Add ^V %i and ''/09. ORAL EXERCISE XXX. 1. Wie viel macht drittehalb, fiinftehalb und neuntehalb? 2. Urn wie viel Uhr kommt der Zug von Boston an ? B. Was sagte der Reisende. als der Bauer ihn fragte, wie viel Uhr es set? 4. Wie viel Uhr ist es nach IhrerUhr? 5. Wie viele Satze hast du schon gelesen? 6. Ist jemand wahrend meiner Abwesenheit gekommen ? 40> LESSON XXXI. ADVERBS. - STRONG VERBS : fattcU MODEL. ■|j^7^ Adverbs. Adverbs may be arranged according to their meaning as follows, with examples of the simpler and more commonly oc- curing ones under each class : I. Time. (a) rast: neiiltd^ the other day, lately bamaUS, at that time ijDv'neltorn, the 4av betor^ ebon, jusl, just now yesterd.ay Qc'jtcvu, yesterday toovl;cr', before I riding ise tell eleven. if) nine ol-boys ist five it- office tember ' at five d. 15. .dd ^740, tehalb ? 8. Was Uhr es 'ie viele meiner amng as lonly oc- , lately belort? « 187] {b) Present: ^iwU, to-day ^ ' ^ now nun. ) {c) Future: 6a(b, soon l^ernad/, afterwards morgen, to-morrow narfiber', afterwards ninrmcr, nevermore u'bermornen, the day after to- morrow {d) Interrogative : Irann? when? ADVERBS. 205 {a) Demonstrative bafelbft, i ^'^' '"^ ^^^^ P'-'^ce (ba)^in, thither, to that place bort, there, in that place (ba)ber, thence, from that place ^iev, here, in this place ^ie(r)^er, hither, to this place (0, anywhere iiberair, everywhere III. Measure and Degree. ^i'^Q., about, nearly f'cinaf)e, faft. I nearly, almost s ! f V.i II i* :!) I. J ■!»' 1 i i? ■ 1 3o6 LESSON XXXI. 187 [ wholly, altogether ^^^^^ ^^^^ gar, at all, very genug, enough gerabe, just, exactly !aum, hardly, scarcely, no sooner nodi, still, more fo, so ungcfd(;x, about uberbauVt', generally tuie? how? ju, too ^^icmlid), tolerably IV. Affirmation. ja, yes ; to be sure jaVoot^l, certainly frcilidv to be sure, indeed furtual;r, truly, really gcU>if5, certainly nattir'licb, of course ^nirfUdv to be sure, indeed p)ax, it is true, certainly nein, no '*^'^. \ perhaps V. Negation. uic^t, not VI. Possibility. iuabrfdHnulid^ probably Woijl, perhaps VII. Necessity, atterbingg, certainly buvduaue, absolutely, entirely baber, '^ VIII. Cause. tiHiniiu, ■) wherefore, why tueebalb, ) (interrog. or rel.j baium, r therefore bec>I}alb, ) Note. — These last, as well as many of the- others, are also used as Conjunctions. See Less. XL. )0 used as t38] 188. STRONG verbs: fallen model. 207 Strong Verbs: foacii Model. INFIN. PR.lND.2.3.Sing. IMPK. p. p.^R-r. Gernt Mociei: fallen faafUdttt fid ^~2n EngLAnaogyji^W wanting fell \ZT (incomplete) Ablaut: n s (Note. -This is only a ^^^/«,V Ablaut; see § 192, Rem. 4.) LIST. blafen, blow biafeft, blaft bratcn, roast.tr. and intr.j briitft, bviit fflUcn (N.), fall fangen, catch fatten, hold (jangen, hang f)ttuen, hew ^Ci^cn, bid ; be called laffen, let Ioufen(N. A.), run raten, advise (gov. dat.) vdtft^ rdt rufen, call ^ufft, ruft fcblafen, sleep Wm, fdiliift ftancn, push |to{,eft, ftofu Also the irregular : fdUft, fdllt fonflft, fcingt f)dl;!t, \-)'^\\ ^angft, (ningt f;aucft, l)out f>eif}cft, bci^t Idffcft, Id^t Idufft, Iduft blie^ bviet fier fi(c)ng bicit geblafcn gc bra ten gefaKen gcfangen gel;alten ^i(<^)»n gebangen f;ieli t)ie^ He^ lief riet vief fd;lief fticB gc(;ttuen gebcijjen gelaffen gclttufen gcratcn gcrufen gef4)Iafen gcftoBcn fli(c)nn n^'floitflen ge^en (N.), go .^^hcft, gebt Remarks.- I. observe in braten, balten, ratcn thi con- tracted forms of the 3. sing. Pres. Ind. 2- fangen is the strong verb (bicng, gebangen) and is proper- ly intr. (= 'to be suspended'); biinge,- i. weak . h-na*c gebcingt) and trans., but the distinction is not strictly ob- served. ^ 208 LESSON XXXI. [§i88 3. Observe that ^ei^eu and fto^cn, having the root vowel long, retain ^ throughout ; whereas laffeu varies according to rule, thus : id; lajje, oclafjen, but er Id^t, licj, h)ir Ue^en. Vocabulary. nian-of-all-work, (farm-) ser- vant, bcr kncdjt beef, bivS gflinbfloijd) skate, bcr Sc^Utt'i'dnib skating, bvi$ 2dUitt'fdmt>laufen bacon, bcr Sped language, bic opvadje study, biVo Stubium last, preceding, toortg to begin, commence, an'fangen receive, get, crl;alten please, gefaUen leave, leave behind, laffen skate, 8d}Utt'fdnib lau'feu kick, strike, bump, ftojjen cut down, uin'(;aucn butter, bie 33utter f play-mate, bcr ©efpicle mouse, bie ^kuy * Idioms: 1. What is th« name of? aSie beift*? 3. What l« your name? 3aJic I)ci^cn u^, abix meine ©efpielen finb grofee greimbe bavcn. 9. '^k liiagb ping jum Sabeu unb faufte brei ''^funb ^l;ee, jnjei ^funb Gutter, §188] STRONG verbs: faHcU MODEL, 209 jefju ^^fimb 3ucfer unb gtoei ^lafc^en 33ier. 10. 3:)ort ftanb ber Saurn, ben ber Jlnec^it neulid; umgef)auen l^at 11. ©agen Sie miv, Wo{)in Sie bovgefteru gingen, al^ id; Sie in ber ^bniggftrajje traf. 12. ®er ©dmler liefj feme mdKx gu . outside, out of doors bovu(e), before obcu, above untcn, below braufeen, inncn, ) .^, . . , . . V withm, m-doors , , orinnen, ) brixben, over there ^inten, behind Note. — Prepositions in composition with verbs are really adverbs (also the particles ab, fin, eiupor, inetj, 3uvucf). 4. By combination. For these see Part III. ' * 212 LESSON XXXII. [§§I9 190. Comparison of Adverbs. I . Some adverbs are compared, as : balb, It), I oft, often gem, willingly gut soon c^er am ef)eften hi) oftcr am iiftei'teu lieber am licbftcn {different root) well fieffer am Iieflcn ( «( ) 2. Adjectives are used as adverbs in the comparative^ as in the positive, without change, as : ©r lauft jf^nctlci* al^ fein Srubcr, He runs more quickly than his brother. 3. In the superlative degree, the form with nitl is used f(Jt the relative superlative (see §§ 127, 2, and 128), as: ©r Idiift nm frfjiicllfteii you alien, He runs most quickly of all. 4. The absolute superlative (see § 127, 2) is usually formed by prefixing an adverb of eminence (such as fe^r, f)i?cf)ft, du^erft, etc.), as: ©r fcf)rei6t iiufjcrft fchon. He writes most (i. e., very) beautifully. 5. Adverbs from adjectives in -ig, -lid), -jam use the un- inflected form for the superlative absolute, as : @r IcifU fvcunblid)ft flviiBen, He desires to be most kindly remembered. Also a few monosyllables, as : Iduijft, long ago ; ()0(^fl, most highly. 6. The superlative absolute may also be expressed by auf iia0 (aufc) prefixed to the superlative adjective, to express the highest possible degree^ as : »9aJ TABLi: OF .STRONG VERBS. 213 er 6eforc^t [cine Gcfcfmftc ouf bad (aufg) ©eiciffcndaftcfle He attends to his business in the most conscientious manner (possible). 7. A few superlative adverbs end in -end, with special meanmgs, as: ()i)*ftcil§, at most mei[tcil0, for the most part iJX'niiiftcre, at least nnd>ftcn?, shortly Also the ordinal adverbs, crften^, etc., see § 183, (r). 191. Position of Adverbs. Adverbs generally precede the word they modifv (except gemig, see § 178, Note). For further particulars as to their position in the sentence see § 45, Rule 5. 192. Table of Classification of Strong Verbs. 1 German English Ablaut. — — — : Class. Div. 1 Model. Analogy. In FIN. I.MPF. P.Pakt. 2., 5. sing. Pk.Ind. 2.S l.M!'. Lesson. I.] 1 l)CiHLMl bite ci I I XXII. ( b blcilu-ii (wanting) ci ic U XX la. „.j a [rfiu'fjrn shoot to, etc. u XXIV. b fricveii freeze icetc. u XXV. TTT i a fiiuioii sing I a it , XXVI. III. J b fpiinieii spin n 1 ( c ()dfcii (wanting) u 1 jxxvii. IV. — fpiccf)cu speak C, etc. a XXVIII. V. " — cffen eat C, etc. a c " — 1 XXIX. VI. — fdjlnc^cu slay a u a Umlaut XXX. VII. ._. fallfii fall various ic same as Umlaut XXXI Infin. < 214 tESSON XXXII. §X9»- Remarks. — 'I. The Umlaut of classes VI., VII. does not occur in the Imperative. 2. The varying vowels of the Imperf. Subj. are given in the lists, where necessary. 3. The English Analogies printed in Italics are Incomplete. 4. The vowel-change of class VII. is not an Ablaut, but the result of reduplication. 5. The lists of the various classes contain only the verbs of common occurrence ; all others will be found in App. L. VJii. Distinguish between the verbs of the following groups : / Httcn, beg, ask {a) } bctcn, pray ( intr.) ( biftcn, bid, offer bat betctc bot ( liCi-^CH, lie (be recumbent, intr.) lag (d) -5 Icgcn, lay (trans.) U(\k I liigcn, lie, tell a falsehood log / jicbcn, pull (trans. ), move (jntr.; jog (r) ■) jcibcn, accuse jic^ ( 5cigcn, show geigtc gebetcu gcbctct geboten gck\^crt gclcgt gelogcn gcjogcn 0c,^icbcn gejcigt 194. Remember the irregularities of : effcn (r. Part, gcfleffcu) ftc^en, ftanb (or ftunb), gc= l^aucnilmpf. l)icb) ftauticn geJicn, giitfl, gogaitnen i\^\)in, m' m^%^^ Also the double forms in the Impf. of: ^eben (imb, hob^ f*u>b>:en (fi-bmnr, fcbtDor) Note. — There are a few strong P. Parts, from verbs now otherwise weak, as: i(nnat)lCII, i'-om iual)lcu, to grind (Impf. mal)ltcr, fin'al,cn, from filf^cn, to salt (Impf. faUtc): iioipaitcil, from fpattnt, to split (Irnpf. jpattcte) ; also some strong participles nsed only as adjectives, viz.: >04J GENERAL REMARKS ON STRONG VERBS. 215 Pii)Olifn (from fr()cbrin, exaltr d, sublime bcjcl)etbcn ( " befd)nbcii,), modest Ocrroorren ( '* DenPimu), confused Vocabulary. examination, ba^ Gramen kitchen, bic S\ud}t place, spot, Mc 2Ulk employed, busy, be)c(>afti0t then fconj.), bcnn huii;;ry, lumgrig left, lint right, rcdit snit (adj.), iicfaljcn in spite of, tiol^ (+geii.) improbable, iinjuabr|d;cinlidi like, uiie to wind up (a clock, etc.), auf'jicbcn pass (an examination), be= ftcbcii greet, salute, grii^cn go (or bej too slow (of a clock, etc.), nad/gcbcn run after, nac(/laufcn (-]- dat.) cry, nifcn go (or be) too fast (of a clock, etc.), borVt)tm command, bcv ^^cfobl visit, visitors, bcr 33c|udi Idiomn: 1. I saw your friend to-day ; lu, wlnhes to be remembered to you, 3di (tnbe heiitf 3lircu Stunts flcfchcn ; er la^t <^it i)riif|fii. 2. How do yon like Boston ? SBje fjefdlU ed 3l)nf n in JBofton ? EXERCISE XXXII. A. i. ©e^t ^f)re Uf)r Dor, ober gebt fie nad;? ^. 6ie get)t ^mi ricbtig. 3. ^abcn Sic ^brc Ul;r aufgqocjen? 4. gin fleiuce 5!}idbcben fragte, iuic bid Ut;r e§ fei. 5. Gin .-rierr joii fcine Uf;r aus ber ^afd'.e unb ^eigte fie bem flinbe mit ben 2©Drten: ,,(2age bu mir fclbft, loie Diel Ubr e^ ift." 6. %s:-o finb beinc e^iJyeftcrn '? gD^arie iff obcn in ber ^i^ibliotbef unb Sopbie iff unten in ber Aiicbe. 7. 3lnfang^ luobnten iuir nic^it gem in biefer ©tra^e, aber je^t gefaflt une bicfelbe gang gut 8. ^6:, einen bciftcn 3oinm« 6ie? 9. ^ )m L'men ie meiften Seute effen lieber frifcbe^ ^-Ieifd> aU ge. 2l6 LESION XXXII. 194- fatjenca. 10. 'Xxol^ bc^ ^cfc(>(« bcS Abnig^ bctctc Daniel jcben aafl brcimal. 11. "Slmc ^antc, bic in ^ikuliu U)ot;nt unb bcren ^^kuber 3ie tenncu, ift fcbr franf. 1l>, WriifKU <3ie frcimblid^ft ^^()vc Gltcrn fiir )md\ ivenn 3ic nad) .'oaufc fommcu. IH. .s>L>ffcnt= lid} Juiib Avil) fcin (Syamon i^it beftchcn, bcnn cv bat aufv^ n'-'^^'))'*''"' bafteftc ftuticrt. 14. Ci'v tuirb ec fdnuerlid> bcftcbcn, ba cr crft fcit 5n)ei 15a(}rcn in bcr 3cl)ulc ift. 15. ^cr \uc\U wddjfv unffcntlid^ einc Umua(n(;cit fagt. 16. ^dj efjc (^crn nebratencS ^){inbflcifdv bcfiMibcv^J iucuu id> rcdU buni^rii^ bin. 17. ^)(cd>ti? Don bcr ednilo ftcbt cine SWxdK, {\\\U ftcl;t bcv mavU. 18. ilUr l^abcn licbcr abcnbc^ 'iU'[ud;> al^? nun-qcne, bcnn nun\^cn<^ finb n>ir getrbbnlid) bci'cbaftigt. i9. ^ie[c^ .Slinb tuivb nadiften-s^ fvaii! ttjcrbtn, bcnn e^ bat fcit bvci ^agcn faft gar nicbt^ nci^cffcn. -M. G\^ [tanb fviibcv einc .Vlivcbc auf bcv StcUe uh> luiv jcl^t finb, abcr fie ift fd;on lani^jt lun-idmninbcn. 21. 5?on \vm murbe bie 5livc^ie flcbaut, luoDDn eic fprccf)en? 2'>. ^sd) tocif^ c^S nicf^t, ee ift miv nie gcfacjt luorbcn. j9, 1. Please show me the way to the post-office. 'I. If George is up-stairs, tell him that I am down-stairs. 3. I do not like London ; I prefer to live in a smaller city. 4. The pen still lies on the book upon which I laid it. 5. Please tell me who lives over the way. (iT Tiiis boy has been stung by a bee. 7. Of ;dl animals the horse runs quickest. H. Give me what you have in your (tliei left hand. II. Lessing died on the fifteenth of February 1781. 10. The soldiers ran blindly into the battle and fought like lions. 11. The train for (nacb) Montreal leaves (ab'fabvcn) at twelve o'clock at night, and arrives in Montreal at ten o'clock in the morning. }2. A little beggar ran after a gentleman, and asked him for some money. 13. * My father is dead,' cried he, 'my mother is dead, and all her children are dead!' 14. 'Who are you then?' asked the gentleman. 15. What answpr was given to the beggar by the gentleman, when he was asked for money? tosl IDIOMATIC USES or ADVERBS. ^17 ORAL EXERCISE XXXII. 1. Was warden Sie sagen, wenn ich Sie fragte, wie viel CJhi es sei? •>. Gefallt Ihnen die Str.tsze, worin Sie jetzt vv'ohnen ? 8. Hat Fritz sein Exa.nen gut bestanden ? 4 VVo 1st meine Feder? 5. Was fiir Sprachen haben Sie studiert ;> 0. Olauben Sie, dasz der Herr dein Pettier etvvas ee- geben hat ? ^ LESSON XXXIII. (\DVERBS (continued): IDIOMS. - IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 105, iDKJMATic Uses of Certain Adverbs. 1. Mini, well. 9J1111, ic^ ift mil- cincrlci, Well iyvhy), it is all the same to me. Note. 9JllH i. litre really an interjection, and hence does not throw Ihe subject after the verb. 2 c6cii, just, exactly. ^a^ ift ebcn bcvfelOc :\)iann, That is the very (exactly the) same man. 2Civ finb (fo)cDcu aiu^«fomnicn. We have just arrived. ^a^5 faim man c&cu nid^t f -jcn. One cannot exactly sav that. "^ ' 3. ficrn, riebct, am licbftctt. ^cf» e[[c flcrii A-ifcfi r am fond of (eating) fish. Sc^ effe lifbcr .^M't-^) aU ^id), I prefer (eating) tish to meat. Qx }t)urbe 0^5 pern t^un. He would be glad to do it. would do it with pleasure. SBefdie ^pvadK fptcf^cn Sie om (icbftcn ? Which language do you prefer (^speaking)? 2lS LESSON XXXIII. [8195 iti 4. cvft, fii*st» only, not before, etc. '^^lan mur, crft bcntcii; tann ]>ved;eu, One must think first and then speak. ^Ijiein '^•^vubev tuirb cvft mDrcjeu tomnicn. My brother will not come before to-morrow. ilsiv batten cvft ,vuci ^3J(cilen maridncrt, We had only marched two miles. Dicin ^^U-ubcr ift crft jtuci Csnln-c alt. My brother is only (not more than) two years old. f). jucrft, tirst of all ; for the first time. ^icfco Sdnff ijt ^ucrft {pox alien anbcrn) ini .s>afcn anc\t: fomnien, This ship arrived in the harbour first (i. e., before any other). ^sd> iucvbc jucrft (or crft' sum ed)nciber, bann .^umSucb^ hdnbler aclH'ii, 1 shall go first (of all) to the tailor's, then to the bookseller's. 3di babe ibn v-\citcvn \\mf f^uni cvftcn ^Alial) v^cfebcn, I saw liim for the first time yesterday. ■>[oTK. — >Juerft refers to /////;• only, as above; crftfllC = 'firstly, in th-i first place,' refers to on/rr only, as in enumerations, thus: Mi) toiintc iud)t foiinucn, crflcn?, un-il i\^ veflurte, j^toeitcn^, luoil id) httllt Umr, I loukl not come, first (in the first place) be- cause it raineil. secondly, because I was ill, (i. fd)Oit, ahH'ady, as early as, etc. ^inb Sic jjlum ba '< Are you there already ? 3ft "sbr ^^U-nbcr jri)UU in A-vanhcid^ y^cu^cfcn'^ Has vour brother ever hecn in France? 7sd^ bin jri)OU bvoi ^aiv' in bcv Stabt, I have been in the city for the last three days. T)ai-> Sdiiff ift \&}0n »V"ft>.'vu anv^^Cicnuiicn, The ship arrived (as early as) yesterday. §195] IDIOMATIC USES OF ADVERBS. 219 Gr Unrb frfjon frmmen, He uill be sure to come (h-^ will come, no doubt). Note. ®cf)on is often, as in the fourth of the above sentences to h left untranslated in English. sentences, to be 7. nod), yet, still, more. (a) Of Ttme: Sinb ©ie not^ {?ier ? Are you still here ? Scb bin iiof^ nie in O^eutfcl^Ianb ociucfen, I have never yet been in Germany. ©V \v>ax m^ i)or eincr 3tunbe bier. He was here only an hour a^i;o.' md) bcutc. Even to-day (while it is yet to-day not later ihan to-day). ^' Note. -- Observe that no d^ precedes the negatives nie, nirfjt, etc. {/^) Of Number: tWorij ciite 3:affe !3:kc. Another cup of tea. 9?orfj 5iuei, Two more. ^^tsd) (ein)mar fo Did, As much again. 8. bocf), yet, after all. {a) Adversative : ©r triib borf,' fommcn. He will come after all (em- phasis on boc^). ev n)irb bod, foin.ncH', He will come, I hope - emphasis on tommeit). ^abe id) <% -^bnen burfj gefagt ! I told you so (did I not tell you so .?). r/^) With Imperatives : i^ommen Sie borfi herein Pr^w come in {urgentX Pray Kiiajtzixaf--.i 220 LESSON XXXIII. [§§ 195- ;| m p I! ' ): (c) In answer to a negative question or statement: §aben ©ic ibn tiirfjt c^efe^en? (^a), boj^. Have you not seen him? Yes, I have. ^c^ f)abe e^ nic^t get^an. ©te t^aben e§ bo^ getf^an. I did not do it. Yes, you did. (For bod) and nocf) as Conjunctions, see Less. XL.) Note. — 2)od) gives an affirmative answer, where a negative one is expected. 9. tturf), also, even, etc. 5(UI^ fcin 3sater njar gegen \\)\\, Even his father was against him. gUlein 33vubcr ioar ni*t miibe, unb id; trav oui^ nid)t miibe. My brother was not tired, and 1 was not tired either, §aben Sic nurf) bcba*t', Uh\^ Sie fatten. Are you sure you have considered, what you say ? (emphasis on bebad;t). 10. twoI)(, indeed, etc. @r leunnet e§ \m\)\. atcr). 12. nut. (With the Imperative.) ^ommcn Sie nut l;cvcin, Just come in (reassuringly). 196] 196. IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. Irregular Strong Verbs. 221 I. 2:6un, to do, Impf. that, P. Part, getftan. Zf^tti, like Engl, 'did,' is a relic of the old Impf by re- duplication, the old form being it-ia, i. e., the stem tn- with reduplicating syll. fc- prefixed, then U-tt, tct, t\)ai. 2km rejects c of the termination throughout, except in i. Sini; Pres. hid., and in the Pres. Subj. Infin. ^Dtjfen, know biirfen, d..re fiinnen, can nibcjen, may niiiffen, must foden, shall P. Part. tl. Imperfect- Present Verbs. Pres. Ind. Prrs. Imperfect I. Sing. i.Plur. Sunj. Ind. Suhj. ivci^ U)iffeu tuifie mi\]k miifite getuu^i barf biirfen biirfe burftc biirfte c3eburft fann fonnen !unne foinitc fiinntc gefonnt mag tnogeu miige moffjtc nmbU getnoc^t mu§ miiffen ttiufje inu^tc iiiii^te gemu^t fott foUcn folle foatc foUte gefoat III. Sorfeti, will, Pres. Ind. i. Sing, loia, i. Plur. Wolku Pres. Subj, VDoUe, i^pf. ind. v^oatc, Subj. it)oa(c, P. Part! getDoHt. Remarks. — i. Observe the following peculiarities in the verbs un^er II. and 111.; i^) All have the same vowel (mostly with Umlaut) in the Inf. and the mtr. of the Pres. Ind. ; but (except follen) a different vowel in the Sing, of the same tense. {b) The Impf, Jfid. and P. Part, have the weak endings -inint (= Fr. savoir) is dsetl of knowledge, and of thinirs onlv; fcimctl (~-= Vx.roiinattrcA oi artj!i'iiiit,nir:,\o' pcrsf);-w///r/ things, thus: a^tffCli ^ii" ^^t 2i?cn? l'>o you know the road? (i. e., do you know which is the right road ?) ^enitCU (5io t^on ^liV-flV Are you acquainted ^familiar) with the road ? ttl'iniClt eie ineiueu 5Bvu^el•? Do you know my brother? SBlffen 3io, luaij er gtiaflt ()ttt? Do you knr)\\ what he said ? §I9«1 IRREGULAR STRONG VERBS. 223 3rf) bnrf flf^f », I am permitted to go. VOCADULARV. to put on (a hat), miffe^cn expression, ber Sdi^'bruc! * French (language \ g^rango'fifcf^ building, ba§ ©ebdiibe commandment, ba^ Ciebot' watch-key, ber UBrfcftliiffer dwelling-house, bag ^Xl>ohn. clearflyj, distinct! ly), beutlid; although, obgleirf^' ' ia'o,n. .. 1. ,v.ll you be «o kind an to le„<, „.e your p.n ? aB.„e„ 3,> 3. What Is that in ii.rumn ? m, bcfftt ^a« nuf J^cutfrf, ? 3. He knows French, i^v fatm ^raiMofifd). EXERCISE XXXIII. ol' ^-,^1^:'"" ^^^' "i^^^ ucrftcbcu; [prid; bocf; beutlicfter. ^. ^lommen @ie nur Borcin, Jucnu eie miUn. H. ^,n e^ ^bnen [(^on gehuujen, Sransofiid) ju IciT.cnV i. ^d, iucrbe ,u>d. kute bieje ^ettion Icrnon nuiffcn, luib e. ift Hm M'oi i^icrtcl anf ;ebn 0. ^)a^d) xmmx^.djn ^agca licfcu unv 5d,Utt)dnd), unb l;ciiie 'ifi ^as, (vta ocfdniiolsen. H. ©a^^ cvitc (sjcbot bci^t (is): „^u loll t feme anbcrn ©otter neben mir (nibeii." 7. e^ tfnit mir feib baft trir erft morcjen a&reifen ; id) Jodre lienor k-ute aboereift' H ^l)iiit^ ':simn nicbt and) Icib, bafj Sie bie inorc^en blcibeit nulffenv ^'. aiMe beiBt ber engli[dK> 3ritgbriid ' Do you know my friend ?'• auf ®eut[d; V Mmncn eie incinen Aicunb V" lu. ^IJfein Cnfel unb meute 3:ante finb idwn oefterit angcfommcn, aber meine ^i^^ttern imb Goufmen tuevben erft iibermorgcu fonimen fonncn. ]) ^rs^^iftt b», bafe beine gjhitter annefommen ift? 12. ^^rf> mil biofe7^u* nicbt miffe^en, loeil er mir 511 tiein ift. 13. ^'eute barf i* (anger ■BH I? ■ ■ 1 224 LESSON XXXIIL [§§i9«- l^ier biciben ; ii'f* braurf^e nidjt oor je^n Uf^r gu §aufe 511 [ciu, 14. 2KoUcM Bk i\(b nirfjt fel^m? 15. '^6) luerbc mel;r (5elb ^abcn muffcu ; id> hah'i mdjt gcmu] §ur 9lcifc. Kn l^^st' inefjv man ^at, befto melir iuiU man. 17. 'Dicje^^ unavtige Hinb luci^ mrf>t, tt)a§ e§ hJiH. 18. ^cf) hahz dtn gebbrt, baf^ meine 9J?utter fran! ift, aber id) tuerbe fie md;t Dor morgen bcfudjcn ' 1 9. Soden Sie gefaUigft mciuen Svtef gur ''^poft briugt ,0. ^I^ilbelm iuirb ben gangeu ^ag 511 §aufe bleiben miiffen, tyeil cr fid; eddltet 'i^at 21. 5iJ?ein 33rubcr fpric^t gut ^cutfc^, obgleid) er erft in in feinem ficbjebnten !^abre i}a^ Stubium biefer (^ipvac^e angc= fangen l;at. 2:1. Solten Sie fo gut fcin unb mir fagen (mir ju fagen), loie mel U^ir e« ift '<'. B. 1. A stranger wants to speak to (f^rccben + ncc.) you. 2. That building was first a bank, then a shop, but it is now a dwelling-house. ',\. How do you know that ? 1 know it be- cause I have heard it fr -ii my father, 4. What shall I do? 1 have lost all my money, o. Do you know who has torn this book? 6. No, I do not know who has torn it. 7. Can you write the name of that stranger? 8. Do you know German? No, but T know French. 9. Do you know the difference between the words ' fcnnen ' and Muiffcn'? 10. I had already put on my hat, and was just on the point of going out, when the rain began. 11. These two ships set sail (ab= fafjren) at the same time, but the smaller arrived first. 12. I could not wind up my watch yesterday evening ; I had no watch-key about me. 11). I cannot remain now any longer; I must be at home at ten o'clock. 14. I know this street, but I do not know the name of it (say : how it is called). 15. A brave man is esteemed by everybody. 16. Of what is bread made? ORAL EXERCISE XXXIIL 1. Wie heiszt 'I am sorry' auf Deutsch ? 2. Weshalb bleiben Sie heute niciit langer? W. Konnen bie Deutsch? '98] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. 225 4 Sollte man gegen jedermann freundlich sein ? 5. Wie ^e lallt Ihnen Pans> (i WiV v;«i tti, -. vviege- LESSON XXXIV. THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. us go, IS really eqmvalent to an /„,/.eraf/z-e Mood\ Pi of Oc^m ; ,cf; fann Be^en, ■! can go,' to a Potential Moo,, etc 198. These Modal Auxiliaries differ from ,l,e' En<.lish Auxd.ar,es a.,, ,nay, ,„u,t, sM,, nnlt, in having an InfinU t and a Past Participie, and in the consequent ability ofo™ he f,nghsh Verbs, and must therefore be supplied in \Z lang^,ge by equivalent phrases, as shown in 'the fo loJ ng partia. paradigms (see also Less. XXXV). "id" '^ "^^ I '"Z; '° "^ ^-^'^ I -r ' " "^^- "^ ^^^^f I allowed (may) Present Indicative. td^ barf, I am per- niitied, may tc^ burfc, I (may) be permitted, tc^ fann, I can, am able icfi mag, I like, may Present Subjunctive. ic^ fonne, I (may) 1 ic^ mogc, I (may) be able I like 226 LESSON XXXIV. ' Imperfect Indicative. [g»98 \d) burftc, I was per- mitted id) fonnte, I could, was able icf> morf>te, T liked, might Imperfect Subjunctive. ic^ biirfte, I might be permitted icf) fbnntc, I could, might be able icb mbcfctc, I might ' like xd) \:}aU flcburft, I have been per- mitted Perfect Indicative. icf) IjaU gefonnt, I have been able id) f)a6e c^emocbt, I have liked tc^ t)a6e geburft, I (may) have been permitted Perfect Subjunctive. id; l;abe get'onnt, I (may) have been able id) \)ahi geniodit, I (may) have liked Pluperfeci' Indicative. id) fjatte gebuvft, I had been per- mitted id) batte i-\cfonnt, 1 had been able id^ battc c^emD(f>t, I h;ul liked Pluperfect Subjunctive. id» biittc gebuvft, 1 miirht have been permitted id> bdtte gefonnt, I might have been able id> bcittc gcmodbt, [ might have liked Future Indicative and Subjunctive. tc^ tuerbc buvfcn, T shall be permitted id> tiievbe fbmten, I shall be able id> tDCvbe mbgen, I shall like ' §198] ic^hjerbecjtburft (>a» Ben, 1 shall have been permitted THE MODAJ- AUXILIARIES. Future Perfect. ic^ mcrbo oefoniit i ic^ h,erbe gemocf)t f'atH'n, I shall BaBcn, I shall have been able have liked tc^ toiirbe biirfen, I should be per- mitted Simple Conditional. icB lyilvbe fonncn, I should be able ic(> iuurbe mojien, 1 should like Compound Condition.* AL. i(B triirbe c^eburft ba* ben, I should have been permitted tcf; luiirbe gcfonnt id; loiirbe brtben, T should have been able gemorftt ('^ibcn, r should foir, bu fofnx , ic^ i^id^ J ^ii,^ j,^_ lam rohliged) to, I tend to, am about thou Shalt I to ic^ mti^, I am com pelled, must Present Suhjunctive. i* miiffe, I (may ) be ^ UU, \ < mav) be compelled oblioed icO mu^tc, I was conipelled Imperfect Indicative. icfi foUte, J was (obljo-ed) to. ought t* irofle, I (may be willing icb luoate, I was wil lint: ^ » 11 1 1 ! i 1 i 1 1 11 H \v C! 228 LESSON XXXIV. [§§ 198 \d} iim^tc, I might be compelled iMrERFECT Subjunctive. \d} folltc, I might i* \vo\Uc, I might be obliged bewilling,vvould id) babe flemiijst, I have been com- pelled Perfect Indicative. id} babe gefollt, I have been obliged id) \}aht gettJoUt, I have been wil ling Perfect Subjunctive. \d} ^ahz cjetDoKt, I (may) have hern willing icb babe flemu^t, 1 id) ^abi c^iollt, I (may) have been I (may) have been compelled I obliged Pluperfect Indicative. id; l)attc i-^cjoKt, I id> batte getuollt, I had been obliged 1 had been willing id) \)atii gemu^t, I had been com- pelled Pluperfect Subjunctive. id) batte gemu^t, I might have been compelled id) bcittc gcfottt, I niijiht have been obliged, ought to have id) (;dtte getPoUt, I might have been willing Future Indicative and Subjunctive. id) ttjerbe miifjcn, I shall be com- pelled ic^ njerbc gemu^t ^aben, I shall have been com- pelled id) ioerbe foKcn, I shall be obliged Future Perfect. id) iuerbe gefollt Ija-- ben, I shall have been obliged id) U^erbe njoHen, I shall be willing \d) hjerbc ge^oUt Ifiaben, I shall have been wil ling h ^9dJ THE MODAL AUXILIARIES 220 i* ttJiirbe miiffen, I should be com- pelled Simple Conditional. id) luiirbe foUcn, I should be obliged ic^ h)urbe woilm, I should be wil- ling Compound Conditional. i^ tDiirbe cj^inuf^t ^abcn, I should have been com- pelled ben, I should have ijahn, I should been obliged have been wil- ling 109. Further Peculiarities of Modal Auxiliaries. I. They govern an Infinitive without 311, as: Gr mu^ ac^cii, He must po. .i,'''^Vn^ compound tenses, when a governed Infin. occurs the weak P Part, is replaced by the Infinitive ^really the old irfh r rV'''^'""' P''^' 9'-'^^'^^'^^ ^^^"^ides inform witn the Infin.), as : ^d) ^a&c flcmu^t I have been obliged ; — but ^d) ^aU C0 i^iin miiffen, I have been obliged to do it. 3. in subordinate sentences, their auxiliary of tense does not come last, but precedes both the governed infinitive and the participle of the Modal Auxiliary, as : @r fagte, ha^ er eg ^afie t^un muffen. He said, that he had been obliged to do it. Mf^r- ~" ^^'V'^'^Somg peculiarities are all shared by the verbs f)ei,u-n ^e fen, joren, Um^ „,ad,civ leljeu ; for other verbs governing an nl Without gu, see Ler,s. XLV. vcrumg an mun. 4. The ..>i^//.r (and older) forms of the Conditional (viz • impf. and Plupf. Subj.. see S tti^ nr^ ^r«ferr-^^ .„ .u_ ,_ ' ^nes (^nh tourbe), thus : ^ I :p i i i ■1? ! Hi 230 LESSON XXXIV. Simple Conditional. ic^ biirltc =- I should be permitted i* tbuntc - I " " ^^^^e ic^ moJ^tc = I " >il^^ id; muOtc = I " be compelled id; joflte - I " " obliged id; mi\it -= I " " willing CoMiouND Conditional. I§i99 id; ^iittc I should have (( ' geburft, biirfcn Qeh)unt, tlMmcu (^cmod;t, uibflcn gemuj3t, luiifjcu (^cfottt, foKcn ^ ge\uoUt, \uoUcn Remarks.- I. The Engl, auxiliaries also use by prefer- ence shorter forms of the Comp. Condit., but differently constructed thus : 'been permitted '* able liked been compv;lled obliged willing id)()nttce§tiun founcn mjf,cn mi'ificu foUcn lunlicn = I J could might must should would > have dene it Observe that the Engl. Verbs have the Mo.M Auxihary C could," might,' etc.) in the 5m//. Tense (Impf.), and the governed verb ('have done') in the Compoimd Tense (Perf. Inf)- whereas the Germ. Verbs have the Modal Aux,hary (batte . . .fbmten, etc.) in the Compound "Y^x^s^ (Plupf. Subj.) and the governed verb (tf;uu) in the ^m/A' Tense (Pres. Inf.). 2. Distinguish carefully between 'could,' Indir. {=^ ^^^ _ui. *..»,fA qnd 'roiild.' Conditional (= would be able, fonttte) ; and so with the other verbs, thus : §>99l Tlir. MODAL AUXILIARIES. i^l ^'t^T^/ft ?'" ^ ^'^ ""''' "-^ ^^^-^ '>-t able to) do It i/nilic.). er liinnte e« tt,.,.,, h.mn « lo.aic - He could (would be able to) do it, it he were willing (a,J.). Vocabulary', to remain up,sit up, «uf'6Icibc» fellow creature, neighbour, go out, lui^'gcfjcn thank, banfen ( j- dat.) bowj(., greet, Qrii^en (trans.) depend, rely (upon), [id; ucr. Iflf[en(auf-fncc.) moment, ber 2(ii'gcnb(icf railway, bie Gi'fcn⁡n ber i)idc^ftc disaster, bag Un^gfucf untruth, falsehood, bi*? \\\\', lual;r^cit over again, noc^ (ein)inar whether, if, ob else, otherwise, [onft S. In Sub weather, S(| fd,5i,cm SBrttcr. 8. I have heard (it) gaid eit «iA h^i.- / EXERCISE XXXIV. w^ f;e, gc agt at. I J. 5BiS,^tcn ©i. „id,t feci bicfen, fctonen Better frcjjtercn f„(,ren? 12. .§aft bu ben 3ug l>o„ SuffJlo at fcmmm fcben? 1.3. ;>a innM i,-r, (,.,1,5 ;<.» ,..- ,- - " e8 war „,e,„anb barauf, ben icf, fannte. 14. @t ^at oeburft, a6cv $ I. If 1' !' p "r V ^ ; ■ li 232 LESSON XXXIV. [§§ 199- er ^at nid^t gemollt. 15. ^^rf> tjabe in ber Stabt fagen ^bven, ba ] ein gvofjce Uncjliicf auf ber C^ifcuba^n gefcbe^en \\t 16. 0;r foU bon bicfem 33aiim gci^rimc-jen fcin, aber id; faun eg faum glaubem 17 ^d} barf nid;t jo f^at aufbleibcn al^ meiu alterer 33rubcr ; td? mu^ iebcu 3(bcnb urn jebu Ubr ju 5Bette gcl;en. 18. :5rf^ i^il^ * tbun m^ id> faun; barauf fonnen 2ie fid} toevlaffcn. 19. ^>on iuem'nnirbc bag 33ud) gejdniebcn, bag ©ie focben lafcn? 20. @g that niiv Icib, bafi Sie fo lange auf mid) f;aben mvtm mulfen ; id; tonntc mciuo .s^anbfdnik uid;t finben. B. 1. By whom was this picture painted? 2. I should like to know what time it is. H. May you go out, if you want to? No, we are obliged to stay at home the whole day. 4. I do not like (1 like no) tea ; I prefer (the) coffee. 5. Could you help me with my lesson ? (i. I should certainly help you with it, if I could. 7. He may say, what he will ; it is all the same to me. H. My father could have sold his house la^t year, but irow it is impossible, for nobody wants to buy it. «). Charles has beaten his dog with a stick ; he should not have done that. 10. May I offer you a piece of meat ? No, thank you. 11. Have (let) the messenger wait, till I write an answer. 1:2. I should like to read this I'rench book, but I do not know anv French. IH. 1 am sorry that I have not been able to come sooner. 14. He will be obliged to study another year, if he does not pass his examination. 15. Sophia should not have gone for^ajvalk, since the weather is so cold. Ki. The horse I warned to buy was already sold. - ORAL EXERCISE XXXIV. 1 Wie heisx-t das erste Gebot ? :>. \\issen Sie, ob wii morgen zur Schule gehen miissen ? 3. Harf ich Ihnen eina Tass^e Thee anbioten? 1. Weshalb haben Sie mir mit meiner Auf-abe nicht helfen woUen ? 5. Wie lange werden vMr aut Fritz warten mussen ? (). Sollte man seinen Nachsten .leben? m- 2oo] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. ^^^ LESSON XXXV. MODAL AUXILIARIES (continued) :-|DIOMS. "OO. The followiiijj are the moaf imt.r^vf.>v,^. r ^i » ^ '•"'- "'ost important of the various meanings of the Modal Auxiliaries : I Surfeit denotes permission, as : Tax\ k% frajicrt 'c- Ma/ I ask. eie hurfcn m nac^ .f^aufe geOen, You may go home now. (£r i)at mm fa^qen burfcn, He has not been permitted * allowed) to say anything. 2. ^iinttcn denotes: {a) abiiity {(^i pa-sous), as : Gv fonntc fd)on frt^reibcn, He could (was able to knew how to; wnte beautifully. %i) Wit nic^t fomiiuMi fbnnen, I could not have (would not have been able to) come. {^>) pOSSibilit/ {o(eve;ifs), as : G^ Urn fcin, It may b. so), it is possible. 3. W^m denotes : ('0 preference, likmg {oi persons), as : ^i:!) mog ticfc^ (sH'Wctt uiAt, I do not like (care for) this poem. ' (5r mO(^tc uid)t arhntcrt, He did not like to work. 3c^ b;ute 3l)rc« 33ruter fe(,en magcn, I should have liked to sea your brother. —^1. ^Miaic. and CtJiuiUj ihrou'^liout. (/^) concession, possibility (in 2. and 3. person only), '» +- .i*i-. IG -*" 11 it ', f ifi- i! i' liii 234 LESSON XXXV. t§2oc (^r mofl ge'^em He may go (as far as T am concerned), or : Let him go. ^a^ moft fciu, That may be (for all I know). NoTE.-The Kngl. ' muy ' denoting permissi.)n must be rendered by Dftrfcn in the first person, as : May I accompany you? ^arf id) 5ie beflleiteu? (c) Observe this idiom : ^(^ tucrbc movi^cn au^et^en, mog e^ x^c^xwi obcr nid)t, I shall go out to-morrow, whether it rains or not. 4. 9)lujfcn denotes necessity, as : mk ^0)ienfd>eu muijcu ftcrbeu, All men must die. Ge mu^ c^cftcrn flcfc&eben fcin, It must have happened yesterday. 2Qir \vcrbcu am^m miiflcn, We shall be compelled ,or ' obliged; or ' shall have ') to go. Note. -'To be obliged, compelled' after a negative is rendered by briuidicn, as : I am not obliged to go, 3d) btoud)c uid)t ^u iiel)eu. 5. SoUcn denotes duty or obligation, imposed on the subject ^y the will of another. (a) Imposed by the speaker, as: ®u joUft lud^t ftcblcn, Thou shalt not steal. (/i) Imposed by some person other than, but recognised by, the speaker, as : '"scl> joU i^cbcu, I am to go. er batte .^'bcn joacil, He ought tc ^ave gone. ^ii}a^? joU v-\cfd>eben '^ What is to be done? 4i>vv:^ jolltc id' tbun'^ What was I to do ? (() It also denotes a statement on the part of another as to the sul)ject, as : (Sr foa fel;r rcid) jein, He is said to be very rich. :li St 200 :cl), J by ^200] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. It, I t. ned lied ;d by 1 the lised other 25i 6. fBoUtn denotes ia) the exertion of the will on the part of the subject as • (^t miO ntd)t cichordH'tL He will not (refuses to) obey. i^) intention or impending action, as : Qv m morgcn abrci|cn, He intends (means) to depart ^a^&^ m [n-ccfH«n, The ice is about to break (threatens to break). er rtioatc eben geben (= mv cben tm ^^cnriff ^u qebcn), He was just on the point of going. (0 a statement or claim on the part of the sul^jecr, as : (Sv \m in ^nbicn oeipcfcu fein, He asserts that he has been (pretends to have been) in India. 7. Caffcu is used (a) as auxiHary of the Imperative Mood, as : Soffcu eie urn bkv blcibcii, Let us remain here. {^) to express permission, etc., as : man i)at bcii ^icb cntfpvinacn loffcil, The thief has been allowed to escape. (d to express the agency of another, as : 3^er Cffi^icr Uc^ bcu edbatcn kftrafcn. The officer ordered the soldier to be punished. mm^niUU %,Uv tkfi ben ^^^anni umf)OUCll, Cinderella's father had the tree cut down. Note.- The infin.in tl,e former of these examples is rendered by .he/..... .nfin.t.ve ,n LnKlish, the object of the verb hUIOU hein, under stood. Supply the ellipsis as follows : ^ ^or CfR^icr Oat imant (obj. of lam), ben 3olb(Ucn (obi. of hntvmn), bcftrafcii (offcn, The officer has ordered so,M to punish the soldier. "^ .! 1 Qf) reflexively, as ,M< I m i 236 LKSSON XXXV. l§§ 260- (5v licfj fifi) Iciibt bctviii^'n, Mc suffered himself to he deceived easily. '^^d} lie)) cs> mir i^cfallcn, T submitted to it. (5-^^ liijjt fid) nidit Iciuvicn, It cannot be denied. 201 . How to render shall and will.- 1. I he Kn"l. ' shall ' and ' will ' must /><)/// be rendered by tUCrtlCU when they express ;?i<'rr futurity, as : I shall be drowned and nobody will save me, ;"scb mvht cvtvintcu imt nicmaub luivti micl> rcttcu. 2. -Ikit if they express more than mere futurity (e. g., oblii^ation or ,lrtrmination\ they must be rendered by foflcu and nioflcu respectively, as : 1 will be drowned and nobody shall save me, ls6> Itiill crtrint'cn unb nicmanb joll mid^ vcttcn. 202. (H)serve the followinj; parallel idioms: (iv f|nt cv uid^t tl)un fiiuucu, He has not been able , . to do it. ^' '^ tiv fnnil c^> nid^t pt\)m fiodcit, He cannot ipossibly) have done it. (5v f)nt c^^ nidit t(}Un mogcn, He did not like to do it. Gv mo;', c^> {^ctfjon fiabcu, He may (possibly) have done it. I Civ ^nt c^^ tljuu miiffcn. He has been obliged to {(■) I do it. I Civ muji c^> gcttion ^nbcn. He must have done it. r Civ \)ai Cv5 t^Utt jotfcn, He should i;ought to) have j done it. " j Civ \o{i Co flctljan ^oku. He is said to have done it. (^') i 202] THE MODAL AUXILIARIES. ^17 ^) ; (Sr ^nt cc^ tf)un luoMctL He intended to have done ii. Gr ni (I ccrbe bie ,!# MM u 238 LESSON XXXV. m 202- 2ettion nie Icmcu fbnnen. K. ^u \mx\t fie lernen fbnnen, \mm bu e^ nuv auf bie vicbtiv^c ^Ahmk Dcvfucbft. 9. '•)J{an barf mrf)t m bcv Sdnile vlaubcvn ; bcv5 ftovt ben luartcu UiBt! IH. ^^^d; mod^tc 3ic nid^t ftbrcn, ahix fac^en Sic miv qcfdUii^ft, Unc bicfcr 2al} auf ^mm l^eiBt. 14 (s5cDVc3^ ^:isatcr foil a*^faln-licl} !vanf fciu ; man Imt jioei Slv^tc ftoicn lafien. 15. ^cv ^hv-^cI \w\iU cbcn Dom i^aumc flicgen, alo ber Sciger ibn fd^of^ 1<^. Wutcn ^Tamyn, A^crr ^Maun, mem iOatcr la^t >ncn fagen, baf^ cr 2ic Innitc ^tbcub crtuartet. 17. r^ak id) 8ie fagcn tun-on, bafj 3ic jcbcn lag cmc bcutfdK (Stunbc nebmen'? 18. ^3tcin, id) nctnnc cincn 2ag um ben anbern erne gtunbc H) ai^ac? mid) betvifft, h mbcbte icf) lieber afle brei ^age meine Stunben n:-Smcn. 20. ^a^i folltc id) meinen, benn 2te Unirbcn mebr ,Beit jum etubieven baben. 21. Gbrli* tvabvt am Idngften, unb Unved)t fdUdgt feinen eigenen .S>n-rn. B 1. Let us take a walk ; T cannot work any longer. ;i. The be<"-ar-woman, who has just asked us for nioi)ey, says that shHs (claims to be) a hundred years old. 8. She is not quite so old, but she is said to be at least above (iiber-l-acc.) ninety years old. 1. The fox said : ' The grapes are sour ; I do not like them.' 5. The fox said the grapes were sour, and that he did not like them. (i. Might 1 ask you how far vou are going ? As far as Montreal 7 . Should I put on my overcoat""^ H. I should tidnk so ! The thermometer is (stands) below zero !•. Is it true that this traveller knows three languages? U mav l)e [so], but I do not believe it. K). If you should see little Freddy up-stairs. let him come to me. 1 1 Bv which shoemaker do you have your shoes made ? 12. The steam-engine is sau I to have been invenied by an Eng- lishman, bi. L^i^'^y boys le irn on Iv because they are obliged ao5] COMPOUND VERBS. ^39 to learn. 14. He must have been very ill, as (ba) he is still so weak. 15. This house is said to have cost four thousand dollars, but I should not like to <,rive two thousand for it. lij. He has not l)cen able to come on account of tiie storm, otherwise he would be here alrcadv. ORAL EXERCISE XXXV. 1. Mochten Sie nichl cine Rcise nach Kuropa inachen .? ± Gehen Sie allc 'I'age nach der Stadt, odcr nur alle zwei Tage.? .*{. Was machen Sie, wenn Sie niclit niehr studieren konnen .? 4. Wer soil das Telephon erfunden haben .? .-,. Hat man einen Arzt holen lassen ? (i. Haben Sie das (ieid be- zahlen miissen ? li LESSON XXXVI. COMPOUND VERBS. 20.*?. 'i'he Prefixes of Compound Verbs may be either Inseparable or Separable. 204. A. Inskparablk Prefixks. Remember: The omission of gc- in the P. Part. The prefixes (jc-, cr-, cm|i-, citt-, flc , ucr-, ^cv-, mifj-, UUDcr- are always inseparable and unaccented, the principal accent falling on the verb. Remarks.— i. '{'he particle mi^- varies in usage, as shown in the Supplementary Lesson E.. iJ 209, i, below. 2. Remarks on the force and meaning of these particles are given in Part III. 205. J3. Separahi^e Prefixes. Remember: i. The Prefix is separated from tlie Verb onlv in Simnl»i» T^rio, Inte es and Principal (including Direct r 1.1 i- il T rrogative and Imperative) Sentences. LESSON XXXVI. [§§ 205- II 2. The j^c- of the ?. Part, and ]H of the Infin. come between prefix and verb. < 3. The principal accent is on the prefix. 2/,.. the prepositional phras'es .. .^ ^ l«flen rav icmc ^rnn,Mid,tVit,, contrary to rule. In acco „u f Le r character as separalile prefixes. 4. Adjectives as prefixes are usually separable, as : frcilaficn, set free (liberate); feftfmltcn, hold fast (de- tain) ; fic^ Io0fagcn (refl.), renounce. But many are inseparable, of which fuller particulars are given m ihe Supplementary Lesson E., § 212. For Uoa- as prefix see § 208, below. ' ^^^' C. Double Prefixes. 1. Separable + Separable prefix; these are compound adverbs, and both separable fsee § 206, 2, above). 2. Separable + Inseparable; the former alone is se- parated, as : ' Oll'crfeimcn, acknowledge, id; crfenne ait yhm see Suppl Less. E., §213). ^^ ■ 3. Inseparable + Separable ; both in.separable, as : koilf traocn, authorize, ic^ licoiif tragtc Hjn, I authoriz--^ "im; uernnftaltcn, arram ranged this. ige, id) iseronftaltete bics., I ar- HM 242 LESSON XXXVI. [§§ 207- NoTE -These are really not c Mound h^x\ derivative verbs, from compound nouns cnilf'tran, ^^lu'l'talt; , hc.u r also the verb (as in the former example) is always weak, not strong - l.oauftvai]tf, bfOlUtlrtflt. 208. -^. riU'.i'iXKS Separable and Inseparahik. The prefixes tjurri)-, fitter , iibct-, utitcr-, \m-, OoU- are sometimes separable, sometimes inseparable. They are : ^a) Separable as long as both prefix and verb retain more or less of their literal or cone '.e meaning; {!>) Inseparable when both have lost this meaning, and form together one new idea. A compoimd of the same verb and prefix may therefore be both sepa- rable and inseparable according to its meaning, as in the following examples : {a) Separable and LiteraL ! (/' Inseparable and Figurative. (Accent on I'retix, Trans, and Intr.) ; (Accent on Verb, always Trans.) tmrdl'vctfcn, pass (travel) through, as : (vr ift flcftcvn bicv i)urd)S-\cvcift, He passed through here yesterday. ^itt'tcrgcbcu, go behind iVbcrf cl3cn t tr. or intr. i, cross ; jump over, ferry across, as: (Sr je^tc mit ciucin BpniUi^' iibcr, He jumped over at a bound. ^•dbrmanu, bittc, jc^ctt2i. mich iioct, Ferryman,please ferry me across. bmdn'ci'jcit, traverse, travel over, as : (TV bat biv? i^in^c £anb biird^; vcift', He has traversed (^travelled over) the whole country. btntcvi^c'()cii, deceive, as: ©r l;intciijiufl' fcincn ^reunt. He deceived his friend. iibcrjc^'cn, translate, as : ^stb iiberjc^'e cin bcutidje^l^udj, I am translating a Cer^ man book. ao8] PREFIXES .SEPARAliLK AND INSEPAKAHLE. U3 un'tctjdncibcn, write under, subscribe, as : mi), He went behind the stove (around the housei. 2 The adverb ttJtcDcr is separable, except in tUicHcrho'loil, repeat (but lliie'ftcrl)o(en, fetch again). v \ < 3. Many compounds with these prefixes are used as inseparable com- pounds only; others ar, separable only. uiitcridirri'ljcn, sign, as : ;'scb \^K\U ben ^i^vief nodi nid>t untcrfrtiric'Dcil, I have not yet signed tlie letter. iimnc'f|Cll, evade, as : ')Jian imij^iufl' bav (^)e|el3. The) evaded the hiw. DoUcn'dfii, complete, as : v3d) \)K\h'i nieine ^Jdboit i)ol(= cn'bct, 1 have completed VOCAHULAKY to meet with, an'treffen give up, aufi^cbcn cease, stop, aufbi)rcn open, anf maduMi leave out, omit, au^yiaffen pronounce, aiho'ipiwbeu assist, aid, bei'fte(;eu go away, forfgebeu come out, bcraue'foiumeu come in, bevein'fomnieu set (of the sun, etc. i, un'ter^ ijeben read to, voi'Icfeu (+ dat. of leave, l>ci'Ia))en [pers.) promise, lHnl>redien present; introduce, iHn'fteUou (+ ace. and dat.) go past, pass by, Dovbei'gebeu close, shut, ;,u'iHadHMi come back, uiriid'toinnien 244 LESSON XXXVI. [§«o8 i \i H collide, ;;aifam'mcnftofu'n send to, jn'fdnctcn (+ dat.) coffee, bcr Maf'fcc Nortiiern Railway, btc OcOib': eiicnbabn slave, bcr 3tla»c marria<];e (-ceremony), bic !irauuni^ pale, blcicf) by heart, aU'>ytucnbi(^ since, fcitbcm' (adv. and conj.) closed, shut (predicate), ju even if, mwv . . . aucb Jdioms: I. What U tlu' iiialtor with him' Uai t)Ot tr? a. H« feels 111, Jbm ift jrtitrrtit ]\i SJiitf; or: (»o ift ihm (Alrdit \xi 'auiit. ;{. To traiisluto into (Jeriiiaii, ;\ii0 tcui|it)( ilbrrirlKii. 4. !ii fine weather, iHei jdioitrut SOcttrr. 5. If you please, SOtiiii iit) liittrit barf (lit., If I may ask). EXERCISE XXXVI. A. 1. 5.^crgif5 nid^t, bao ^^-cnftcr ^u.^imiadHMi, mmi bu ba'-S 3immcr Dcvliif^t. i. '^iivJ man auffdncbt, tommt fcltcn 311 3tanbc. ij. .Vlbnncn 3ic mir fa{\cn, U>ic bicfcy 3."i3ort auf Dcutfd; aiivcn u>irb? 4. ^3Jicinc 3dni>c[tern fanicn mir cuti^ci\cn, abcv kibcr babcn fie mid; nid^t ani^ctroffcn. 5. ^lUclc babcn licrfvrodH'n, im§ bcijuftcbcn, abcr mir iocniiic babcn nne mirtlid^ bcigcftanbcn. 6. Sir finb jcM mit bcm erftcn 2:ci(c bc^S 5^ndH^> bcinabc fcrtig ; nacbftc Sod>e fani^'n unr an, ben ^mcitcn 2i\l jn nb^r[cl3cn. 7. 3tiH'i Jugc finb auf bev ^iovbafcnbabn sutannncni^cftoficn. «. ^d^ bbrte auf ju fin^cn, mcil id> bcifcr unirbc. *J. llicin ^l^atcr madUc ben ^i^ricf auf unb Uv$ benfclbcn bcr 3'iii»ili^ ^^^^' 1<^- "^''^^ ^i"- mal \iu}t, bem i-\laubt man nid>t, unb n>cnn cr aud; bic ^Jinibrbcit fViidU. 1 1 . .s^abcn 3ic bie i^cituuv^ botiMumcn, bic id> v»bncn au^i bcr 3tabt jut^icbidt babe? 12. (rffen 3ie geuu^bnlid) in ber 3tabt 3U 'lliittaiV? 13. :;>a n>ob(, id> i-\ebc jcben ^acT um neun llbr fort unb t'omme erft um fed>^ llbr juriid. 11 ^Uiancbcr bat anc\efanoen, tiHV5 er niclit uollenbet bat. 15. llnfere ^cacbbam mufjcn UH>bl fort fein, benn alle ^aben finb bei ibnen ju. U). ^lommen 3ie bod) berein; icl^ ioill 3ie i^evvn :-^>vaun uinftclicn. 17. '^sd) banfe melmal^, aber icb bin ibm fd^on lun-geftellt iT)orbcn. 18. il\'i j^208j coMPocxn vi:ki!s. 245 i^bcv ubcrmorgcn ftattv 'Ml ^JsJoHcn .3ic cine :ra)ic 2M mm ^le nur lictnn- cine 4 af[c .Uaffcc. ^. 1. The Reformation took place in the sixteenth cenfury. •-. Have you closed all the doors and windows ? l] \Vh,t is the matter with you ? Vou look so pale. 4. I do not know'- since I have come back, I do not feel at all well, o In the year ,865 all slaves in the United States were set free (5 Have you opened the letters which have just arrived > 7 The sun sets earlier now, and the -..eather bepns to .row colder. K Mary ,s learnmg a poem by heart ; she has alreadv repeated It ten t.n.es. ii. Have you found out at what o'clock the ".eenn^. takes place .^ 10. Do you know the ^^-ntleman who has just gone past .Ml. When we were goin^,. past the church, the people were just coming out. I >. Pay attention to your work; you always leave otu words, when you are co^ Wn^. hi VVhy have you closed the window } I was beginnincr To catch cold. 14. I have tried to learn this poem, but it is too hard for me, and I have given it up at last. 15. (Joethe's l;aust has been translated into English by Bayard Tavlor. 1>. The marriage of my brother takes place to-morrow at eleven o clock, ORAL EXERCISE XXXVI. 1. In welchem Jahre wurden die Sklaven in den Ver- emtgten Staaten freigelassen .^ :>. Lernst du gern Gedichte auswendig ? ;}. (Jlauben Sie, dass unsere Nachbarn fort sind > 4. Kennen Sie den Mann, deram Hause vorbeigeht ? r, Wer hat d,esen l]rief aufgemacht > (i. Wie sprechen Sie das Wort u-o-e-t-h-e aus ? R 246 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. [§§209- SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON E. ON CERTAIN PREFIXES. aOl). 'rilK iNSEFARAHLK PRKKIX lUiS- The particle mi^- is inseparal)le, hut : (,,) With cclain vcrhs it takes the JJC- of the P. Part, and JU of the Iniin. aftc.il, as: miri)rt"^^"l"' act amiss niiiVflctianbelt mitAul)a^^.•(u Wuh other verbs llltft- either : {/>) Has {JC- ^h'/on- it, as: mifnion'bclu, ill-treat !'. Part. flcmilYllan^dt — or: (c) Drops flC^ altogether, as: mimaricn, displease P. Part, mimal'leu Note. — 01)serve that tliu principal accent: under («) is on the /re/ix throughout ; " (/,) is on the /'r<:/i.v in the 1'. Part, only, otherwise on the vfr/'', " (c) is on the vrr/' throughout. 210. Use of the Prefixes ^cr- and J)i«- 1. The particles Ijcv (' hither ') and |)in (' hence') are prefixed' • verhs, 1,0th simple and compound, to indicate the directio:. towards or from the speaker respectively, as : Wommcn 2\C Ijcr, ("ome here (hither, to me). (Hcl^cn 2:K Ijilt, ('O (there) thither (hence, from meV Hence, a person standing L',^-s/ : Mommcn 2\( llCiailf, Come up h-^re (up-stairs) ; hu'i to ont^ u/stairs : (SSf()cu Z\( IlinuHtcv, Go down there ido\vii->tairs). 2. The .simple prepositional adverbs ab , nil-, ttUf-, ilUi--, fin- 'l-'fter-, itbcr-, untcv ,Hm tint are only used with verbs of motion, whf'n the ;6m pound verb denotes motion in a general way, without spe cifie A direction, or when it has lost the idea of motion altogether ii iii] USE OF THL PREFIXES. 24; J- i'r) V he,, w,th aui and bOl-, also with ah- in the sense of ' down ' ed In ; ' . u '° "•■ ''■°'" ^'" •^'^^^'^- •« ^"^^her indic- ated In prefixing (,cr- and (jir,- respectively. (/') When with the remaining prefixes („„-, „„f-, etc.), the place to wh.ch the motion is directed is implied, ,u\ not secifi d ^ or Ijin- IS smularly prefixed. 4. The following examples will serve to show more clearlv th. ,Uff ence between verhs with the simple prefixes and tho::^:;!^^- or t" :!; {a} With Simple Prefix.- UU8nel)0ii, go out (for a walk, on business, etc.) »or^icf)cii, prefer obfteii^eii, dismount onfiMnnii'tt, arrive U5ciiicf)fu, desert [perish UntcrflclKil, set (of the sun) ; sink ; {''') With (jcr- or (jilt- : IjmniicnclKn, go out (from the house) Oftuoi-5ir()i'ii, draw forth ftrrahftcii^cn, descend OfMllfoimiicil, come up to, ap- proach l)iniibornc()cii, go over, across l)ininitcrnol)cii,godown(stairs,etc.) .re^usl Us TSX '"" "''° "'"' --^P-tivdy is specified, these words a.e used as /.r/.../,.,,. y,,,^,,^ governing a substantive. !mt may be re- peated as adverbial prefixes with (jCr or ^tll, as : ^ ^v niiui ou^ brm Himmrr djinoug). Notes. - ,. .Jlb-, .neaning ' off, away,' ,l„es no, r.quh-e these prefixes, as • abre.ten, abfle[;c„, to depart, go off; _ but : UiuaHcljcu, to go down acc^a^^';:: ^'^^'^"^''^^"^^" ^^^ -''-^ ^° -•"^>' - ^P-i.ied, „, t.... preposHio,, i„ .it,, „. Gf litt in bie atnbt hineiii. j^c^ t«erbc ,u,d. Gm-opa hii.ubcivid,OM, I shall go over to I-urone err ,ft oom ^ncf,e h.rab.efadcn, Ho h,.s fallen down from the Lf. Othkr Prefixes. suiiJ^Ver^t:''""' """ ""^°""' substantives are treated as ^aSpviUrm, the breakfast, fnil)'ftu(fcn, to breakfast; irf, friifi' fti'cftc, gcfriifi'ftiicft. ' ^ I 1 )*■- lit ;aB Ksem Kf ■!■ 2aS --f SUIM'LEMKNTAKV I.liSSON K |§§2lt !Die ,^-^anb'l)alie, the handle, l)anb'()nbrn, to handle; l)onl)'liabtc, fli!l)anb'l)abt. T)cr 3{at'jrf)lafl, the counsel, nit'idilacien, to take counsel; rol'= Wa^k, flcvat'fclilnflt. Note -Observe that all such verbs are weak, as in the case <.f the last two of th.' aboCe verbs, which arc not compounds of haben or fdilaflcn respectively. 212. Adjective Prefixes ;ue frequently inseparable, but retain the principal accent and require flf h/ore them in the P. Part., as : ttJci^'uicion, to prophesy, ttJfi&'iantc, rcuuMfn'iint ; icdjt'fiTtiticn, to justity, vc(l)l'fcrtinte, 0cvori)t'fci-tint ; lict/loicn, to caress, Uth' to[ti\ jjclieb'ioft ; also the substantive compound : luft'ivanbdn, to walk for pleasure, fleluft'iuailbc'it. 2i;j. Some verbs with Separable -f- Inseparable Prefi.K are used only m ('onstructions which do not require the separation of the former particle from the verb ; thus we may say : (£[)ViftUv^ ift OttCi'ftanbcn, Christ is risenjromjhejead,— or: "■m (Sl)l-iftUO ttUicn'taub, — but instead , of : (Si- cvftaub nuf, we say. (5v ftanb ucii tJcu tottn oiif. Similarly with OU^CrlolOU, ilOrcnUinltcn, and a few others. EXERCISE E. 1 Have vou answered all the letters ? I have answered all except this one. ■>. I have asked my sister, if (whether) she is ready, but she has not answered. :5. She has gone up-stairs ; perhaps she h' ^ not heard. 4 I et her come down, for I cannot wait for her any longer. .^ I should like to speak to vour father ; is he at home ? ♦'.. Yes, he is up-stairs in his studv: i>leasc oo up. 7. Some one is shouting in the street ; go amcn (gen., or ilber + acc), be ashamed [cbncu {\\a6>), long (for), yearn luunbcrn (iibcr -f ace), be astonished freii it*,' €' SBS. ?' 1: . t 250 furt()tc«, fear LESSON XXXVII. [§§«■)- l^iitfn, protect ftcflcn, place ticrinfini, leave juttagcn, carry (to) fid) fiivcMcn (lun- + dat.), be afraid „ butcn(lHn- + (Int. ), beware „ [tcUcn, pretend „ iH'i-lafjcu (auf + ace), rely (upon) „ gutvai-jcn (impers.) hap- pen, occur 2. Transitive verbs are often used in English with the direct (personal) object unexpressed, e. g., 'change, turn, open, spread; etc.: such verbs have the object expressed in German as the reflexive pronoun, e. g. : The weather has changed, ^^ae Setter batfit^ geanbert. The wind is turning to the east, ^Dcv ®inb brebt fil^ nad> Cftcn. The door opened, Tic Ibiix offnctc ftrf). The disease was spreading over the whole towrn, Die .SU-aufbcit iH'rbvcitctc fl(^ iibcr bic (\a\^c Stabt. 3. For the use of ReHexive Verbs for the Passive Voice, see § 1 1 4, {/>). 4. From what has been said above, it will be evident that Reflexive Verbs are used to a much greater extent in German than in English, which indeed has no Reflexive Verbs in the strict sense defined above. 210. (ioVERNMENT OK REFLEXIVE VeRHS. I. All /r/zd- reflexives take the reflexive {personal) object in the accusative ; the remote object (the thing) is in the genitive, or is governed by a preposition, as shown in the examples given in § 215, i, above, thus : 217] IMPKRSONAI. VKRns. 251 ^c6 fd;amc tiiirf, mcincg mvac^m, l am ashamed of my behaviour. (S-rinncrft bu birfj bcffcn nid>ty 1 )<, you not remember it? 2Bir febntcn un^ tmt^ unfcrcr Dhittcr, We lon-ed for our mother. ^c^ erbarmtc iiiirf) fcincr, I had pitv upon him. 2. Some spurious reHexives have the' reflexive (/.r.W) object m the dative, and the thing in the accusative, as • ^5^ tann mix bao bciifcn, I can imagine that. M) bilbetc mir bic^o nur cin, I only imagined this as ^:^-obiS'^i:!:;''"" "^^^ '- ^^^^^^ °^ ^^^ ^-- -^^^ ^ '-- 3clnd,n.eid,cltc mir, j,o§ ic^ e.^ tf,uu fbimtr, I flattered myself that I could do it. ' ^^'^' Impersonal Verbs. Impersonal Verbs Proper are those used only in the third person sing., with the neuter pre .oun eg as subject. I. Those expressing Natural phenomena, as • C0 frf^neit, it snows eg blil3t, it lightens C0 regnet, it rains CS bonncrt, it thunders, etc. also with the verbs [cin or iuerbcn, as : 0^« ift (iDirb) fort, luarm, bunfcl, etc., It is , grows) cold warm, dark, etc. ' ^^ ift (]d}ldc^t) funf. It is (strikes) five. 2 Those expressing bodily or mental affections (a) with accusath^e of person. (Sg friert mif^, I am (feel) cold. ©^ Dei-rangt mid) {\m\6>), I am (feel) desir jus. m freut midft, I am glad (it rejoices me). e^? toimbert mirfv I wonder (it makes me wonder). m 2C2 LESSON XXXVII. [§§ 217- It (B^ jainmert mid) (gen.), I pily (it moves me to pity). e^ vent mid) (gen.), I repent (it rues me), etc. (d) with Dative of person. e^ biinft (bcudit) mir, Methinks. (g§ gelingt mir, I succeed, etc. {/) with fein or iuerbcn {^Dative of person), as: (5g ift (tinvb) mir iibcl, luoM (511 9liutc), T feel ill, well (it is ill, well to or with me in spirit). e§ ift mir lieu, (eib, I am glad, sorry (it is dear, sad io me). Note. In this class of verhs the subject C8 is omitted when the per- sonal object precedes the verb, i^s- mid) uniubcit, etc. 3. Verbs used impersonally with a special sense, as : 2Bie ftc^t'g mit l^l^nen? How fares it with you.? @§ 9C§t il^m gut; He is prospering. 2Ba^ flicbt'g? What is the matter.? 2Ba§ fc^lt %^\\i\\'^ What ails you? Also fein and toerben, as under i and 2, (/•), above. 4. For the impersonal use of the passive voice, see § 113. Note. ~ Of the above classes, those alone are strictly impersonal which admit only of ti as subject ; others, which are used with other sub- jects, but only in the third person (sometimes plur. as well as sing.) are properly called unipersonal. 218. Conjugation of Impersonai, Verbs. 1. Impersonal Verbs form their various tenses, moods, etc., in precisely the same way as other verbs, but are used only in the third person singular. 2. Some are weak, others strong, as : frieven, to freeze, Impf. e^o fror, gefrorctt ; fifnteicn, to snow, Impf. ce ict)neitc, P. Part, gefdmeit. a«9] GOVERNMENT OF IMPERSONAL VERBS. 253 3. Most of them are conjugated with f)abm, as : @^ ^ai gefc^neit, gefrorcn, etc. ; but some take fein, e. g., geliiujen, gluctcn, to succeed ; gefc^e^en, to happen (compare § 53), as ; ©^ ift gefdjcijen. It has happened. 219. Cover: . VI ENT of Impersonal Verbs. 1. Impersonal V^ rbs expressing bodily or mental affections, etc., take the immediate (personal) object (= Engl, subj.) in the I?afi7'e or Aca^ five (see § 217, 2, 3, above). 2. Those under § 217, 2, {a\ denoting a mental affection may be used {a) impersonally, with the thing {cause of emotion) in the genitive, as : @l jammert mii^ fciitcr, I pity him (it moves me to pity of him). ©^ reuet mid| meinet Sunben, I repent (it makes me repent) of my sins. ip) personally, with the thing (cause of emotion) as subject, as: %x iammertmin^, I pity him (he moves me to pity). 3«einc ©iinben reucn (pi.) mif^, I repent of my sins (my sins move me to repentance). Remark. — Observe that the English subject is object in German, the verb remaining always in the third person, as: %i freut mic^, I am glad. ®$ freut bil^. Thou art glad. %% freut t^n. He is glad. .1^ 11 %% freut vm, We are glad, etc. iuav, etc), when definite existence is expressed, or m particular assertions, as : ^8 ift ein 9.^Dgel in biefcm ^^auev. There is a bird in this cage. a^.^ fiiib jioei ^i^i3gel auf biefcin 33aumc, There are two birds on this tree. Remarks. — i. The English subject is also subject {nomt- fiative) in German, as : (S§ ift ciu 9lomttn (nom.) bou Tiden? auf bem 2:ifcb, There is a novel (nom.) by Dickens on the table. 2. The verb ''feiu) agrees in number with the /-tv?/ subject, and c^ is omitted, unless it begins the sentence, as : § 220] THERE IS, THERE ARE. 255 thirst, bcr ^iirft lemonade, bic l^imonabc caterpillar, bic %m).K slei^rhing, bie 3d^Iittcii6ahu way, mode, bic ::li;citc siiccessful(ly), i^lactUcf) now-a-days, bcut.^iitacic loiiei'f)ci'raten marry (trans.), ^ei'vatcn hurt (wound), berle^en Idioms: 1. I feel well, mh ift lopiii ,« m»tc. 2. He has married the daughter of the doctor, (*r bat ftdi nut icv Zodyter ^c« ^ottovi ocrhciintct. .3. In this way, ?luf ticfe mdie (ace). 4. I was hungry (thirsty), 3d) Ijattc *u„j,n' (tutfi). EXERCISE XXXVII. -'^. 1. Q^ bonnert, iinb id; fih-cf^tc, c^^ iuirb haVo regiicn ■> Um U>ie DielU^r h)irb bet ^hmn ^u TOtag gcoeffcn? 8. e^ ijat H)at)i-enb bcv md)t Q^fximn unb ^cutc iuerbcn luiv Bd^litmmij laufcn fonnen. 4. m^Ujalh bomtcrt e^, iuenn e^ bli^t'^ ®a^ lajit fid; md;t Icid;t erflaren. 5. ^d) habt mcincn bcftcn .^unb Un-Ioren ; fo em .v^unb finbct fid; nid^t IcidU Uncber. (i. (i.% freut un^ fct)r, ba^ .t^einric^) feiii eEmncn o{iidIid> bcftanbcu hat. 7 M) furcate, c§ Juirb biefee .^abr nur tDentose xHpfct qebcu ; bic ^Kaupen l;aben faft aUe inattcr mx bcu ^i^aumcn gcfreffcn. 8. (sjutcn ^^^'-rgcn, i>rv 33raun; giebt'^ bcute i^tm^-, ^};cucv? t i(^rcr ? 1 J. <3d>mcid)eln '^ie fifft, ba& e^ i^hneu auf bicj'e 2SJcife gelingcn tt)irbV ^ie l>ab*;n iiid;t (^5elb gcnug. 13. ^d) l)ab .s>aufc !am. 18. C^'c. iuivb bid) balb bcinci^ :©etragen'5 'Cucn, Jycim id; mid) uidu irrc; bu foUteft bid) fd)amcn. 19. @v giebt bcutgutage *3:l)oren, imb Icibev ^at <6 ju aiUn ^^citcn!Xl)in-cn gcgcbcn. ;.^o. (Siefonnen fid) bcnfcn, baf^ cc> mid) tuunbcrtc, ah id) mid) r.mbrcbtc unb mciiicu Idngft Derlovucu ^reunb Dcv mir fab. J?. 1. Are you afraid when it lightens .' )L Yes, I am always afraid of tlie lightnin<;, :\. What is the matter with you ? You do not look at all well. 4. I do not know what ails me ; 1 do not feel well, perhaps 1 have caught cold. 5. It has been snowing the whole night, and to-day we Iiave tine sleighing. H. Have you hurt yourself ? Yes, I have cut my finger. 7. 4'here are two gentlemen at the door ; do you know them ? 8. I know one of them, but I cannot remember his name. 9. I must dress immediately, or else I shall not be ready at seven o'clock. 10. If you do, not dress more warmly, you will catch cold. 11.1 am thirsty ; please give me a glass of lemonade. l:i. I am glad that the thunder-storm is past; the lightning is dangerous. \',\. Do you remember whether he was here on the 15th or on the i6th of January ? 14. Have you decided to leave (the) town, and to pass the summer in the country? 15. I hear somebody shouting in the street ; what is the matter? ORAL EXERCISE XXXVII. 1. Sollte man sich vor dem Donner fiirchten ? 2. Wie laniie wohnen Sle schon in dieser Strasze? 3. Stehen iSie aaj] PREP0..1T10N.S WITH TUK C.ENITIVE. 257 gewohnhch fruh des Morgens auf > 4. Wcshalb hast du die Fenster zugeinacht ? 5. Wie ge- Ht es Ihnen in diesem Hause ? (i. Wird es dieses Jahr vi. !e i'flaunien geben ? LESSON XXXVUI. PREF OSITIONS. 221. The Prepositions with Uie Dative only have been given in §§46, 51; those with the Accusative only in 555* 31, 50; those with Dative or Accusative in § 65. PrePOm ' roNs WITH THE GeNITIVK, 222 The Prepositions governing the Genitive are chieHy nouns used adverbially. The following lines contain tiie principal ones, and will aid the memory : Ihmcii, mittclft fro|t unb ma^rcnb, iimi, ticrmiific, unncor^tct, CDrr^aift unb unter^olb, Snncr^fl 6 unb oufrr^olft, ^icsfcit jcnfcit ^alficn, incgcn, Stott, aud) liiiigg, jufolflc, tro^ /^7.v,v the case • Juegcn may follow or precede a personal pronoun, a no' 1. but al ways follows ^ '.imiiumm 258 LESSON XX.W III. [^aa3 2. .j^alb is used only in ilcebalb and mcdbalb ; halben after the prrsonal pronouns or substantives with a determinative or attributive word; l^albcr after a substantive used alone, as: 'Xc6 Ai'icboU'ei balbfll. For the sake of peace. ''I^cifpicl^ balbcr, For the sake of example. 3. The personal pronouns have a special form endinjj; in -i before balbcu and UK'ocn, thus : mcinetbalbcn, for my sake unfcrhuci'^cn, on our account, etc, W. au^crl|0lb, (on the) outside a. obcrl}alD, above of , (1. uutcr^olb, below •I . tUltri'^alb, (on the ) inside of Examples : Unfcv Ojaitcu ift ou^cvljalb (^iuncr^nlb) bcr Stabt, Our garden is outside (inside) of tlie town. 'Woutrcal lici^t iintcrljalb bc8 0ntario=3ece, Montreal lies below Lake Ontario. Remark. — ^suncrbalb in expressions of time may be fol- lowed by the dative of a substantive without article, as : OtUncrbalb §U)ei ^ai^cn. Within two days. 9. (bcr)mtttclfi, ) by means 10. Dmniigc, \ of 11. JufolflC, in consequence of Rlmark.. — (-^ufoU^C governs the genitive when it precedes its case, but the dative when it follows, as : C5r tbat bie'o jiifotflc mcincs '^V'febls, or meincm '-IVfcblc jufoIc\c, He did this in consequence of my order. 12. bte^fcit oi"! this side • 18. jcufcit, on that ('the olhcri side 7. frttft, by virtue of 8. Iiiut, in accordance with faaa] !il I-REPOSITIONS Will, IIIK GENITIVi;. 259 Rkmakk - :Dice[cit and jcnteit are prepositions (governintr a r^oun,,; biceicu* and jcnfcit^ ../;../.. (without a case) as ^scft^ n)of)nc birefcit cr jciifcit be. ^yluffe., I liv. on this he on that (the other) side of the river, - but • ' Sii iuo(;ncu bcibc nabc am ^•(uffc ; icb bie.fcite, or jcn. Cit«, \Ve both live near the river; [ on this, he on the other side. 1-4. (Jotr, ailftatt, instead of REy-ARK.-i)(„ftatt.is sometimes divided, thus: 9(nftatt mcine^S ^i^rubcrc.. Instead of ,ny brother, - or- «n ineinc. ^^vubcro Stott, < In n.y hrother\s stead ). 15. Ullflcariltct notwithstand- ].;. Jroj^ in spile of Remarks.- i. Uiu^cadUct may precede or follow its case of thn^ ''^^ g°^!^7« the ././/.. in the phrase trot^bcm, ' in spite of that, and with the meaning of ' as well as.' as : Tiefer .Unabe vcitct tio^ eincm mmnc. This boy rides as well as a man. ir. ma^rcnb, during jg. jj^,, ^ ^ Remarks.- r. i^cing. also governs the ././.;., and always precedes its case, as : ^ Scingvj bc6 llfci-0, or bcm Ufer, Along the shore. 2.^ Gntlan.3 ooverns the genitive when it precedes its case • but It more commonly follows its case, and governs ,ho ..;..: iciiivCj as ; Gr iling ben m)^ cilt(nnj|. He went along the river. To these may be added : ■-<». Onacfidlts, in presence of ■>■) iim »r-"— ^ ■ 1 .,, . ■ .i , . , "" ""«••• wiui-ii, ior ine sake -M. mmittcn, in the midst of of 14.^ 26o LESSON XXXVIII. [§§223- I. Um . . . U)tl(en takes the case between um and K EM ARKS. toiUen, as : Um mctnei 95atcr8 iriffcn, For my father's sake. 2. ^\iQ personal pronouns have the same forms with um . . . hjlHen as with f;albeu and iuegen, thus : um feinettuiHen, for his sake um ^brettuiUcn, for your sake, etc. 23. unfcrit, ) ^^^ f^^^ f^^„^ 24. UUtHCtt, ) 224. General Remarks on Prepositfons. 1. An Adverb of direction is frequently placed after an accusative, like a preposition after its case, as : ^cn 'i^erg ^inauf. Up the mountain. 2. {ii) Some prepositions may govern a substantive clause v^^ith bttj), as : e^rc ^i^atci- unb ^Otutter, auf bo^ e^ bir \m\}\ gebe. Honour father and mother, that it may go well with thee. Notes. — I. Such are auf, aullcr (also used with tocnn), bi\<, o(}nf, (oii)fttttt, uuncad}tet, maljmib. 2. 331'?, ungead[)tet, Umljrcnb are also used as conjunctions without baf?. ijy) Um, ot)ue, and (an)ftatt may govern an infinitive v^ith ju, as : CSr \(\\\\ flcftcrn, um bidi ju ftefurf)cn. He came yesterday (in order) to visit you. ^c^ fanu nic baran benfcn, o^nc 511 Itti^cn, I can never think of that without laughing, Diefcv ^)Jiann foUtc arbeitcn, nuftatt 511 bdtcin, This man ought to work, instead of begging. Remark. — Hut if the subject of the infinitive clause is different from that of the sentence on which it depends, ba^ must be used, as : «24] GENERAL REMARKS ON PREPOSITIONS. 26 1 ^d)UmxU md)t Doibeigef;cn, o^ne bof cr mtd) fafi (not oBne iiuc^ 311 fcf)cu), I could not pass by without his seeing me. 3. Preposnions may govern adverbs, as : md) ohn up- ward ; na* mntcn, to the rear; auf immer, forever; t,on fern from afar; and the compounds with ba(r)- and h)o(r)- (see § 38, Rem. 5 ; 8^, 3 ; 96, 7). ^ 4. A substantive governed by a preposition may be followed by an adverb, for nearer definition, as: 9la(i^ eincr ^Cid^tung ^in. In one direction. 95oit aaen Seiten ^cr. From all sides. ©r ritt Winter bem ^einbe !)cr. He rode in pursuit of the foe. Urn ha^, Ir^aihi ^cnim. Round (about) the house. fSm nun on. From henceforth. aJait ^ugenb oiif. From youth up. Vocabulary. to observe, remark, bemerfen (the) little Red (Riding) elect, erluaf;Ien (+ ju) permit, allow, erlauben inq^uire (about), fief) erfunbicjen (+ md)) go about, around, fjerum'gcfien ring (a small beli; flingeln go for a walk, fpajieren gefjen divide, teilcn let (of houses, etc.), bermictcn go away, loeggeb^'n the opposite, ba^ ©e'genteil custom, habit, bie ©ctt)obnf)cit microscope, ba^ liafroffo^' Hood, ba^ ^}i!Dtfd|)pd)en umbrella, ber 9tegeuf4)irm drop, bcr 2:ro|)fen drunkard, bcr ^Trunfcnbolb will, testament, bas Xeftamcnt' stairs, staircase, bie 3:reppe deceased, ber (bie) ^erftorbene warning, bie SBamung living, (eben'big loose, slack, lo^ in^time, punctually, rec^f* St'itig except that, au^er ba| ! I 263 Lr.SSON XXX VI II. [§824 Idioms: 1. Feu- all I care, WrhiriUirQrn. '1. ThiN lioiiHd Ik f(»r Nal(«, 1>iiird ^iau0 tfi jtr Herfjufett ;Ht., to bn NOld). :t. He MiiN <>l«>rt<>(l mayor, (ft- tuiirtir ]tim ^tirfltrtntifirr nrtuiiiilt (lit-, to or f«tr a, »'fc., - {iim - \\\ riiicm). 4. I liav«> lu>(Mi Ix'r*' for a week, ^^ill tiiit jcit nif)t XaQCit ^irr. 5. To laugh (at), make sport (of), «it(i luftifl mnrtirtt (jibfr + acc.). fi. What is tho matter? SUno ift kl.?'? 7. There is a ring (at the iloor, etc.), {^i fliitflrlt. EXERCISE XXXVIII. A. 1. ^a^5 .s?au$, luclcbcy ju Dcrfaufcn ift, ftcbt auf;cdialb bcr 3tat>t, nidU lucit l^om 3cc. 2. 'An'nn ce nur inncrbalb bcr 3tabt ftitnbc, fo unirbe irfi flcvn taiifcnb I baler meEjr bafiir t^eben. 3. WcfaUt e« .Mmcn bcffcr biov^fcit fccc^ Abfie-j j^u iuobnen, ober jenfcit^? 4. Iro^ bcc^ 3turmce. fain bay Sdnff rednjcititj in 'Jtotu ^J)orf an. 5. liefer 2run!cnbolb bat uin feincr ^-amilie unUen ba-^ Xrinfcn aufi'\Ci-\cbcn. (>. (rr fiirdUctc, baf^ fcine 3obne bic fdilcd>tc ©eiuohiis bcit lerncn mod>tcn. 7. Tcr buni-\rii-\c 'iln'^If I'^iui^ mctinnal'^ uin bae .s>au''? unb fud>tc :-KottdppdH'n. H. 'l>crmittclft fcince flro^cn Ci'infhiffce bci ben ^KciduMi {}<\\ \\6> .v)crr %. :iUin ^Mri^crmciftcr eruniblen laffcn. 9. (Scit luann iDobnen 3ic in bicfcr Straf^c? 2cit brci ^abrcn. ](). Urn mcinetipitlcn luiU er ni*t mit mir j^ebcn ; uicUcid^t imirbc er urn ^^sbrctunKcn i^obcn. 1 1. ;^[t O^con^ obcn? ,^a, cr ift focbcn bie 2:revVH' binaufiv^Vi"i"it-'n- l"-- l^^ffcn Sic un^3 licbcr nacl^ pbcn tjcbcn ; ce iinrb um^ bcffcr i^cf alien cbcn ju fit^en al^5 untcn. 13. G^ bat lun- ciniijcn. lliinutcn cjcHini^clt; ivcr tpar ba? 14. (1^$ njar jcinanb, bcr fid^ crfunbic|cn lyoKtc, ob bicfce .s^amo ;u Dermicten fci. 15. Tern 2'cftamcntc jufoU^c imirbe ba§ (iii^'utum unter bic bcibcn 3bbnc bee ^U'rftorbencn i-\cteilt. IH. Hceinettuegen tnag er gebcn, fobalb e^5 ibm gcfdllt. 17. %\\\\ ^X :^TT "T """"'■>• '"^'" '-''>■ '«•■''" -■•-"- altly. ,. W e have l,ee„ here since yesterday. a„cl we „u,stwait ree cays ,no,e for .he ship. «. ,>„,. ,J„ ,„„ ,,^. ,. \ nol th,nk ,„uch of , his Ke„tle,na„ : he u„„ld ,lo a„y,hi„.. f," see,, ,n .idrop of water, n. in^consecp.ence of this had .-of „ her people? I:,. No, that is a bad habit 1. Vonder ,s the ,iver. on this side stands „,v honse „„ ha, .s,de h,s. 1 5. Notwithstanding the warning of his fa her the youth ,^,en went on the water in bad weather. 1 ) " stead of t.k,„g the large boat he always ,00k the s.nall one. ORAL EXERCISE XXXVIII. K Weshalb hat der Trunkenbold das Trinken at.fgegeben > '■ '^ ' "f '<= ^^''^'»« l"t -^ich Herr li. „„„ BUrgenneister rwablen lassen ? :, Haben Sie .lingeln horen ^ u::':: Tl- .. °/""^ •'^"= S'^''"'-^"- ""'• i" vvelehen, Jah,e' 2 J'urchcen S,e, es konnte regnen > ,;. Kannst du ,„ir sagen was aiif der Straszt los war i * ' 264 LESSON' XXXIX. [§§ 225- LESSON XXXIX. PREPOSITIONS (continued):- IDIOMS. 225. Prepositions vary more, perhaps, as to idiomatic usage m different languages than any other part of speech. Their yiroper use must be acquired chiefly by practice and memory, out below ar given the German equivalents, in various idioms, of the most commonly occurring English Prepositions, ■nore particularly in cases where the usage of the two lan- guages differs. 220. About. (a) In the sense of ' around ' = um, as : ©ie ncrfamineltcn \\d) urn ibn. They assembled about him. (/?) Of time = UUgefii^r urn (um alone = ' at ' ; see § 227, (If) I, below), as : Unjicfii^r um ^'bn Ubr, About ten o'clock. Uugcfii^r um 'Il^nbnacfitcn, About Christmas. , (c) In the sense of ' nearly ' (of number) ■-= cllUO, UUgCs fii^t (adverbs), as : (5r l)at ctmo (uttflcfii^r) taufcnb )thaUx iibrig. He has about a thousand dollars left. (,/) In the sense of ' with,' ' about' (the />i'rso/i) = hti, as: '^(b babe tcin (^c\^ hti mir, I have no money with me, about me. 227. At. (a) Of locality : I. = iu, when the action, etc., is within a building, etc., as : ^u ber Scbiile, \\\ ber ii^ircbe, im ^beater, Im ^lon^ert. At school, at church, at the theatre, at the concert. ^2B] PREPOSITIONS. 26s t>|]» 2. = an, when the nclion, etc., is ad^^a to the object ot the preposition, as : 81m rt-ei>ft«v „„ Kt Zlm. nm Jifc(,e, At the window, at the door, at r/„ table (but be Iifrt,c, at table). 3- - out wlien the action is on tl,e surface, or on an elevation^ as : Um.cr[ttd:. nuf bcm ScMoffc, At market at the Lll at tne post-office, at the university, at the ensile. ' 4^ - IXX or m with proper .ames of towns (also with ^aii6, 'home'), etc, as: ,^U (ill) ^^ari^^. At Paris. ^U ioaufe. At home. C^) Of iime: I- = urn (most usually), as: llm f)aI6 uicr llfn-, At half past 3 o'clock Uitt Dftcrn, At Easter. 2. = 311, with 3cit and Stuiibe, as : ,^uv rccf)tcn 3cit, At the right time. ^W biefei- eiiinbc, At this hour. Note. -U,„ with the ace. is also admissible witia these words. 3- == ki, as : 83ci ^ageSan&ruc^, At day-break: (c) Of price = 511, as : ^icfcv 3urfo. n^irb 311 siuei ^fmrern bae, ^fi.nb t^evfauft This sug.r H .old at two dollars a pound. — '*• By. («) Expressing the /.r..«.^/^.,„/ after the passive voice ^- It. as '. ", ~ n-.K^j5}, .,jj-(^,j^ tltern 0eiui)t, The loved by its parents. 18 child IS 266 I.F.SSON XXXTX. [$^ 226- (p) Of a part of the body, etc. = bci, as : (Sr nat;m "i^ci^ ^inb bci ber ipanb, He took the child by the hand. (c) Unclassified : ©Ci iiid^t. By candle-light. 5Bci ^)iad^t. By night. aWit WcUHilt, By force, Mi ber Gifenbai?n, By the railway. 3u 2anb, ,511 ^Kaffer, By land, by water. 229. For. Rendered usually by \\IX, but : (a) Of purpose = ^U {n^ver fur), as : T)ic^i ift fduMUH^ 'isiottcr \\x\\\ S^ajicreniieben, This is fine weather for taking a walk. ©r reift ^um i^crc^niu^cn, He travels for pleasure. (/; ) Of time : 1. Past = jcit, as: .Beit cinem ')3ionatc. For a month (past). 2. Future = nuf -j- ace, as : "sd> ircrbc nuf ciniv-^c 'Tat^c i^erreifen, I shall go away for a few days. 3. Duration = ace. without preposition, as : (rr UHir eincn iV^n-iCU 9}^onat bier. He was here for a whole month. (r) Of cause = nu^, as : (in- tbat cv OU^ ^urd^t. He did it for fear. id) Unclassified : ^Ifiit'g (2r[te, For the presept. gum crftcn (jtDciten, etc.) 9J?al, For the first (second, etc.) time. 230 PROPOSITIONS. 2Ci'; 3«»t ©ebuit^taoc 511 Seifmad^tcn, For (as) a birth- day-present, for a Christmas-present. 280. i„. Rendered usually by in, but : («) = OUf, as : In the street, *i(uf bcr StrafK'. In the country, ^i(uf bcni 2anbc. In this manner, %\x\ bicfe ^ii^eife lacc). In German, %\x\ Tcutfc^. • (^) = untcr, as : Ulltcr Glifabetb^ ^icgieruno, In Elizabeth's reign. ( '•) = gU, as : ^M ^ilHii-jcn, In a carriage. 231. Of. (a) By the genitive without preposition, to express the relat;on of the possessive case, as : :Dcr %^\{h m\\m ^'MUxi, The will of our father (i. e our father's will). ' H') = Hoii : 1. After 7'crhs^ etc., as : "s* f).nccl)c tjoil ihm, 1 .speak of him. 2. Between ///A'j- and names of phncs^ as : Tic .'i^bnioin tioii (iiinlanb, 11ie Queen of England. 3. After numerals and other partitives, as : Giner Hon meiiicn ^rcunbcn. One of mv friends. 2)ev adcftc tion mcincu ^Hnibcni, The eldest of my brothers. 4. Replacing a genitive plural without article, as ; (St iff bcr 33ater Hon Dicr itnabcn. He is the father nf four bovs. Vi^- tft 268 LESSON XXXlX. a3X 5 the Alma. 5. To avoid a succr^srion of several genitives, as : ^ie ^-rau worn ^Setter mdne^ lOnUU, The wife of my uncle's cousin. (c) Of cause, when the caure is a disease == on, as : Gr ftarb on ber Gbolera, He died of the cholera. (a) Oi place, with names of battles: 1. = (jci, if named after a town, village, etc., as : ^ic 6cMadit bci SeiV^in, The battle of Leipzig. 2. == on, if named after a rii^er, as : ODic (3d4acf)t on ber Stlma, The battle (e) Unclassified : ^JJJangel on ©clb. Want of money. Sicbc jnm ©elbc. Love of money. 2Baa foil oug miv h?erbeu ? What is to become of me ? 232. On. Rendered usually by ouf, but : {a) Of fi?ne or date = Ace. without preposition, or = on 4- Dat., as : 2:cn (or om) jtuiJtftcn ^aniiar, On the twelfth of January. {b) Of modes of progression = ]n, as : ^^tt "ipfcrbc. On horseback. 3u Me, On foot. (c) Of situation, on a river, sea, etc. : 1 . When it means on the untter = ouf, as : iUcle ecf)iffe fa()rcn nuf bcm §ubfon. Many ships ply on the Hudson; — but: 2. When it means on the s/iore = on, as : Hamilton liegt om OutariosSec, Hamilton lies on Lake Ontario. ^-33] PREPOSITIONS. 269 {d) Unclassified: "^^^ Jleife, On purpose. ®ci biefer Gele^en^ett, On this occasion. Untcr (or mit) bicfcv 33cbinouno, On this condition. ^m ^egriffe, On the point of. 233. rp^ JSJ^^T^' ''- ''''''-' ^^^-^ = ^--e without Sc^ ^abc melner ecfnt)eftcr cin Su* nencbcn, I have given a book to my sister (i. e., my sister a book). C^) Of motion or direction to persons = 31,, as : ^^ m in nicineni ^l^ater oc^eit, I will go 'to my father. U) Of motion to places : I. With proper names of countries, towns, etc. = „„,^ as • 1 aris, to Germany. «.th the .A<;„sar,rr, in various icii„,„s, „.|,ere ,i,es'e prepositions witli the Dative = 'af (see §227 (a), above), as: '' 3n hie ^c(,„te, fiirdf,., i„« sweater, fionsert «. f. lo. q^fien To go to school, church, the theatre, concert, etc an» (^cnftn-, an bit I^iir gt.l;en. To go to the window, door. Wuf Oci. ^m,tt, SSaU, a„f bic m, UniuerfitSt ^ebcn To go to n,arket, to the ..all, post-office, university: (ii) Frequently = ju, which may usually replace the prepositions in the above idioms also as ■ er ift aur etflbt, ^ur .Sirctje u. f. .„. gcflangen. He has gone to town, church, etc. I if, ' 270 LESSON XXXIX. [§234 234. ' With. Observe the following Idioms: ICon ijanjcm .s^a^cn, With all my heart. Gr jittcrt Hur Mciltc, He trembles with cold {cause). !3^a^ ift 6ci uiuj nirfit 3itt»./rhai is not the custom with (= amoNg) us. ,^tt bicfcr IHbfidU, With this intention. Remark. For the proper use of prepositions after partic- ular adjectives and verbs, see Less. XLIX. VOCAI'.ULARV. account, bill, bie ^){ccfmiinii to intend, c\cbcnfcn be^enough, suffice, binvciclHMi bring with (one\ mit'bviu(^cn sign, uutcr^cicfi'ncn bring back, ,^iiritcfbviniicn excursion, pleasure-trip, bcr harvesting, ba^o Grutcn favour, bcr Wcfaflcn Louis, Lewis, ViibUng measles, bic ?]cafcrn (f. pi.) dressing-gown, ber 3cblafrocf * evil, biv5 ilbcl relative, bcr ^iscvumubtc treaty, bcr '^iU'rtrai}* root, bic :^i>urscl this evening, bcutc 5(benb thorough(-ly), griinbUrf) fortunately, i-^liicflidH'rlucife possible, iiiLSilirf) absent (on a journey), Dcrreift Idioms: 1. To be aofustinned, 2ie Wctuohiilifit lloDrit (4-iiifin. with ^u). 2. Ill the ini(i. J, baft bu ben biibfdH'., 3d,lafrod bcfonnncny ^,d! ^abc ibn 3unt (sKburt.ta.,0 bcfonuuon, unb ^icbe ibn bcutc sun. crj^'n bev bai ^errn [prod^en iK, abcr cr ift bci 2^ unb Lnt fidi nia> ftorcu. .. ^u |,ijcft am ^.-nftcr , ficb bod, cinnial Jun ,>n)tcr bmaue, unb bu u>irft ibn uicU dU fcbcu tonncn s ^ -in rocld^cr 8cit Icbtc ^olierc V Cr. Icbtc untcv bcr .Hc,icrun, v,,,^ XIV. ^oP ,vrantro.d>. 9. ,^ft c. mo^ilid,, ^.u borfclbcn ;V>it .on erne r ^ad,e 3U fpredHMi unb an cine anbcrcau bcnfcn^ lo ^^ic Stcb. sum (sjclbc ift bic ^^ur^er aUe. llOcl.. 1 1 . Unfcr y>m,. f^ebt arn^J. Voren^M-Iun, unb Don bon ^cnftcrn ficbt niaii bic I)umpndnrrc Uorbci^Kbci. 1>. ^s^Hift bu ,nir bcinc Wranunatif I^'fHM,.^ ,,a loohl, u.it bcr ^)3cbin.iuuo, baf; bu bicfclbc 001 inin-iKii surudbrincift. i;;. ^sft .s^crr ^^^. ^n .s^aufc -y ^Vci„ ,, .ft m m .^ocbcn .crraft. 14. .^i ^a.c.anbvud, "fin.at b'c ^^o^cf ant Kbo.Mtcn. l.>. ,){l(o ;s-cnftcr unb Ihlircn mcrbcn be. JJacbt^^auo ,vurd,t i>or ^icbcn bci une siuicfd^foffcn. 16. 2^\'§balb imb bic Mmbcr nid)t ^ur 3d)ulc mwwn? 17. ^c^ finb nicbvere ^inbcv m bcr Sdnilc, bic an ben ^Jiafcrn ^dittcn babcn, unb bic ^Wutter fitrtttct fid, Dor bicfor .SUantbcit. 18. ^)icifcn 3 . licbcr m Sanb obcr ^u Gaffer V ^m 3onuncr ^icbc i* ce Dor ]n ^v«affcr ju rcifen. H». Diciu ^^ater battc bic C^JclDobnbcit, un/.Stinbcr uut ficb su Dcrfaniuicln unb un^3 (N^cfd,id,tcn ju cr^ablcn. -^o. Witkn im Sonuncr, unb banu toicbcr um Ul>eibnad,tcn, ;>1,c id, auf^$ ^anh, um mcinc i^crioanbtcn ju bcfud,cn. •>!. ^LUnijcn 3ommcr Kicb id, mcbr al. Dicvjcbn ^vxnc bci bcnfclbcn. I IMAGE EVALUATION TEST TARGET (MT-3) V /, {/ V C^, y^:^ t-r 4 r ^ %"m^ / & ^ =^ 1.0 LI 1.25 1^ M 112,5 2.2 IIIM III 1.8 i4_ mil 1.6 Ptiotographic Sciences Corporation 1 Ci^ \ iV :\ \ ^f-. ^ cv b0(^ gc)ac3t, Did I not sav sc. > 276 LESSON XL. [§§a3»' 238. III. Correlative Coniunctions. These are : entttjcbcr . . . ober, either ... or | ^.^j^^^^^i^,^ tticbcr . . . nO(^, neither ... nor ) Itil^t nur . . . fonbcru m^, V not only . . . ) connective fomo^l ... 0(8 m^. S but also S llij^t jonJO^l . . . aU, not so much ... as Balb . . . Bfllb, now . . . now (again), at one time . . . at another tcilS . . . ieilg, partly . . . partly eincrfcitS . . ^- onbcrjcitg, on the one hand ... on the other. Remark. — The last three are adverbial conjunctions, and either follow the verb, or throw the subject after it, unless they modify a particular member of the sentence (compare § 237, Remarks i, 2, above). 239. S. Subordinating Conjunctions. 1. Sentences introduced by subordinating conjunctioiis are'always^C^^/^^/^/^A and therefore havt the verb last (see § 32). 2. Some of these also are adverbial, but, as this distinction, does not affect the construction, they are not separately arranged. 3. The principal subordinating conjunctions are as follows {a) Introducing substantive clause : bttj, that oB, if, whether {b) Introducing adverbial clause : al«, ^ ) Bl8 (bo^), until \ btt, [ when [• time C^C (bafe), | before \ *''^' toennj ) betior, ) J [§§438- ire : nnectivf ime . . . . on the ons, and t, unless compare junctioiis last (see istinctio'i eparately s follows time «39j CONJUNCTIONS. while, whilst wntcrbcffen, toflfjrciib (bo§), fcit(bcm), since fo6u(b'^ as soon as fo fangc, as long as (fo)ioie, as soon as toic, how — manner benil, than tile, I ^^^"' ^s inmiefcril', inasmuch as \t nar^bcnr, according as bo, since bo§, that toci(, because ba§, that fluf ba§, ) . urn bo§, J '" ^'^^^ that bamit', in order that tticmi, if or§ ttjcim, j toofcrn, J ofiglelr^, hjcnn gleli^, obfdjiin, mcim fj^on, 06 m^, tucim ou(^, obiuo^r, unnear^tet (bo§), WCnn . . . vx^i, if not, Unless V7 as if in case *■ time degree cause purpose condition although I ° > concessive 278 LESSON XL. [§§ 235 ! ■ I Remarks. — I. aScun and oh take the subju7ictivc when the verb of the principal clause is in the impf., plupf., or conditional, as : %^ miirbc tommen, tuenn icb \m^\ ^enug Wore, I should come, if 1 were well enough. :^c^ tt!iifjtc iiivM, ob cv i^ctommcu ludrc (fci), I did not know, whether he had come. 2. SBcim may be omitted in conditional sentences ; the verb then /^f'A'-''>/-^ the clause, as in the question order icompare § 59 j. This construction is nuich more common than in English, and is generally used when the dependent clause, containing the coUiUtion, precedes the principal clause, con- taining the consequence, as : .^iitte ii^ (^5c(b, jo anivte icf) ^-rciinbe l;aben, If I had (had I) money, 1 should have friends. Note. The particle fo should not be omitted in the latter clause when the former is without UHMUl. 3. In the compound conjunctions oDgid(^, o6frf)On, otJttJO^f, etc., the two parts may be separated, and the latter part placed after the subject, as : Oftfllcifl) (otlfj^OW/ etc.) cr trant wwx, etc. ; or : OB cr 9(ci(^ !ranf Univ, Although he was il'. Note. — With menu the partic'.es i^lcid), etc , always follow the subject. 4. The ob or njemi may also be omitted in these conjunc- tions and in nl8 oB, o(g mm C as if ') ; the verb then degms the sentence, or immediately follows aU, as : ^ft er glcit^ ixanl Although he is ill. @§ frficint mir, ol^ ob {}vmn) i* Sic ivgcnbluo gefef)Crt ffaiit ; or : a(§ f)atte id), etc., It seems to me, as if I had seen you somewhere. mTERjECTlONS. ho] „^^_._ ^^' Interjections. ^ers or:^n:r -- 2:^ 77 t'-- — either: ' °' *°"n UHirtcte bergeben^, benn ©ie iamen uid)t. 3. 3Bcnn id; aw ^Ijxcm ^aufe t)oruberget}e, fo gel;e id? gelubbnlic^ f;inein. 4. 21 Iw id; aber geftern 5lbenb boriiberging, fa(; id) fein 2id;t unb baher bin id) nic^t f^incingegangen. 5. ^e mel;r \mx lernen, befto mef^r finb iuir im ©tanbe gu lernen. 6. Xie ©d;ulev befommen morgen ^evien, barv'.tn f^jringen unb fingen fie bor ?yreube. 7. 2Bie fefir id) mid; auc^ bemiil;c, e§ gelingt mir leiber bocb md;t, affe 3a^c biefer 3(ufgabe rid)tig ju fd)reiben. 8. ®u tabelft micf), aU ob id) fc^ulb baran h?are. 9. ©in borficf)tiger 5Jtann legt in feiner ^ugptb ©elb juviid, auf bafj cr in fcinem Sllter m(i)t Mangel Icibe. 10. Sfujjer ^ucnn icf) fran! obev fe(;r befd)aftigt bin, gebe tcf) jeben 2:ag fpajic^ rcn. 11. eriftnid)t nur reid;, fonbern nuc^ freigebig, unb bee* balb f)at ev fo biele ^reunbe geluonnen. 12. fatten w'xx geixm^t, bafe ©ie {)eute ^efud; f)aben, fo irdren n)ir erft morgen gefommen. 13. SBoIIen ©ie fic^ erfunbigen, ob %xan ©. noc^ in bemfelben §aufe tr>Df)nt'? 14. ©^ giebt nod; biele Seute auf ber ^Selt, bie h)eber lefen noc^ fc^reiben fonnen. 15. ©ie fatten mir ^elfen fbnnen, h)cnn ©ie e« aenjuEt batten, aHein ©ie toollten e§ nid»t. rr Lt.) ;, jcben* m aud^ brrrite iniit ^a4oJ INTERJECTIONS. 281 UHirtcte :m ^aufe ;r geftern icf) nic^t b iuir im I ^erien, mid; and) 3(ufga0e lib barau >nb ©elb 0. 2(uj3er [g fpajics unb be^s i: geixm^t, efommen. Demfelben JBelt, bie lir ^elfen e§ nirf)t. [".". n- .etc. fl,u loicn no^'i'Vu^^'Ifl^.^ M't men. 19. .cat.; r* '.M> rl^ I" '"'* «""i' ''"8'f'>-= -ff. 1. We .sh.ill come, even if it nin, n <• the town, I must m.ke some c Is 'i%, „ °'' ' ''^^'^^ him, or shall we w.-i, ,11 he comes b., ok >;";::r7 """°"' away, a ,hief came and stole the n,„„ev' t "''"'' "'^"■"« lale when you are sturtvin.' n ZU' ? ^"" '" "^ When I . ,,.., .. m;,as;';.!:inT.;::i'-jnn- "P l.Ue. ,. ]Jo you consider this cloih de^r J -ru no. high ,0 be sure, but it wil, n wet , ,1 / k'" " cloth, which is dear, but I believe th-,t it ll /' "^ " not, on the contrarv, consider it le " i ' t , ^°°''- • "^ ' ''° good cloth. 10. since I havl I een M i'''' ""'' '' '^ to read much nor to urite „, d n U " ""'' ""*^^ colder to-day than yesterda • P. ' i a ""'he'" '"' '"'" ' '^ whether I travel by ,he steamer or n Vh '"'"' '°-""'' I had thought ouha,, I r . ; Lei:: 7- ''■ t"j 14. The hare slept, and in^the me^ ,1,^ h toTt " '°"- nved. 15. If the hare had .Tot sfept he would h "' first. ^ ' ould have arrived ORAL EXERCISE XL. 1. Die Fenster sind alle auf, wer ist daran schuld > 9 T ate™ .^t ^Lt: I r- -en - .nic^^r vo,t hier der ^^Z^'^n^T Zr:::ZsT"'' bestanden? 6. Halten Sie diesen Hut fi" teuer? 19 supri-r.>n.Nr\KV r.F.ssov F. (§«4t SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON F. ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CERTAIN CONJUNCTIONS. 241. 1. *MUcin follows and lim'.ls, or corrects, aprmativc statements, ;is fouboni uocs lURative, thus: Gr 1ft n-irfi, nllrilt I'V ift niri)t flliirfliil), He is rich, but he is not hai)py. 1. XcflO f>i" Uni fo (hut not JC) may be used with a single coniparn- live, as : Gilcii eio, ^amit 2 to t)cfio mm io) jviil)iv aiifomnien, Make hastr, so that you may arrive all the sooner. 3- Taft is the most gineral in meaning of all the conjunctions. It may be oi"ilted when it introduces a sithstanlirc clause, as in indirect state- ments. The sentence then has the construction of a principal clause (verb second; see §S7, 3). Hut \^<\\\ cannot be omitted when it expresses purpose or consequn'/>os/i^u ^ ^^^ (.^^ frtt.v,,,), as: Since iast Tuesday, 3cir (cl3tciu Xiciifhig He was here the day before vestrrdnv K,,f t i (.) Sin« ^as «W/„.,/„^ conjunction of ,/„, = ,„„„„ „, (r. being demonst rathe), hwi subordmating- Vih^n they =' whilst, while ' (tue pron. being relative), as : ®ie fprad)cu niit eiuaiibev; inbeffcn (nnterbeffen) g'ltfi i(f) aitf unh Qb, They were speaking to each otlier; (in the) meanwhile I was walking up and down ; but: (gte 1pra.-<)eu intt einnnber, iiibeffen (imterbeffen) i(f) onf imb ab pinr,, They were speaking to each other, while I was walking up and down. In the s. nse of 'however,' inbeffen is coor dip ating oVi\y. 16. ^nu^m is subordinating only, and denotes cause as well as cime, as: 'M) bvand)c md)v C^V>lb, i Hem ict) uicle 2cl)u(ben ^u be^aljhni babe, 1 need more money, since I have many debts to pay (having many debts to pay). ^iiH Mil rv ntir Mc >>anb anb, (iid)o(te er, As he gave me his hand (giving nie his hand), he smiled. 17. SSeil must be used (not Xiix) in answer to the question why? or wherefore 'i as : Sienriim famm eie iiirfit? 93cil id) XxmX mat:, Why did you not come ? Because I was ill. 18. ' Unless' is rendered by tueiHt • • • nid)t W - • • «<'^)» O"" ^y ^^^^ [coordinating Vid.\. conj.), as: Sir uicvOcii uidn aii^^nelic" fbiinen, hjcnn fid) ba§ :©etter nii^t (iUDint, We shall not be able to go out, unless the weathei changes. 3d) (affc bid) nid)f, bit fegiieft mid) tJCun- I will not let thee go, except (unless ; thou bless me. Note. — Xcim in Ihis sense always follows the verb. 19. * But ' after a negative = k\U, as : M) battc iud)tv^ 0'? llniiliid: aiif meiufv 3teife, I had nothing but misfortune on my journey. Note. - yJtd)t§ roeiiificr do = ' anything but ' (not ' nothing less than '), as: Gr ift nirflfd tticuifitr al3 reicl), He is anything bui nch. 20. Distinguish between; [a] Ta = ' there ' ; adverb of place, as: 3d) mav Do, I was there. §841] ADDITIONAL REMARKS ON CONJUNCTIONS. 285 (d) ta — ' then ' : adverb of h-fne. as ; ®[ntfttf '* ^'"s- ""? ' ^" ''''"'^^ ^* ^^"' 'T^^ ^hief sneaked into the house j then I seized him. (c) ^tt = 'since," as': subordinating conmncnon. as : cnnn ^';'^"S"ish between HcffcimnriPnff)tet, < «^...;5./,,, - Uoor^ ,^^, conj.) and ungead,tet, • .//^.«,.,.. «../«.//^.,.«^/„^ „.. ' (.«W conj.) EXERCISE P. tortoise crept ,„„!vly ,owa e ^oa ' RaXrif '=''''''=■ "•""" '"^ week, and r liave i,o( seen l,im since ■.% u ' """ '"*' I .must ei.„er ,o a„a see i.,,,';: l^ . ' H rorTri e^I! mJ; T", f - stder I,,,,, an ig„o,-a,u n,a„; he is anything b« la™ ,rHa„/ been at the ru-l way-station? Yes I wa, ,!,.„ , '■."»'=>"'"' PART SECOND. SYNTAX. LESSON XLI. SYMTAX OF THE CASES : - NOMINATIVE AND GENITIVE. 242. Nominative. 1. The Nominative is the case of the subject, or of a word in apposition to the subject, or of a predicate noun quali- fying it. The nominative is also used in address, there being no special form for the vocative. 2. Neuter verbs indicating a state or transition, such as Y\\\, to be ; tuerbcu, to become ; bicibeu, to remain ; fcfocincn, to seem, appear ; beifjcn, to be called, take a predicate nomi- native, as : (Sr ift SolUnt octporbcn (c^cbliebeu). He has become (re- mained) a soldier. 3. Verbs of caUin;>^ take a predicate nominative, verbs of considering ?i nominative with ato, in \\\& passive, as: M\\cinri6 I. tuuibc ticv %^\:^\tx ^cnannt. Emperor Henry was called the Fowler. ■^Dlein %, miibe, lucrt the Accusative is more usual than the genitive. 245. Genitive after Verbs. I. Verbs of meanings similar to those of the adjectives under the previous section take a genitive of the nearer object, as: ac^^tcn (also 4- ciuf with nr^.), benfcn (generally + <\\\ with > (also + ace) pay attention beburfcn, need bcgcl;rcn, desire brauc(K'n, want entbclnen, miss, do without ertiHihncn, mention Also the following : I^arren (also -\- auf with ace) wait toatten (also + ace), tend, nurse ace, think gebenfcn, mention genicfjcn (generally + ace), enjoy Hergcffcn (generally + ace), forget Iarf)en, laugh at fpotten, mock frf^onen (also -|- ace >, spare •47] ADVERBIAL GENITIVE. 28g 2. Transitive Verbs of accus/n,. condemning, acquittaL deprtvatwn, emotion, take a genitive of the remoter ob^ ject, as: anflagen, accuse berauben, rob Befd^ulbigen, accuse cntbinben (also + bon), re lieve entf(ct^en (also + Mm), dis- robe logf^rec^en, acquit u6erfuf)'ren, convict uber^eu'tjen (also + bon), con- vince berfic^ern, assure JDurbigen, deem worthy Sei^en, accuse 3- Also many reflexive and impersonal verbs (see §§ 21c 216, 219). ^' ^*^» Adverbial Genitive. For the use of the genitive in forming adverbs from sub- stantives, see § 189, 2. The adverbial genitive may express place, time or maimer, as : 2in!cr ^anb, On the left hand. Seiner 2Bege ge^en. To go one's way. 3)iefcr 3:age, During these (last) days. 5il6enb8, In the evenins;. ^orgeug. In the morning, etc. Meg ©rnftcg. In all seriousness. STvocfncn g-ufecg. Dry-shod. ^ And particularly with ^^etfe, 'manner,' after an adiec- tive, as . •' @IMIi^Cr3BetK,-or:po:<.nately(lit^ ©IucfIirf)erU)ei[e, j mannerj 247. For Interjections followed by a genitive, see § 240, 4, (a). For the genitive after prepositions, see §§ 222, 223. 7 290 LESSON XLI. [§§247- EXERCISE XLI. A. 1. Guten Morgen, Karl; was hast du fiir Eile, mein Junge ? 2. Guten Morgen, Herr B. ; es ist bald neun Uhr und ich gehe jetzt in die Schule. 3. So, liast du noch wait zu gehen ? 4. Bis nach der Friedrichstrasze ; Herr G., unser Lelirer, besteht sehr auf Piinktlichkeit. 5. Steige nur ein, du knnnst mit mir fahren, da mein Weg durch die Friedrichstrasze fiihrt. H. Ich bin Ihnen sehr dankbar; das ist sehr freundlicli von Ihnen. 7. Sitzt du da bequem ? . Nicht im ireriniisten, aber was fiir eine Menge Hiicher hast du da ! ])u hast gewiss viel /u studieren. 10. Ich arbeite jet/l sehr rieissiir, da das Examen nachstens stalthndet. 11. Auf welches Examen bereitest du dich vor ^ I -L Auf das Ein- trittsexamen der Universitat. l.'i. Was fiir Sprachen stu- ■ dierst du ? 14. Ich studiere Knglisch, Latein, Deutsch und Franzosisch. 15. Natiirlich studierst du audi die Mathe- matik? IH. Wir miissen Rechnen, Algebra und Geometric lernen. 17. Bist du ein Freund von der Mathematik, oder ziehst du die Sprachen vor? 18. Ich lerne sehr gern Ma- thematik, besonders Algebra ; mein Lehrer glaubt, ich habe nicht viel Sprachtalent. l!». Deshalb solltest du desto fleissiger die Sprachen studieren, l^auf) dass deine Bildung nicht einseitig werde. 'iO. Mein Valer ist auch derselben Meinung. "21. Hoffentlich wirst du deiii Examen gliicklich bestehen ; da sind wir aber schon bei der Schule. 'iL Ich danke Ihnen vielmals fiir den freundlichen Wunsch, vvie auch fiir die Fahrt. B. 1. "An honest man is the noblest work of God." 2. A pound of iron is about as large as two pounds of silver. H. Mr. Cleveland was elected president of the United States in the vear 1884. 4. I was to have taken (made^ a journev to Europe this summer, but my father needs me in his busi- 248] DATIVE. 291 ave ness and I shall be obliged to remain at home. 5. ] been offered five thousand dollars for my house, and [ shau ^c-u It, for I am glad of the opportunity of getting (to gfet) rid of it. . Columbus was a man of great bodily, as well as mental power. i;{. His whole /leet con- sisted of three small ships, of which two were very old. 1 J. Have you seen your brother the lawyer ? ]n. Excuse [me] ; my brother is not a lawyer, but a doctor. I have not seen him since Christmas. Ki. As a student he always used (pflcqcn ) to say he meant^to be (luevbcn) a lawyer. J 7. We are tired of studying; let us go out. 18. Shall I send for (nad]) a carriage.? 19. No, it is not worth while (bcr ^IJaibciucrt) I would rather walk. :>0. Unfortunately it has rained and the roads are bad. 21, We can try (the) walking, and if we get tired of it, we can take the street-cars (^].Jfcrbe6a(;n, sing.). " LESSON XLII. SYNTAX OF THE CASES (continued).- DATIVE AND ACCUSATIVE. 248. Dativk. The Dative is the case of the Indirect Object. The Dative is used to denote the person for whose advan- tage or disadvantage a thing is or is done, as; 292 LESSON XLU. [§§a4»- @r f)at mix etn Suc^ gefauft. He has bought me a book. 249. The Dative is very freely used in German to denote the person who has some interest in an action or tiling. This is called the ethical dative or dative of interest, and must usually be left untranslated in English, in which language its use is obsolete, thus : Scf) \j- Rkmarks. — I. The great majority (jf tliese verbs have Engli of the loss of di become transitive tinction between the (hitive and accusative ; their construc- tion in (lerman swoulfl bo carefully observed. 2. Many of the verbs under u/ ), (, ) above take a ^//m7 object, particularly in the shape of a clause or of a neuter pronoun, as : (Jr i)at mir licrbotcn 311 flcfjClt, He has forbidden me to go. ^d) crlinbcvtc, bttfj id) fommcu loaflc, I replied that I would come. Wdn )BaUx bat C0 mir bcfofjien, My father has ordered me (to do) it. For the Dative with RcfexiTe Y^rhs, see §§ 215, 216; with Impersonal Vi^rh'iy see §§ 217, 219. 251. Dative after Adjectives. The Dative stands after adjectives similar in meaning to the Verbs given in the foregoing section, such as : (a) ApproacJty etc. : aijniicb, similar fremb, strange gleicl;, equal, like {b^ Pleasure^ etc. : angencbni, pleasant gndbicj, gracious (>onC'iri)ul)f fiiib mir ^u fliof? (S[XO\\ gcnilfl), These gloves are too large (large enough) tor ine. For the Dative after Prepositions, see §§ 46, 51. 252. ACCUSATIVF. The Accusative is the case of the Direct Object. Time and Measure. AU transitive 7>erh take the direct (;bjecl in the accusative. Rkmark. — Many verbs that are transitive in English are in- transitive in German (see § 250, Rem. i, above), and vice versa. 258. DOURI K ACCUSA'IIVK. The verb Iclncn, 'to teach,' governs two accusatives, one of the person and the other of the thing; the verb fiajion, 'to ask,' takes the latter accusative only when it is a neuter pro- noun, as : Sd; n^erbc bir^ bic bfut)i^c 3^rad)c Icbrcn, I shall teach you the German language. i^cb ivodte bid) c^cntc ctluos fragcn, I should like to ask you something. Verbs of calling, etc., have a second accusative as facti- tive predicate, as : %6> nannte t^n cincn '^^utch, I called him a fool. Of Verbs of considering, etc., some, such as : betrarfitcn, ' to regard ' ; nnfebcn, ' to look upon ' ; barftcUcn, ' to represent,' take ?i factitive accusative with al§, as : %6 febe ben :>)iC9cn oi& eine SSobhbat an, I regard the rain as a benefit. 2(jC LESSON XLII. [§§853- li •« li ) !, Other verbs of con.s^(le^in^^ with those of choosing, etc., which take a scjoiicl accusative of this sort in F.n^^lish, are followed by a preposition (Kir, ju) in Cerman (see Less. XLIX). 254. Accusative aftkr Intkanshive Verhs. 1. Intransitive Verbs may somctinies be followed by an accusative of a meaning akin to their own, called the cognate accusative, as : "sch babe eincn frf^bnctt Uroum getroumt T have dreamt a beautiful dream. 2. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative of that which is effected or produced by the action they express, as : ^V^ctru'^ mcintc bittcrc !tf|ri[ttci!, Peter wept bitter tears 3. Intransitive Verbs may take an accusative followed by an adjective, etc., di"^ factitive predicate, as: ^scf; l;abc mirf) fntt 9Ci]e)"fcii, I have eaten enough (lit., have eaten myself satisfied). ^i>$ .Uinb iueintc firfj in bcu 3t^hif, The child has cried itself to sleep. Remark. The Accusative in all these constructions, ex- cept the last, which is not used in the passive, becomes a nom- inative in the passive construction ; that of the thing after lebren remains accusative ; with fraiicu and bitten, the ace. of the thing is not used in the passive. For the accusative after y?^/?^c flcrit^tct. He stood there [with] eyes uplifted. EXERCISE XLII. ^. 1. Also, Sie haben sich entschlossen, uns morgen fruh zu verlassen? :>. Ich nuiss wohl, da meine (ierchaft.angelegen- he.ten mir keinen langeren Aufenthalt erlauben. A Sie reisen naturhch mit dem zweiten Zug al^? 4. Wlssen Sie, urn wie viel Uhr dcrselbe in B. ankommt.? 5. Ic h kann es Ihnen nicht ^anz genau sagen, abcr er konmit gegen vier Uhr Cdes) Nachmit'tags an 6. Das 1st mir vicl /u spat. Man erwartet mich schon um halb zwolf auf meinem Burean. 7. In ./m Falle mus.en Sie wohl den Schnellxug nehmen, der schon um drei Viertel auf sieben abfahrt. H. Es lasst sich nicht iindern. 9. Gut ich werde Sie Punkt sechs Uhr wecken lassen. 10. Ich d'anke Thnen ; das wird durchM.,s nicht notig sein, da ich meine Weck- uhr bei mir habe. 11. v;.e viel Zeit brauchen Sie, sich anzu- kleiden? U. Zwanzig bis fiinfundzwanzig Minuten ; aber ich werde noch mehreies ein/.upacken haben. l;}. Dann ware es jedenfalls besser, die Weckuhr auf halb sechs zu stellen 14 Bitte, sagen Sie mir genau, wie viel Uhr es jetzt ist ; ich furchte' meine Uhr geht nach. 1.5. Es ist gerade neun Minuten vor elf 16. 1st es moglich ! Dann geht meine Uhr ja vor. anstatt nach. Sind Sie gewiss, dass Thre Uhr richtig geht? 17. Jawohl; ich Habe sie heute nach der Stadtuhr gestellt. 18. Es wird spat • 29^ I.KSSON XI. II. IS§ 255- ich muss mich schlafcn Icgen. iiin morgcn friih auistchcii /u k()nncn. 1!». Also maclien wires auf dicse W'eise : Sie stchen uin hall) seclis auf, uni fiiuf Minuten nacli sechs friihstiicken Sie, uiTi fiinfundzwanzJL;- Minutcu nach serlis win! der Wagen vor- fahren und in zehn Minuten siiid Sie auf dem IJahnhofe. Dann liaben Sie noch zehn Minuten iibrig, uni Ihr Billet' zu losen. und Ihr (lepiick einschreiben zu lassen. Jetzt, gute Nacht ! '20. (xute Nacht, schlafcn Sie wohl ! />'. I. Do not trust those who flatter you, •>. Do not be- lieve them, for flatterers are liars. ."). I always considered my father as my truest friend. I. The general c^ommands the sol- diers : the soldiers obey the general. .">, What is_the_name of the gentleman whom we have just met? His name has escaped me. »i. You should never forget to thank those who help you. 7. How does this hat, which I bought myself yester- day, please you? S. It docs not become you very well ; it is too large for you. H, When 1 was going to the railway-station, a boy met me and gave me a telegram. In. May 1 ask you if Mr. H. is related to you? 11. He resembles me very much, but he is not related to me. I'i. Mr. 15. has been ordered, on account of iil-he.ilth. to go to a warmer climate. He has been forbidden to pass the winter in the Nordi. ]'.\. How long does he remain absent ? I 1, He is to remain absent at least four months. 15. Last week I ordered (myself ) an overcoat at the tailor's, wliich he was to bring me to-day. \ (i. The Niagara 1^'alls are considered ( one considers, etc. ) as one of the greatest wonders^of^thc^ world. 17'. People say of one who sleeps very soundly that he sleeps the sleep of the righteous. 18. May I ask you to assist me, or at least to advise me? 19. I should be very glad to be able to help you. •>() I am in need of money, and should not like to ask any one else for it. 2571 THE PRESENT. >99 LESSON XLIII. THE 'NDICATIVE MOOD:-SYNTAX OF ITS TENSES. 25($. 'J^he Indicative is the mood of reality and direct statement. As the tenses are used with reference to time in the Indicative only, their proper use is given here. 367. I'piE Present. The Present Tense answers to all tlie Engli:-h forms of that tense (e. g., icf> lobe = 1 praise, am praising, do praise), and is used : 1. To denote action now going on, as : Tavj Minb fj^laft. The child "is sleeping (now). 2. To state a general fact or custom, as : 3)er 3d;ncc ift Unnf?, The snow is white, 3)er Dd^fe frigt (^ka<^, Tiie ox eats grass, 3. For the imperfect in /lisforical narrative, to give greater vividness, as : ®e[diiuinb ^cdt cv ciiicn Stein auf unb mirft beufclbcn bcin .srMinbe, ber \^\\ bcifu^n mia, an bcu Mopf, Quickly he picks up a stone, and throws it at the dog, who is about to attack him. 4. For the English perfect (as in French ), when the action or state continues in the present, the past being inferred and the present alone expressed, as : Sic Uingc ift cr fdion franf? How long has lie been ill .? (N. B. — He is sdll ill.) S* flC^C [cit acbt %<\,yi\\ luicbcr ^uv cdnilc, 1 have been going to school agai.i lor the last week (and am still going). Note. This construction is very common with ffit. 11 ir 300 LESSON XMII. [§§257- 1 1 5. For the future very commonly, where no ambiguity would arise, particularly to replace the English form 'am going to,' as : ^c^ fdircik morgen einen i&x'\q nn meinen SL^ater, I am going to write a letter to my father to-morrow. 258. The Imperfect. The Imperfect is used : 1. As the historical (narrative) preterite, when an event is told in connection with others, as : ^m 3(nfaug j(^uf (^ott ^immcl iinb Cfrbe, unb 3tae§ ttJor hjitfte utib Iccr u. f. Id., And in the beginning God cre- ated heaven and earth, and all was waste and void, etc. 2. To denote customary, continued or contempo- raneous action, replacing the English forms 'was doing,' 'used to do,' as: @r fling jeben STag urn mer Ut^r au§. He used to go out every day at four o'clock. 2Bir (u(jvcn an ber Slircbe toorbet, aU bie Ut?r elf f(^(ufl, We were driving past the church, as the clock struck eleven. 259. The Perfect. 1. The Perfect indicates a past event as complete and no longer continuing, thus : ^d) ()obc flctcbt unb flcUcbct, I have lived and loved (and both my life and my love are ended). 2. The Perfect is used of an event as a separate and independent fact, simply asserted as true without reference to any other, as : ©ott ^ttt bie SBelt crjl^offcn, God created the world ; 260 THE PERFECT. 301 but in the sentence : ©ott jdjuf bie 2Be(t in fed^^ ^agen unb ru^tc am fiebenten, God created the world in six days, and rested on the seventh, the imperfect is used, because the two events are connected. 3. The Perfect is used (apart from historical narrative), in preference to the Imperfect, of an event which has not been witnessed or participated in by the speaker, as : ©eftern ift ein Sltnb crtrunfcn iPerf), A child was drowned yesterday ; — but : ©eftern crti auf \Impf.) ein ^inb, al^ ic^ am Ufer ftatib, A child was drowned yesterday, when I was stand- ing on the shore. Remark. — This distinction between the use of the Perfect and Imperfect is not accurately observed, but it is always better to render the English forms ' was doing,' ' used to do,' by the Imperfect. 4. The Perfect replaces the Future-Perfect, as the Present does the Future, as : %^ toerbe fommen, fobalb id; meine ©efitdftc abgcmac^t \^t, I shall come, as soon as I have (i. e., shall have) finished my business. 260. The Pluperfect. The Pluperfect is used, as in English, of a past action •mpleted before another was begun, thus : er \\\iit icine 3Iufgabe UoUcnbct, c()C 6ie famen. He had finished his exercise, before you came. 261. The Future. The Future v; used: X. Of an action about to take place, as : Unfcr 3Satev mirb ung lokn. Our father will praise us. 3o: LESSON XLIII. [§§261- i 2. To denote probability or supposition, as : (2^ njirb mcin ^i^rut>cr fciii, bcv aihu'ti-^'iiincu i[t, It is probably my brother who has arrived. 262. The Future-Perfect. The Future-Perfect is the Perfect in the Future, and expresses probahility even more frequently than the simple Future, as : 3)cv ^^vief itJirh fc^ion i^eftcrn flcfommcn jcin. The letter probably arrived yesterday. EXERCISE XLIII. A. 1. Diese Hitze ist unertriiglich ; ich glaube, nie einen so heissen Sommer erlebt zu haben. ;2. Und wie schwiil es ist! Sieht es nicht sehr nach Regeu aus ? .*;. Richtig, da sind schon die ersten Regentropfen, und ich meine, vor einigen • Minuten Donner in der Feme gehort zu haben. 4. Das macht mir einen Strich dnrch die Rechnung. l>ei diesem Wetter kann ich unmoglich zur Stadt gehen. 5. Fiir's Erste allerdings nicht, aber das Gevvitter wird nicht lange anhalten. (;. Das ist ein wahrer Platzregen ; so ein Regen ist dem Lande sei;r notig. 7. Ja, wir haben diesen Sommer uberliaiii>t sehr v.enig Regen gehabt, aber vorigen Winter desto niehr Schnee. (S. Horen Sie, das war ein Knall ! <». Ja, und wie schnell der Donner auf den Phtz folgte ! Fiirchten Sie sich vor dem HHtze? 10. Seitdem es vorigcs Jahr in unserer Nahe eingeschlagen hat, bin ich ein wenig angstlich. 1 1. Das glaube ich schon, aber sehen Sie doch, jetzt hagelt es noch sogar ! l->. Das braucht das Land gewiss nicht, aber die Hagelkorner sind nicht grosz genug, urn viel Schaden anzurichten. l.i. Es fangt schon an, sich aufzuhellen ; {las schlimniste ist vorbci. 1 1. Wie sich die I.uft abgekiihlt hat! b"). Und '.vie srhnell ! Das ist oft der Fall hier zu Lande. I'.. Jawohl; orianern Sic sich nicht des 262) SYNTAX OF THE TENSES. 303 wechselhaften Wetters, das wit* vorigen Friihling gehabt haben ? 17. Besonders im Marz und Anfang April. IS. Einen Tag thaute es, den iiachsten fror es, und am dritten Tage regnete oder schneite es gar. 19. Dann gab es wiedtr eine Hitze wie mitten im Sommer; schon im April batten wir fast achtzig Grad Fahrenheit. 20. Da scheint die Sonne wieder ; ich sagte Ihnen ja, dass das Gewitter nicht lange anhalten wUrde. 2\. Da haben Sie Recht ; jetzt muss ich mich auf den Weg machen. B. 1 . A misfortune seldom comes alone. '2. Schlegel trans- lated Shakespeare's works into German. ?u Is your father at home ? No, he has been away for three weeks, but he is (prob- ably) coming back to-morrow morning. 4. As soon as [ have news of his arrival, I shall come again. '>. During my illness I used to go for a drive two hours every day. (i. Are you going (to go) to the concert this evening ? I do not think I shall go. 7. Have you an engagement elsewhere ? No, but I am going to bed immediately, as I start for Boston to-morrow morning at seven o'clock. H. People (man) are often con- scious of bad habits, which they cannot get rid of. 9. Have you been long in America? I have been here since my fifteenth year. 10. This is probably a letter from my mother, for that is her hand- writing. 1 1 . We had hardly been at home half an hour, when it began to rain. \:i. Shakespeare is considered the greatest poei of the English nation. 18. He was born at Stratford-on-Avon, and passed his youth in that place. 14. As a young man he went to London, became celebrated there, and died in the year 1616 in his native^town. 15. The sun was setting, and the long [and] desperate combat was not yet decided. Uj. For the third time our brave soldiers throw themselves upon the batteries of the enemy. 17. Nothing could resist this attack ; the enemy wavers, and the victory is ours. IH. But what a dearly-bought victory! 111. He, who i 304 lESSON XLIV. [§§263 led the soldiers into the combat, comes not back with them. 20. Yonder he lies cold and silent, and our triumph becomes bitter mourning. 263. LESSON XLIV. THE CONDITIONAL AND SUBJUNCTIVE. The Conditwnal. 1. The Conditional tenses are, in form, subjunctive p\A tenses, answering to the Future as a present. 2. They indicate possible futurity^ and coincide with the Impf. and Plupf. Subj. in their use in conditional clauses, and will therefore be treated conjointly with them (see § 267, below). Note. — The Tenses of the Conditional are a new formation; the Tmpf. arid Plupf. Subj. having, in the older stages of the language, per- formed the function of the Conditional. 2CJ4. The Subjunctive Mood is used much more fre- quently in German than i'^ English, the distinction between Indicative and Subjunctive being almost entirely obliterated in the latter language. 265. The Subjunctive in Indirect Statements. The Subjunctive is used in Indirect Statements or Quotations (see also § 87), i, e., when the words used are quoted in substatice only, and not as they were spoken, espe- cially after a verb in the principal clause signifying : ' {a) Imparting of information (statement, report, con-' fession, reminding, etc.), as: antlDDvten, answer yci/uupitJi, aSacrc berid^tcn, report er5af)(en, relate 0eftcl;cn, confess H en, say 266] SUBJUNCTIVE IN INDIRECT STATEMENTS. 305 con-f (b) Apprehension, as : benfen, think crinnern (refl.j> remember ful^Ien, feel ^orcn, hear mctnen, be of opinion mer!en, observe fd^lie^en, conchide tuiffen, know (c) Contemplation with various emotions, as : fiird^ten, fear h)unbern (refi.), wonder freuen (refl.), rejoice h)untcf)en, wish glauben, believe jnjeifeln, doubt tjoffen, hope (d) Request, command ^ advice, etc., as : befel^ten, command raten, advise bitten, ask Derlangen, demand erma^nen, admonish 2^6. The Tense in Indirect Statements. T' verb of the Indirect Statement is, as a rule, in the same tense as it would have, if the statement were made directly (see § 87, 2), i. e., the tense of the Indirect Statement is the same as that of the Direct. Remarks. — i. An Indirect Statement is always a subordi- nate clause. 2. The conjunction ba^ may be omitted in such clauses, which will then have the construction of a principal sentence (i. e., verb second \ see § 87, 3). 3. The Indicative may replace the Subjunctive in Indirect Statements, when the speaker wishes to represent his own belief in the correctness of the statement, as : ^d) \io.ht gebbrt, baj5 mein ^Bruber fran! ift, I have heard that my brother is ill {and he is ill). 6te niu^tc, ba^ bcr ©piegel feine tlntDa^rtjdt j^rat^, unb mxlU, ba^ ber ^ciger fie betrogen Jottc, etc. (Grimm, I irr 306 LESSON XMV. t§§ 266. Sne.e7vittchen, p. 52, 1. i), wShe knew that the mirror did not tell a lie, and saw that the huntsman had deceived her {and he had deceived her). But the Subjunctive is used, when the truth of the state- ment is not vouched fo*-, or when any doubt is cast upon it, as : ^t fenntc, There is nobody here, who does not know me. ^cf> luerbe eg t^un, ttio0 au(^ babon !ommcn mbflf, I shall do it, no matter what may come of it. Note. — The Indicative is also admissible in these constructions. 5. The Impf. Subjunctive is sometimes used to express possibility , as : 3)ag gingc \QXi\j\, That might (possibly) do. ^c^ bail)tc, bag ttjiirc gut, I should think that might be good ; and especially with the Modal Auxiliaries, as : ^ag mor^te (fBimtc, biirftc) mat^r fein. That may (pos- sibly) be true. 6. Observe the following idiom : iiCic bcm aurf) fei, However that may be. EXERCISE XLIV. A. 1. Ich habe gehort, dass Sie Ihr Haus verkauft haben ; ist das wahr ? 2. Ja, meine alte Wohnung gefiel mir nicht niehr. 3. Wie kommt das ? Ihr Haus schien mir immer eine sehr elegante und bequeme Wohnung zu sein. 4. Ein besse- res lasst sich nicht leicht finden; allein, seit(dem) die vielen Fabriken in der Nahe gebaut worden sind, gefallt mir die Umge'bung nicht mehr. 5. Das kann ich mir schon denken. Der Rauch von den Fabriken muss sehr unangenehm sein. G. Das ist nicht das Schlimmste ; das fortwahrende Gerausch 310 T.ESSOX XI. IV. [§§a68- '18 --#- brinfj^t ciiuni oft zum Verzwfifcln. 7. Habon Sie ein andtTcs' Haus nekaufi ? h. Nein, vorlaiili^ liabe ich mir ein Haus in der Schillerstras/c ^aMiiietet, sohald ich aln-r einen passcnden Bauplatz rinden kann. wcrdc ich hauen. 'J. Haben Sic sich schon nacli cinem Hanphit/. iim^'eselien ? |o. Ich habe die gan/e Stadt durchsucht, abcr ohnc Krfolj;. II. Sie miissen sehr schvvcr /ii befriedigen scin. I >. Das gerade nicht, nur beslehc ich auf drei ]k'dingun<;eii : I'Vische Luft, cine ruhige Straszc und einc schone Aiissiclit. I;;. Warum baucn Sic nicht auf dcr Anhiihe in dcr Vorstadt. jenseit des Flusses? II. Daran habe ich schon gedacht, nur siud mir die Preise ein wcnig /u lioch. l,"). Das wiirde mich nicht abhalten, so iange ich nur bekanie, was ich wiinschte. lO. Es wird mir wohl niciits iibrig bleiben, als mich dort an/ukaufen. 17. Beabsichtigen Sie, mil Backstein oder mit Quaderstein zu bauen? bs. Ich muss das erst mit meinem Architekten besprechen. l!». VVelc'ien Architekten haben Sie gewahlt .? ^(». Merrn Kalk, der den TLan meines alten Hauses ent- worfen hat. 21. Dann bekommen Sie jedenfalls ein gutes Haus. Ich wiinsche llinen (iliick zu Ihrem Unternehmen. 2"i. Danke vielmals. B. 1. An old beggar-man said: "When I was young, I could have worked if 1 had wished (uioUon), and now I should be glad to work, if I could, but I cannot. Alas ! had I only been more industrious." ;>. A certain French king is said to have died of hunger, for fear that he might be poisoned. 8. I wish my house were not so far from yours. 4. 1 too ; if the way were not so long, we could visit eafch other oftener. 5. We were astonished to see Mr. V>. on the street this • morning, as we thought he was still in England. G. They say he intended to remain three months longer i. England, but that he was obliged i-j come home on account of business matters. 7. What did the gentleman whom we just met ask 2691 TIIK IMI'KKATIVK MOOD. 3n you ? He asked me how far it was to the town-hall. H, The mcssen^'cr asserted that he could not wait lon<;er because he had no time, hut I believe it was for (auvj -f- d^it.j another reason. !». A certain gtMitleman wanted to set his watch, and asked his servant what o'clock it was. jo. Tiie servant answered that he had no watch, but that he had seen a sun-dial in the neij^hbour's {garden. II. To^this the gentleman replied absent-mindedly: "(Jo immediately and ask him for permission to bring- it up here." 12. Do you believe that the derman language is as difficult as the French? i:{. When I began to study (Jerman, I thought it was not so difficult as h'rench, but now 1 believe otherwise. It. I should be very sorry, if the news were true which 1 heard this morning. I."). The boys must not skate to-day ; the ice is too thin, and they might break through and be drowned. U;. Please tell me who translated Shake- speare's works into German. 17. Would it be worth while to take a carriage to drive to the bank ? No, I do not think so. IH. He said that of us ! I should never have believed it. H). I asked the bookseller: "Have you Schiller's works.?" He answered : " I have not^a single copy of them left. 20. I asked the bookseller if he had Schiller's works, and he answered that ht; had not^a single copy of them left. LESSON XLV. THE IMPERATIVE AND INFINITIVE MOODS. 209. THE IMPERATIVE MOOD. The Imperative expresses a commattd and correspciids precisely to the English Imperative. The Imperative proper occurs only in the 2. person, the other persons being supplied by the Pres. Subjunctive (see § 268, i, above). 312 LESSON XLV. [§§269- Remarks. — I. The pronoun of the 2. Ters. is only ex- pressed for the sake of emphasis or contrast, as : Singe bu. Do yoit sing. @ef)t i^r, irir Juerben blciben. You go, we shall remain. Note. — The pronoun, if expressed, always follo7vs the verb, as above. 2. Where no definite person is addressed (e. g., when an author is address'ng his readers), mail should be used with the Pres. Subj., as : 9Wan benfe fic^ meinen 8d;recfen, Imagine my fright. 3. The Modal Auxiliaries foffcn, miiffen, laffeii are used with imperative force, as : SDu fottft nicf)t toten. Thou shalt not k @r mvS^ [c^ircibcn. He must write. fitt§ (la^t, (affen 3ic) un^ gc^cn. Let us go. 4. The Present and Future Indicative are sometimes used with emphatic imperative force, as : 2)u bJcf.lift bier ! You are to stay here ! Sic tticrbcn bie (sjiite ^olscn, inorgen fruf;cr gu fommen. You will have the goodness to come earlier to-morrow. 5. The Past Participle and Infinitive are also used in ex- clamatory clauses with the force of an Imperative, as : ^ugeWtcn, Mut|d;ci- ! Drive on, coachman! etill ftc^cn ! Stand still ! ^tltftciflCn ! All aboard ! 6. In elliptical and exclamatory clauses a command is fre- quently expressed by an adverbial prefix or prepositional phrase, without a verb, as : l^n\^ auf ! ^amerabcn, m\ ^a$i\M*CH, '(theact of; reading,' — but: gute £ecture, 'good reading, good literature.' 2. Some Infinitives have become substantives entirely, as : ba^ Sebcn, life ; ba^J (vntfd^en, horror. 3. The Infinitive, either with or without 511, is often used as subject of a veio, and as such may have an object by virtue of its verbal character, as : &uU ^-reunbe (ju) ^o6ctt ift befjer aU reic^ (gu) fein. 271. The Infinitive without m. The Infinitive without 311 follows : {a) The Modal Auxiliaries (see Lesson XXXIV); also toerbcn in the formation of the future tense. {U) The following verbs : blcibcn, remain laffen, let, allow, permit finben, find lelncn, teach f;eiBen, order, bid lerncn, learn l^elfon, help mac^^en, make t)i>ren, hear fef)en, see and, in certain phrases, ^(x\)Zx^, as : ^d; \)offen, hope taten, advise (^) Those implying a suspension of judgment, as : befdjulbigen, accuse frf^einen, seem einbilben, (refl.), imagine fc^meirf)eln (refl.), flatter one's giauben, believe self. Icugnen, deny {c) Those indicating various states of mind, as : bereueu, repent Xxih [ein, be acceptable (be frcuen (impers.), | ^^ gU^d) freuen (refl.), I Jeib )cin (tF)un), be unaccept- able (be sorry) Remarks.— I. With most of these verbs the Infinitive may be replaced by a baf) clause, and ;;///./ be so replaced unless the subject of the action in the dependent clause is either subject or direct object of the principal clause, as : (Sr glaubt, [cbr gcfc-(nc!t 311 fcin, He believes himself to be very clever ; — or : Gr glaubt, tin^ er [e^r gofrfncft ift. ®»^ ^offte, 3U fomincn. He hoped to come ; -- but ; (Sr F»Dfftc, bn^ fein 3?ater fommen it^erbe, (see § 265, c\ He hoped that his father would come. @a t^at mir Icib, (5ic nirf^t gefeben nt finfim was not to have seen vou sorry or n t^at mir teib, bag ic^ Sie nic^t gefe^en \),. Help me to do my work, and I will help you to learn your lessons. 4. When you (man) do not know what to say (what you shall say), say nothing. 5. You will now close your books ; we have read enough for the present. 6. "To err is human; to forgive, divine," is a verse from a poem by the English poefPope. 7. I have so much work to do that I do not know where to begin. 8. Show the child how it is to learn its lesson. 9. 1 am tired of read- ing, and must now retire to rest. 10. " Eat, little^bird, eat," said a child to her bird. 11. " Thou shalt not stear is (called) the eighth commandment. 12. The habit of rising early is oJ great importance when one has a_greaf_deal_of work to do. 13. If one wants to rise early, one should go to bed early. 14. An old, well-known proverb says : " Man does not live to eat, but eats to live." 15. Another proverb says : " Speaking is silver; silence is gold.' 16. When I arrived at the railway'^ station I found that I had no money with me ; imagine my r 318 LESSON XLVI. [§§ 273- ii embarrassment. 17. The art of making glass was already known to the ancients. 18. Are there any houses to sell or to rent in your neighbourhood? l!i. 1 wish to speak to Mr. Bell, 20. Have ((affcn) John black my shoes, for I am in a hurry. '21. I have heard say that the celebrat 'lOp of G. is coming ; would you not like to hear him pre.' • 22. Yes. I should like very much to hear him ])reach ; when is (loflen) he to come here? 2'.). We have h.ul the good^fortune to shoot three hares. 24. Some peoj>le would rather die than beg. LESSON XLVI. THE INFINITIVE MOOD (continued). 273. Infinit e of Purpose. The Infinitive with ^u is used to express purpose., as: SOiein 3'vcunb {'am, inid^ ^u tuanint. My friend came to warn me. Remarks. — i. The Infin. expressing purpose is generally governed by the preposition U1U (see § 276, i, below), which begins the clause, as : ^d) f'oinmc, iim Ste nad^i A^aufe 5U 6rini3cn, 1 come to fetch you home. 2. An Infin. clause with }u is always preceded by a comma in German. 3. This Infin. is also used, with or without ju, after adjec- tives preceded by \\\, ' too,' or {|Cnug, ' enough,' as : %6> iimr \\\ miibc, [liWiC) au^get^eu ju fiinttcu, 1 was too tired to be able to go out. (Ev ift vcicf) flcnuci, (urn) uicic Xieuer Ijalteu ju fiiuucn, lie is rich enough to keep many servants. 275] INFINITIVE OF PURPOSE. 319 introduced Note.— -After -an adjective with ju, a cla may be used, as : m nuir sn iniibc, ah Dog id) au&flrl)ni foimtf, I was too tired to be able to go out. 274. The Infinitive after Substantives. The Infinitive with 511 is used after substantives, nouns and adjectives, akin to the verbs in § 272, to express purpose, cic, as * v'^c^) ^abe CufJ, einen 3pa5icrciang ju moreen, I have a mind to take a walk. :3c^ battc fcinc ^cit, mid^ nad> ibm umjujc^cu, I had no time to look after him. er ift ftet^ bcrcit, ben i)amcn ju ^clfcil. He is always ready to help the poor. 275. The Accusative with the Infinitive. The Accusative with the Infinitive is inadmissible in modern German; hence verbs denotin- statement, know- ledge, perception, etc., must be followed by a bo^ clause, as: (^^'i"/-) I know him to be a good man, • {Germ.) ^c^ \m\\\, bo^ fx ein filter ma\m if}. (E;igL) I perceived her to be inattentive, (Germ.) ^^cf) mcvttc, ba§ fic unaufnicrffam loar. Remarks. — i. In such sentences as those in the examples given in the above section, the passive construction with the Infin. is also inadmissible in German except impersonally, as : {EngL) He is known to be a good man, {Germ.) Mm tticife, bttj ?r ein i3utcr m'nf* ift; — or : QeA ift 6e!annt, bn^ cr u. f. \\\ Observe the different relations of the accusatives in the fol 0*^1 ng sentences 320 LESSON XLVI. [§§275- {EngL) I begged him (obj.- of ' begged ') to come, {Germ.) I^rf) bat i^it 311 fommcu. (Engl.) I wish tc see him {obj. of ' see'), {Germ.) ^d) trunfd)c, t^u 311 |e(;en. {Engl.) I wish him {subj. of 'come') to come, {Germ.) ^cf) iuunfd)e, bn^ cr tomnie. 3. After glauben, the Infin. is admissible in German, but not in English, when the subject of the action is the same in both clauses, as : {Germ.) ^Jrf) g(auBte, vec^t gef)ort ju fjaben, {Engl.) I believed that I had heard aright. When, on the contrary, the subjects are different, the Infin. (with accus.) is admissible in English, but not in German, as: {Engl.) I believe him to be an honest man, {Germ.) ^d; glaubc, bo^ cr ein ebr'id;cr ^Dienfd) ift. 4. The English Infin, in objective indirect questions is unusual in German, and should be replaced by a finite clause, as : {Engl.) He did not know where to go, {Germ.) gr tt)u^te ntd;t, iuofjin cr gct)en fottic. {Engl.) He told me what to do, {Germ.) @r fagte mir, tua§ ic^^ tliun fattte, 276. The Infinitive governed by Prepositions. I, Only three prepositions can govern an infinitive (with gu) directly, viz. : um, ' in order,' o^uc, * without,' and (^au)ftott. * instead of,* as : ©i* fam, U!H mid) toon biefem Unfad \[\ bcttttr^rij^ttflcn. He came, in order to inform me of this accident. ^c^ founte ibn nid)t cin[eben, oftiic ber,3licb ^u lacben, I could not look at him, without laugh//z^ heartily. 277] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS, 32 1 ^itftott mic^ gebulbig nn^u^eren, untcrBrac^ er mid) beftanbig, Instead of listen//^^ to me patiently, he kept constantly interrupting me. Remarks.— i. Observe that in each of these examples the preposition stands at the beginning of the clause, the Infini- tive at the end, with the words dependent on the Infinitive between. ?. The Infinitive after Df)nc and (an)ftatt may be replaced by a baf; clause. This is always the case when the subject of the action is different in the two clauses (compare § 224, 2, b, Rem.). Thus we may say : Sd; furf)te Dorbcisufomnien, oFine gefeben 311 tticrbcn (or : obne ba^ id; ge[ef;en hjurbe), I tried to go past without being seen ; but we must say : ^c^ fud)te bovbei^ubmrnen, o^ne bn^ man mid) fn§, I tried to go past without any one's seeing me, because the subjects of the two clauses are different. 277. With other prepositions, the Infinitive or bo^ clause is represented in the principal clause by the adverb "i^^ pre- Lxed to the preposition, as : ^c^ bei3nugtc mid; bamft, ibn meine Unsufriebenfjeit morfen 311 loffcil, I was contented with showing him my dissatisfaction. 2Bir bertaffen un^ baraiif, bn§ Sie fommen. We rely on your coming. %&i fonnte ibn md)t boron Derbinbern, oug^Uflc^cit, I could not prevent him from going out (or : his going out). tparen, He was jealous of our having been invited. i 322 LESSON XLVI. [§§ a77- 2Bir fe^nen urn tam^, ®ie toieiJcr^uje^en, We long to see you again. @r finbet ^i^er^piuflcn boron, tinber jtt neefcn. He finds pleasure in teasing children. ©ie dvc\txU fid> 'Ooriiljer, bo^ unr [0 fpat famen, She was angry at our coming so late. Remarks. — i. The preposition 'of is often omitted, as: ^ie '3Zad>vicf)t, baf| ber Aviebc unterjeicbnct tuorbcn Wat, The news of the peace being (having been) signed. 2. The Infin. clause is only admissible when the subject of the action is the same as in the principal clause (compare § 276, Rem. 2, above). 3. The English Infinitive in -ing, or Gei /nd, must be carefully distinguished from the Present Participle, with which it has no connection. 4. The genitive or possessive adjective in English before this Gerund will become the subject of the bo^ clause in (jerman, as : She was angry at our coming late, ©ie tt)ar bofc bariibcV, baf5 luir 511 f^iit famen. He insisted on his sister's '.earning Latin, (Sr beftanb barauf, bafe fcinc St^lucftcr 2atcin Icrntc (levnen foUtc). 5. In an indirect question^ ob takes the place of ba^, as : (g§ gcbt mic6 md;t§ ^x^, ob er lonnnt ober nic^t, It does not concern me, whether he comes or not. 6. When the Gerund expresses an adverbial _ relation (time, cause, etc.), it must oe expanded into an adverbial clause, as : Before concluding, I shall make one more obser- vation, r^lie t^ \Mvt^t. toerbc idb nod) einc 33emerfuna 478] THE INFINITIVE GOVERNED BY PREPOSITIONS. 323 On seeing me, he held out his hand to me, ^U er midj |of|, hicit er mir bie §anb ^in. In persuading others we persuade ourselves, ^iibrm itJir anbere iilicrrcbcn, iibcrrcbcn n?iv un^ felbft. 278. The Infinitive in Elliptical Constructions. 1. The Infinitive is used, as in English, in various elliptical constructions, without being dependent on any other word, as : 3Barum mid) tuccfcii? Why waken nie ? 9^a(i) [eincm 3lu^fci;on 511 uvtcllen. To judge from his appearance. 2. For the Infinitive with the force of an Imperative, see § 269, Rem. 5, above. EXERCISE XLVI. A. h Nicht wa.ir, Fraulein B., Sie waren gestern Abend iiu Konzert.? ;2. Ja, waren Sie auch dort ? Ich habe Sie nicht gesehen. a. Das ist gem inoglich ; unter so vielen Mensciien findet man sich nicht leicht. 4. Der Saal war gedrangt voll, wahrscheinlich well das Konzert zum Besten des neuen Waisen- hauses gegeben wurde. 5. Nicht allein das, sondern auch weil die neue Sangerin, Fraulein M., zum ersten Male auftrat. 6. Das Publikum schien von ihr ganz entziickt zu sein, und die Zeitungen sind heute Morgen voll ihres Ruhmes. 7. Ich habe nie eine so klare und starke Stimme gehort. S. In der Arie aus Lohengrin hat sie sich besonders ausgezeichnct. 9. Das Lied von Schubert mit Harfen-Begleitung gefiel mir am besten. 10. Frau S. sang auch sehr gut, aber Sie schien ein wenig heiser zu sein. 1 1 . Trotz dem, was die Kritiker sagen, gefiel mir ihr Gesang besser a'ls der von Frl. M. 12. Ich finde auch, dass sie mii mehr Clefiihl singt und dass ihre Sdmme geschulter ist. 1:1. \^'as liaiten Sie vom Geigenspiel dcs Ilcrrn K. ? 14, Es muss sehr gut sem, dem Beifall nach zu uiteilen, aber ich ver- 324 LESSON XLVI. b§a7» stehe mich nicht auf die Geige. 15. Ich ziehe die Geige jedem andern In^trumentevor. Ki. Spielt Ihr altester Bruder nicht die Geige? 17. Nein, aber er spielt die Flote unci begleitet mich oft, wenn ich auf deni Klavier spiele. 18. Ihre Familie ist iiberhaupt sehr musilialisch. 1{». Ja wohl, wir spielen fast alle mehr oder weniger. :>(). St-lbst Ihre kleinen Geschwister? 2\. Ja, Marie spielt die Guitarre, Anna die Geige und Frie- drich nimmt seit einigen Monnten Stunden auf dem Violoncell. 20. Wissen Sie, ob vicl fur das Waisenhaus iibrig blcibt, nach- dem alle Kosten bestritten sind? L>3. Etwa funf hundert Thaler, doch beabsichtigt man, ein zwcites Konzert im Laufe des Winters fUr denselben Zweck zu geben. /?. 1. Let us (indef.) not return evil for evil. 2. Do what is right, let it cost what it may. 3. The eighth command- ment says that we are not to steal. 4. He was punished for having neglected his duty. 5 The teacher told us we should close our books, we had read enough for the present. 6. Freddy, do you stand, and give your little brother your chair. 7. In German they say of one who buys anything without seeing it that he buys a cat in a bag. S. Do you care to go for a drive with us ? 9. No. thank you. Do you ride (tahen); I prefer to walk. 10. Who has left these books lying on the table .Ml. John ; and he says he forgot to take them up. 12. Bid him carry them up immediately into the study, and then let him come down here. 1 3. Every one thought Mi. N. to be a rich mm 1 ut he failed fperf.) lately. 14. I have not a single pen fit to write with, and I have a dozen letters to write. 15. Do not allow yourself to be disturbed by my com- ing ; do not stop writing. 16. The beggar, of whom we were speaking in another exercise, passed his youth in idling instead of workiiig. 17. Little Frederick had the misfortune to break an arm while skating, and he was obliged to remain lying in bed a week. 18. Alfred the Great divided the dav »6o] THE PARTICIPLES. 3-JS into three part3 : one part was devoted to business, the second to reading, praying and studying, and the third to eating, sleeping and pleasure. 19. We wished our friends to come in, but they had no time. 20. I am glad to have made your acquaintance. ;.'! . If you go hunting without your father knowing it, he will be very much displeased. 22. Our teacher useu to insist on our writing a German exercise every day, and it was impossible for us to neglect this duty without his knowing it. 23. Before going home we must go to visit your old friend L. If you went away without his seeing you, he would be very sorry. 24. We heard some one coming behind us on the street, aid we remained standing at the corner to see who it was. 25. Our old neighbour has three sons, but instead of their supporting him, he is obliged to support them. Is he not very much to be pitied > LESSON XLVIL THE PARTICIPLES. 279. The Participles are properly Verbal Adjectives, and their uses and constructions are those of Adjectives. There are three Participles, the Present, the Past and the Future- Passive or Gerundive. The English compound Perfect Par- ticiple (e.g., 'having praised',) has no corresponding form in German, and must be rendered by a clause (see § 284, below). 280. The Present Participle. The Present Participle has active force, and, like the Present Indie, marks a present or continuing state or action, the substantive which it qualifies being the subject of the action, as: 326 Lesson xi.vii. L§§a8o Ta^ [(^Infcnbc ilinb. The sleeping child (= 'the child that sleeps '). Sine ^anrfirtinOcnbe ©efc^ic^te, A story that makes one's hair stand on end. The Present Participle is for the most part used only atinhutively, as in the above examples. It is used predica- tively only: {a) When it is a true adjective in function, without any idea of time, as : Seine 5lrann;eit ift nirfit kbputnib. His illness is not serious. 2)ie Sd^onbeit biefev Sanbfc^aft ift cntjiitfcwb. The beauty of this landscape is enchanting (i. e., delightful). ib) In apposition with the subject (sometimes also with the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, when the action of the Participle is simultaneous with thai of the principal verb, as : ©icb frfntcir nac^i mir ummcnbeub, \oX) er niir in^ ©eftc^t. Turning quickly around, he looked into my face. ' ^Prriitcub [rf)Iuc3 fie bie ^ilugen nieber. Blushing she dropped her eyes. gJrcifcnb mit bid \Cmm\ 3?eben S^rer Sdnbev SlJevt unb 3a^r, 6af,jt uicle bcutfd^e ^uirften einft 5u Sorm§ im ., 3. The Past Participle, like the Present (compare § 280/;, above), may be used predicatively in apposition to the sub- ject (or sometimes to the direct object) of the sentence in which it occurs, as : 2)a^ 2?Dlf, Dom ?^-urften unferbriirft, emporte fic^ gegen t{)n. The people. ODpressed bv fhp nrinri> rAtri^if^rj against him. m i2B LESSON XLVn. t§§a8i> 4. For the Past Participle with Imperative force, see §269, 5. 5. The Past Participle replaces the English J^nse;?/ Parti- ciple after fommcn to specify the manner of the motion, as : @r tarn i Cflongcn, gcfoufcn u. f. w., He came walking, running, etc. 6. After verbs of ca///ng, it is used for the Infinitive, as : Ta$, f)eint (ncnnc i(b) fiir bie ^iifunft gcforgt, That is (I call that) caring for the future. 7. It also replaces an Infinitive in such phrases as the following : ^cf; mn^ fort! £ieber I^ier 211(^3 im etid^e rcloffcn ! I must go ! Rather (would I) leave everything in the lurch here. (Lessing.) 8. It is used in a few (7/?so/u/e constructions, with or with- out a substantive, which is usually in the accusative when present, as : ^UflCgckn, ba^ bieg Waijx ift. Granted that this is true. 3}icincn 53ritber ouggcncmmcu, Waxm aik jugegen, Ex- cept my brother, all were present. 282. The Future Passive Participle. This Participle, also called the Gerundive, has the form of the Present Part, preceded by gu. It is formed from tramt^ tive verbs only, and is only used attributively, being replaced •n the predicate by an infinitive with ju, as : (^ine 3u (oOcnbe .Oanblung, An act to be praised ; but eine ^anbhutfl, Jt)eld;e 311 UUw {ft. 283. General Remarks on the Participles. I. Many words with the form of Participles have the value of adjectives. Some occur as adjectives only (see also § 194^ Note), others with a special menning, as: fjclef^vt, learned i mmwx, acquainted; uerju-ieben, different; beja^rt, aged, etc. has read. ^°'^'^"'^'' '""= ^l'^"™^" ; *«« ©elefenc, what one inr;;:'; !^" ^' ^^-^>"- -^^^ ~::r: its subLntit r . sSt? 'it' T ";-""''""'^ p^^-^-^^- poetry, precedes the^ s e S .sL . ?\'''"'°^"^ '" and more correctly folLls as '' "^' '"' ^-^'^Hy » bcr due,, §«„b mmmtni, „,it bet anbern bn3 fob „6cr ben, iVaffcv cn.^or(,„It„,b u.f.u, Swim m,ng vv,.l. one Itand, with ,he other holdinrZ" child above water, etc. "'"ing tne 2)as ms, lu-m ,^.iir,-tc„ untcrbriirft u. f. lo.. The neoole oppressed by the prince, etc. '^ "^ ' 284. English Participial Construct,ok,s. I. The Present Participle is never used in (v.,„ frequently is in Kn.lish, t^ express ad^rbil^ r'S :; •,: 22 33<^ I,E?^SON XLVtI. [§264 iced, where so used, by a reg ular or cause, and must be replaced, where so adverbial clause, introduced by the proper adverb or con- junction, as follows : (a) To express time, the conjunctions bo, aU, * when,' ittbcm, nja()rcni5. 'while,' must be used, as : Seeing him turn pale, I hastened to his assistance, ^tt (aU) i* \bn erblci^en ia% eilte i* i^m jur .t^ilfe ^evbei. Recovering himself, the orator continued, ^W^^m er fid; fammelte, fubr ber ^Tiebuev fort. Remarks.— I. The English Perfect Participle is replaced by a clause with noff)llcm (or oJS', with the Pluperfect, as : Having examined his papers, they let him go, 9la(^= bcm man feine "^a^ierc unterfucf)t l^attc, Uefe man \hn ge^en. 2. The clause with inbcm, indicating simultaneous action, may be replaced by a participial clause in the case specified in § 280, /-, above. (p) To express cause, the conjunctions btt, illbcm, * as,' 'since,' or lucil, 'because,' must be used, as: Being an honest man, he may be trusted, 99Beit er ein etjrlidicr "OJiann ift, fo tarn man i{)m trauen. Hoping to see you soon, I remain ever yours, ^nbcm i* boffc, 3ic balb ju fcbcn, mhUxU tcf» \UU ber ^i^rige. Not having found him at home, I went away, 2)tt tcf> i(m ni*t 511 .soaufe flcfuubcn ^itc, ging icB fort. 2. The Present Participle qualifying a preceding sub- stantive or pronoun is changed: {a) Into a regular relative clause with finite verb, as : A loaf was found at Herculaneum, still retaining its form, Gin 3?rut Vourbe 511 ^ welches uocli bie ^orm bcibcjtclt. U64] ENGLISIT PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 33 1 The sliip, having come straight towards us, sliowed the black flag, Ta^ ecf)iff, mclf^cg geral^c auf mi ^ugcfommcn toar, scigte bie \d)mr^c ^taggc. with ?hT; "f Ju" ''"'' 1 '^'^'^ '" ''^' ^^""''^'"^ ^'^"^^ ^"1 correspond wuh that of the pr,nc,pal verb, as shown above, the Pluperfect, however generally replacing the English Perfect Participles. (/') Into an attributive participial clause, in which the Participle will immediately precede the substantive (see § 283, 4, above), as : A man passing on the street, Gin auf ber Strafee tior« Dcigc^cnbcr 9)?ann. 3. A Participle preceded by an adverbial conjunction is replaced by a finite clause with the corresponding conjunc- tion, as : - o J While travelling in Europe, we met a great many Americans, %\^ jmr in Guropa reiften, trafcn tt)ir mit t^ielen Imerifanern gufammen. For the Infinitive in -ing, or Gerund, and its German equi- valents, see § 276, above. EXERCISE XLVII. A. 1. Haben Sie Ihr Billet schon gelost.? -2. Nein noch nicht. ;}. Dann miissen wir uns beeilen ; wir sollten erst etwas geniessen, ehe wir abreisen. 4. Hier ist der Schalter : soil ich auch ein Billet fur Sie nehmen ? 5. Danke, ich habe meins schon gelost. (i. Jetzt bin ich fertig, aber wir haben kaum drei Viertelstunden Zeit, bis der Zug abfahrt. 7. Dann miissen wir nach der ersten besten Restauration gehen. H. Dort druben ist eine. 9. Das trifft sich gutj gehen wir gleich hinein. ](). Kellner, wir haben es sehr eilig. 1 1 . Nehmen Sie Platz, meine Herren ; ich werde Sie sofort bedienen ; hier ist die Speise- karte 1:>. Geben Sie mir gefalligst einen Teller Suppe. 13. Und Sie, mein Herr? 14. Brin-en Sif^ m,v -,„«,.. ..v,^ Semette. lo. Entschuldigen Sie, hier ist sie. 16. Ich nehme 53^ LESSON XLVU. II 284 |; eine Forelle. 17. Bedaure, es ist keine mehr da. 18. Nun, dann bringen Sie mir ein StUck Lachs. 19. Hier ist die Wein- karte; trinken die Herren V/ein? 20. Bringen Sie eine Flasche Rotvvein und Glaser. 21. Wie schmeckt Ihnen der Fisch? 22. Ausgezeichnet. 23. Diese Suppe schmeckt mir gar nicht. 24. Lassen Sie sich doch Fisch kommen. 25. Ich mache mir nichts aus Fisch ; - KeUner ! 2(). Zu Befehl. 27. Eine Portion Entenbraten mit grunen Erbsen. 28. Wunschen Sie keine Kartoffeln? 21). Jawohl, gebratene Kartoffeln. Brin- gen Sie audi Brot. aO. Noch etwas ? 81. Nein. Was wunschen Sie, Herr B. ? 32. Bitte, reichen Sie mir die Speisekarte. Ich bes'telle mir Kalbskoteletten mit Kartoffeln und gelben Riiben. 33. SonstnochGemiise? 34. Etwas Blumenkohl. 35. Erinnern Sie sich schon fruher hier gespeist zu haben, Herr B. ? 36. Nicht dass ich wiisste ; die Restauration scheint neu zu sein. 37. Des- halb wird man vielleicht so gut bedient. 38. Ist den Herren etwas gefaUig ? 39. Bringen Sie mir eine Portion Eis und eine Tasse Kaffee. 40. Und mir eine Tasse Chocolade und eine Portion Erdbeeren mit Sahne, und schreiben Sie alles auf meine Rech- nung. 41. Hier ist die Rechnung, mein Herr. 42. Wie viel betragt sie? 43. Sieben Mark funfzig Pfennig. 44. Hier sind acht Mark; das Ubrige ist Ihr Trinkgeld. 45. Jetzt mussen wir fort ; es hat soeben auf dem Bahnhofe zum ersten Male gelautet. ^. 1. A sleeping fox catches no chicken. 2. Sleeping dogs* do* not bite. 3. The past cannot be helped (changed) ; let us rather think of what is to come. 4. It is much better to think without speaking than to speak without thinking. 5. Man is a speaking animal, a fire-using animal a laughing animal : these are some of the definitions which have been proposed by philosophers. (>. We learn to speak German in speaking German. 7. Well hit (treffcu) ! I call that well played ! 8. I wanted to show you an article in yesterday's §284] ENGLISH PARTICIPIAL CONSTRUCTIONS. 333 paper, but it is nowhere to be found. 9. Let me know when you think of coming to town. 10. The skill of ants in the buildmg of their nests is astonishing. U. Smiling, he began to read the letter, but before having read the half of it, he threw it furiously on the floor. 12. A hussar came galloping down the street and said the battle was beginning. 13. The Paradise Lost of Milton is one of the most important works of English literature ; it was written in the seventeenth cen- tury, but this does not prevent its being still much read. 14. After having been so well received by us, I wonder that he is not ashamed to speak evil of us. 15. The morning was cool and charming, but towards noon the heat became oppressive, and we saw great clouds rising in the west iO. He says the matter is perfectly clear, but his saying so does not make any difference. 1 7. He went away complain- mg that there was no use talking to people who did not want to understand. 18. That was because he was angry, and because he had not succeeded in making himself understood (berftdnblid)). 19. Make no mistakes in copying your exercise, or else a second copying will be your punishment. 20. Besides making mistakes the last time, you wrote very badly. 21. " The danger to be avoided," said he, "is not yet past." 22.'Going (^ingefjen) to visit our friends in Schiller-street this afternoon, we met them coming to visit us. 23. His being rich is no excuse for his being lazy j we do not need to be idle merely because we are not forced to earn our bread. 24. A certain man, just before dying, called his sons to him, and told them there was a treasure lying hidden somewhere in his field. 25. Believing they would find it, they began digging everywhere, bu^t without finding the wished-for (orh)iln[rf^t) treasure. 26. One of them, wiser than the others, finally guessed what his father had meant by ha-.-ing told them this. 27. This son said that smce digging the ground the crop had been nmch better, and that this was the treasure the father meant. 334 LESSON XLVIII. I§a85 LESSON XLVIII. * CONCORD AND APPOSITION. 285. Concord of Subject and Verb. 1. The predicate verb (the finite part, or that containing the copula) agrees with its subject in number and person. 2. Two or more subjects require the verb in the plural, as : ^Jiciu i^atcv unb inciuc ^Jhitter fiitb ^ier gen)efen. My father and mother have been here. 'remarks. — I. If the subject nearest to the verb be singu- lar, the verb is sometimes in the singular, especially if the subjects follow the verb, as : ©eine §abfurf)t, feiue iippige Seben^art, feiu ^odn^i^n'*-'"^'^^ 3Befen fcrotitc bie Grbitterung gegen i^n auf? J^brfifte, His avarice, his luxurious mode of living, his arro- gant behaviour, excited the animosity against him to the highest point. (Schiller, Egmonfs Leben und Tod.) Dbcn bei bem ^bronc log i?er S^bnig unb bie Monigin, Above near the throne lay the King and Queen. (Grimm, Dornroschen.) Note. — This is especially the case when the subjects, indicating things or abstract ideas, are regarded as forming together one idea, or are more less synonymous, e. g. : ^Ott« unD ^Of ift Dcrtnitft, House and home are sold. ©Clb una ©Ut lltttJ^t uicl)t gtudlid), Money and property (= wealth) do not make [one] happy; or when particular attention is called to the last (as forming a climax), e. g.: :Uicin ilkmibgen, iiiciu :1hif, mcitt l^eben ft€{}t nicl}t anf bem @piele, My property, my reputation, my life (the most important of allj, are not at stake. Sa85] CONCORD OF SUBJECT A.SD VERB. 535 2. If the subjects be of different persons, the verb agrees in person with the first rather than the second or third, and with the second rather than the third, the plural pronoun of the proper person being usually (always with the second per- son) expressed before the verb, as : 2)u \\\M> \6> (mcin ^i^rubcv unb idO, luir gingen au^, You and I (my brother and I) went out. ®u unb bcine ed)me[tcr, ijr jcid au^gcgangen. You and your sister went out. 3. With titles of rank and compliment the verb is usually in the plural (see also § 49), as : Seine 5Jiaieftat ^okn geru^t u. f. lu.. His Majesty has been pleased, etc. 4. CoUectives, if singular, take a verb in the singular, unless followed by a plural substantive in apposition or in the geni- tive, as : @ine gro^e a}ien[d;enmenge toor jugegen ; — but : Gine grofje 3Jiengc 9}ien(clHMi marctt gugegen, A great number of people were present. ^ Notes.— I. The singular may also be used in such cases as that given in the second example above, unless the collective is considered with reference tu its component parts individually. 2. With nouns of Number in the sing, (see § 185, i) the verb is used in the plur. only 'vhen an indefinite quantity is meant, as : ©in |inar (= cinifle) i£agc tnnrcn Devflaugcn, A few days had passed ; — but : etn ^aar ©ticfel foflct ftebeu 2;t)a(cr, A pair of shoes costs seven dollars. 5. When the real (logical) subject is represented by c6, or some other neut. sing, pron., before the verb (see §§ 39 ; 82, Rem. 2 ; 141), the verb agrees with the logical, not with the grammatical subject, as : d^ pub meine ^vubef, It is mv brothers. i I 336 Lcaso:, XI. nil. [§§285- Note. With z/^rsonal pronoun as , 'act, tkl. t5 follows the verb (see § 39, 2). 6. If the subjects be separ:ited by a disjunctive conjunc- tion or conjunctions, the verb regulnrly agrees with the last only, but this rule is by no means so strictly observed as in English, even by the best writers, e. g. : SBcbcr bie Union noi^ bie Si^ue mifrfjrrn fic^ in biefen ©trcit. Neither the Union nor the leag took part in this dispute. ©otco^l bie gage a({l bie 53efeftiguni3 biefer Stabt fd|iejicn jebem Slngriffe ^Troij ju bietcn. The situation, as well as the fortification, of this city seemed to defy every attack. (Schiller, lojahriger Krieg.) Notes. — i. Construdtions like the following : Gnttucbcr bu obcr icf) bin taiib, Either you or I am deaf, are in German, as in English, telt to be awkward, and are therefore avoided by substituting some other construction, e. g. : Giitmebcr irf)btntaub,obcrbu bift e8, Either I am deaf, or you are. 2. The sing, is used after expressions of the time of day, and in the multiplication-table, as : ®« iP yi\)\\ 111)1", It is ten o'clock. 3fl}U mat elf ift (mod)t) Ijunbcrt Uiib yi\)w, Ten times eleven is one hundred and ten. 286. Repetition of Sui3ject. When several connected sentences have a common subject, the subject must be repeated (as pronoun) when the order of the words is changed, as : 3Der 3ug fommt urn neun U^r an, unb faBrt urn ftalb 5eJ)r. tuieber ab. The train arrives at nine o'clock, and leaves again at half-past niue ; — but : 2)er 3ug fommt um neun Uyr an, unb urn bal6 gefin fdbrt cr h)ieber ab. The train arrives at , ne o'clock, and *;*; haif-pasl nine it leaves again. 289] THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE. 337 287. Omission of Predicative Verb. .t>aben and fein, as auxiliaries of tense, may be omitted in a subordinate sentence, as : 9Md>bcui fie ben ilkief rtdefcii, loeinte fie. After she had read the letter, she wept. 288. Other Concords. 1. TheAttributive (or Determinative) Adjective agrees with the substantives il qualifies in gender, number and case (for inflections see Less. XX, XXII, XXlVj; the Predica- tive Adjective has no inflection (see § 14). 2. For the concord of Pronouns and Pronominal Adjectives with their antecedent (in gender, number and person) see §§ z'i, Rem. 4; 39 ; 43, Rem. 3, 4; 82, Rem. i, 2; 83, Rem. I ; 86; 95, I (//); 1C2, 2. NcTE. A Relative Pronoun referring to an antecedent of the first or second person takes the verb in the third person, unless the relative is followed by the personal pronoun, as stated in § 95, i [h], e. g. : 53ift bu e«, bcr fo ^,ittertV — or: J^ift bit ct% bcr bu fo 3itterfi? Is it you that tremble ? 289. The Appositive Substantive. 1. A substantive or pronoun may have another substantive attached to it attributively, giving a further description or definition of the person or thing spoken of. This latter sub- stantive is said to be in apposition to the former, as : yjiein A-reunb, bcr 8c§rcr, trug feine ein^iJie 2Baffe, cinen birfcn Storf, in ber .'pnnb, My friend, the teacher, carried his only weapon, ? thick stick, in his hand. 2. A substantive or pronoun may also be placed in appo- sition to a sentence or clause, as : ©r fagte, ba^ er iuiebcr gang gefunb fei, cine ©e^ouiihing, n)eld)eid) be,;;iDcifeltc^. or; ttiQ? jcfi be^iueifelte, He said he was quite well again, a statement which I doubted. ■ f 338 LESSON XLVIII. [§§a8g ij 3. The appositive substantive is in the same case as the substantive which it defines, thus : 5iarl (Nona.), muw jiingftcr ^^ruber, ift franf, Charles, my youngest brother, is ill. 2)ie Mrari!(;eit Marls (Gen. \ >neine» iiingften iBniberg, The illness of Charles, my youn^^est brother. (iinc gefdt;rUcI;c Mrant(;eit brobtc (n.tr. Marl (Dat.), meis nem jungftcn 50vubcr ; or : bctvohtc ( trans. ) Marl (Ace), meincn iiingften IHubcr, A dangerous illness threat- ened Charles, my youngest brother. Notes. — i. A substantive in apposition to a sentence is put in the Nominative, as in the example under 2, above. 2. An appositive genitive without a determinative word before it, especially v.hen governing another genitive, is uninflected, as : Die iliautt)eit be* ifvonpviii^cn, «ol)n bej? bciitfd)iMi .l{aifcr«, The illness of the Crown-Prince, son of the German Emperor ; but : 2)ie ftranfl)eit be 5. The appositive substantive agrees in gender when there is a special form for the feminine, as : ^ie ©raijitatiou ift bie Scntcriu bcr '-Baljnen allev ^im= rnelsfbrper, Gravitation is the director of the courses of all heavenly bodies. 6. These rules are also applicable to an apposition intro- duced by al5, ' as,' e. g. : §a89] THE APPOSITIVE SUBSTANTIVE. 339 ^6) fanntc ihn a(« §(r\oh ;Nom.), I knew him as (when) a boy (i. e., when / was a boy) ; — but : ^d) fannte il;n alg ^naben, I knew him when {/if was) a boy. EXERCISE XLVIII. A. 1. Konnen Sie mir eine gute T^uchhandlung empfehlen ? 2. Was fiir Bticher wollen Sie kaufen ? ii. Ich miichte mir die Werke einiger von den besten deutschen Schriftstellern an- schaffen. 4. Sie soUten zu Herrn Br?nn gehen ; er hat einen sehr groszen Vorrat, besonders von den deutschen Klassikern. 5. Wo ist das Gescliaft? (>. Nur einige Schritt(e) von hier, Nummer fUnf, urn die Ecke ; ich werde Sie begleiten. 7. Das ware mir sehr angenehm. S. Sie scheinen ein groszer Biicher- freund zu sein. i). J a, das ist eine Schwache, die mich viel Geld kostet, aber mir auch viel Vergnugen macht. 10. Hier ist der Laden ; ich erwarte Sie auf meinem Bureau, wenn Sie fertig sind. 11. Ich danke vielmals fiir Ihre Aufmerksamkeit. Also, auf Wiedersehen. 1;2. Zeigen Sie mir gefalligst einige Exem- plare von Schillers Werken. 13. Gebunden oder ungebunden ? 14. Zeigen Sie mir beides. 15. Aus wie vielen Banden besteht dieses Exemplar? IB. Aus zwolf, und ich mochte Sie auf den ausgezeichneten Druck aufmerksam machen. 17. Der Druck ist sehr klar ; haben Sie noch sonstige (andere) Ausgaben ? 1 H. Wir haben Ausgaben in groszerem Format', aber nur gebunden. Hier sind sie. 19. Das Format gefallt mir besser, aber ich mag den Einband nicht. 20. Dem ist leicht abzuhelfen. Ich bestelle Ihnen ein Exemplar und lasse es nach Ihrem Ge- schmack einbinden. :>]. Gut, ich mochte es in braunem Leder mit Titel gebunden haben ; aber wie viel soil ich Ihnen dafur bezahlen? 22. Die Ausgabe kostet zehn Thaler, der Ein- band fiinf, 2H. Bekomme ich Rabatt' ? 24. Ja, zehn Prozent gegen bare Bezahlung. 25. Ich bezahle bar ; das macht zwei und vierziir Mark. 2<). Wiinschcn Sie noch etwas? 27. Ich 340 LESSON XLVIII. [§§ 289- I mochte auch Goethes sammtliche Werke in demselben Format und Einband haben. ;i8. Es thut mir leid, dass wir keine mehr haben, aber ich kann sie bestellen und gleich iiiit der anderen Ausgabe einbinden labsen, 29. Zum selben Preise? 30. Nein, es wird mit Einband achtzehn Thaler netto betragen. 31. Dann besorgen Sie es gefiilligst, und schicken Sie mir die Werke nebst Rechnung an diese Adresse ; hier ist meine Karte. 32. Ich besorge aMes aufs Sorgfaltigste ; binnen acht Tagen sollen Sie die Biicher haben. B. 1. "Books," said Alfonso the Wise of Spain, "are my most honest councillors : neither fear nor hope prevents them telling me what my duty is." 2. "It is not my courtiers," said this king, " who tell me most honestly what my duty is , it is my books." 3. "No courtier dares to say to a king: 'Your Majesty is wrong,' but my books tell me so every day." 4. I asked a gentleman standing near me, if he knew what time it was, and he answered me that it was exactly twelve o'clock. 5. More than two hours have passed since then, so it must now be between two and three o'clock. (>. Was it you that came to see me yesterday, when I was awa)' from home .'' 7. Yes, my brother and I wanted to visit you, and we were sorry not to find you at home. 8. Margaret, the eldest daughter of Henry VII. of England, married James IV. of S-^otland. 9. These were the grand-parents of Mary Stuart, Queen of Scotland. 10. To do what^is^right, and to be happy, is one and the same, for virtue is its own reward. 11. Dear father and mother, do you remain sitting here until I go for a carriage to drive you home, for I know you are too tired to walk. 12. Twelve and twelve make twenty-four, and twelve times twelve is one hundred and forty-four. 13. After having seen London and Paris, we had not much desire to see other cities. 14. I wrote to K.. invitinij him to pnss his holidays with us, and by return of post received a letter. 2Q0\ THE APPOSITIVK ADJECTIVE. 34t saying we might expect him in a fortnight. 15. I asked you first as my oldest friend to assist me in this embarrassment. l(j. I know we should avoid asking our friends for help until we have done our utmost to help ourselves. 17. The hunts- man whistled, and his dogs came running from the wood. 18. Our teacher was^in^the Jiabit^of telling us we should do what was right, let it cost what it would. IJ). Is your teacher still living? Yes, he is still living, but he is getting very old now. 20. Goethe and Schiller are the two greatest poets of Germany : it is dithcult to say which of the two is most beloved by the German, people. ;>1. If ^ ou think we are right, give us some sign of approval : a word, a smile, a glance will suffice. :>•>. All the rest of our party arrived at the top of the mountain before sunset, but my friend and I arrived only at nine in the evening. :>:\. Expect us on Thurs- day next, health and weather permitting. 24. The gentleman coming out of that shop is Dr. B., and the lady accompanying him is his niece. Miss L. 25. Did you ever see the Emperor William .'* I have never seen him as Emperor of Germany, but I saw him many years ago as King of Prussia. LESSON XLIX. APPOSITION (continued): -APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVES. - SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITION. 290. The Appositive Adjeciive. I. Attributive Adjectives and participles are said to be lised appositively when they are separated from their substai> Uve, as : 3)er ^age, jung, ^iifift^ imb gciftrdr^, Wax ber :^iebling be^ .|)aiifi>!v The page, young, handsome and clever, was the favourite of the house. iJ M ■ U^ J.KSSON XLIX. (§2$0 ^311 bcv 3cl;IadU fcurig unb |urd)tlo0, iuar ^lionmoutb fonft iiberaff UH'idUid} unb unfAIiiffig, Ardent and intrepid in battle, Monmouth was everywhere else effeminate and irresohite. 2. This appositive adjective or participle is, like the pre- dicate adjective, uninflected, and is placed at the end of its clause. It is used much more sparingly in German than in English, and is almost wholly confined to apposition with the subject of the sentence (sometimes also with the direct object). In English the attributive adjective or participle is generally used appositively when it has more than one modifier, and always when it has a complement (as in the second example above). In German on the contrary the attributive adjective is freely used in all such cases before a substantive. All such appositive adjectives or participles, unless referring to the subject (or direct object) of the sentence, must be rendered in German either by an attributive or by a relative clause. The following examples will serve to illustrate to what extent the appositive adjective can be used in German, and to show how it is to be replaced in German in various connections. {a) English Appositive = German Appositive (see also the examples under i, above) : (Engl.) Beleaguered with present distresses and the most horrible forebodings on every side, roused to the highest pitch of indignation, yet forced to keep silence and wear the face of patience, Schiller could endure this constraint no longer. (Carlyle, Life of Schiller.) {Germ.) 9Sou gegcuiudvtiijni 9JiJten unb ben f(l^rec!Iid;ften Sl^nungeu i)on alien 3citcu Jcimgcjur^t, bi§ auf ben l;oc^[ten ©rab ctttriiftct, gcjttungctt jebod), ftilljus fc^ttjeigcn unb bie 5!Jlaefe bev ©cbulb gu tragen, fonnte Sd^iKer biefcu 3^tt"S "^^ Idnger erbulben. Sago] THE APPOSITIVE ADJECTIVE. 343 raint no NoTr..--In this example, as in those under i. above, the adjectives (participles) beleaguered, f tc, are in apposition to the subject ' Schiller.' {J>) English AppositiTe Adjective == German Attributive Adjective or Relative Clause : {Engl.) To judge from the quantity of light emitted from Jie brightest stars, there is (one has) reason to suppose that some of them are much greater than the sun. ^ (i) \ (Germ.) "^adj bet toon beit bctlften Sternen ouggeftra^I^ ten 2irf)tmafje 511 urteilen, f)at \\\axi ©runb anjunefjmen, ba^ einige bation biel grb^ev finb aU bie Sonne ; or : narf) ber Sicbtmaffc ju iirteilen, ttjcl^e u. ]. lu. augge= fiiro^U luirb u. \. \o. {E?igl.) In the Isle of Man vast trees are found standing firm on their roots, (ii) -' {Germ.) 2luf ber ^\x\d 9Jian finbet man ntad)tige §8aumc, metric auf ben 3Bur§eIn fcftftc^cn ; or : mdcf)tige, auf . ben SBurjeln fcfifie^cnbc '-Sdumc. Notes. — i. The participles in these examples are in apposition to the objects 'quantity (of light)' and 'tree' respectively. 2. Observe the position of the Germ, attributive adj. immediately before the substantive. (c) English Appositive Adjective = German Attributive Adjective : {Engl.) Bruce caused his men to lie down to take some sleep at a place about half a mile distant from the river. ( Germ.) 'ikuce lie^ fcine Seute fid) nn einer ungefdbr cine l)albe 9JZeile bom ^^hiffc cntfcrittcn ©telle nieber= Icgen, nm ein n»emg %\x fdUafen. NoTK. — An attributive clause is preferable here, since a relative clause would separate the clause of purpose (iUll, etc.) from the infin. (Uieberiegcn) on which it depends. (i) i 344 LESSON xLrx. [§§ 290- (ii)-^ Note. {Bngi:) During the eruption of the volcano, the dark- ness occasioned by the ashes was so profound, that nothing hke it was ever experienced ^"■'x's.^'5""*' ^''^ *"«6™*'^« K'6 %mmi toav bie burd b.e a(i4.e ttcrurforfite Tvinftcrnis f„ tief, toie man me ctlt)a« aiinlidieS toahrgcnommen battc bi,l, ,J ""'-"'''•^' y' 'he position of the subject ,,fUr the verb for ^^:zi^ ''''-''- --'-'- ^" ^--- - ais:tt ("V I ^,f"^^'\ j! ^^' ^'^ P^^^'^ advantageous for defence. (^«.<) This plant has changed into two distinct vegetables, as unlike each other as is each of them to the parent-plant. (Gen;^.) Dtcfe ^^flan^c hat fic(, in jtyei berfc^iebene @e= mufeavtcn uerimanbelt, mclt^c einanber fo unafintiA fmb, line jebe bcrfelben ber SJhitteri^franje ift of ":^;;^:::^:;:rtt::Tr'"" '^ ^— — „„t 3»1. Syntax of the Prepositions. The cases governed by the various Prepositions are fully t eated of m Lessons IX, XIII, A, and XXXVIII, and tlreir icl.omm.c use is furtlier defined in Less. XXXIX ad iecdvefr °^ ™™^' r^"' •■''"'" "' "'^" "' substantives and ," ess d ll '■"''° "" ""' ""'" ■■" -^'g-fication, is ex- .^ er,^' P-PO-t.o„s. The proper use of prepositions aftu ,erbs, etc., must be learnt fron, practice and rom the dictionary ; but below is given, for convenient reference he regimen of particular classes of verbs, etc., which differ most widely from their English equivalents. [§§ aso^ 291] SYNTAX OF THE PREPOSITIONS. 345 I. at, of = iificr -f- Ace, of sorrow, Joy, wonder etc., as: Verbs. , fid) drgern, be vexed erroten, blush erftauneu, be astonished fic^ frcuen, rejoice fid^ gram en, grieve flagen, complain Iad)en, laugh fic^ frf)amen, be ashamed [potten, mock fic^ (ber)h)itnbern, wonder Substantives. Strger, vexation Grvotimg, blush ©rftauncn, astonishment ?^'rcube, joy (also an -}- Dat.) ©ram, grief ^lage, complaint ©eldditcr, laughter ©diam, 'i-^cid)dnumg, shame (5)30tt, mockery 33crnnniberiing, surprise Also the Adjectives argerlid), vexed ; bofc, angry (at things); empfinblid), sensitive ; froh, luftig, merry. Note.— m\t takes nilf + Ace. when referring to persons. 2. for = nuf + Ace, of expectation, etc., as : gefa^t, pre- pared ; ^offcn, ^^offnung, hope ; marten, wait. 3. for = nni^, of longing, inquiring, etc., as : *^^^bs. Substantives. biirften, thirst 2}urft, thirst forfd)en, inquire j^orfdnuig, inquiry fjungern, hunger hunger, hunger iagen, hunt c^agb, chase . fudien, search 2uft, ) fid; fcf)nen, long berlangen, desire 33erlangen, ) desire _ Also the Adjectives burftig, thirsty ; elirgeijig, ambitious ; gie. rig, greedy ; ^ungrig, hungry. 4. for = urn, of entreaty, etc., as : Htten, ask ; Bubten, court • [le^en, beg ; fic^ {ummern, concern one's self. 23 34^ LESSON XLIX. [§a9« 5. from == bar -{- Dat., of protection, etc., as : ^en)a{;ren^ preserve ; {;uton, protect ; rctten, save. 6. in = au + Dat., of plenty, want, etc., as: arm, poor-, frucfctbar, fruitful; reid), rich ; f^luadv weak ; ftarf, strong. 7. in or on = auf + Ace, of ionfidcnce, etc., as : Verbs, Substa?i.tives. fief) triiften, boast Stol^, pride [id; Herlaffen, rely 93cr(ai reliance ucrtrauen, trust 33ertrauon, confidence 8. of = an 4- Dat., of plenty, want, doubt, etc., as : Verbs. ig Substantives. 'OJJangel, want 9teid)tum, wealth tlberflufj, superfluity 3iT??ifel, doubt fe^lcu (iinpers.), > , , ,, ' - be wantinj mauijdn " ) •^njcifcfn, doubt bcrjtoeifcln, despair Also the Adjectives franf, sick ; leer, empty. q. of = an + Ace, of remembrance, etc., as : Verbs. Substantives. beiifen, think ©ebanfe, thought erinncvn, remind (Srinnerung, recollection fid^ crinncvn, recollect Note. These verbs also govern the Genitive. See § 245. io. of = auf + Acc. of suspicion, envy, pride, etc., as, S ubstanti7>cs. Adjectives. XHdU (gelicn), (pay) attention ad;tfam, | iHrgmobn, suspicion aufmei!fam, j "'^^^'^^^^^ (i'ifovfud)t, jealousy avglDobnifd), suspicious 3^eib, envy eifevfiid;tig, jealous eit J, vain neibiyd^, envious ftolg, proud agi] SYNTAX or THE PREPOSITIONS. 347 1 1, of = Dor -f Dat, of fear, etc., as : Verbs. Substantives. \\^ furc^ten, be afraid c^urdU, Icar „ erfc^recfen, be terrified ©cfirerf, terror „ grauen, dread ©rauen, dread Also the adjectives bange, afraid; fid;er, certain, sure. 12. to = nn + Ace, ot add,..ss, etc., as: nbreffiercn, ad- dress ; fc^veibcn, write ; fic^ vidUoi, turn ; fid; Joenben, apply. 13. to = gegcit, after Adjectives signifying an affection of the mind, as : barmfjergig, merciful ; feinblid.^ hostile ; freunb. hc^, friendly; gerec^t, just; rtleicfigiftig, indilTerent; gncibig gracious ; graufani, cruel ; nac^ficbtig, indulgent. EXERCISE XLIX. 1. My sister is vexed at not receiving an invitation to the party. 2. lam tired of waiting for Charles; let us go without him. 3. Oh no, do not let us go yet ; he will be angry at us. If we do not wait for him. 4. Charles has many good qualities, but you cannot rely upon him. 5. The boy is proud of the watch given to him by his father. 6. If you lose your way in a city, it is always safest to apply to a policeman. 7 I have no doubt that this is good advice. 8. Mary is angry at Sarah, because Sarah has made sport of her. 9. Our neighbour has been ill for some days ; he complains of rheuma- tism, and says he has caught cold. 10. I am less vexed at his not coming than at his not sending us word. 11. The war had already lasted more than four years, and people were long- ing for peace. ll>. Diogenes is said to have gone once in dav- hght through the streets of the city, carrying at the same tim'e a lantern. 13. People began to laugh at him and mock him, asking him what he was looking for. 14. He replied that h^- a iii^ .„f an ^ioneoi man. lo. iIxk:. general postponed attacking the enemy, because his army was weak in artillery. Iff!' 348 LESSON L. U§ afta- 16. Mr. Kalk, the architect, promised that my house should be finished before the 1st July, but I doubt it. 17. The Province of Ontario is rich in iron, but is wanting in coal to smelt it. 18. We have been thinking for some time of selling our house, but we cannot find anyone who is willing to buy it. 19. Be good enough to remind me to buy some postage-stamps, when we go past the post-ofiice. 20. We may learn as much by pay- ing: attention to what we see and hear as we can learn from books. 21. The horses, frightened by a passing train, shied, and were on the point of running away. 2i. The first settlers in this country had much to endure : they lived for the most part in houses built of [the] trunks^of^trees and covered in many cases with bark. 23. (Just) as many people lost their lives (the life) by the famine occasioned by the earth- quake, as by the earthquake itself. 24. The bad news re- ceived yesterday has prevented our going to town to-day. 25. There are men who grow richer by giving than others [do] by receiving. LESSON L. WORD-ORDER. 292. The Essential Parts of a Sentence. I. Every sentence contains three essential ,: arts, viz : the Subject, or that of which something is asserted, the Predi- cate, or that which is said of the Subject, and, thirdly, the Verb or Copula, the word which makes the assertion, and which may include the Predicate (as in the simple tenses of a verb), but does not necessarily do so. Thus, in the sen- tence : ' He sings,' ' he ' is the Subject, while 'sings ' contains both the Verb or Copula and the Predicate, i. t., it not only asserts som.ething of the Subject, but al ) says what that something is, being equivalent to ' is singing.' In the sen- «93] POSITION OF THE VERB. 349 tence : ' He has sung,' on the other hand, ' has ' is the V,rb (or Copula), ' sung ' is what is asserted, or the Predicate. 2. The Verb (or Copula) is in German the member of the sentence, the position of which is most absokitely fixed- it is the cardinal point or hinge on which the sentence turns. ' 293. Normal Position of the Verb. In German, there are three normal positions for the Verb accordmg to the nature of the sentence. ' (a) The Verb stands first : I. In Interrogative Sentences expecting the answer 'yes ' or ' no ' (i. e., when the verb is the question-word, see § 23, 2), as : Sft SI;r Sruber njofjl ? Is your brother well > 2Birb er fommcn? Will he come.? ^Ci^en au^gefjen, If the weather were fine, I should go out. (b) The Verb comes second (is the second idea) in all principal assertive sentences (compare § 20), as : ^er 5Kenfc^ ifi ftevblicf), Man is mortal, ' ,i 350 LLSSON L. [§393 i ii •1 .1 i ^er iiinflcre 'il^rubcr meinco ootcv^^ ^ooldbfr \o Iranf irar, ift tci. My father's younger brotbei', who was so ill, is dead. ©eftcrn !iHbcnb ftnrb bcr '^H'uber meiue^^isaiev-^, Yesterday evening my fatlier's brother died. (SolDobl (nid;t luiv) mciu ^^aUx, ioie (jonbcrn audi) mcin 5^.nibcr ttJCr jiUiiei^cn, Both (not only) my father, and (but also) my brother were (was) present. Remarks. — i. As in the last three examples above, the first member of the sentence may be complex, with several attributes, complcmenis, etc.; the verb is still the second idea. 2. The coordinating conjunctions pro'\r (§ 236; do not count as members of the sentence (see the last example above), but adverbial conjunctions throw the subject after the verb. NoTK. Certain adverbial phrases, of a more or less interjectional nature, such as: fvdlid), true; jil, yes; ja lUOl)l, to be sure; \m\\, no; fur;;, in short; lUit cilinn 5i?0Vt, in a word; ^wi, well, are not regarded as part of the sentence, and do not tlirow the subject after the verb, thus: grcilid). irt) link e^ nid)t fcUift 0cfcl)cii, Tiae, I did not see it myself. iiurj (mit eincm aSorO; id) glaubc c« uid)t, In short (in a word), I do not believe it. ®Ut, id) tucrtic tommcn, Well, I shall come. 3. In assertive sentences of an emphatic or exclamatory character, the verb sometimes comes first, especially when the particle bodi is present, as : ^ft ba^5 eiu ^ilsctter! (= J^a^ fur ein ffietter ift ba^!) What weather ! ^cbc idi'^"> biv bO{^ n^f«f\^ ! I told you so ! 4. If a dependent clause or a quotation precede the prin- cipal sentence (compare § 294, l\ Rem. 2, below), such clause or quota.tion is regarded as a single member of the sentence, and requires the verb immediately after it, as ; ^93] POSITION OF THE VERH. 351 SDa ic^ fclbft mrf;t fommen fonntc, f ' icftc id; mciiun So^ As I could not come myself, I sent my son. %h id) antam, tuor c^> fduMi iiad) lo lU;r, When i arrived, it was after 10 o'clock. 3Bcnn cr {innmcn [of fc, jttfr&c id; jjj .'oaufe in. If he should come, I .hall be at home. ,.m UMlI iiioinc I'dify.aK- nd^t (crncn," jrfjric ber unartige Miuibo, "1 will not learn my lesion," cried the naughty boy. Notes -i. After de,Kndent ^u.ulitional and adverbial clauses (except those of Lvu) the particle fo usi.allv introduces the principal sentence, as : ^a idi nid)t felbit foiiuiini l\ iti', fo fdiirftc id) inciucn ^of)u. ' Seuii cr tuiimicn foUtc, fo luerbr id) ^u >^auic fr 2. This pa. ucle fo should always be inserted after a cu..ditional clause wita tt .tin omitted ; in c..lloquiaI usage, however, the principal sentence sometimes has the subject d./on- the verb, fo being omitted, as: 5K>nri' a fril()or flcfoiinitrii, fo fiattc cr mid) gofd)en ; or (colloquially) : SBfire er friih r ncfo.imeu, cr t^diU mid) !icfoI)eii. This latter construction, Lnvever, should not be Mnitated. _ 3- In /r^/^r//^«.;/ clauses introduced by j,., Qcfio, or ur io, the depen- o.nt clause comes first, and the verb is preceded by tl,. w, : ' expres- sing the comparison, as well as by the particle j.', etc., as 'Micium- bie md)tc finb, b.fio (ur^r frtft bio ^a.^e, The longer the nights are, the shorter are tiie days. (^) The Verb last in dependent sentences and ques- tions (compare §§ ^,2 ; 88), as . 3c^ t»eif„ bag bcr Hfcnid^ [terblid) ^ 1 ow that mnn is mortal. mn mann, ttJcIt^n leftern bicr mnr, A mnn, who was here yesterday. Scf) gebe, mil es fc^on fpat ift, 1 go because it is late. m JiH'ifj ni*t mv i)kv GciDcfcn ift, X) not know who has been here {t/c'/>. question). rt" *( 1 352 LESSON L. [§§ 293 Remarks. — i. Indirect statements with baf^ omitted have the construction of principal sentences (verb second; see §§ 20; 87, 3), as: (?v fagte, ev fjobr ce; Deroeffen, He said he had forgotten it. 2. Conditional chiuses with UKini omitted follow the question-order {\Q:xh first ; compare § 59), as: aOiirc ba^i *^i> otter [duMt, fo univbe \6) nu^geh' i. If the weather were fine, I should go out. 3. The Verb precedes two infinitives (or infinitive and part.; see § 199,3), as in the compound tenses of Modal Auxiliaries, thus : Gr [ante, bafj er nicM ()alic fommcu nioflcn. He said that he had not intended to come. 4. Clauses with iJcmt (='unless,' § 241, \^),\\^V\\\g negative force, follow the construction of a principal sentence (verb second), as : ^c^) laffe 2)idj nic^it, Tu fcgncft inic^) bcnn, I will not let Thee go, unless Thou bless me. ^c^ luerbc nid^t toiumcn, C0 fci bcnn, bof; ba^ ^Better fcbbn iDCvbc, I shall not come, unless (it be tha'^) the weather should become fine. 5. ^(^hiw and fcin, as auxiliaries of tense, arc frequently omitted at the end of a dependent clause, as ; ©r loiujnctc, baf^ cr ba-S ^-enftcv ^,e-/tvod;oi (^olsc under. stood), He denied that he had broken the window, ^c^ fvaojte ifui, ob er juv vedUen ^eit ani^efoininen (fcj understood), I asked him if he had arrived in good time. 294, Position of the Subject. The Subject is placed : (a) In Direct Questions, if it be the question-word, at the beginning ; otherwise immediately after the Verb, as: P d 294] POSITION OF THE SUBJECT. 353 aSJer ift ^ier gelDcfcn ? Who has been here ? 3ft cr i)KX gctucfcnV Has he been here ? 2Bann fommt ^^re Si^tticfter ? When does your sister come ? (d) In Principal Assertive Sentences, the norma/ po- sition of the Subject h Jirsi ; but if any other word precede the Verb, the Subject immediately follows the Verb, as: ^(f) )Merbc inovi^cn nidit auoiic(;en ; or : ^Jorflen iuerbe ir^ nid)t au^fle{^cn, I shall not go out to- morrow. Remarks.— i. Tn point of fact it may be said that, in a principal sentence, the Subject follows the Verb quite as often as it precedes it. 2. A preceding dependent clause, or a quotation, always throws the subject after the verb, except when, after a con- ditional clause with ucnil omitted, the principal sentence is not introduced by the particle fo (compare § 293, 4, Note 2, above). 3. When the real {logical) subject is represented by eg before the verb as grammatical subject, the logical subject immediately follows the verb, as : (5^ ift mcinc (Sr^mcftcr gcmefen. It was my sister. i,c) In Dependent Sentences, the Subject, if a relative pronoun, h-gins the sentence, otherwise the Subject imme- diately follows the connecting word, as : ^er gjJaun, lucli^cr geftern bier mar. The man who was here yesterday. ^er mam, ben i(^ geftent fai). The man, whom I saw yesterday. %i} fav3te ifn-, ba^ ir§ fommcn toerbe, I told her that I should come. I i i I 354 LESSON L. [§§ 294- Note. — F-rsonal Pronouns, and especially the reflective f|^, some- times prece('e the Subject, both in principal sentences with the Subject after the Verb, and in dependent clauses, as : a)foi'gcu roiU fid) meiu 5Brubcr toerl)eiraten, My brother is going to get married to-morrow. Gr fugt?, bafj i^it bicfer SJicnfc^ beleioigt ^obt, Ke said that this fellow had insulted him. 296. Position of the Predicate. 1. The Predicate, if not included in the Verb (see § 292, I, above), may consist of a participle or infinitive (as in the compound tenses of the verb); or it may be a substantive, an adjective, or the separable prefix of a compound verb. 2. The Predicate is placed last in Principal Sentences and in Direct Questions; in Dependent Sentences it immediately precedes the Verb. 3. If the Predicate is compound, consisting of two or more of the elements under i, above, they will occur in the follow- ing order: I. Predicative adjective (or substantive) ; 2. Sep- arable prefix ; 3. Participle ; 4. Infinitive ; thus : I'RED. Adj. @r foil fteto gegen fei len armen 53ruber fe^r frcigctiifl Part. Inf. gctoefcit fcitt. He is said to have always been very liberal to his poor brother. Pref. Part. Inf. ©ie imivbc fd>on cjeftcrn ah - gcrcift jcin. She would have departed yesterday. Remark. — Any one of these elements of the Predicate may, for emphasis, occupy the normal position of the subject in \}ci& first place {before the Verb), as : Srf)lin ift baa 3i^cttcr hcutc nid;t. The weather is not (at all) fine to-dav (i. e., it \^ far from fine). 291 pis tra (ol sul 296] POSITION OF THE PREDICATE. 355 6i)(bat ift mein §8mber, nic^t ^Jiatrofc, My brother is a soldier, not a sailor. ^iiiQCn tt)itt id) WoU, aber ntc^t fpielen, I will sing, but not play. Note. - The Separable Prefix and the Participle are, however, rarely placed in this position, except in elevated or poetic diction, or for con- trast, as: IWiebcr ftetg' id) jum @efecf)tc, I descend (down I go) to the light. (Schiller.) 3urUlTe blcibi ber .f na^jpeu '^xo% The retinue of squires remains behind {ibid.). Sntfdjloffcn ift cr nlfobatb, He is resolved at once (i/>iJ.). ©cgebcn Ijnbe id) il)m baS i8urf) nid)t, fonbern nnr geliel)eii, I did not give him the book, I only lent it to him. 296. Position of Objects and Cases. 1. Objects (not governed by a preposition) precede adjects (objects governed by a preposition), as : ^c^) f)a6e einen Srief an i^n {an meinen 33ater) gefc^rieben, I have written a letter to him (to my father). 2. Pronouns (unless governed by prepositions 1 precede substantives, as : ^cf) \:}ah^ i^m einert SBrief gefc&rteben, I have written him a letter. 3. Of Pronouns, Personal before "other Pronouns, as: ^c^ {jaht ijm bag (etUjag) gegeben, I have given him that (something)o 4. Of the cases o^ Personal Pronouns, the Accusative precedes the Dative, and both precede the Genitive ; but the reflexive [id^ usually precedes all others, as : Gr l^at fi(^ (Dat.) c^ gemerft. He has taken.^^note.^of it (for hinuelf). IT mwimHt ^tl^M I 356 LESSON L. m»9^ 5. Of Substantives, the Person (unless governed by a pre- position) precedes the thing; the Indirect precedes the Direct Object, and the Remoter Object (in the Genitive) follows both, as : 3c^ Jjabe S^rcr Si^tocficr bas SSuc^ gelief^en, I have lent your sister the book. ©r hai bicfcn 9Konn be^ 2)ie6[ta^Ig befc^ulbigt, He has accused this man of theft. 6. Yhe personal {or subjective) Genitive (compare § 243, 2) may either precede or follow the substa ilive which governs it, as: Witxnti a5oter§ ^au%, My father's house ; or : Xa^^Qxx^ mcincS ISBotcrs. 7. The limiting Genitive (see §243,3) follows, exc?pt in elevated or poetic diction, as : I'a^ Gnbe bcfl ^ticgcg, The end of the war. 8. Cases governed by adjectives precede the adjective, l.ut a substantive with a preposition may follow the //-j'/^//Vd;//V^ a, 1 jective, as : 3cf) bin i^m ban!6ar fiir fciiic ©cmiifjuiii^cn, T am grate ful to him for his exertion. 297. Position of Adverbs and Adverbial Expressions. 1. In general, adverbs precede the word they modify, as: 3c^ bin \t\^x miibe gelDorben, I have become very tired. @r ^ai bag ^^urf) wx^i gelefen, He has not read the book. 2. Adverbs of Time precede objects (except pronouns) and all other Adverbs or Adverbial expressions, as : Time. Object. Place. Manner. ^r ^at {)cftcrn bag SOuc^ ju S:>a\\\^ febv flcif^ii^ ftubievt, He studied the book very diligently at home yesterday. agsi POSITION OF ADVERBS, ETC. 357 3. Adverbs of place precede those of manner, and both follow objects, as in the above example. 4. Of several Adverbs of like kind, the more general precede the special, as : SWorgcii urn ge^n U^r, At ten o'clock to-morrow. Remarks. — I. Any object, adject, adverb or adverbial phrase may occupy the normal position of the subject at the head of a principal sentence (before the verb, compare § 295, Rem., above), as : aWcittcn J8otcr ^a6eic§ md;t gefe^en, I did not see my father. ©cftcril lam id) ju fpat, I came too late yesterday. 2. The re/ati7'e position of objects, abverbs, etc., is the same in principal and subordinate sentences. 298. Position of other Members of the Sentence. 1. Attributive Adjectives and Participles immediately precede the sut/st««tive they modify, as : @in §«r 13?evteiaigung fef)r fliinftigcr Ort, A place very favourable for defence. ^ag auf bem ^uget ftc^cnbe .^au^. The house standini; on the hill. 2. -Prepositions precede their case, with the exceptions given in the lists (see §^r" 4^) ; 51 ; 223). 3. Conjunctions ccme between the words or clauses they connect, as : 5Jlein 33ruber unb feine ^amilie nnb bter. My brother and his familv are here. 3c^ tt)ei|3, ba^ 3ie nicfct fommen tvivhta, I Know that you will not come. ir II {EJ m\i I iM .i^i^l !■ pirj^^^m ^^^^1 . : 35^ Lesson t. t§§298- Vote. — In dependent clauses that precede the sentence on which th. y depend the conjunction is first, as: aScil id) frnnf mar, tonnte itJ) nic^t fommen, Because I was ill, I could not come. ^.^99. Construction of Incomplete Clauses. ^^he Word-order of Incomplete or Elliptical Clauses is the sai.ie ss that of Con. jlete Clauses, there being no Verb in the fo>-ner. Jn Infinitive Clauses the Infinitive comes last; and in Aj jositive Clauses, the Adjective or Participle comes last, thus : ©ute ^reunbe (311) f)abtn ift ein grofee^ ©liicf. To have good friends is a great blessing. 5Dic ^uuftin CI 311 maUw, The art of painting in oil. Sc^ iuerbe mic^ fveuen, '3ie morgen ju fe^en, I shall be glad to see you to-morrow. 2)ie§ afu^ be. mir benfcnb, fd)lief id) ein. Thinking all this to myself, I fell asleep. SSon bem 2arm oufgefi^rcdt, f^rang er ai:^ bent Sette, Aroused by the noise, he jumped out of bed. 300. Interrogative Sentences. 1. Direct Questions always i^egm with the question-word, the other members of the sentence occupying the same relative position as in principal sentences. For the position of the Verb and Subject, see §§ 293, 294, above. 2. Questions in German very frequently have the form of a principal assertive sentence, the question being marked only by the rising inflexion of the voice, as : 3)u ^ofl bcine 2e!tion nic^t gelevnt? You have not learnt your lesson t Notes.— I. This construction often occurs with a Dof^ in the sen- tence, as : 30t] rNTERROGATIVE SENTENCES. .^59 ^n ttJirfl tto^ fommen? You will be not?). sure to come (will you Grift ioiftnicfitfranf? He is not ill (i, he .? I hope not). 2. Exclamatory sentences frequently have the construction of depen- dent questions, but may also have that of direct questions, as : 2Bci- mitfle()en Wrfte ! (Happy he) who might go with you I aBie tft bog Sisetter f(})i)ii ! How beautiful is the weather 1 301. RECAPITULATION. General Remarks on German Construction. The following are the principal points in which German differs from English Construction : 1. The Verb (containing the Copula) is the hinge on which the sentence turns, and has its position most absolutely fixed. 2. The Subject does not, as in English, necessarily precede the Verb in Principal Sentences; but if any other member of the sentence precede the Verb, an inversion of the subject takes place, and it is thrown after the verb. Notes. -I. The terms inversion, inverted sentence, often used by grammarians, refer to the Subject only, not to the Verb. 2. This inversion of the Subject is also found in Interrogative and Imperative Sentences (see §§ 293 ; J94 ; 300, above). .. ^;7^J '"^^^^T "^'"^ "^ sentences is marked by the varying position of the Verb, which is last in Dependent Sentences. 4. All the other parts of the sentence, except what precedes the Verb are included or bracketed between the Verb and the Predicate. 5. Dependent Sentences (incl-uinj. Infinitive and Appositive Clauses- see § 299, above) are marked off fioru the sentences on which they depend by commas. j v ^ I'll I li 360 SUPPLEMENTARY LESSON Q. t§§S02- SUPPLEMENTARy LESSON G. COMPLEX SENTENCES. -CLAUSE-ORDER. 302. Compound and Complex Sentences. 1. A sentence is compound when it contains more than one coordinate clause ; complex when it contains a iubcf-dinate clause, thus : Compound: 3d) cjliiq nn il)m t)or[iei, taniitc i(]n alier nid)t, I went past him, but did not know him. Complex : Gr f n^te inir, bnfj n fomntnt lucvbe, He told me that he would come. 2. Any subordinate clause may itself be complex, having another clause dependent upon it, as: 3d) emnrtete it)u geftevn, tacil cr mir nt1rf)viclieu Ijtittc, tjnft fcine ©efrijiifte ba(b becnbifit \v\\ Unutni, I expected him yesterday, because he had written me, that his business would soon be finished. Note. — In the above example, the clause loeil er, etc., depends on the principal clause preceding it; whereas the clause bag feine ©efc^aftc, etc., depends on the clause weil er, etc., which is itself subordinate. Remark. — In the following observations as to the relative position or order of clauses, the term "principal sentence " includes all sentences, though themselves subordinate, which occupy the relation of a principal or governing sentence to the clauses dependent upon them. 303. I. "in Complex Sentences, the position of the various depen- dent clauses is regulated by the following general principle : Finish the principal sentence before introducing the sub- ordinate clause. 2. Thus, in the example in § 302, 2, above, it would be wrong to insert the last clause (bilfj . . . ttJiirbeu) within the preceding clause on which it depends, thus : Scit ev miiv bajj feine @efd)nfte bceubigt \n\\ tiuirben, ge|ci)vieben I)attc. 3. Similarly the following construction would make the complex sen- tence quite unintelligible: 3)ie ®ch)o()ul)ctt mug tie j^ettigteit eine ^c^^z ol)ne iibev bie 9?egel ju benteii ju t^un tjctlci^cn. The observance of the above rule will require the clauses of ibis sen- tence to be arranged .is follows : 305J COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 361 2)ie ©emo^nMt muB bic J^ertinfeit ftcrld^cn, eine ®arf,e m thun tt re" d- ^^^;'V^-"''*^"'^"^"' "^^^^ ^P-^^^-) --tit"; the ead.ness of do.ng a thing without reflecting upon the rule. is :.^Z^r'''''''" '''''-' ''' ^-'-^- °^ t^e separable prefix |eiter ging bie @onne an jenem 2«orgen, an bem n)ir abreiften our The sun rose cheerfully on that morning on which we set o^t ^' The prefix ouf should be inserted after mirgcn. the1>?rtultTf 'rr.""''"'"' ""'^' '^"^"^^' ^*^^"d immediately afte. the particular part of the sentence to which they refer as • S)ie ^rlcftcrin toot, iftrct mttin felftfi getudfil^t' unb flefietftaf lod I '". '""',7'' ^"'^^'"^' '^^"^^ -d consecraterby tie goddess herself, speaks to thee ^ f iben'sZ:: r" ^^' ^ '''-' ^^-^^^ °^ ^-^--^ t^«^ ^^^^-t Oft Doigcmo MI, I have often reproached him with this mis- take of misuuerpreting every action. Scf) fomue biejvrngc, cb tmt fiimcn, ntd,t fieantmorten, I could not answer the question, whether we were coming. 305. Relative Clauses must immediately follow the antecedent : ' pitllsIntetVrr ^-^^^^---^i— o, precedes the verb of a 1 he man who was here yesterday came again to-dav not know the man, who was here yesterday. Note. -If the antecedent does not precede the v^rh t), 1 .- ' • • S»teiflb,r5)l„„„„,rt.r(,.!o,n,n™,,„,M«„.f „ 3« I)06c ben *«„„ „i,i„ ,,,„„„^ „,,j,„ ^ ^ J- ' guify. T" *"' "'"""°" ''^ *= ="'"="- ™W cause ambi- fnand, whom I had „„t seen foojcng^.i™.. ""^ ^62 SUPPLEMFN'TARY LESSON G. t§30« :M' I A 306. A Snhordinatc or Dependent Clause (with the exceptions specified in Remarks 3, 4, below) may also, whether subjective, objective or adverbial, procde the principal clause, in which case it throws the Subject after the Verb, as: CD ifl) fomiiicn (onn (sui>jective clause), ift juicifelljaft, It is doubtful whether I can come. aScr flcr ,511 rid fccljuiit (subjective clause], iinrb iveiilg (eiften, He who considers too much, will accomplish little. ^nft cr mil' nidjt fictdjriclien ^subjective clause), miid)t iiiir gorgcn, [The fact] that he has not written to me, causes me anxiety. Cb id) trcrtJc fomn-en fbnnea {objccti^'c clause), lucifi icf) iiidit, I do not know, whether I shall be able to conK ^nft cr fronf ift {objective clause), {)abe id) geftern , qort, I heard yesterday, that he was ill. Ta id) frnnf hjor (adverbial clause], foiiiite id) nid)t tommeii, As I was sick, I could not come. Remarks. — I. Such a clause takes the place of a subject, object or predicate, as the case may be, ' before the verb i compare §§293, b. Rem. 4; 294, Rem. 2; 295, Rem ). 2. Adverbial clauses in this way bring expressions of time, place, etc., but more especially those of can^c, nearer to the verb, which is the part of the sentence they modify. 3. (.M\\y subject i^■c relative clauses with the f^w/^//;/*/ relative mcr, mnvS, can stand at the head of a sentence, as in the second example above. NoTF.-Tlie relative bcr is sometimes used instead of luer as compound relative (includmg both relative and antecedent), especially in the plural, as: '^M fid) s\\ t)avt ocvnnnnen batteit, f(or)oii ini§ bom Sonbc. (Schiller) ; i. e., 5»irifiu<^cn, wetdic ii. f. u.. • or : -iBa- fid) jii Ijart iiersinii,]en hattc (sln?.)| flod 11. y TO., Those who had committed too great offences, fled from tha country. 4. Clauses which modify not the whole sentence but a particular member, cannot stand at the head of the sentence, but stand either immediately after the word to which they refer, or after the conclusion of the sentence (compare § 297, above). This remark applies especially to relative clauses (but see Rem. 3, above, and Note), and to comparative clauses with oI§, as: >Sein llnniiirf loar grbucr, old er crtroflf n fonntc (or : ^u grofi, %\i Oa^ ei- est u. f. \x\), His misfortune was greater than he could bear. f ?306] COMPOUND AND COMPLEX SENTENCES. 3^3 Note. -Comparative clauses with n>ie may precede, as: ffite im Mawb ocr tio(\d rinjit, Wan ft* jcbcr jiiitficfi tliun, As the bird sings amid the boughs, let every one enjoy himself. (Schiller). EXERCISE G. J;,VT "77«''^'^' «^*>-^ - great botanist, to give, in the present tate of our knowledge, a co.nplete definition of what (^ that which) is to as ">la,u "' 'tT ""T';- " -"^■■-'-^'""ion to what one must regard as a plant. 2 The good king Robert Bruce, who was always watchful and prudent, had received inforn.ation(.^tlinbc) of (Don) the intention of hese .nen to attack him suddenly. ,. Bruce caused his men to lie c.own o take some sleep at a place about half a n)ile distant fro.n the river see § 290, ., ,), while he himself, with two attendants, went down to watch the ford through which the enemy must pass, before they came to the lace where kmg Rol,ert's n.en were lying. 4. " If I go back," though! he lung "to call ,ny ,nen to (the) arms, these men tvill get (foium;, hrough the ford unhindered; and that would be [a] pity,'sinc is a lace so advantageous for defence." o. I„ the confusion, five or six of the enemy were slain, or, having been borne down bv the stream, [were lrow,u.d. .;. Vyuh the natural feeling of a young author (3ri,r.f , cdai he had ventured at) to go (fid, anf.nari,c„,, secretly and witness ('bcH "eli + dat.) the first representation of his tragedv at Mannheim. 7. He resolved to be free, at whatever risk (anj jebo ^c^- Din); to abandon -g.ve up) advantages wluch he could not buy (cvfanfo,,) at such a price • o qm his stepdame (inrT.niittcrlid,, adj.) home, andgo forth (fortmauborn)' hough friendless and alone, to seek his fortune in the great market (Qiuat 11 -f- da .) hun, to make an attack upon the fort from that side where he hade imbed up, offering (fid, rrluctcu) to lead. =.. how) the way 0. He ordered his men to advance against the wail with their shields held ogether m the manner which the Romans named ' testudo ' or tortoise ^rf,t bhotc) iO Mis n.other was present on (Inn) this joyous occasion and si e produced (== showed) a paper of (== with) poison, which, as she hln' t'!T"l to have given her son in his liquor (C^Vlrauf, ace.) rather than that he should submit (himself) to personal disgrace. M PART THIRD. WORD-FORMATION. HISTORICAL SKETCH. y LESSON LI. DERIVATION AND COMPOSITION. 307. I. New words are formed in a language by two more or less distinct processes : Derivation and Composition. 2. Derivation is of four kinds, viz.: i. without change; 2. by inter- nal change ; 3. by Suffixes; 4. by Prefixes. Note. — All tr.immatical teToiinations (inflexions) are really suffixes, but these are not considered under the jiresent head. 308. A. WITHOUT CHANGE. Verbs are derived from substantives, adjectives, adverbs, etc., by the simple addition of the endings of conjugation, as: '.'Ivbcit, labour; nr= lieitH'li, to labour (sH'n^*, grass ; iivai=on, to graze tvorfcu, dry ; tvorflt-en, to dry — lui()CV, near (compar. 1 ; niil)Cni, to approach — geilCtl, against; brgefln=eu, to meet. Note. — In many of these derivatives, and in most of those from adjectives, the vowel has Umlaut, as: 'I'fluiv. iifliiii,=en, plough — .CMimmfv ; l)nmmor:it, hammer — ftarf, strong; ftiirtscii, strengthen — tot, dead; totscn, kill — offen, open; offn=ou, open — empor, up; empjrjcit, excite. 309. B. BY INTERNAL CHANGE. Derivative Verbs. — Verbs are derived from other Verbs : {a) ]5y change (generally Umlaut) of the root or Stem Vowel, forming causative verbs, which are always transitive and weak, as : foticu, fall ; fatlon, fell {cause to fall) — tvillfcu, drhik; tviinfcn, make to drink (drench) -- jil^eu, sit; \t\^m, set — Uegcn, lie; legen, lay — fot)ren, fare, proceed ; fiU)ren, lead, cause to proceed. 364 \ c d c f( h Saxa] DERIVATION BV SUFFIXES. 365 {d) By umge of consonant, with 1 without vowel-change, as : ftc^cit stand ; ft II, .ause to stan, set pL.r ight ~ bicgnt, bend ; tmiVit' bow ^ ucijcil, iroline; nirft:i, n. //,- /,e„J) - u,arf,e„, a^akc ; hJerfi I, n' )use {cause to awal< ). Note. -Many weak verbs and nearly all ./r^«^ verbs are /W«,/^V^; but ^r/W/,., verbs are generally ^ ^vj/l. 810. Deri\jtive ubstantives. — These are derived from Ve-bs by internal vowel-change without suffix, and are mostly masculine, as • bmboh, bind; Syuiib, bond, volume; 5l^uiib, union - 'iilu'll, sit; Z,\\i stake (thing set or laid down), etc. - jidjcn, draw; Sup, Irait etc — trcten, tread; Zx'xW, step. Note. -Observe that in both the Vu. nd Substantives above occasional conso. nant changes also occur. C. BY SUFFIXES. 311. Verb Suffixes. 1. =Clll forms derivatives from other verbs, as well as from subsfan- tives and adjectives, usuallywUh Umiaut, implying diminuti..n or con- tempt, as: liid) oil, laugh; Idd) cln, smile — itlillft, art; fuilft clll, affect (artfully) — froiiiin, pious; |roiiunc(u, affect piety. 2. =rrn from verbs, substantives and adjectives (sometimes with Um- laut), as: folnon, follow; folii = crn, infer — id)laf, sleep; fd)lafH'rn, feel sleepy — arg, bad ; ovivcrii, vex. _ 3- =icrci1, mostly from foreign stems, without Umlaut, as : mnrfd)= icrcn, march - rcflicren, reign - imO=.frcn, study. Also from ( ierman root.s, by analogy, as: bllri)ftali=icicn, spell. 312. Substantive Suffixes. »• 't (--ft, ft), -b, =tlC (usually feminine) from verbs, usually with vowel- change, as : l)C;incit, bendjilViri, J bay (bight) - falH' CU, drive ; rval)r t drive - tni(] nt, wear; Xx>rf}ab=en (masc), injury. 8. tX, often with Umlaut, indicating the actor, chiefly from verbs, but also from substantives, as: luicfeil, bake ; ii3acf Ci, bak-er iiuiu'ii. paint; !J}ia(=cr, paint-er — tiUMCil, dance; Jiiuj^CV, danc-er -- (Mavtcii, garden; @artll=cr, garden-er - @d)af, sheep; ®d[)ttf=cr, shepherd. Note. — Some derivatives from substantives insert 11, as: ^yilbsitscv, sculptor (from 93tlb) — 01bcf=lt=cr, bell-ringer (from (yiocfc) — ;1tcb«ii3, as: eii6=i(jsfeit, sweetness — 3tanbt)aft»t(js(eit, steadfastness — $reu# lofsig>teit, unfaithfulness. 313] DERIVATION BY SUFFIXES. 367 II. .in (compare §89, 2, Note) forms feminine appellatives from mas- culine substantives, usually with Umlaut (always so from monosylla- bles), as: ®raf, count; ©riifin, countess — ^iciiitb, friend; ^reiinb-in, (female) friend — @iivtncr, gardener ; @drtner=iti, gardener's wife. »2. ^liltfl forms masculine diminutives (sometimes with Umlaut) from verbs, substantives an^l adjectives, as: Iel)reh, teach; l'c()r=lin0, appren- tice — gtud}t, flight; ^;ud)t=|lnfl, fugitive — fvcmb, strange; (^rembaiiig, stranger — jiinfl, young; 3ui>g=Iin0, youth. 13. »ni6 (Engl, -ness) forms ab' tracts from verbs; also from a few adjectives, usually with Umlaut, as: licgiabcn, bury; 33egvoli=ni'^, funeral — ^inbern, hinder; Apinber=nig, obstacle — riefanficn, captive; @efong» nig, prison — ftufter, dark; |5i"ftei"=nig, darkness. 14. 'fill, »fri form abstracts, (generally neuter) from verbs, and also from a few substantives and adjective, as: fcl)iffen, send; @d)icf=fjil, fate - raten, guess ; 9iot=fcI, riddle — S}Ml)(, trouble ; 2)?u()=fttl, fatigue — triilie, sad ; $!riib ftti, tribulation. 15. =fd)Oft (Engl. -ship, -scape) forms femi^^ine abstracts from verbs and adjectives, as: 2Bailber=fd)aft, wandering — {sit'iii'-b=fd)Oft, friend- ship — ?anb=f(l)aft, land-scape - ©cincin f(^nft, community (Stgcn= fj^oft, peculiarity ; also some collectives, as: ^I'ieftcr frfjoft, priesthood; @efeU=fd)att society. 16. 4um (Engl, dom) forms (generally neuter) abstracts from verbs, substantives and adjectives, as : 2Bad)>?tlint, growth - (Stgen-lum, pro- perty — 9JeicI)-tum (masc), wealth — itiiutg tum, royalty (king-dom). 17. -Ung (= Engl, -ing in verbal nouns) forms a large number of feminine abstracts, chiefly from verbs, as : ^cU'{)r=uii9, instruction — 3Scr» geb^'Ung, forgiveness. 18. The suffijces =^enlJ, i\], 4d)t, ^ing are only found after stems which no longer have an independent existence, as : 2lb=cnft, S)lt^=cnl), (Sff=|g, m-'i%, iQaUm (hawk). 313. Adjective Suffixes. 1. =bflt (connected with bdl'Clt, 'bear') from verbs (= Engl. -able) and substantives, also (rarely) from adjectives, as : rtVllflt.', eat-able — fnicf)t« bar, fruitful — furd)t=6av, frightful — 0ffeu=bar, evident. 2. 'tn, 'ftn form adjectives denoting material or kind from substantives, as : golb=en, golden — b(ci cm, leaden — ftlbev=n, silver — I)i)lg^ern, wooden. Note. -^(Sifern, 'iron,' from Sifen, is anomalous, 368 LESSON LI. 313- 3. 'I^aft (connected with f}abcu, 'have') forms adjectives, denoting the quality of the primitive, chiefly from substantives (also from a few verbs and adjectives), as: fiinb ()oft, sinful — tiigenbjjoft, virtuo"s — nJO^n= l^oft resident — bOy? Ijnft, malicious — lual)r l^aft, true. NjTE. — The sufRx sljjis often added to adjectives in sljoft, as: njQ^v^aftsig (compare also § 312, 10, Note, above). 4- -tl^t sometiriics replaces i^ (see below) after names of materials, as born i(f)t thorny — ftcin id)!, stony; also m tor-t^t, foolish. 5. 4^ (— Engl, -y, as in might-y, etc.) forms a very numerous class of adjectives, usually with Umlaut, from verbs, substantives and particles, and from other adjectives (including the possessive pronouns, sec §119, 6-), as: na(l)flic[i=in, yielding — niinft=i(^, favourable -— ni6d)t=r, might-y - fd)n(b-ij|, guilt-y — fliit ig, kind — Doll ifl, complete — i)eut=ifl, of to-day — Dor=|0, former. Note.— For sifl before =ffit, see § 312, 10, Note ; for ;«() after sl)Hft, see 3, above. 6. =ifd) (= Engl. -ish) forms adjectives: {a) From proper names, denoting or/gin, as: lutljerMfl^, Lutlieran — piruH if(^, Prussian. (^) From substantives, as: bieb=jfd), thiev-ish — t)ini.Tll=if(^, heav- enly; sometimes also with depreciatory sense, as in English, e. g. : fiiib ifrf), child-ish — Juoib iid), woman-ish (compare finb> Ii(^, child-like — unib lirf), woman-ly\ (f) From foreign words (=: Lat. - icus ; Engl, -ic, -ical), as : l)iftov« tfd), histor-ical - log^jfdj, log-ical. 7. Aci forms variative numerals; see § 182, (>). 8. lid) (Engl, -like, lyi forms numerous adjectives from verbs (with active or passive sense), substantives (usually with Umlaut) and other adjectives (generally with diminutive meaning, like Eng. -ish), as: crfreu- liaSi, delightful — jdliib lid), injurious — bciirdf Ud), intelligible — glaitb 11^, credible — t)evad)t'l!^, contemptible — jd()r lid), year ly — in!*tin4id), man-ly - liatiir !i1), natural — rijt lid), redd-ish -- ((ing-Iid), long-ish. 9- 'fam (Engl, -some) from verbs and substantives (also from a few adjectives), as: aiifnicif fnm, attentive - beil^om, whole-some --^ furd)t» jam, timid — ein=fom, lone-some. /). BY PREFIXES. 314. Verb Prefixes. The Verb Prefixes coming under the head of derivation are those which are always inseparable, viz: 6?-, C!lt= or cm^-, cr , 0C^ mift', tier , jeT=. Their various meanings are given below. 314] DERIVATION BY PREFIXES. 369 1. ic» (connected with the prep, bet) is intensive, and (a) forms transitive verbs from intransitive (its most frequent use), as : fnlteu, fall ; Oc-faltcn, be-fall — (|c()cn, go ; br=3ci)cu, commit (a crime, etc.) — {(ngcil, mourn; De^flaflCU, mourn for; {b) it forms verbs from substantives and adjectives, with the mean- ing 'provide with,' ' make,' as : bc=freuut)Cll, be-friend — 6c=ftdr= fcii, make strong, strengthen. 2. ent'- (cmji" before an f, akin to o?lt-, as in nnttnortm) corresponds frequently to the (Latin) prefixes dis-, de- in English words and denotes (a) 'in return,' as: cm|l=fangcn, receive; cm|I-fcl)[cn, recommend;^ {b) 'contrary,' 'against,' 'away from,' having privative force, from verbs, substantives and adjectives, as: cn^btubcil, relieve — cnt-bccfcii, dis-cover cilt Gcl)Cit, cilt (aufcu, get away, escape; {c) transition, origin, as: cnt4d)tafcil, fall asleep — ent=ftel)CU, arise, originate. 3. er* (Engl, a-, as in a-rouse, a-rise, etc.) denotes : (a) 'out from,' 'upwards,' as: er4)cbcn, raise— cr=mecfcn, awaken; (' Compounds are those composed of stem + substantives, either with the stem-suffix «e, as: Sogeroerf ; or without suffix, .is: ^lanbsrocit, trade — ^aflbs l^orn, hunting-horn. 2. Secondary Compounds are made up with a Genitive case, Singular or Plural ; if sin- gular, the first component takes sS after sfrotig masculines and neuters, and -AW after weak substantives, whether sing, or plur, ; thus: ©oniuaflsSsfleib, Sunday- dress — 'j^rcub 5 eit* gefc^rei, cry of joy — - ffiortevsbud}, dictionary. 3. The suffix s8 is also added Xo feminines in A, «^elt, sfett, »|lf)nff, »llitp, and the foreign endings 4on, tot, as: ®eburt=e=tag, birthday — ;Vrnl)cii=8-Hel)e, love of liberty — aJia^igfeitsgstJereiit, temperance society — SHeUfliuiis8s!vieg, religious war — Unioer* fitOtsSsgebciube, University building. 2. Qualifying Adjective -f- Substantive, as : (5be(=ftrin, precious stone, jewel — 3uugfrau, virgin — J^od)ieit, wedding (high time) - SBoU=monb, full-moon. Note. — In a few spurious compounds of this kind, the adjective is declined, as: ein ^oficr^pricfter, high priest; ber §ol)eprieftcr — *^ie £aiige»»)eilc, tedium, ennui; Gen. bet gangeutDeile. 3. Adverb or Preposition •\- Substantive, usually from compound verbs, but not always, as: Aporflinft, origin— Sol)l tl)at, benefit — S(n» gal)l, number — iBei=jpic{, example — §iiiter4ift, cunning — Uber=mad)t, superiority. 4. Verb-stem + Substantive, sometimes with connecting suffix »t, as: Sej=c^bnd), (Scf)reib=feber, ®iiig nocjel. 5. Other Compound Substantives. There is a special class of substantive compounds of a character different from those enumerated above, and of various composition, consisting of: I3'9^ Sai] COM POSH lUN OF SUbSTANTIVES. 373 Substan- first ele- ompound 'osition or elow, as : 'e-ball — ibcr-ftube, — Xaiii- itcher - last wind Urument) ?ork. lives, either le — JSOflbs ural ; if sin- it after weak - 'j^rcubsen* Itp, and the e of liberty ■ — Unioer» 5US stone, 5otl=monb, jclined, as; ;nnui; Gen. :ompound fit — S(n» faer=mad)t, suffix -'t, \ class of lumeratetf (a) A limiting word (not asubst.) -f Substantive, as j ©(Inbe^Iu^, blind man's-buff — tal)l=fopf, bald-head — ©rog.maul, boaster — i'ang^beiii, long-legged person — ®d)rei.f|al«, bawler — JBIcr. erf, square. (b) Limiting word -f Adjective, as : bcr SSlmmtx\ai\, the glutton — bnS 3mmcv gviiii, the evergreen. NoTB. — These compounds are masculine when referring to persons, otherwise neuter. The same rule holds good for the compounds under {c), below. (c) Verb -f- Object, limiting word or phrase, as: ftcr S^auge* nirf)t^, the good-for-nothing — ftcr ®priug4u8=felb, the romp — ter ©toreiufrieb, the kill-joy - bal ®teU=bid)=ein, the rendez- vous. 320. Composition of Adjectives. Compound Adjectives consist of an Adjective preceded by a limiting word, viz. : 1. Adjective -f- Adjective, as : taiib=jltumm, deaf-mute — buutel^blau, dark-blue — lot bad:ig, red-cheeked. 2. Substantive -j- Adjective : (fl) with connecting inflexional suffix (compare § 319, i, Note 2, above), as: (icbcK-fianf, love-sick — gebaufcn=t)oU, pensive-- l)offnung8=(o?, hopeless; {b) without suffix, as : Ucbe=t)cU, affectionate— ^ulb-reirf), gracious — frtMibo=(cer, j-oyless. Notes. — I. The Adjectives Ui, reirlft, ttoK are of such constant occurrence as to have almost acquired the character of suffixes. 2. In soniu of these compounds, the substantive expresses comparison, or has intensive force, as : frcibemeig, white as chalk — f eberleidjt, light as a feather — felfenfeft, firm as ^ rock. 3. Verb -f Adjective, as : n)i§=bcgierig, eager for knowledge — merf- Univbig, remarkable (noteworthy). Note. — In Compound Adjectives like bnnfc»l8*H)ert, 'welcome ' (' thankworthy'), the first element is the infinitive used as a Substantive. 4. Adverb or Preposition -\- Adjective, as : l)orf)=geboren, high-born — tDDf)l=fei(, cheap — initei-=tl)nn, subject — uber*!lug, overwise. 321. Composition of Adverbs. Adverbs are compounded of various parts of speech : I. With Nouns {mostly in the Genitive) affixed to other parts of speech, as: gall; glcic^-faUg, likewise; icben=fon?, in any case — 374 LESSON LII. t5§3ai- 9)?nft(r) : cinlflpr^mnften, in some degree — '3fitc : rtnerfeitJ . . . anbtcr^ Uiiif^ on the one hand ... on the other hand — Xeil : mcil'tcii^tfilfi/ chiefly; mcineS.tcilP, on my part — i^rfl : gcrabe^^ttJCfl^, straightway; ffliieS. tOe9d,bynomeans — Scilc: cinft-toeilcn, niitt(cr=ttjcile,meariwhile, mean- time — Sotje: girufli(f)cr.mcifc, fortunately; fi-euii=ttJfiif, crosswise; t!)Ovid)ter»HJCtfc, foolishly. Note. — The wasc. and «f«/?r genitive-inflection »8, from Us frequent nse in adverTjial genitives, has become an advjrbial suffix, and is sometimes attacl.ed to ^;«. substs., as: bte »Jiad)t, aiiv. nadfti, by night. So also has the suffix >ttiartd, as; t)immeI«Uijrt8, heavenward — norb«lDartd, northward. 2. With Prepositions (or original Adverbs) prefixed or suffixed to other parts of speech, as: ju n(cirf), at the same time — flcrabc.^U, straight on - ouf'luartS, upward; bov.vnttf, uphill - HlttC^meg^?, on the way; beig'Unter, downhill — ^cutjU^tanc, nowadays - ia()rc=lon0, for years. 3. With Pronouns (or Stems originally Pronominal) compounded with each other, as: njo()iu? whither? ba^in, bortljiii, thither — iuo^er? whence? ba()er, bort^iu, thencp, etc. For Numeral Adverbs, see § 182. LESSON LII. HISTORICAL SKETCH. - GRIMM'S LAW. - UMLAU"^, etc. 822. Relation between German and English. 1. A comparison of German words and forms with their English equi- valents will serve to show that a very large number of both words and grammatical forms are common to both languages. Though rarely ab- solutely identical in form, the resemblances are both so close and so numerous that they cannot be the result of mere borrowing on the part of either language from the other, but must imply relationship, or, in other words, a descent /ro7n a common source, a common origin. English and German are therefore Modern dialects of one and the same original language. 2. This original language is no longer extant, either a: a spoken or as a written language. There are, however, ether languages — some still spoken, some known to vs only as written — which were once al»7 LSSaai- 323! RELATION BETWEEN ENGLISH AND GERMAN. '♦7$ . . aiibtcr- J, chiefly; f; ?flitc8« ile, mean- rosswise; ill adverbial substs., as: imeUUijrtd, uffixed to I, straight the way; ■ years. npounded , etc. I. ;]ish equi- ords and arely ab- >e and so le part of in other 5 of one ken or as some still )nce al*^ modern Hindustani, etc. Persian, etc. modern: the Romance Ian- (ii.iljdsu' this common anrcutor, or @ntnMprarf)f, a^ German philolo. pists c'.ll it. This group or sith-famiiy of languages is called the Ger- MANIC ur Teutonic, the common source or (iJrl^l^i^)lad)e of which was itself a dialect of a larger family, all of whose members were dialects of, and derived from, one common primitive source (UnpVQd)O). This family is called the Indo-Ger.manic, Indo-European or Aryan family, and includes most European and several Asiatic languages. 3. The divisions oi this great family, with the chief representatives, ancient (written) and modern (spoken), of each, are as follows, beginning from the East : {a) Indic — ancient: .Sanskrit, etc. {b) Persic— •' Zend, etc.; {c) Greek — ancient a.nd modern. (d) Italic ~ ancient : Latin, etc. guages (Italian, French, Spanish, etc.). (e) LrrHUANic. (/) Slavonic — Russian, Polish, Bohemian, etc. (g) Germanic — see below. (/i) Ckltic— Irish, (Jaelic, Welsh," etc. 323. The Germanic Languages. The Germanic or Teutonic group 'of languages may be classified as follows : 1. Gothic or East Germanic, once spoken by the Goths of Mcesia, on the Danube, represented only by a translation of portions of the Bible, made by Ulfilas, Bishop of the Goths, in the 4th century, a. d. 2. Scandinavian or North Gilrmanic— ancient: Old Norse; modern: Icelandic, Danish (Xorwegian), Swedish. 3. Low German or West Germanic — ancient: Frisian, Low Saxon, Low Frankish; Old English (Anglo-Saxon), Middle English; modern: Dutch, English. Note. — The modern representatives of the other Low Gennan languages are mere dialects - known as Plattdeutsch (i. e., Flat German), the present (High) German literary language having displaced them. 4. High German or South Germanic, including the (no longer spoken) Old and Midd'e High German, and the GERMAN, as spoken and written at the present day. The following diagram will serve further to illustrate the relationships of the German language : j;5 LESSON LII. [§§323^ H i. •a h u O •a c Ml c S X e c s w S O h _ h 0< c u ■ 8 -I •^ *« S w --2 u I P w - Q o c X . 5 < o - M o Z X < Q o w 3 -O O 3 u C *■ ^ o J3 W 2 ^ -s c s c to E c. O c [§§323- I I •8 3^4] 1 f 1 M u £ ♦«» § 'S fl V i5 •a Ji T3 § 1 ■2 J? •s •3 .1- u u 4-* N «irf c en *-• .5 Q c c "i (fi g bo c r3 3 ,■11 ^ M) O B c OJ nj X ■l-i M »< V Ji W s K IS •a s E e V .124. HISTORY OF HIGH GER^'^N. History of High German. 377 The High German (including the Middle German) branch of the Germanic subfamily has passed thi^ough three stages as follows: I. Old High German, to the 12th century. Its literature is chiefly ecclesiastical — its principal authors being monks, such as Otfrid, the Frank, author of a rhyming harmony of the G()s|)els, and Notker, of St. Gallen in Switzerland. Each author wrote in his own dialect. NoTK.-The chief characteristic of this Old Hi^vh German, which ciistinRnishes it from the subst-quent '.tage.s, is the compa.ativc fuliu-ss and distinctivc-n.-ss of its Kranimatica) forms. Thus '^o,irit, 3blii,rii, Otntfii (d.-t. pi) =^ O. H. G. t.-^-um, sun-uir, gtb-6m re- sprctivfly : ai'd the pres. indie, of nt- an (iii'li!>!.ii) is as foll.ws : nim-u, nim-is, iiim-it, neman)-(es), nem-at, nein-ant. It also has a fifin case (the I intrumental). 2. Middle High German a. n. ih)o-isoo'. Literature during this period passed from the hands of the clergy into *ho^toi {he nobles; hence its courtly character. The branches of poetic composition therein re|)resented were F.p.c and Lyric I'oetry, tlie former conjprising not only the great National Epics of the ' Nihclnngcnlicd' and Gudrun,' but also the Courtly or Art Epics of Chivalry, such as Wolfram von Eschenbach's 'Parcival' and Gnttfried von Straszburg's ' Tri.stan und Isolde'; the latter comprising the i)r eductions of the ' Minnesanger,' of whoin the greatest wns Walther von dcr Vogelweide. The Dia/cct of Snahia (which included Maden, Wiirtemberg and parts of Bavaria) became the leading literary language. Note. - Middle is distingui.shed from Old High German chiefly oy the loss of the full vowels of ii.fi, ctional syllables, vvhidi were for the most part changed into f. Thus the (). H. G. datives pi. laj,-um, seb-om are in Mid. H. G. t.ig-en/ geb-en ; and the pres. indie, of nemen is: nii.i-e, nim-esl, nim-et, ncm-en, nem-et, nem-ent It is further distinguished from O. H. G. by the sj.read of the Umlaut (see § 326, below), which m the former is confined to th- vowel a, to the vowels o and u also ; and from both 0. H.G. and Modern German by the large number of its diphthongal sounds (.li, ei, o.-, 01, an, ou, on, eu, ia, ie, io, i„ ; ua. iie, iie, no), the greater number of which are unknowti in both the preceding and the hter stage of the language. 3. Newer Modern High German, from 1500 to the present day, forming, since before the beginnmg of the i6th century, the standard /.' ary lan^^nagc of all German-speaking people. Its basis is Doctor Martin Luther's translation of the Bible (1J22— 34), in which he adopted the „.fan>,(eiiprad)r" or official court language particularly of the Duchy of Saxony, as being, in his own words, „Dic gcmcine Dcutfl^e 2|iro^e, tt)cld)er nadifolgcu nUe Jviirften unb ^bnigc in gain ©euttdj. lanb." ' 378 LESSON LI I. t§§3«4- Note. —The chief characteristic which disfinpuishes Modern (New) High German from Middle Higli German is the lengthening v.Ll long in ^Tidern G.rnian, but short in Middle High German. To tliis may be add;d .'ii'i use of the letter () lo mark a preced- ing long vowel, as in neftmen, M. H. G. nemen (wirh short e); thi.- rliarge of f into frf) be- fore 1, n, as : 2it)(ai, Srfincc, M. H. G. slSf, sne; and that of the long vowels i, fi, into the diphthonj.';s fi, tit respectively, .- : jncin, brill, bvri, ®cib, TOailS, .&0U8, ^OUt, lotlt, M, H. G. min, din, drl, wib, mfls. hfis, hut, hit. ;{25. (tkimm's Law oi l*autt>cr'd)icbunfl. I The law of the progression or shifting of mutes, Genu. \iauU DCr(d).cbuilfl, also called Grimm's Law after its chief ciiscoverei, Jakob Grimm, the illustrious grammarian, is one of the most striking features of the Germanic. languages. 2. The Mutes are divided into three classes, according to the organ with which tlicy are: uttered, viz. : LiN(;i;.\i.s (or Dkntai.s; : t, th, d; l.AniAi.srp, ph (f), b; and Palatals (or Gutturai.si: k (c), ch [h), g. Kach of these classes contains a ft'niiis ^ov sitrd), an aspirate or spirant, and a tucdia (or sonant), thus : Tenuf.s. A SIM KATES or Spirants. th ph, f kh. ch 'h) Mkdiak. d b g LiNGUALS: t Labials: p P'lI.ATAI.S: k, c 3. In the majority ol the Germanic languages — (iothic, Scandinavian, Low German (including therefore I'.NGLlSHj - as compared with the other members of the Indo-Gennanic family (Greek, Latin, etc. ; see § 322, 3, above), each of these mutes has undergone one "shifting, '' or been pushed forward one stage in its own class, the tenues having been changed hito aspirates (or more strictiv sf iraiifs), the asjnrates into mediae, and the media! into tenues. In Higli German alone they have undergone a second "shifting" in the same direction. Note. — The accompanying diagr.im will serve further to illustrate J^vi) this 1 rocess, showing how the mutes observe the following rotation >/^^ from primitive Indii-Gormanic through general Germanic (including / English) to High (Wrman. vi/.. : 'I'tnuis, Aspiratf, Mtdi.i ; Aspirate,^ Media, Tennis; Media, Tunuis. Aspirate. v^f, 3. Taking Latin or Greek as representing the first or primitive Indo-Ciermanic stage, and English as repre- senting the second, or general (Jcrmanic stage (the first shifting), the following scheme will show the theordical working of this law ; 325] grimm's law of iiautbcrfcf;iebuiuj. 379 !?fQ Latin, Greek, etc. : = English, etc. : := (High) German LiNGUALS. t, th, d th, d, t d, t, th Labials. P, ph, b P ph ph, b, b, p, Palatals. k, kh, g kh, g, k g. k, kh 5- The operation of the law is, however, subject to the following general exceptions : ^ (a) p and k were changed in the second shifting, noc into aspirates proper, but into the s/mnt/s f and h (= j^i respectively, and these s])irants were n(jt. subjected to any further change. (d) The lingual aspirate is represented in High German by j, |l, ff, or §. {c) The second shifting of media to tenuis took place in High Ger- man in the /in_s;-ua/ scries only, except in one dialect (the Ale- mannian). {(i) The aspirate lor spirant) rf) is never found in Modern German at the beginning of a word. 6. Hence the modified scheme below will represent approximately the actual working of the law : LiNGUALS. Labials. Palatals. Latin, Greek, etc. : t, th, d p, ph (f), b k, kh (h), g = English, etc.: th, d, t f, b, p h, g, k = (High) German : d, t, z, s, ss, sz f, b, f h(d)) g, k (rf)) Note. - Latin has c, f, and h for k, ph and kh respectively ; and the (1) at the bottom of the last column does not occur at the beginning of words ; see 5, {fi), above. EXAMPLES OF t'lUilocrfiOicbuiig. (Note. — Examples from Lat. unless otherwise specified.) 1. LlNciAi.s: (r/) t th ) kh (Lat.h) — g-g, as: Ilostis — guest — Okft; hortus — garden — ©ar ten; (r) 38o LESSON Lll. L§33« g__lj(c)_(f) (k if initial) as; gelidus — Cold — fatt; genu — knee iinic; jugum — yoke — 3od); frangro - break — brcd)en. Note. — A further class of exceptions is caused by the fact that the mutes are some- times protected from change by an adjacent consonant, as: wander — roanPcrii; s.tone — eicin ; haste — A>nft ; night — 9Inftt ; craft — Rvaft. There are also other deviations from the strict rule too numerous to be mentioned here. 326. Umlaut. 1. Umlaut is the modification of an accented a^ 0, U, OU into it (e), b, iir iiu respectively, and is caused by the influence of an i or j| in the following syllable. Remarks.— i. The vowels a, 0, ir, with the diphthong nil, are guttural or "back" vowels, and approach the sound of the following i, which is a palatal or " front" vowel. 2. This i or j appears in Old High German, but has disappeared — with some exception's, as under (vnu()t, fruit G5ttii§, goose ©ruft, grave ^anb, hand $aut, skin filuft, cleft lli'nft, strength ilu(), cow fltiitft, art £ou§, louse fiuft, air £uft, desire 3)Jarf)t, power Wacjb, maid-servant i!)Jau§, mouse Also those ending in -iiio and -in( SKadjt, night 9lal)t, seam 9lot, need aiufi, nut Snu, sow Sd)nur, string Stabt, town ffianb, wall 2Burft, sausage 3iinft, guild ^ufainmeiifunft, meeting D. Irregular Foreign Substantives. (Less. VII, §22, 6.) 1. 2)er Kaplan, chaplain, pi. Ataplaiic. 2. The following foreign substs, with accent on last syll. follow the 5i«nb Model : ber iWonoloci', soliloquy; bcv 3)inloii', dialogue; also those in -or accented, as: ber ^umov', humour; ber I'Jaior', major. 3. The following are mixed (Or)r Model); Oer 3l(Itiia'tor, alligator; ber 2)Smon, demon; ber ,Slon'|uI, consul ; bao ctercoffop', stereoscope; ba§ 2:cleifop', telescope; also those from the Lat. in -OX unaccented, as: ber Jottor, ber ^i'rofeffor. 4. The following are weak or mixed (Olir Model): bcv 9lbamaitt', adamant; ber T)ias tnant' (or 2)emant), diamond; ber SDlaiinet'', magnet. E. Neuter Monosylla i?LKs OF ^uiil) Model. (Less. VIL§22, 5.) SBeet, flower-bed 53cil, hatchet SBcin, leg SBier, beer S8(ed), tin-plate SBIei, lead 93oot,' boat SBvot, bread 2)infl,2 thing 6rj, ore geU, hide ^eft, festival ijett, fat ^tofi.i i-aft Wift, poison OUcio, rut .yeft, handle .'Oorn,2 horn Jod). yoke flnie, knee ilreu^, cross 8atib,2 land Sid)t,= light 8oo9, lot aOiia(a)l, mole, mark; time 3)lo6, measure Wo or. moor a)loO'5, moss Vwli, net ti, oil ^^Jferb, horse *>PfuiiD, pound ^Ult, desk Slec^t, right SHef), roc-deer 9tcic(), enii ire 9iiff, reef 9I06, horse Salj, salt Sdiaf, -heop ©d'iff ship Scfjilf, nish Sd^ot, shot Sditpciii, pig 3c i(, rope Sieb, sieve Spiel, {,ame Stiicf, piece 2:au, cable Teil, share 3i>eliv, web- 21'eif, work fflort,2 word 3elt, tent 3eug, stuff ^iel, goal APPENDICES. 383 Also eight in -r : ■'Qaat, hair $eer, army 3a^r, year iWeer, sea * Also with Umlaut. ^aar, pair tier, animal 9101)1-, reed J^or, gate " Sdi; also A])|>. (j.* /'. Weak Masculines not knding in -c. (Less. XIV, § 57, 2.) eat bear Oecf, fop .Unffa, Caffir Sate.-, Bavarian ©efeU, fellow .jj,ci.ic(,, man «urnar' Bulgarian Wraf, count Woln; Moor «ui-[ct), lad i^a.ieftolj, old bachelor -JJarv, fool J^vtft, Christian ^elb, hero ^Jicvv, nerve gtnf, finch ^ei-r, master Qdyi, ox (Jiil-ft, prince $irt, herdsman i>ommei-, Pomeranian ^ritia, prince Spn^, sparrow -2teiiimc(,i, stono- lOov, fool [mason Hiuiar, Hungarian A'oifatji-, ancestor 6'. Substantives of Mixed Declension. (Less. XV, §§ 61 6,?.) (a) 9Jomc Model (Muse). ©aHe(n), beam (sUnnri.- fniti, -^ .. . • „, . , , . wumi, bLeei aji i", will ©ebante, thought Also one neut. : ftn.; wv\, ( ;. bco .Oericiio. .. Masculines: ^'^ *^^"*^ '^ ^°^^^- ^nuer peasa,,t i>oi(.cer, laurel nHUitoffd, slipper *3tiefel boot 2. Neuters: 9htflc, .ye Unbe, end • Also after ailaler Model. I. Masculines! 9tt)ti, ancestor >VOVft, forest 0au,' district »ufar,2 hussar /■ Neuters: (c) Cljr Model. ma^t, mast ijifau,' p.iar'. I; Sd)nterj, pau; See, lake S3ett, bed «pi.rn, spur (also Sporeii) otaat, state Strati, beam' i^t'Mh, shirt . @trau6,3 ostrich Uittertimii,-'snl)JLct 3ii.'vat, ornament 3* "9, interest Of)r, ear ' Also after Cvimb Mudci. » Al,,o alter Slnabe Model. To these may be added the foreign substantives in App. D. . See .,!..., App. G m ■ m 1 384 APPENDICES. baSSBanb: bie syanf : ba3 Dina : ber !Corn : ba« «eftc(;t : ba<5 ^oni : ber Sabett: ba^ Snnb: bas i;id)t : bcr "Mann : bcr Dfonb : ber Crt : bie Sail : bev etrnug : iaa Suc^ : boo sajort : ber3oa: * For instance ■ dered); but bie j the Netherlands. - For instance but an alien Crten Double Plurals with dikferent meanings. (Less. XV, § 64.) '^onber, ribbons iflnnfe, benches 3)insie, things Dome or Jbnirr, thorns _ (MefiiOter, faces Corner, horns lidben, shops Snnbfi', sejiarate countries ^ fiirfne, candles Wdniier, men Woute, satellites Ovter, (single) places* Sour, sows Stioiific or Straugeii, os. triches 2;iii%r, cloths aBdrter, single words 3olle, inches SDonbt, ties 5, praise Dei 111 01 b, murder ber ;)!i-,t, counsel, advice Plural. btc Saiiten bie iiauc) bie '-Ikflrelningcn btc "-lU'triiiiereien bie i^iinbnifje bie 3;air{)ac]nn(ien bie (Srbfdinften bie (vricbcKouertrcSiie bie ©eamlttljcitinteiteir bie ftitp.ftbejcugiingen bie .Hiiinnicrnifje bie Vobivriiifte bie SDJorbtl&uten bie Siatfc^lagc APPENDICES. 38s Singular. (ber 5Rat, cou.icillor ber SWoui), robbery I'd- 3ci]Cll, blessing ber Stl'Cit, quarrel, dispute ber J'ob, death, decease bag UnjUict, misfortune ber S8erbru6, vexation ber3an'/ quarrel Plural. bfe SJiate) bic aiidubcrcien bie 3ci]ituniien bie Strcitiijteiten bic JobcSfciUe bie UiiiililcfcfaUe bic 33crbric6lic[}fciten bic 3cinfcrcien /. Exceptions to the Rules on Gender. (Less. XVII, XVIII, §§ So, 89, 90.) 80. I. {a) Fern.: Cic SDIannSpcrfoit, male-person. Ncut : all diminutives in -(^eit and -Icill. 2. (fi) Neut.: bao aSeib, woman; ba3 *i)ieii)ct), wench; 'a^x'i ';'fraueiijimmer, woman; and all diminutives in -djni and -(fill. {b) Trees, etc. ; ber 2(f)oni, maple ber 9(pfel, apple baS ©pl)cii, ivy baS ©eratiiiiiii, geranium ber §afer, oats ber §nnf, hem j ber illee, clover ber iloljl, cabbage ber J^ol)lrabi, Brussels-spouts baj JJoiii, grain ber ilciud), L'ck ber SorOecr, laurel ber a)(aiS, maize bO'j 'JJiood, moss ber Stoggcn, rye ber Spnrijet, asparagus ber Spiiiat, spinach ber 3:abat, tobacco ber iffieijen, wheat Also Compounds, as: ber Sc^uiarjOont, blackthorn; baO Weifeblatt. honey-suckle; ba3 *-8ergif;nuMniiicf)t, forget-me-not; baci Jaufenbfcljbn, daisy; and diminutives, as: basi 93ei(c()en, violet. 3. (a) Metals — i^/zjc. ; ber MoOalt, cobalt; ber Stahf, steel; ber Sombacf,' pinch- beck; ber -iiJiSmut, bismuth; ber 3iiif, zinc. /^^;«..- bie iUatiito, platina. ip) Countries, etc. — Musl. : ber ^eloponneS, Peloponnesus; ber .'onai], the Hague; Fern. : bic .Uvim, Crimea; bie Senante, the and those in -ei, -ou, -]. also those in -^an, as: Ddu'gau. Levant; bie Ufraiiie, the Ukraine 89. I. (a) Neut. : ba§ ^effing, brass. (fi) Feminines in -el : Slc^fet, shoulder Stmpct, lamp Slmjel, black-bird aingel, fish-hook SJibel, bible 93ucfel, boss (of a shield) 6l)inbei, cymbal Ssattel, date 5)eid)fel, carriage- pole Itiftel, thistle (Surge!, throat 2)rof)0(, thrush .giummel, humble- (Sirf)e(, acorn bee j^abcl, fable ^jnfel, island ^actei, torch ilaitjci, pulpit (■5:cffc(, fetter ^artoffol, potato ^t&cl, spelling-book iloppoi, leash ; brace i'appei, poplar (VOrinel, formula (of dogs) iparaOcl, parable Qabcl, fork .Hugel, bail ']}riiiU'l, primrose ©ciftel, scourge ^uppel, cupola SRafpef, rasp (Sonbcl, gondola a^Ianbel, ,- Imond SU'gcI, rule aJiaiigel, mangle aJHftct, mistletoe i)hi)d}el, sh 11 'JJobel, needle ■Sleffcl, nettle Drgel, organ iS6 APPENDICES. «unjel, wrinkla Semmel, roll of bread Safel, table 3il)aiS)tel, band-box Slc^el, itckle Srobbel, tassel H oc^aufel, shovel Sc^autel, swing ©d^tnbel, shingle ©d^ilffcl, dish In -n : Slber, vein 9(fter, aster Sliiflcr, oyster 93lattev, blister Gutter, butter (Jeber, cedar 3)auer, duration (Sifter, magpie 5afer, fibre J?eber, feather, pen (?eier, celebration 6ptnbel, spindle ©toffcl, step of a ladder Stopvel. stubble ijolter, rack ^alfter, halter ilammer, chamber belter, wine-press Irommel, drum SrUffel, truffle Wad)Ul, quail Smarter, torture Wauer, wall ajiutter, mother 5Jattcr, adder 9Jummev, number 99affel, wafHe fflinbel, swaddling cloth 'Burjel, root Srotebel, onion Steuer, tax Xo(i)tet, daughter 2;rauer, mourning SeSper, even- tide, vespers ffiimpcr, eyelash 3tffer, cipher '^itljn, guitar fliefer, pine illammer, cramp-iron Dper, opera fltnppcv, rattle Otter, otter fcauer, lurking-place 3Jiifter, elm iJelier, liver Scijcuer, barn aeier, lyre Sd^Icuber, sling Setter, ladder 3rf)ulter, shoulder Note. — The names of rivers ending in -er or -f I are also feminine, e. g. : bie Dber hie Sffiefer, bie TOofel. Neuters in -fl : «ilitbel, bundle 35iinfel, darkness (gjempel, example In -cii: atlmofeii, alms 33eclen, basin (Eifen, iron In -er : 2l6enteiier, adven- ture 9llter, age Saner, bird-cage ®iter, pus ©uter, udder ^fcuftcr, window i^euer, fire Steber, fever J^tiber, load Jutter, fodder fiapitel, chapter SKittel, means Drafel, oracle SHubel, hei-d, flock Stegel, seal Sd^armii^et, skirmish U&el, evil Segel, sail SUIIen, colt fiafen, sheet (bed- Jliffen, cushion clothes) 2cf)Cii, fief And all infinitives when used as substantives. ©Otter, grate, rail- ing ©itter, trellis Jlloftcr, cloister iJupfev, copper fiager, couch Softer, vice Seber, leather fiilber, carrion IDJeffer, knife atUeber, bodice aJhifter, pattern Dpfcr, sacrifice ^•Pfiafter, plastL-r 'IJolftcr, cu;hioii ^I'lilner, powder ^tsiifter, register, index SEBiefel, weasel aBappen, coat-of- arms 3ei«^eii, token Scepter or ^^Pter, sceptre Silbcr, silver Steuer, helm 2^{)eater, theatre llfcv, shore •SJoffer, water iiJetter, weather 'IBiiiiber, wonder Simmer, apartment Wolter, a grain mea- Siiiber, oar sure Sifiauer, shower Note. — 3)iiinftev, 'minster,' occurs both as masculine — itom its present form — and as neuter — Irom its derivation from the Latin monasterium. (c) Feminines : Stc^t, proscription SBont, bench itirunft, conflagration Surg, castle Strt, manner, kind Soi, bay Slut, brood ^aijrt, expedition 'Bofin, path ©rout, bride ^Piicht, bay i?fucf)t, flight APPENDICES. 1^7 Slur, field %\xi, flood j^orm, form iJracf)!, freight (5raii, woman iJrift, time gurc{)t, fear j^urt, ford @ei6, goat ©ic^t, gout ®ier, cagernc*? Glut, glow ©unft, favour ^oft, custod) J^aft, haste $iilb, grace ^x\t, guard 3ai]b, chase iloft, food Neuter \ : 9la§, carrion lUint, office iOnb, bath iOniib, ribbon Sett, bed 93ilb, picture SSlatt, leaf Slut, blood 93ucl), book S3imb, bundle S^rtd), roof 35itt0- tiling 3)orf, village Si, egg Si5, ice iJacf), compartment So{j, cask gelb, fiL-ld §leifcf), flesh ®arn, yam ©clb, money (3Uv1>, gl.iss ©leicv groove, rut ©lieb, limb (3) 2ier 9(t)enb, ev draft, strength flufi, cow JTur, (obsolete), elec- tion Caft, load Cift, cunning Tlatt, boundary iDJorfd), mars! , fen aWautf), excise a)JiW}, milk '}lal)t, seam 9JuII, zero ^;in, torment iPflicbt, duty iJJoft, post !}JrncOt, sjilendour Oiial, torment Shift, rest ©oat, seed Also those in Bdfam, shame 3d)av, host, troop Sc^au, show Srfieii, dread ®c()td)t, layer, stratum Scf)[ad^t, battle ScOIucfjt, ravine Sd)mad), disgrace Sd}fift, writing Sc^idb, guilt, dtbt Sd^iuulft, swelUng See, sea Sidjt, ^ight Sprcii, chaff Spuv, trace 3tntt, stead, place Stirii, brow Streit, litter [sion ®ud)t, longing, pas- App. C. 0lUcf, luck GJolb, gold 0)ra&, grave CJfao, i^rass PJut, projierty, estate ^CiV>t, resin ,yaii;-t, Iiend 4lClu6, house ^ei(, prosjierity ,'ijemb, shirt §erj, heart $cii, hay $irit, brain JOOtj, wood Aiif)n, fowl Jtalb, calf JliiiD, clii'i.l Jtiiui, c!ii:i .Uloi^, ganuent Alovii, corn Ali-aut, herb iJamiit, lamb iianb, land 2anb, foliage Also those in February ; DtttJ $'.'tfd;a ■ening ; bad ^u^enb 2eib, suffering iiieb, song fioO, praise £od;, hole fiofiii, wages Sot, plumb-line '^ial)l, meal, repast aJhilj, malt iUlnvt, marrow iUJaiil, mouth i^of beasts) TOe(;(, flour iDieitjc^, wench iDhiO, pap, jam •Jleft, nest Dbft, fruit Df)r, car ^ec^, pitch 'IJfaiib, pledge 3iab, wheel 9iei5, twig ;){teB, ream atinb, head of cattle 5d;cit, log of wood App. E. \t, seal. '.en. ^f)Oit, deed 'ZtiHv, door J:rad)t, load, cos- tume I^rtft, pasturage U^r, watch a3ad)t, guard aBaljI, choice 2Be£)r, defence aSelt, world SBuc^t, bulk, heavy weight SBulft, pad aSJut, rage 3o^l, number .yeit, time ,Sier, ornament 3uc^t, disciphne Bunft, guild 3d) lib, sign-board wc^loB, lock; cas- tle , Scf)tna[j, grease, lard Sd)toevt, sword Stift, foundation Strol), straw Zl)C[l, valley tiid;, cloth 'Ski), cattle 5?olt, nation iffiadjS, wax iBantm'3, jacket, vest ffiel), woe iiSciO, woman aBerg, tow iBtlb, game iffiol)!, wcUbeing Sffiort, word SBrad, wreck 3elt, tent 3inii, tin If! $S8 APPENDICES, i (c) Matatlifitt: Suc^ftabe, letter of the alphabet jifrlebe, peace f^unfe, spark i^ebaate, thought @(aube, faitb ^aufe, heap 9lame, name Same, seed Sc^iabe, injury SBtOe, will Slffe, monkey 2)rncl;e, dragon I^atte, falcon $nfe, hare fibroe, lion iWabc, raven Aiife, cheeM And names of males, as: ber 33otf, messenger; ber Jdnabe, boy, etc. Neuters: Mmie, eye; Gnbe, end; (Srbc, inheritance. («•) Itr flat^oIiJ', Catholic. 3. {b) Masculines: 3rrtum, error; Weic^tum, wealth. (c) Feminities in -nJd : (5rlau6nt3, permission erfparni3, savings 3aiiliii5, putrefaction *53rbcrn;3, furtherance '5«nftcrni3, darkness .Rcnntnid, knowledge *3cl)icrfni^, terror SrocfntS, drought * Also neuter. Fcminines\n-\9.\: J) rangf a (, tribulation; mm;fal, trouble ; SrUbfal, affliction. Masculine \\\ -|el : Stopfel, stopper, etc. 90. 4- >^>;«/«/«^ compounds of D!ut : 2Inmut, grace ; ^cmut, humility; ©voijntHt generosity; Sanjmut, long-suffering; Sanftmut, meekness; 2c()H)cnnut, melar.choj, aSe^mut, sorrowfulness. /. Nouns which have a double Gender. •SebrargniS, distress *!8efugni§, authority SOelilnimerniS, sorrow S3eforgni9, arprehunsion a3etrilbni<3, affliction JBeroanbtniC), conjuncture ffimpfangnio, conception ©rfenntnisl, cognition *93erbammnt9, damnation aSerbcrbni^, corruption (is also used as neuter) 33crfiiii!iniiy. neglect, omission liiJilbnid, wilderness ( Less, ber Sanb (pi. SBdnbe), volumes ber SBunb (pi. '-Miinbe), confederacy ber Saner (pi. Sauern), peasant ber GI)Oi- (pi. Gbore), chorus ber Grbe (pi. Grben), heir bie Grfcnittnio, intuition ber ®eiicl, hostage bie ©ift (^litgift), dowry ber ^arj, Hartz mountains ber ^cibe (pi. .^eibcn), heathen ber §ut (pi. .£>iite), hat ber Jliefer, jaw ber ^unbe, customer ber Setter, guide ber 9JJangel, want bao ^Rart, marrow ber Wejfcv, measurer, surveyor ber JReiiJ, ricu XVIII, §g,.) bacs 33anb (pi. Sanber), ribbon baa SBimb (pi. SOiiiibe), bundle ba? 93aucv, cage baS GOor (pi. GOorc), choir • ba§ Grbe, inheritance baS GrfenntniS, verdict bie ©eigel, .scourge baS ©ift, poison 'iiO.^ iMirs, resin bie $cibe, heath bie S^wi, heed, guard bie jltefer (pi. iliefern), pine-tree btc flunbc, knowledge, tidings bie Sieitcv, ladder bie DJtaiiael, mangle bie ffiarf (pi. itiarten), border-land baS Weffcr, knife baS iReiS (pi. 3ieifer), twig APPENDICES. 389 bet Sc^trb (pi. Sc^ilbe), thield ber See (pi. Seen), lake ber Spiofje, offspring ble Steucr, tax, duty ber Stift, pencil, tack ber Xe\i, p.nrt ber I^or (pi. l:boren), fool ber Berbienft, gain ba9 S(5irb (pi Sd^ilber), »l(?n.botrd bie See, sea, ocean bie Sproffe, step (In a ladder) ba« Steuer, helir. bad Stiff, pious foundation bad 2,ei[, share, portion baa Iljor (pi. Ifjore), gate bad Oirbicnft, merit K. Monosyllabic Adjectives without Umlaut. (Less. XXV, § .25.) barfcf), harsh (rati, good Bunt, variegated bumpf, dull (said of sound) falD, fallow falfd), false fladj, flat frol), joyful glatt, smooth ^o^t, hollow ^olb, favourable laf)l, bald fari], stingy fnapp, tight la()m, lame lag-, tired matt, wearied ir.orfcf), rotten nacft, naked The practice varies with bang or bange, afraid ; blafi, pale; sound; flov, clear; nnfe, wet; javt, tender. platt, flat plump, clumsy rafrf), quick toi), raw runb, round facfit, gentle, low fan ft, soft fatt, satiated fc^laff, slack fdjlauf, slender fc^roff, rugged ftarr, stiff ftolj, proud ftraff, tight, stretched ftumpf, blunt toU, mad ooU, full maf^r, true ja^m, tame fromm, pious; gefunb, L. Stronc; Vkrhs not given in the Lists. (Less. XXX 1 1, § 192. — Rare forms in [ J.) 1. bingen (W.), hire 2. ga(;j)ren (W.), ferment 3. gebarcn,' bear, bring forth 4. feifen (W.), chide, scold 5. lUeben (W.), split, cleave 6. Ineipcn2(W.), pinch 7. pffcgsii,''' practise 8. jaugen*(VV.), suck 9. frf)inbeit (W.), flay 10. fd)(ei6eit (W.), fray 11. fdjnaubcit (W.), snort 12. ft^rauben (W.), screw 13. fd^roaren," fester 14. f plcigen (W.), split 16. ftedeno (W. N.), stick, be stuck 16. ftic!3en(\V.N.), scatter 17. ftiiifen, stink 1 gebierft, etc. '■' Rarely strong, s fougft, faugt. " fc^iptert. " ftidft, etc. ; gcbungen gor gcgoren gebar gcDoren «ff gefiffen Hob gefloben tttipp gefnippen '.Pflog ; hpflig]'; gepflogen fog flefogen ( [fcr;anb] J ( IfcOimbJ < gefdjunben wa Oefc^liffen f^nob gcfcfinof'cn fc^rob 8 ;,fc»)n)or ,» ( [fcOiuur] '; flt,'.. . r: fpU6 gefplitfen fiat [geftccfenj ftob geftoben ftanf ' geftunfcn Weak in other meanings. « fSugft, fSugt, or generally weak. EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. -•o»- ■ Explanations.— i. References are to the §. a. Words in Italia are not to be translated. J. Words connected by ^, if followed by a note, are included in that note; otherwise such connected words are tc be rendered by a single word in German. 4- The gendar is not given, where it is according to rule. I. One may' say of the metaphysicians' what Scaliger said of the natives" of the Basciue ' Provinces': " 1 am told" that they understand each^other, but I do not believe it." « • can.' * a)ietapl)t)fifcr. ^ ^^^ tSingcbovciie. < bnijf ijd). * t^vo^Jin^, /. '113,2. 1 II. "A friend of mine,'" says Lord Erskine, "suffered from' continual' sleeples.,ness.* Various' means'' were tried" to^send^him^o^sleep^— but in^vain." At^last his physicians resorted'" to an experiment" which succeeded perfectly.'* They dressed" him in a watchmnn's^coat," put " a lantern into his '" hand, placed " him in a sentry-box," and — he was asleep '^ in ten minutes." »ii9,3(^). 'nii-fdat. MortUia()vcnb. '♦(Sililaflotuifeit. « ucrfcf'ieben. '9)fitti(, «. 'iipvfitdicn. "11)11 cin,^,iiui)l{ifcrn. ' iu'nKbnic<. '° nrrroUeii auf + acc. " ^jH'Vliid), w. "uoUftdiibhi. '^niMiol)cu -f dat. of pers. and ace. of thing. '* ")Jad)tiuaif)tevfittc(, »;. " fteden. •''44, 6 (^). '^fteUen. " iE3ad)t()niticiiincfd)(afen. III. The great Goethe was not particularly ' fond ■' of music. When a pianist' once, at a Courtlconcert in Weimar, was in«_the^ middle' <7/"a very long sonata," the poet suddenly ' rose' up and, la the horror " of the assembled '" ladies and gentle- men, exc! jjr.'.ed ' : " If it lasts " three minutes longer, I shall confess ■' everything." * bcfoiiber, adj. ^ greunb. 3 iflnDicriptclcr. ■• .S>f, m, ; use compound word. Smitten in. « donate, /. 'plbt3lid). «ftet)en. ' Sd)i-e(feu, m, "oerfammeln. "riifen. '^baueru. "gefte^cru 39* L.-^ EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION'. 391 IV. In the first piece ' Theodore Hook wrote for the stage.' a traveller' comes up^io ' the door of an inn/ and sa>s: "Excuse me, my friend, are you the master of this house?" — " Yes, sir," is" the reply ; " my wife ha^^been ' dead these " three weeks." ' etUcf, n. ' S8ill)nf. » bcv Dh'iieiibc. * aiif . . ^u, 224, 4. * lautft. ' 257, 4, Note. • ' for the last three weeks ' ; 46. ' ©aftl)QU». V. "Ven you're a married man, Samivel," said old' Wei- ler, "you'll understand a_good_many_things' as' you don't understand now ; but vether it's worth-while ' goinjr.through* so much to learn so little, as the charity^boy " said ven he got^to^the^end^of the alphabet, is a matter^o'^taste." 1 rayther think it isn't."" ^ ' a i)roper name preceded by an adj. takes the art. " '^JielfO. 3' ihat,' 96,5. '•^ol• a)fiil)c juert. * bunVmo.d)cu. « -.HniuMmljiUfr. 'fertig fein iitit. « ®ciff)inncf«farf)e. 9 • i scarcely think (flloubcn) it.' VI. George Selwyn's morbid ' passion 'for public executions' and similar* horro's' was notorious.* He paid_a_vi.sit_to Lord Holland while the latter lay on his' deathbed' When hisjordship" wa9|old '» that Mr. Selwyn had called," he said : "Should he come pgain, please bring him up.'' If I am still alive " I shall be^appy " to see him. If I am dead he will be happy to see nie." ' fmufljaft. n'nbeii)rf)aft. 3,e)inricf)tuitfl. *), 2. »bcr ii^cvbauiitc. ^ijei. 4i„, s ^ihlcf fe()i-,/. ^poUtifd). '2lii«ftd)t,/ 'jiemlid). ^mcifcUjaft. "'the lady.' " bciiiri)eii. 'Mrcf' feu (/;-rt«j.). '3d„f etitev ^p;r,ici1al)vt. ' fronting^ the Savage Club* ft stranger, in a state « of excitement ' which defied « regular" construction/" addressed him thus: "Excuse ^/^, have you seen a gentleman with one eye of^the^name^of " X. — ?" Gilbert answered '^ this question with anotheT: "Stop'' a moment. What's the name of his other eye ? " MKrmumtciiCM. ^CiM(r,/ ^Zvcm\s\ug. *wv. ^use the Engl words. 'HiiUrtiib, w. ^^it'iimimui. 8,-p,ttni4--en. ' i-cneh'erf)t '°>iiJovt^ fol^ir. ">JJamni«. '-beniitunn-tcii. '^crimibni. XI. When Charles Lamb was still a clerk' in the India- House/ lie was one day rebuked ^as.follows ' bv a superior^- "I have remarked, Mr. Lamb, that you alwavs'conie'to « the office' very late.' - "Thats true, to^e^sure.^" answered Ella; "but you must not forget that f always go aw;iy very early." Of^course" such an explanation'" was more than enough." '5d)roilnn-;44, 5. ^ use the Engl words. M'lr 9irDe ftrdrii -tfof- fleiibmmitVu. ^ Dci- i^oni ■ rtu^ -.iiir. ^ >)3iireatt, «. -mol)! (after the verb ' is '). 9 luuiidtd). '° Giflannui. " ()iiuTid)cnt) XII. r never in my life committed' more thnn one art 0/ folly."" said Rulhiere one d;iy in the presence of Talleyrand. " But when will it end = .? " inquired the latter. 'begelieii, trans. ^loilicit. ^t\\\in\. XIII. While Sheridan was staying' at the country-house "" of a friend, he was one morning a«ked ' by a lady to'a^ccompany her on a walk. The lady was neither witty nor beautiful, and the author of the ' School for Scandal '" was at^a loss' for an excuse, until he luckily" discovered and ann^uncid ' to her that it was raining. His disappointed •"■ persecutress » 2(j ill B<: r m :i '> A fii \\\ 394 EXERCISES I\ COMPOSITION. retired," but shortly'' came back to^announce" that the weather had cleared^up." "Sojt^as,'* m?dam,"" said Sheridan, driven'' to despair"; "but it has only" cleared up enough for one — not yet for two." « anf S8cfuc^ fein. n'aubf)aii^. Miitten. n'dfteiicl)iile. «t)crlegen urn. 'fliacflidiectDcife. 'mittpilrii -t dat. ^m ifiven Gvwnrtimgen (expecta- tions) flrtaiiid)t ; 283, 4. ' ^ycifolciciiii. '^ fid) ,^urucf;;iel)en. "ba(b. "iiiit bci- 9;nd)rid)t. "fid) aufflarcn. 'MUevbingS. "gimbigc ^uau. '*299. "3Jeri;iueif(ung; usedef. art. "f)od)ftcn8. XIV. Foote, being annoyed' one day by an irinerant' fiddler,'' who produced ' harsh " discords " under his window, threw him down a coin' and bade him be^gone,' as one scraper " at '" a door was quite sufficient." *belaftigeu; 284, I, (,a(,l. - ^ird,ipicO «. '^ n.ucridjnit, / "^ angcfc^en. 236, I, Rem. I. =' fveicii l»anf laficii. =^ fri)nauben. • " fd)(ud)scn. XX. A young poet once came to Piron to read ' him a couple of new sonnets^ written ^ by him, and ask him which he preferred.* The^momentMie had finished the first, Piron said hastily": " I prefer the other," and positively' refused' to listen even" to a line'" of it. Dovlrfen. » (Soniiett', «. 3 yerfafiou ; 290, {l>)- * Dovijle^en. « ®o« balb...mu-. MjafUg. ' burd)au8. « fid) lucigcr-i. ' and) nur. '° ^eile. XXI. Wewitzer, the well-known actor ^ and wag,=' was joking^ and laughing at* rehearsaP one day, instead of mmdmg" his part.' Raymond, the stage-manager,^ took" him to^task,'" saying: "Mr. Wewitzer, I wish" you would pay" a little attention.'-' — "Well,'' sir,'-^'" answered Wewitzer, "so I am '^ I'm paying as little attention as possible." ^ ' ©dianfpieler. ^mmh.m. 3jd)er^,en. *aul ^ ^uobc, use def. art. mm + aiif, with ace. ; 224, 2, (6). 7 gjoQ^.^ s s)}fj^{,-fem. 9 ^teUen |°3Hv9febe. "luoUte. '^ gebeu. '^Mn. ^^^Umx. '^ §err 9tegiffeur! "ba8tt)iie id) jaaud). • >Aegi„eur. XXII. The younger Dumas once perpetrated » a cruel* joke'' at^the^expense * of the Manzanares,' the riviil*»t« th.f EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. 39^ runs^through' Madrid and is called a river by the grandilo- quent inhabitants of this city. When the famous dramatist" was one day present- at a bullfight," either the heat/ or some revolting" incident - in the show,- overcame - him to^such^an^extent^' that he fainted.- J3n - somebody brin- ing him a glass of water, as he was recovering,- Dumas : Tl ';/'^"^" ^"" ' ^'^^"^" -^-= "Go^'and pTr It into he Manzanares; the river needs- it much more tnan 11 mnc^en. -bitter, mit}, - auf Soften. » masc. ^ ^ad) ' bur*- n)alt.ge.. -brvmaOcn. - oI,nmacI,tin lueibe.i. - 77 Rem 6 ''m erMen. «ab(el,ie.i. «.84. i («). ^3^it. ^Md)mac^. 4tig ;ben' -f ace' XXIII Frank Talfourd, who rejoiced Jn ' a stature ' of six feet and several inches, was playfully^ challenged^ at the Savage Club one evening to raise his foot asjii..h as ^ the chandelier" that hung in the middle of the room! Lifting' his foot with^rather^too^much^vigour,^ he knocked down one of the glass^globes," which fell to the ground and was^smashed- to atoms." Frank rang ,Ae bell instantly and asked the responding- waiter, for- the amount- of nis bill. " Pray, sir, what have you had .? " — " Oh i " said TalW, pointing-;./ to -the chandelier, - only a glass of J ft* evfreuen + gen. ^ Sp^t. ^ im ^^tn^. ^ n„ffotbcni 5 ^is ,„ ^vonlcndner. ^iu bie .^o(,e mcrfc, 284. i (/.). « ct.mis u a tin «@, 1 uppel,/ -^erfrfieaen. .eut. " ''into .thousand pieces ' '3 H,.®"^ XXIV. Douglas Jerrold once said to a young gentleman who burned with • an ardent.desire ^ to see himself in^print^ 'HI!* « ul 398 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. "Be advised* by me, young man; don't take down* the shutters until you have something in ihe window worth Jook- ing^at." " ^ « uor + dat. « 33egierbe. » gebrncft. * use laffcn, with refl. form, "4. ('^)- *ob. ^fetiensttjcrt, 122. II. XXV. Alexandre Dumas had a we 11- won ' reputation in Pari? =" society as a teiler^oOmecdotes. At a large even- ing-party, he was " rather' annoyed ' at the persistent ' efforts of his hostess tojnducejiim « to exhibit ' his power* in this accomplishment.^ At last, tired of refusing,'" he said : " Every one has his trade,^ madam.'- The gentleman who entered" the room just before me is a distinguished" artillery^officer. Let him bring a cannon here and fire" it; then I will tell one of my little stories." Muof)(tofrbient. "^ ^nrifcr, 122, 9. 3 ^jrf, nrgcrn -f iibrr with ace. -« nirfit ninitg. « uimblaffin. ' tin: babiii ,vi bviiirifii. ' ^eigcn. « ^ertiiifcit » ^(lA), n. " subst. inf. " .s^auMucrf. '^ giidbioe graii. '^ eintuctcn in" " QU8fle,^cirf)uet. " nbfcucrn. XXVI. Some brainless* acquaintance' of Rivarol's was boasting ■• of * his having " mastered " four languages. " I con- gratulate ' you," said Rivarol ; "you'll have in^future' four words for one idea,* " » gebaufeuonu. * ber ^I^efaimte, 122, i, 2. 3pr„(,(f„ *277,R^m.i. » bag clause. * ^^^ ^jg^g anpig.jd 7 gratuUeren + dat. « j^^c^j '©ebmifc. "* XXVII. On the day after the first representation » of 'L'Ami des Femmes,^' a comedy" by Alexandre Dumas (the second), the author's father sent him a letter, congratu- lating' him on' the success" of his piece," and volunteering" his own collaboration ■•* on '» some future " one." The letter EXERCISES IN COMPOSIT/ON. 399 closed with a somewhat grandiloquent phrase"- "If a gua- rantee '• is desired - for my ability,- I beg to refer" you to" Monie Christo ' and ' The Three Musketeers.' - " The son -replied: "Even if I did not hnoM- the great Nvorks you "• mention,- I should gladly- accept your offer," on^account of the high opinion ^^ my father evidently ^^ entertains « of you." JJi??»T' "^/,^:5ro.tcnfreunb. ^mm, u. -'in which he con- gratulaed" 5,,, ^^,^,^^,„,, ^Zm,n. "ftd) crbicten. ."to colla- borate (mittubeiten)." -an. "fpatci-. -122. 4. Note. '3.;,,,,,,-, u^. I^oi; y^'T'-..'''^^^^' 'M)imucifennnf + acc. » arfuJetier. ** augenfrfieinlid). ^^"has." -yiunmig. XXVIII. Curran happened^o^teir Sir^ Thomas Turton that he could never speak in.public^a quarter^of^an hour without moistening^ his lips/ Sir Thomas declared thlt he had spoken >r five hours in the House^of^Commons « on^ the Nabob of Oude without feeling « the least » thirst " That IS very remarkable indeed,-" observed" Curran, -for every- body agrees- that it- was the driest - speech of the session 16 » (immediately after the verb). " bcmeifcn. -Me(nl.). '3 ba i„ ,i(,er XXIX. A gentleman praising' the personal ^ charms ' of a very^plam * lady in Foote's presence, the latter « said • " Why don't you lay« claim' to « such a beauty ?"_- What rijrht have I to« do soV^ was'" the counter-question.'^ ''Every right," replied Foote, " by - the universal '=' iaw^of^nations - — as the first discoverer.'^ " ' 284, , (.). ^ pevfonlid,. 3 9fei3, m, < "anything but (241. ly, Note) I Ji .1! HI' il I 400 EXERCISES IN COMPOSITION. tetc. " ©egenfi-age. 'Muid). '^ aUgcnicin. '* i^bltcrrec^t. » gntbeder. XXX. One day the poet and banker' Rogers took' Thomas Moc-e and Sydney Smitli home in his carriage from a breakfast, and insisted^' on showing them by^the way' Dryden's house in some obscure^ street. It was ve7y wet weather; the house looked « z^^/j ^^^^^cVi Hke" other okl houses and, having ' thin shoes on, they both strongly ' remonstrated'^' but in^vain. Rogers got^out '" himself," expectin- '^ them "' to do likewise-; but Sydney Smith leaned "> laughing out of the wmdow, and exclaimed : "Oh,"' now you see why Ro-ers doesn't mind '^ getting >« out : he has goloshes "■' on. But^my dear Rogers, lend each of us a golosh ; we will then each stand upon one leg and admire the house as long as vou please.''"" ^ ^ » 33aii.iuicr (pron. as in French). » brinnen. ' bcftcfjen aiif -f-acc 277 untcmca.^. 5,i,|e„v. ^ aucfdKU nnc. ^284.1,/.). « nuTqikI,. nuo: ^ticieu. -aiKSftcinon. " 42, 3, Rem. - "and expected." '3275. .45,^ ©IciclK. 'MoOnte. '^ o,,,. - fid) f.l) ■urn uou -f- dat. " 277. Rem . »9 ®alofd)c, /. - gcf„u,, i^ ^^.^ ^ ^ 77^ Kem. 3. XXXI. '' When I was going from my house at Enfield to the India House one morning," says Charles Lamb, " I met Coleridge on his way to pay me a visit. He was brimfuP of some ^ new idea, and - in^spite^of ^ my telling him that my tune was precious' — he drew me into the door of an unoccupied' garden by tiie roadside," and' there - shel- tered^ by" an evergreen" hedge" from observation'^ — /^^ took'-' me by" the button^of^my.^coat,'« closed'" his" eyes, and commenced an enthusiastic"* discourse, '« waving^" at^the^same^time ^' his right hand gently,-'^ as ^=' the musical ==' words flowed in an unbroken " stream ^« from his" lips I lis- tened^" entranced '' ; but the striking- of a church^clock re- 20 si » 13 .20 EXERCISES IN COMrOSITION. 401 called " me to a sense cf my duty." I saw It was of no use to attempt to break away''; soM took^advantage^of ' his ab- sorption"'' in his subject/' quietly =' cut off the button from my coat with my pen-knife " and decamped.'" As I was passing " the same garden five hours afterwards on my way^home," I heard Coleridge's voice, looked Jn,'' and — there he stood, with closed eyes, the button " in his fingers, gracefully waving his right hand, just as when I had left'' him. He had never'* missed" me." » iiberoor non. » irgenb cin. ^ tvo^bem bn§. -♦ foftbnr. ' unbcnii^t. *i!anbfti-nf5C. 'Insert verb and object here. «jrf)iit3cn, 291, 5; 299. 9burd). '° immcraviiii. " .V^crfY. '^ 33:obar()tiuii]. 'Maflcii. '*228{** byjittle^and^little,^" than entirely^ dissol- li ' ! I t t' 402 EXF.RCISKS IN COMPOSITION. ving" it. Those" persons whom he finds" to be sincere'* and consonant " to his own '' virtuous^" disposition/" he is so charmed^' with,- tiiat he appears to place' his chief- worldly" pleasure in their conversation'" and company And although More is negligent^' in'- his own temporal '" concerns/" yet'* no^one is more assiduous" in assisting'' the suits " of his friends than he. What shall I say more .? If any. person is^desirous •'" to have a perfect »" model^of friend- ship, no one can afford"^" him a better than More, ^hi his conversation »•' he shows so much affability"' and sweet- nes.s^of^manner,"' thatno^mancanbeof^so^austere a dis- position,"^ but^that" More's conversation must*'' mrke" him cheerful «•'• ; and no matter"" so unpleasing,"' but that with his wit"« he can take^away"" from it alLdisgust.^"" 'befdjrciben. =» folfleiibcrmufien. Mci)afftMi, 186; 299. '•44, i (/;) 5 ,t„f rlrfltig {adv.). 6 « to be a follower of = iiad)tohicn 4- dat. ^ '< and very stnctly observes (bcobad)tni) it." ^277; 291,1.. '" of the reproach (^Isornnirf) of having." '° 277, Rem, i. "96,5. "•2oo,5(.). "gf,,!,,,, j^. '^"can." 'Maiuifnin. ^^ m\)\nx, 270; use dct. art. 'MmmMid/ Pffrgcii. '9 n„crfd)uttcrlid). ^° fcft()altcn. =='"of his friends" "211- frillig, 239, Rem. 2. " " a man (yJMd))." ^H'tiftn, «. ^^ m-bcffrrn =Modmi. ^^%^m\^'^ 64. *8,nit. ^9 nblenfen ; 284, i ya). 3° ,{,(,,,' '' allmalig. '^ gniij. 33113^^,,. 34 fold). « erfinbcii. ^^ aiifrid)tifl 3'ent' fpvcd)eub-f dat. 38cige„. 39 t„gnit.l)aft. -»" eiunei^art. -*' bc^,aubrni. *-Use as prep, before "those persons." ^^ \\m\\ in + ace. -""greatest" **Jue(tad). '«MIntcr()n(timc?. *' qteidigiltig. "^gcgcii. "9 tmMtltd). ^^%\\- ge(cgenf)eit. " bod). -'^ ftrcbfnm. " ..j^ ^^e support (Untcrftiiljmig) of " ^*3(ngdfncnl)ctt. « luunfd)cn. ^^DoUfomnicn. " 3beat', «.; use compound word ^^Xxtimx. » Umgang, .;/. ^^cutfclintnt. « ?icbeiK^miirbigfeit. "fo licrbe nefiiiiit. ^^ bafi iiid)t. '^^joKtc. ^5 „„jf,eitcrn. ^^ (^^cj,p„|-ij,„j, m. MtJibrig. *^m.\k,m, ^ entfemention. '" Me8 2Bibernjartifle >• ABBREVIATIONS. I see below. I. German : 8lnnii= 3tiimeifuno, note. a. Z. = ailtco Icliami'iit, Old Testament. a. a. D. = am niigtfut)itcii Crte, in the place referred to. bfll , bcrfll.= bciiilcidjeit, the hke. b. — . any case of the definite article, b. ^.= baS()ei6t, ; , . b. i. = baa ift, ! "»''• "•• b. 3. = bicfcS C'inljvccs, of this year. b. TO. = bii'jt'3 ajioiinto, of this month. Ir. = I)ottor, Doctor. Gto., Giur. = Gucv, (Sure, ©iirer (in titles). fl.=: ©iilbiii, florin, ^r. = 1\vaii, Mrs. J?vl)r.= ;^reil)en- Baron, ^■rl. = J^rriultiii. Miss. flCb.= (jctoreii, born, geft. = (leftoilH".!, died. ®r.= Oivofthcn (a coin). f).. })tH. = Iji'ilisv holy, saint. $r., iivn. = iM'rv iu-nii, Mr. i. 3. = it" 3nl}i'f in the year. S\a\>. = flapitcf, chapter. Six: = iliciijci (a coin). I.= lies, read. m.. m. M. = 93!arf (money). 9Jfffr.= a)lnmitfript, manuscript. aWaj. = 9JJaitfftat, Majesty. II. Latin (in addition to others which are used in English also): A. C = Afttw Chrtsti, in the year of Onr Lord (Christ). a. c. = anni cjirrcniis, of the current year. S. T. = Salvo Ti>'u'.o, without prejud'ce to the title (used ir .addresses where the proper title of tlie person addressed is uncertain). 404 m., 91. iJl. = 3fJame, name. n. C^i. = IKUO Gl)»ifto, after Christ. !JI. S. = 51()i!)f(()iift. i)oftscript. J{. X. =■. 9Jeiie« leftameiit, New Testa- ment. W., *|'fb. tr: «pfuiib pound. ipf. = 'IMcmiiii, penny. ^ pp. = uiiD io uu'iter, and so forth. ®e. cr. — Seine, geiner, his (in titles). 3. = Scitc, p.ige. St., £tt.= Sonft, Saint. f. = fie!|i', s:e. f. 0. = fitl)C i,i>en, aee above. i. 11. = ficljc tinteii, f. ID. n. = ficl}c meitei- unteit, Z.. Jt)., 2I)l.= 3:eil, 3:l)cil, part. 2;()li-. = II)i-,(er (money). u. a. jii. = iinb nubeie mefir II. bill, m.— iiiib bcriileicf)en me^r, u. f. f. = inib fo fort, It. f. JO. = imb io iDciter, 25. = 5icr§, verse. 0. Cljr. = por GOriflo, before Christ. Dcnil., t)fll.= ueviileiihc, compare. t). 0.= con otu-ii, from the top. ». u. = Don imteii, from the bottom. J. S8. = jum ibeifpiel, for example. It. 'esta- titles). VOCABULARY. GERMAN — ENGLISH. Explanations. — i. '■ e numerals refer to the §. 2. All verbs nrc weak and regular, unless referred to a $; the conjugation of others will 1)6 found under the § iiulicnted. 3. A — indicates that the word in question is to be supplied ; under masc. and neuter substantives, tlie ttriniiuitioiis of the gen. sing, and nom. plur. are gi en ; thus: !^atien (-3 ; — ) means that the gen. sing, of nffianeii is *iUaiU'ii*, and the nom. plur. the same as the nom. sing. The sign " indicates Umlaut in the pi., e. g. : Oiarten, (-(3; ") means that the gen. Mug. of this word is OKntiMi*, and the nom. pi. Wdrfcit ; £ol)H (-ed ; "e) means; gen. sing. 2ol)iic#, nom. pi. 3bl)iie ', under fem. substs. the pi. only is given. 4. With adjectives, "cr indicates Umlaut in the compar. and superl. 5. Proper names are not given when they are the same in German as in English. ; • e belt: et ce- tera. proper 91. t, the others. Anbern, to alter, change ; e9 laftt fid) nid;t — , it cannot be helped. anbert^alb, one and a half. SJlnfang, m. (-e3 ; "c), com- mencement, beginning. niifnniicn (188), to begin, commence. onfaiigS, in the beginning, at first. angcncbm (dat.), pleasant, agreeable. angftlid), frightened, timid, anxious. atibalten (188), to continue. 9(ul)i3[)0,/. (-n), hill. anfaufcn (fid)), to settle, buy up property. aiiflcibcii (fid)), to dress. aiifommen (167; fctn), to ar- rive; in 9-'. (i. (-§), behaviour, conduct. betreffi'u (167), to concern; trao mid) bctrifft, as for me. betrilgen (131), to cheat, de- ceive. SBettlev, m. (-§ ; — ), beggar. beroegcn (131), to induce; to move. benjeifen (120), to prove, de- monstrate. berounbern, to admire. beja^Ien, to pay (ace. 0/ thing ; dat. of person and ace. of thing when both are present, otherwise aec. of person). S8ejaf)Innn,/.(-en), payment. 33totiot^er, / (-eti), library. biegen (131), to bend. aSier, «. (-eS ; -e), beer, ale. bieten (131), to offer. 33i(b, «. (-e§ ; -er), picture, portrait. SSilbung, / (-en), education. Sillet' ipron. bill-yett), n (-te« ; -te), ticket. billig, cheap. binbcn (144), to bind, tie, fasten. binnen (dat.), within. bi^ (34), till, until, up to, as far as; .^roei — bvei, two or three ; — ju {dat.), — nac^ {dat.), as far as. >Uiicl)of, m. (-e§, -^c), bishop. bitten (i8i ; for, urn), to ask, beg; (id)) bittc, if you please, please {lit., I beg, pray) ; rocnn id) — barf, if you please {lit., if I may ask). blafen (188), to blow. 331att, «. (-e§ ; ^cr), leaf. bian, blue. bleiben (120; fein), to re- main. Slciftift, «. (-e§ ; -e), lead- pencil. blinb, blind. m\^, m. (-eS; -e), light- ning. bitten, {impers.), to lighten. ^fllurne,/ (-en), flower. SBIumenfofjt, m. (-§), cauli- flower. bombarbieren, to bombard. ' «oot, «. (-e8; Sttte, or-i), boat. bBfe, bad, evil: cross, angry: Soferoic^t, wi. (-e9; -er), villain. Ml Si 4o8 VOCABULARy. Sote, m. (-n; -n), mes- senger. 6rotcii (i88), to roast. 5raud)cii (g^ot. or ace), to require, want, need, use, make use of. braim, brown. bici(^ii (167), to break, breit, broad, wide. Orciiiicii (99), to burn, be burning. S3ricf, m. (-e§; -c), letter, epistle, briiti^^cit (99, 2), to bring, take. 93rot, « (-f6; -c), bread; loaf. 93i-ucfe, /. (-11), bridge. aU'ubcr, ;;/. (-s ; '-), brother. 93ticl), «. (-C5; 'oi), book. 93iid)evfiTuiib, m. (-e5; -c), lover of books. 93iid)l)iiub(cv, m. (-§; — ), book-seller. 93iict)[)niibhiit3, /(-en), book- shop. SUvcfiii {proH. bii-ro'), n. (-?'; -^'). (business) office. SBiir.icvmciftev, ;«. (-9 ; — ), mayor. aSuttev, /, butter. GOofoIabc, /, chocolate. Gl[)vil't, in. (-C11 ; -oil), Chris- tian. Confine,/ (-n), cousin. ®. ba, there, in that place; here; conj., as, when, be- cause, since. Ib^xi), H. (-•.■'3; -er), roof. bafUr, fcr that, for it, for them (0/ things), ba[)Ci', thence, hence, there- fore. baiuit, therewith, with it, with that. i Sompferrintc,/. (-n), steam- ship-line. Sampfirf;iff, «. (-:§; -e), steam-boat, steamer, banfbnr, thankful, grateful. 3)nnf[iavteit, /, thankful- ness, bnnfcii {(int.), to thank; id) banfc C^iincM), (no) thank you. bnnn, then. Parnn, thereon, brtriliit, thereon, on it, on them {ofth'ngs), etc. bnviH, theruii, in that, in it. bnriil'Cr, over that, over it; about it, r.t it. bnvum, therefore. bn?i, n. of bcr, ivhick see. biifcU'i't, there, in that place, bnf!, that ; (anf) — , in order that, bnuon, thereof, of it. bciii, bcine, bcin, thy. bcntcii ( ) ) ; gen. or geturnl- /v Cin -f- ace), to think; fiit) ~, to imai.;ine. bcnn, for, cot! . bcr, bio, bn<3, def. art., the (4 ; 44); rcl. pr., who, which, thr.t (92, 93, 95); dam. pr.. the one, ho, she, it, that (133 ; J40-143). berjcnijc, bicjcniH', bnqcs 'lia'-'('35; Mci), that, this, the one ; he, she, it. bcricIOc, bicfcUic, baofelDe (136; 143). ndj. and pr., the same ; he, she, it. etc. bco'ljal'i, for this or that rea- son, therefore, on that ac- count, befto, (all) the, so much the; — licfjcv, £o nuich tlie bet- tor; jc mctir — Ocffcr, the more, the bettor. bc«rjc jcn, on that account, btutliixi, char, distinct; clearly, distinctly. bci!tfd;,German; auf Seutfc^ ir: :i!cntfd)cn, in German. ^ciitfd)'lanb, «. (-s), Ger- many. i^inmant', m. (-5 or -en; -en), diamond. bie, / of bcv, which see. t'Kb,m. (-e§; -c), thief. Ticncr, m. (-^; -), ser- vant. Jicnetng, w. (-c5;-c),Tues. day. bii'icr, biefc, bicfcS (bico), (6; 134, 140, 1,(3), tills, that; the latt.r. bie'^fcito, W?'.. on this side, binu'ii (App. L.), to hire. binib' ven, to divide. ^Oct), yet, however, but, after all, pray, well, just. Sol'tor, ;«. (-0; Sotto'icn), doctor. Donncv, vt. (-§ ; — ), thun- der. bonnern, to thunder. ^onucretoii, '«• (-c3 ; -c), Tluirsday. i)orf, (-co ; "cr), village, boi't, there, yonder, in that place, bvci, three. bvcifad), three-fold, triple, treble, brcimal, three times, thrice. brci'^'ig, thirty, bvcfdjcn (159), to thresh, thrash. briiiGcn (144), to press. bvittctiaU), two and a half, briilu'ii, over there, over the way. Snicf, m. (-e§), printing, print, bu, thou, you. biinn, thin. buvd) (34), through ; by. biird;auo', absolutely, entire- ly; — nidjt, by no means, not at all. . burd^fucS'cn, to search thtougli, bllr'eil (196-202 ; permis- sion), to dare; be permit- tod, ahowed ; barf id; 'i may I? !Diirft, m. (-e§), thirst; — ()nbcn, to l)e tliirsty. Su^'cnb, «. (-c§;-c), dozen. ebftt, adv., even, just; ex- pctly; fo— , just now. Gcfe, / (-11), corner. S'bclftcip,, VI. (-ro ; -e), pre- cious stone, jewel. e^C, adv. and conj., ere, be- fore. ilx i\, to honour, esteem. el/vUd), honest ; — luofjrt nm laitgftcii, honesty is the best policy. H, n. (-C'3 ; -er), egg. frii]ciitum, (-c5 ; ^er), pro- perty, possession, estate. •Sife, /. haste, hurry; iuq5 f;nft bu fiiv — ? what is your hurry ? ittcn, to hasten, hurry. ^ili.], har.ty, speedy; c3 — (jnbcn, to be in a hurry, be in haste. cii (120), to book, inscribe, check (lugrage). ciufc()Cii (iSi), to perceive, comprehend, eiiifcitij, one-sided. ciiiftci^icn (120; fcin), to mount iiito, get into (car- riage, etc.). Gii/tiittocj;a'mpn, «.(-«;—), entrance-examination, ma- triculation-examination. Ginit)Ol;i!Cr, m. (-S ; — ), in- habitant. Gi§, «. (-C>o), ice; ice-cream. Giicn, «. (-0), iron. Gifcnbal;it,/. (en), railway, elegant', elegant. G((e,/. (-ii),yard. GItcni {no sing.), parents. cinpfcf)[eu ( i6/; dat.ofpers.), to recommend, cmpfiiiben (144), to feel, ex- perience, cnblid), at last, finally, at length. Ciiiiliid), rt^'., Enplish; niif Gnali(u), in English. Gntc, /. (-n), duck; Gnteii= bratcii, ;;/. (-5 ; — ), roast duck, entne'iieniierjcn (188; fcin; dai.), to ro to meet. cnt.]c'jeii[ommeii (167; fcin ; dat.), to come to meet. cntfd)Iicf!Cii (fid); 123), to resolve, decide, c'.tfdmlbijcii, to excuse, cntiucbcr, cithrr; ciitun'bcv . . . ober, either ... or. fntrocrfen (159), to draw (a plan, etc ); design, entjiicft, delighted, charmed. cr, he. Gvbfe, / (-n), pea. Gibbebcii, «. (-s ; -), earth- quake. Gi-bbccrc,/ (-•.;), strawberry. Grbc,/, earth, rround. Cifi: bcii (144), to invent. Gifinbiinfl, / (-en), inven- tion. Gifoln, M. (-c6; -c), success, crfricieii (131; fcin), to freeze, be frozen. CViU-eifcii (118), to seize. ciOnlteii (i88), to receive, get. cviitncvn (fid); gen. of thing remembered), to remem- ber, crfiiltcn (fid'), to catch cold. Gifaaiiitg,/(-eit), cold, crfcnitcn (99), to recognize, cvflaicn, to cxilain. ci-titiibigeii (fid)), to inquire ; fid) bet jemnitb nod) ctiua3 — , to inquire of anyone about anything, cvlaut'cii {dat. of pers.), to permit, allow. Cilebcii, to experience, cnieiiiicit (99), to nominate, . appoir.t; jiim Woitucnieuv — , to appoint (as) governor, crobcni, to conquer, over- come. evfd)iccfcii (167 ; fcin), to be frightened. cvft, first ; fiiiS crftc, for the present ; bev cvftc bcftc, the first which comes to hand; ad7'., first, only, not before, i:ot till. crftcnd, first, in the firstplace. citviiifcn (144), to drown, be drowned. aroa()Icit (ui), to elect (as), eriuartcn, to expect, wait for. ■IM 4^0 vocabularv. eriurtiif(^cit, to wish for, de- sire. ti]iii)ltn, to relate, narrate, tell. «^(38. 39), it; tliey; there; er ift — , it is he ; e<3 finb 5IHanner, t. y are men. eifen(i8i),toeat; ju5DJittag — , to dine. etiua, nearly, about. GtiunS, sonietliing, any- thing. titer, euve, euer, your. (Europa, «. (-3), Europe. G ja'men, »«. (-S ; — ), exami- nation. exemplar', «. (-?> ; -e), copy (of a work, etc.). gfabrif', / (-en), factory. ffaben, m. (-cS ; -), thread. fol^ren (iS6; fein), to go, drive, ride (in a convey- ance); tr.ivel; sail. f>fal)vt,_/! (-eit), journey, voy- age ; ride, drive. %all, m. (-e^; -e), fall ; case, event; in bent '^ailt, in that case. f aUen (188; feiii), to fall. falls, in case. tVami''lie, /. (-n), family. fongen(i88), to catch. faft, almost, nearly; — itie, hardly ever. ^cOinuU', V!. (-'3), February. fediteii (124), to fight, fence. jfeber, /. (-11) , feather ; pen ; spring. feievn, to celebrate. ^eicrtag, >«. (-e^; -e), holi- day. getnb, m. (-eS; -e), enemy. gelb, «. (-e3 ; -er), field. ^clf(cn), ;;:.(-cno; -cn), rock. ^enftev, «. (-S ; — ), window. Jfevien, //. {no sing;.), vaca- tion, holidays. | {?crne, / (-tt), distance ; in bev — , at a distance. fertifl, ready, done; — fein (mit), to hav© finished (with). Seftli(t)teit,/ (-en), festivity. ■J^euev, «. (-0 ; — ), fire. i^ielier, n. (-0 ; — ), fever. fiubcit (144), to find ; meet with ; think, be of opinion ; jiiaii finbt't fid) nid)t leicfit, people do not find each other easily. ^ifcfi, m. (-e3; -e), fish. (■^•lafdje, /. (-11), bottle. flcd^ten (124), to weave. ^Icifdl, n. (-co), meat. flei^iil, diligent ; industrious; , diligently, etc. ^ieiicn (131 ; fein), to fly. flieljen (131). tlee. fliejjcn (123), flow. (Vlbte,/. (-n), flute. ';^-liis1cI, VI. (-§ ; — ), wing. i^-luf!, »«. (-eS; ' e), river. foIncn(fein ; dat.), to follow. ■Jvovelle, / (-11), trout. jvormat', «. (-e§; -c), size (of a book). fort, forth; away, gone; loir miiffen — , we must be off. fortgel)en (18S ; fein), to go away. forttuiiljx-enb, perpetual, con- tinual, incessant. fritgeii (186), to ask ques- tions ; ^raijeti, «. (-S), questioning, asking ques- tions (action of). ^■raitfvcid), «. (-§), France. friin,\ofi)rf), French. ^vau,_/! (-en), woman, wife, lady, madam, mistress, Mrs. Aiciidein, u. {-iS; — ), young lady, Miss ; iiieiit — , Miss. freiget'ig, liberal, generous. freilaffcn (188), to set free, liberate. ' freilic^, to be sure, indeed, of course, ^yrejtog, m. (-e6;-e), Friday, fremb, strange , foreign, ■^^•retttbe, {adj. subst.) m. or /., stranger, foreigner, ^^rembling, nt. (-eS; -e), stranger, fieffcn (181), to eat (said of beasts). ■Avciibe, /. (-n), joy, delight. freuen (fid) ; at, \\b(x-\-acc.), to rejoice, be glad ; eS freut mid), I am glad. (^•rcuiib, fit. (-co; -e), friend; id) ('in ein — uon, I like. Arcuiibin, f. (-nen), friend (female). fveunbUd), friendly, kind. Sreunbfc^aft,/ (-en), friend- ship. ■5viebe(n), m. (-n§), peace. (Vriebrid), «/.(-§), Frederick; ^•riebridiftva^e, Frederick- street, fiieieii (131), to freeze; feel cold; e3 fviert mid), I feel cold ; mid) friert, I am cold, fnfd), fresh. iVVit}, 7H. (-en§), Fred, Fred- dy, frol), joyful, glad ; froljeij IVhtteS, cheerfully. friJljlid), joyous, merry. J5-nid)t, /. ("e), fruit, fviil), early; fviihcr, earlier; formerly. ^rul)ling, vt. (-eS ; -e), spring. frill)'ftiidcn, to breakfast. >^iid)'j, in. (-e, four and a half. fitufug, funfsig, fifty, i5untc(n), >«. (-ns; -n), f* ark. VOCABULARY. 4ff f«r (34), for. f^urc^t (DOi),/ fear (of). fiirAten, to fear; ficC) — nor (+ dat.'), to fear, be afraid of. 8=U6, m. (-eS ; «e), foot. ga(l))ren (App. L.'), ferment. gaiij, a^'., whole, entire; the whole of; adv., quite, wholly, altogether, entirely. gnr, even; — nirfjt, not at all; — rttdf)t^, nothing at all. ©arten, m. (-3 ; "■), garden, Wiirtiier, m. (-§; — ), garde- ner. ©aft, m. (-c§; ''e), guest. ©aft^nii?!, «. (-e'S; Hx), inn, hotel. gebavcn (167), to bear, bring forth. (lebeit (181), to give; v. im- pers., e§ giebt, there is, there are. ®eDot', «. (-e5 ; -e), com- mandment. ©ebiirte'tag, vi. (-e§; -e), birthday ; jum — , as a birthday-present. ©ebanfe, ;«. (-n§; -n), thought. gebei()eii (120), to thrive. gebenfcn (99), to intend. Webid}t, n. (-c§; -c), poem. gebrcingt, packed, com- pressed, crowded. Webulb, /., patience. gefal^rlic^, dangerous; dan- gerously. icfallen (188), to please, suit; joic gefillU es 3l)iicn ill SoftPrt? how do you like Boston ? /efdUig, pleasing, complai- sant, kind; ift b?!n ftpvin \ etroaS — ? v.'ill the gentle- rfian be helped to anything ? gcfftaiilft, if yon please. «efUf)[, «. (-66; -e), feeling; emotion. flCgeit (34), towards, against, about ; for. rtfdcit (1S8; fein), to go; walk; niie getjt eS^^neii? how do you do? how are you ? (jel)inen (a'a/'.),toi)elong(to). ©eige, /. (-11), violin; ©oi= genfpiel, «. (-«), violin- playing, gclb, yellow, ©elb, «, (-eS ; -ev), money, ©clbbeutel, »«. (-5; — ), purse, gefegen, convenient; oppor- tune ; nicfito tbunte miv gc; [ogenei- fein, nothing could suit me better, geliitgeii (144; fein), to suc- ceed; c§ gelingt tnir, I succeed, gcltcn (159), to be worth, ©emaibe, «, (-«$ ; — ), paint- ing, picture, j ©einiifc, «. (-5; — ), vege- tables, genan, precise, exact ; pre- cisely, exactly, carefully, minutely. : ©eneral', >«. (-c« ; -e), gene- ; ral. genefeit (iSi; fein), to get j well, recover (from an ill- ness), I genicfeen (125; fein), to en- joy ; eat or drink, ' gcnng, enough, ©conictric', /, geometry, ©cpiict, ;/. (-eo), luggage, baggage, gevnbc, adj., straight; adv., exactly, ju.st. ©erdufri), «. (-eS ; -c), noise. gent (liebcr, ant lietftcnV with pleasure, willingly, gladly ; etuinS — Ijaben, to like a thing ; — K'rnen, to like to learn, study ; ba9 ift — mpglirf), that is very I probable, ' ©evfte, / barley. ' gcfal)\en, fali^en, salt. ©cfang, m. (-00), singing. G3efd)af t, «. (- co ; -c), busi- ness ; mercantile establish- j ment ; shop, store. j ©cfd)aft§angcIegentH'it, /. (-en), business matter, bu- siness engagement. gefc^efKn (181; fein), to hap- pen. 0efc()enl, «. (-e^s ; -e), gift, present. Oicfd)id)te, /, (-n), history, story. ©efd)macf, vt. (-e§), taste. geh()ult,/./.,fcf)n[en, trained, cultivated. ©efrfinjifter, //. , brothers and sisters. fflcfeUfd;aft, /. (-en), com- pany, party. ©efidit, n. (-cS; -ci and-i), face, cour.tenance ; ©efid)s ter, faces ; ©cftd)te, vi- sions. ©efpiele, >«. (-n; -n), play- mate. geftern, yesterday, ©efnnb[)Cit, / health. geiuinncn (isS), to win, gain. geiuifi isiett.), certain (of); certainly, surely. geiuiffenlinft, conscientious, ©eu'ittev, «. (-0; — ), thun- der-storm, storm. Wciuofjndeit, / (-en), cus- tom, habit; bte — ^abtn, to be accustomed to. gerina, fim.n!!, tridi-.ig, n-.ran; ' gfn--p(}n(ic{i, usual, eustom- nid^t ini — ften, not in the : ary ; generally, usually, least. i flte^en (123), topour 11 1,1 iff ii 412 VOCABULARY. jttlnj'n, to shine, glitter. flliinjcnb, brilliant. 0IaS, «. (-co; -"cv), glass. (jiatt, smooth, slippery. flinudcil {^dni. of pers.), to believe ; think. fllcici), at once, at the snme time, immedintel)-, directly; fo — , immediately, etc. flleid)cii (ii8), to be like, re- semblc. flleitcii (iiS;, to glide, slip. fliimiiien (123), to glimmer. ©liicf, n. (-CC), (rood) for- tune, good luck ; success ; — n)ihifd)cii, to congratu- late, wish success to. (jliict(irf), happy, fortunate; successfully. ©olb, n. (-C'5), gold. flOtbcit, of gold, golden. ©oiiucvneui', ;«. (-e§; -e). governor. flraben (186), to dig. ©tab, in. (-co; -c), degree. ©vaf, >«. (-ni ; -en), count, earl. ©lafiit, / (-ncn), countess, ©ramma'tif, / (-en), gram- mar. ©raS, «. (-c§ ; '^cv), grass. flrntulicicn {dat.), to con- gratulate. (jreifeit (nS), togmsp. ©ried^eiilaiib, «. (--0), Greece. flro6("ev, j«/. grbBt), great, large, big, tall. (jriln, green. flritnblid), thoroughly. Criifjcii, to greet, salute, bow to; %{)x ^vcunb Idftt Sic — , your friend wishes to be remembered to you. ©uitarre, /. (-11), guitar. gut, rtfi^".,good; kind; adv., well ; fo — fein iinb, to be so kind as to. Outefl, «., good (thing). 0. |iaar, «. (-c? ; -e), hair. f)n6cn (24), to have; i)lerf;t — , to be (in the) right ; lln- rec^t — , to be (in the) wrong; ron5 — Sic? what is the matter v.hh •; oor — , to intend, prop^. purpose. ^afcn, m. (-3 ; "), port, har- bour, haven. iiafcr, m. (-«j), oats. |iaiicIforii, n. (-e3 ; "cr), hail-stone. f)n;U'ln, to hail. Oalti, half; — brct, half past two. Siilftc,/ (-n), half. Ijialtcu (188), to hold, think ; — fiiv, consider; id) (jalte nicl nou il)Hi, I think high- ly of him (esteem, value him highly). iianb,/. ("c), hand. ^idnblev, w. (-3; — ), dealer, shop-keeper. .c^anbfdmt), m. (-e§; -e), glove. finncicn (188), to hang, be suspended; ba^ 'Bilb £)a!igt, the picture is hanging. I^aiii^cii, to hani:, su.'jpend. $arfc, /. (-11), harp; .f>avs fens53cijleitunij, accompa- niment on the harp. I^art C'ev), hard. .^af e, m. (-n ; -n), hare. {)affcn, to hate. fjciiicn (1S8), to hew. ^auptftatt, /. ( "c), caphal. ^lOit?-, n. (-co; "cr), house; 511 .fiauic, at home; imd) ^ciufc, home. l)ebcn (131), to raise, lift. ^ecr, 7t. (-cS; -c), army. r^eftifl, violent, heavy; hea- vily (of rain). Jgeibc, ;«. (-n; -ti), heathen. ^einric^, m. (-S), Henry. fielfer, hoarse. ^ci6, hot. Ocijjcn (188), to be called, bo named; mean, signify ; U'ie \)Z\%i bn§ aiif 3)ciit|d)? how do vcj say that In "■■-.rman? mie fieijjt? what the name of? id; ^cifie Vf., my name i-- A. $c[b, VI. (-eit; -en), hero. l)e(feu (159 ; dal), to help. Ocll, bright; brightly. (jeraOftcigen (120; fein), to descend. hcvnuotommen (167 ; fein), to come out. $cibft, m. (-C'j ; -e), autumn. .ficvbc,/; (-11), flock, herd. Oevcintoutmen (167 ; fein), to come in. ^tcvr, tn. (-n; -en), master; gentleman ; Lord ; Mr. ; 3f)r — SSater, your fa- ther. §erj, n. (-enS ; -en), heart. i)evj(id), heartily, exceed- ingly. §eu, «. (-e§), hay. t)eiitc, to-day ; — 2(bcnb, this evening; — SJlornen, this morning; — iitcr rierje^u S^afjj, this day fortnight ; r;eut((iitanc, now-a-days. ()ier, here; — 'u Sanbe, in this country. [)ievmit, herewith, with this. $iimmel, r,t. {-i ; — ), heaven, sky. f)inaufoe^en (188; fein), to go up. f)inau§fe()cn (181), to look out (at the window, juiii f^eiiftcr). fiineinfleljen (188 ; fein), to go in. f)ingc{)eu (188; fein), to go (hence) ; go anywheie. Ijinter (65), behind. ^i^e, /, heat. VOCABULARY. 413 Joel) ^oses c tn inflection; compar. t?t)^er, sup. ^od)ft), high, tjofien, to hoye. _ j^offcntlid), adv., (it is) to be hoped, I hope, ^offumij], /. (. tn), hope, ^b^er, compa\ . ; -er), child, ilivdjc,/ (-11), church, flar, clear, illnffc, / (-11), class, .niaffifcr, in. (-0 ; — ), classic wtitcr, classic. JKcUiicv', n (S; -e), piano, .ffleib, ;;, (-c§; -cr), dress; pi. clothes, flein, .small, little. Kiebeit (App. L.), to cieav«. \\ 414 VOCAnLTLAKV. fUmmen (123), todimb. flinncdi, to ring (said of small bells); eo flitiflelt, there is a ring (at the door, etc.). fliiiflcii (144), to sound. Jlltubc, ;//. (-11; -ti), boy. Jtitall, ,11. (-06; -c), loud quick soinifl ; cLiji, tliun- der-tlap. flncdjt, ;;/. (-e'3; -c), (farm) servant, man-of-all-work. fltcifcii riiS), to ])inch. fiieipcii (App. I,.), to i>inch. .ftiuid)cn, w. (-'5; — ), bone., ^od), ///. (-co; "c"), cook, hornet', iu. (-I'li; -cii), comet, fommcii (167; fciii), to come; arrive; — laffcn, to send for ; juie fomtut baS ? how is that ? flbiiiil, m. ( (i')o; -c), king. .Hijniiiiii,/ (-iicn), queen. ^Olliaftnifti', / King-street. f5niicn (iers. and of thing), to cost. franf ("er), ill ; sick ; .ftraitte, {adj. suhstX sick person, patient, ilvantdcit, f. (-en), disease, illness. XtrtCsi, m. (-e§ ; -e), war. fncd)cii (123), to creep, ^ri'tif er, vt. (-?, ; — ), critic. Mrf)C,/.(-n), kitchen. .«uf),/("e),cow. ihmft, f ("c), art. ^iinftlcr, til. (-'5 ; -), artist, j lurj ( 'er), short- I Wrjlict), not long ago, lately, recently. ,«utf rf)or, in. (-0 ; _), coach- man, driver. «. \(X*ti\\{sen. or iilHT 4- ,„<■.), to laugh (at). ^'ad)0, m. (-C.;. ; -0), salmon fahcii (iSr,), to load; invite.' i'abcn, ;//. (-c; — ami ■■■), window-snutter (//. — ); sho]), .store (//, -"). Vailb, «. (.-co; «ci- and -<), land, country ; country (op- posed to town); aiif bent — C, in the country ; aiifo — flcOcf, to go into the , country; 511 — e, by land; flier ,^11 — e, in this country. Vanbfc()nft, / (-en), land- scape. Initn ("ev), long. laitrtC, ad7i. long, ,. long time or while, for a long time ; fo — , so long as; er ift — itirf)t [)ier ni'iuefcn, he has not been here for a long time; er ift iiirfit — l;icr fleiuefeit, he has not been here long, raitflfant, slow; slowly, uiiicift, long ago, long since, i-'cirm, m. (-co), noise. laffcn (188; 200, 7), to let, allow; leave; have (a thing done); fane it — , to send word; fotnnten — , to send for; id) Inffe bno gjnrf; einbiiibeii, I am having the book bound; e^ laftt fid) nid)t (eiigncn, it can- not be denied. Saftev, «. (-S; — ), vice. Snteiit, n. (-0), Latin. 2ailf, ;;;. (-f§; "c), course, laitfeii (iSS: jetii), to run. laiitcii, to ring (of large belJs). toll. fi'ben, to live ; be alive. ^'eben, «. (-0; -), life. 2c&crool)(, «. (-0), farewdl, adieu, 8eber, «.(-«; — ), k-ather. . Uvicn, to l.iy, put, ])lace, set. iJeOrer, m. (-5; — ), teacher, master. leid)t, light, e.isy ; easily, readily, [fib (.only used as />red. with feiil and tl)im), sorry, grieved ; CS ift, ii tftiit mir — , I am sorry, [eibcn (118), to suffer; an Ctiua^ — , to suffer from anything. U'ibcr, alas! unfortimately! (eiOeit (120), to lend, eeiften, m. (-0; -), (shoe- maker's) last, leifteii, to ai;com])lish. ycttion', / (-en), lesson (ernen, to Larn, study. tefen(i8i\ to read, t'efcn, n. (-§), (net of) read. ing. letjt, last, final. J:^eilte, //. {no sint: ), p("r>i)le, persons. ?trf)t, ;/. (-e§ ; -er and -c), light. Heb, dear. i'\ihi,f. love, affection; — 511. love of. liebc'i, to love, licber {ravi/>. of^exn); conj., rather ; iaj gef)C — , I prefer to walk. Sieb, V. (-e§; -er), song. nei-,eit (i3i ; fein, l^abcn), to lie ; be ; be situated, tint, left. linfe-, to (or on) the left, loben, to praise. «odft, «. (-eo; ^-'er), hole. Sbffel, .-.■.•. (-§; =-), spoon. Sp^eniuiii, HI. (-§), Pame of an op«ra by W*»jnar VOCAnULARY. 4IS loo, loose, slack; juad ift — ? what is the m.itter ? ItJfcii, 1(1 free, redeem ; ciii -IMHn —, buy a ticket. Iooipriii,ii'ii (144 ; foiii; niif + (i(i.), to spring uiiori, leap upon. iJouile,/ (-ii'j), I.oiiisa. iibiue, tn. (-11; -11), li,.n. XlitCiiDii), VI. (-0), Louis. Vlift,/ (^'e), air, .ntmosi.horo. liifliMl (i,!ai, 111. (-C'j or -en), May. Wal, M. (-eo; -e), time (oc- casion); jiim let^toi: — , for the last time. ntaleii, to paint. Hialer, ;;/. (-0; — ), painter. aJin(ci-ci',_,/;(art of) painting. man, /iron., one, we, you, they, people ; — fiiflt, they say, people say it is said. mand}ev, maiutc, mand)e§, adj. and pron. , many a. aUaitgcl, in. (-5), want. Wami, m. (-C5; '•'pr), man. IViaiitef, in. (-i; ^), cloak, m.-iHtle. SJhirflareto, / (- •|'^), M,n.ri;a- ret. SJfarie.y; '-n'\. Alary. llliivt, / (-), mark (a coin ^ io(j Pfennig or about 25 cents). I'iintt, ;//. (-fo ; "c), market. ni'H}d)icrcn (fcin or hat'en), to march. Wnr5, ;;/. (-c:.), March. yjhifcvil, //., measles. DJatl;;'iiinti{,/, mathematics. ^Intvofc, I//, (-n; -n), sailor. ailaiic-,/. ("c), mouse. *0!cl)l, n. (-00), flour. mcl)V, more; nidit — , no longer, not now. inchrerc, several ; nu'lu'dor., several things, a good deal. meljrtnal'j, several times. iiieibCH (120), to avoid. iticilo, / (-11), mile (der- ma n), league. inoin, uu'tno, inoiit, my. ineiiie (hor, Pio, bno), i ne. incineil, to think, be of opi- nion, suppose, niean ; ba§ foUtc id) — , I should think so [emphatic) . iiicinetiiu'iicii, (lun) incim't- loillcii, for my sake; for all I care. meiiiiiU'(bi'i', bii\ bao), mine. iUicinuiiii,,/ (-C11), opinion. lltcift {suf>erl. of uii'l), most ; nm — en, most, most of all. 'JJicifter, ;;/. (-0 ; — ), master. melfeii (124), to n)ilk. Weiubie', /. (-n), melody, tune ; air. a'ieiU]e,_/; (-n), great quantity or number. iUlenfd), ;;/. (-C11 ; -oil), a human being, man ; per- son ; //. , mankind, people. mcfien (181), to measure. aifcfftr, n. (-0 ; — ), knife. DJietilll', n. (-eo; -c), metal. luieten, to rent. Wild!./ milk. Itlillioit', A (en), million. SDiinutc, y: ( n), minute. I liiiituteiijeiflcr, ///. (-<5; — ), I minute-hand. j mil {fiat. 0/ ill)), (to) me. ntit (46), with ; by (in niulti- ))lication). ''.liittan, ;;/. (-eo; -e), mid- day, noon ; ^11 — fffen, to dine. Dtittrtii'C'efieii, n. (-0 ; — ), • dinner. lltitti'ii, in the n)iddle or midst of; — im 'iLUiitei', in the middle ot winter. I'fittmod), .n. (-eo), Wed- nesday. nii3ilCll (i(/i-2o2; preference, liking), to be able ; may ; likt ; id) man ba'5 iiid)t, 1 do not like that; ic^ m5d)tc, 1 .should like. minilid), possible ; bao ift iici'ii — . that is very pro- bable. IKoiiavd)', in. (-en ; -en), monarch. 5UJo'nat, /;/. (-eo; -e), month. I'(0nt0ii, m. (-5; -e), Mon- day. lUof(]eii, ;;/. (-0; — ), mor- ning; sititen — /good mor- ning; he's — >3 {or moi'; lieno), in the morning. niovneii, to-morrow; — friU), to-morrow morning. lltiibe, tired, weary. ■Blithe, y. trouble; iiidtt bcr — lucrt, not worth while. aiiiit)le, /. (-It), mill. multipliuereit, to multiply. iUitfit', f. music. titiififalilcf), musical. miiffen (196-202; necessity), to be obliged or forced, must. iUlut, VI. (-eo), mood, cou- rage, spirit ; miv ift fc^Iedtt su — e, I fee! ill : frohejt — eo, cheerfully. a'iiittev, f. ("), mother. I % m 11 ■* 4i6 VOCABULARY. 9t. nac^ (^6), after; according to J by (of time-piece) ; past (of hour of day) ; to (before proper names of places); — ^aufc, home. 3la(i)ba\; m. (-i and -n; -i\), neighbour, ttac^bcin', cpnj., after. nacf»aii)i'ii (i88; fein), to go after ; go or be too slow (of a time-piece). SnacOmittiisi, >«. (-eS ; -c), af- ternoon ; bed — S, in the af- ternoon. ?lac()iiclr,/ (-en), news, nflcfift (super/, o/ml)), next, Kadifte, w. (ad/, subst.), fel- low-creature, neighbour. nac^fteiiS, shortly, soon, very soon. 9lac^t, / (-^e), night, not), (udt)er, \\M)\\), neav S^ii'K, / , nearnesd ; neigh- bourhood ; ill mciiiev — , near me ; in my neighbour- hood. Stame, /«. (-ii3 ; -n), name, title. notiiv'Iirf), naturally, of course, I suppose, nebcit (65), beside, besides; near, alongside of, by. Itebft (51), together with, in- cluding. 9Jef(e, m. (-it ; -n), nephew. nef)mcii (167), to take; fid) in Sldjt — , to take care, be- ware, neiii, no. jteiuuMi (99), to call, name. ^<:ttO,net(com>nercia/Urm). JiCii, new. neulid), lately, the other day, not long ago. tieuiUoOalb, eight and a half. nidjt, not; — iiicljv, no lon- ger: -TO(i!}r? is (it, etc.) not (so)? nlcf)t9 (indec/.), nothing. ntc, never. iJiteberlnnbc (bic), //., The Netherlands, nie'nirtiib, nobody, no one, no person, not anybody, etc. nod;, still, yet, even ; — cin, one more, another; — ct = luild, something (anything) more ; — einmol, over again ; — [)eiite, before the end of the day, before the day is over; — immcv, up to the present time, still; — uor uicvj^crjii stagcii, only a fortnight ago. iHorb'eiieii&nfjn, / (-en), Northern-Railway, lilitiii, necessary. ^noDcmber, ;«. (-S), Novem- ber. 9Ili'niero, «. (-§), number, mir, only. just. 3ilifi,/C'c), nut. iiil^Hc^, useful. o. oD, whether, if. obcii, above, up-stairs ; nacT) — , upward, obalctd)', although, pbcr, or. Dfcn, })j. (-0; ^), stove, offcn, open Dffi,iicv',w.(-C'3;-c), officer, bffiicn (lid)), to open. oft (^ci), often, free, .ntly. C'!;cim, ;«. (-cS ; -c), uncle. oOiie (34), without; but for. Dilfel, w. (-§; —), uncle. ^Hilnft, m (-eg ; -"e), palace, ^'rtiuoffcl, ;«. (-3; -u), slip- per. 'I'npicr', «. (-e6;-e), paper. ';-ini"t, w. (-c'3; ^c), [-ope. i'luio-', «. (.I'll _) Par paffeiib, fit, suitable. Pfeifen(ii8), to whistle. VknniQ, m. (-e9; -e), f,!h, one hundredth part of a mark), penny. ~;=fnb, «. (-C8; -e), horse. ■;!ferbc()Qf)ii, / (-en), tram, way, tram; street- cars, horse-cars. i«fIaume,/(-n), plum. Pfteaeit (7m»/C'), to attend to; to be accustomed, wont ; — (strong, A^Y>. I.), toprac- tise, e- ercise. i'fiinb, «. (-C3; -e), pound. %i)movW,/. (-„), philo. sophy. %[an, m. (-0 ; -c or "e), plan, design. -;:ianct', m. (-en; -en), planet. %\<\%, nt. (-eg; ^c), place; — nef)mcn, to sit down, be seated. t. SAiff, H. (-09 ; -f), ship, vessel. Sitilb, «. (-co; -ci), sign- board. «(tilbfr5tc,/ (-11), torioise. fctiiiircii (App. L.), to Hay. 3(f)liul)t, / (-fit), battle. fAloftn (188), to sleep; firt) — Iciu'lt, to retire to rest, Ro to l)ed. S(f)(ufio(f, w. (-eo; ^'e), dressing-gown. Scblaf'jimiticv, «. (o; — ), bedroom. fAlaflCii (18^,), to beat, sjrike. fAlcrfit, bad; badly. fcl)leid)cii (i 18 ; fcin), to slink, sneak, frfllcifcii (118), to sharpen, grind. fAleificii (App. L.), to slit. fc^Iieficii(i23), to lock, shut, close ; conclude, finish, fc^liinm, bad. fc^linflcii (144), to sling. Sdjlitteii, tn. (-3; — ), sleigh. ©c()(itt'fd)ulj[aufcn, «. (-3), (act of) skating. ©d^Iofi, «. (-en. (-0), snow. fd)ncibcn(ii8), to cut; reap; ficl> In bit j^anb — , to cut one's hand. ' SAneibfr, »«.(-); — ), tai- i lor. i fifineifn, to snow. I fdincU, quick ; quickly. 5d)llClljUtl, w. (-i'4; "c), express-train, fcflon, ilre.idy, as early ,is, re.idily, easily, indeed; — IrtnjU', for a long time (past), fcftbn, fine, beautiful, hand- some. cdionlH'it, / (-CM), beauiv. 3il)ottc, III. (11 ; -11), Scotch- man, jiiliniibcii (.App.I..^, to screw. fd)rccfCM (1(17), to be sf.irtled. j fd)rci(H'ii (ijo), to write (to, I rilll -\- ,/,(. i>//>frs.). I fdncicH (lio), to cry, scream, \ shout. I fcl)vcttcii(ii8; fcin), to stride, step, st.ilk. ! .rdiriftftcUcr, in. (-5; - ), writer, author. Scbiitt, tit. (-C'3; -c), stride, sto]), iiace. 3d)u'licit, ;//. (-0), .Schubert (derman musician). 5d)ul), III. (-c<3 ; -c), shoe. 5dmlb,/, guilt; (-on), debt; idmlb aw etiuivj fein, to be to blame for anything. 3d)ulc, / (-n), school. wAiilcr, ;«. (-«; — ), puiiil, scholar, school-boy. 3d)uftcr, tit. (-0; — ), shoe- maker, cobbler. )d)iittcln, to shake, fdnuad) (^'cr), weak, infirm. Sdjiuadie, / (-n), weakness, infi;mity. I 2d!atrtiicr, m. (-0; -"), bn.- | ther-in-law. I 3rt)miiHic, y: (-11), swallow, fdiminoii (App. I,.), to fester. fd)iv)iu-j ("ci), black. fdjrociflfnd.'o), to be »ilent, keep silenie. 5d)tiici|UMI, M. (-0), keeping siliiuT, (iict of) Nilence. 3rt)iitci< (6ic, A',//, bcv 3d)uiciO, Switzerland. fd)U)cUcn(iJ4; feini, to swell, fdmicv, heavy, hartl, .lirtkuli. fAiDcrlid), !v)nllv, scarcely. 3d)U)cftci, /; (-|^), sister. fd)n>jmmcn (ij.s), to swim. rdJiuimmcn, n. (-.>), swim- ming (act of). fdm>iiibcn(i44\ to v.inish. iMmiiiijIcin 1 14), toswing ; fill) - , to le.»i), hound. fd)iui)ren {\\,i), »o swear. fd)iuill, .ultry, close. 2; -en), hike. 3ccvcifc,y; (-11), voyage. 3eiiclid)iff, //. (-C'j; -e), sail- ing-ve.ssel, ship, felicn (181), to .see, perceive; look, behold, fclir, very, very nuich, ex- ceedingly, fcin, feinc, fein, his, its, one's, fein (5.>; fein), \o be; (<« fj/c.r.), to be, have. feit (4(1), since; — uiann, since when, ' 'v long; — adit IrtjU'ii, I : a week past, feitbem', amj., since, felbft, self; even, fenben (90), to send. 3eri)iette, / (-n), table- napkin, fe^cit, to set, i)ut, place; fid) — , to seat one's self, sit down, fid), pron. refl. aa: and dat., one's self, himself, herself, itself, tliem.selves; to liiin- .self, themselves, etc. ; re- (/'/•r., one another. fie, she, it; h: r, it ; they them. 3ie (/or bu attU il)i), you. VOCAHULARY, 419 flebfii, seven. eieli'eiucl, «. (o; — ), se- venih part, ficboii (i2\), 111 In.il. (SillH'V, «. ('J), silviT. flllrteil(i44), losing. ftllfcil (14.) ; iiili), to sink. finncii (i3«), to iitlvci. fi(|cn(«8i), toMt. SdiUU', ///. (-It; -It), slave. Stlliuartb, «/. ( i'(i ; -c), enu-- ralcl. Jo, so, thus, in suih a man- ner, iiiiietd (;/«/ iniiisiiih-ii in the apodosis to a condi- tio>i,ilil,tii.u')\ --olu'it, just, just now; — eiit, eiiic, ciit, Kllcil ,1. 'obitlb, as soon ;is. ^ofort, ininu'di.itcly, ilircctly. fOrtiU', evi-n. eollii, HI. (-fJ; "0), son. old)(er), adj. and proH., SUC'll. 6olbiU', ;//. (-cit ; -on), sol- dier. folli'ii (i(/)-202 ; duty or obli- gation), to lie in duty boiuid, be to; shall; be s.nid. eoimuof, ///. (-'3 , — ), sum- mer. Joiibi'Vil {after mxaiives on- ly), but. Soiiiinbciib, ///. (-e'j ; -c), .Saturday. Sonne, y: (-11), sun. oonntrtfl, m. (-c>5; -e), Sun- day. foiift, else, otherwise; — nod), any more, any other, any besides. fonftifl, other, different. Sophie,/. (-U0), .Sophia. forrt'faltii^, careful; care- | fully. I fptlt, late. I — ju'lten, i.S8), ' to take 4 walk, go for a ' walk, go walking; — fal)« |t*(^fn (167), to sti ren (i8()), to go for a drive. SpiVMCi'tianrt, m. (-co; "c), walk; otmn — Miiu1)eii, to take a walk. Spert, w. ( CO), Inicn. fpciiMi (120), to spit. cpeijefai-tf, / (-11), bill oi fare. fpcifen, to eat, dine. j Spevlinn, ui. ( cs; -e), s|)arrow. I fpielen, to play. I ipinnen (15S), to spin. fplcifieu (.App. I..), to split. I opfailio, / (-11), language. 3pina)tiUent', «. (-t''5;-<), talent for (learning) lan- guages. Spiad)'ftnbinm, «.(-<}; -ten), linguistic study. fprecben (1^)7), to speak, say, tell ; to sjieak or talk to or with. «piert)en, «. (-«S), speaking (act of), speech. Sprtdiiuoit, II. (-e'S; "cr), jmiverb. fptieffon (123), to sprout. fpriniu'it (144; fein), to spring, leap, jump. St. H^o'ieit^, ;«., St. Law- rence. Stunt, m. (-C'j; -en), state. Stabt,/. Ct), town, city. Stabt'thov, fi. (-eo; -c), t(>wii-i;ate, city-g.ite. Stabt'iil)i-, /. (-en), town- clock. Stillil, ;;/. (-eo), steel. 5tanb, »i. (-ci ; "e), stand; condition ; \\{ — e (onintcn, to be completed, be done ; ini — c fein, to be able, be in a position to. ftUft ("cr), strong, powerful; severe. ftiUt'finben (i.h), to take place, happen. 167;, to sting, ;tc(fen (App. I-.), to stick. ftelKn (1.S6; fein or Ijaben), to stand, be; be nituated. ftcl)len (167), to steal. ! fteitien (uo; fein; aiif + '/(I.), to climb, mount, ascend , descend, gel down or off, alight. Stelle, /. (-11), place, s|H)t. , ftcUen, to put, pKice, set (up- I right), fteilien (159; fein), to die. ftiebeit (.App. L.), to scatter, ftill, still ; (piiet. Stintnte, / (-n), voice. \ ftinfen (App. L.), to stink. j Storf, m. (-eo; "e), stick, j cane. ftiJren, to interrupt, di.sturb, j trouble, ffofien (iMH), to pu.sh, kick, strike, bump, knock. Stiafte, / (-n), street, road, ftveiiten (118), to stroke, ftreiten (ii«), to quarrel, ftrcnjl, severe; severely. Stricb, HI. (-C'J; -e), .stroke, dash ; etn — bnvc^ bie ;)(ect)nnn(j, disappojntmei::. Strom, w, (-e<3; "e), stream, current. Strnntpf, ;«. (-69; "e), stocking. Stilcf, HI. (-eo ; -e), piece. Stiicfdjen, ;/. (-0; — ), little piece, ni'.irsel, bit. Stnbent', /«. (-ett : -en), student. Stnbinm, «. (-3; Stubion), study, ftnbievcn, to study. Stnbieien, //. (-0), studying (act of). Stnl)l, m. (-c-, n. (-c5 ; "cr), valley. atialev, in. (-3 ; — ) dollar. a;()at, /. (-C11) deed; ex- ploit, achievement. t^iuicii, to thaw. %\)fi, in. (-0) tea. l;^em|e,/., Thame*. ZW, n. (~eS; -e), gate, gateway. if)oi-, 111. (-en; -en), fool. 2I)roM, in. (-co; -e), throne. t()yn (196), to do. i-()iir(e),/. (-n), door. Xier, n. (-e§; -e), beast, animal. 1\\i\), in. (-e3 ; -e), table. Jitcl, «/. (-'3; — ), title; mit — , with title (printed on the back). Joc()tcr, / ("), daughter. 2bc[)tci-d)cn, n. (-0; — ), lit- tle daughter, lorontoer, adj., (of) To- ronto, tot, dead, tbtcn, to kill, till )e idle, lazy, indolent. tiajcn (186), to carry, tl'illirisl, sad, ■sorrowful, me- lancholy. Iriuiiinj,/. (-en), marriage (-ceremony), trcffeii (167), to hit, happen upon, meet with; hit upon, fall in with. tvcit'cu (120), to drive. 3;i-ci.ip^', / (-n) stairs, stair- case, tvetcn (iSi), to tread, step, trcn, faithful, true, tiiefcn (123). to drop, drip, trintcr (144), to drink. 2iinfcn, n. (-6), (act or ha- bit of) drinking. Xi'iul'i',elt), 11. (-C'j; -ei), driiiking-money, gratuity, tip. tvo^j (223), in spite of. tfol^bcni' !uao, in spite of what. SiLrni/tenboIb, m. (-ec; -e), drunkard. Ind), n. (-eS ; "cr and --:), cloth. Ju'flenb, /. (-en), virtue. n. Ht'er, «,(-§; — ), evil. iiOcf (65), over, above, a'^, through, by way of; I;eute — brci iffiod)en, this day three weeks. iibeil;anpt', in general, gene- rally ; as a matter of fact, at any rate. ii'benuor(3cn,the day after to. morrow, ii&enc'oen, to persuade, iiberfc^'cn, to translate ; in§ 2>eutfd)C — , to translate in. to German. ii'tcrjicljcr, in. (-S , — ), overcoat, iibrii], remaining, left over; bu'j lUu"' 'C, the remainder, what is loft; — Ulciden, to be remaining or left, iibiinj, / (-en), exercise; practice. Ufcr, n. (-3; — ), bank, shore. \\{)x, f. (-on), clock, watch ; UMt uiCf — , at four o'clock ; luie uiel — ift co? what o'clock is it ? linmog'fid), impossible ; id) faun — , I cannot possibly. Un'vcd;t, n. (-1-6), wrong; — (jabcn, to b2(ii. the) wrong, iinfcr, nnfcrc, nnfer, our. iintcn, below, down-stairs, nnta- (65), under, beneath, below ; among; — bcv 3iee aionm.i eiiuUica^S, in the r^ign of Elizabeth, untei-ncl/mcn (167), to un. dertake. Untciiicl/incn, n. (-S), enterprise, undertaking. Un'tci)d;icb, m. (-e3 ; -c> difference. Un'iuaOflicit, / (-en), ud truth, f,iV 'lood. un'iuaOvfdjcinlic^, improb* ble. Vocabulary. 4^t im'iceft i^en.), not far from. Ui/jufriebcn, discontented, dissatisfied, ur'teilcit, to judge. U. f. in., abbrev. for unb fo Tuejter, and so forth, etc. O. aSatcr, m. (-§; "), father. oeiDcvgeii (159), to conceal, hide. uerDrcniteii C99), to burn, con- sume with fire. oerbevbcii (159), to spoil (iMtr.) ; — {iveak), to spoil {tr.), injure. oerbvicjini (123), to vex. SScrciiiijten Stnatcii (bie), pL, The United States. oerge()Cii§, in vain. oti-fleltcit (159), to requite, reward. oerijcffeii (iSi), to forget. S8eri3nii,jcit, «. (-c), pleasure, dcliglit, amusement. S3evI)iiltnio, «.(-fe5 ; -fe), cir- cumstance. Dei-I;ci'iatcu (fici) mit), to marry. oerfaiifcn, to sell ; bicjcS ^an^j ift ju — , this house is for sale. J)ei-Iafieii (iSS), to leave, de- sert, quit; fid; — auf (+ ace), to rely upon, depend upon. oer'eibcn, to render disagree- able, spoil. oerletcu, to hurt, wound tKrnercii(i3i), to lose. SSerluft, in. (-65 ; -e), loss. ocnnicteii, to let, rent. cermittelft {gen.), by means of. «)evreifen, to go on a jour- ney. oerreift, absent on a journey. tJerfammelit, to collect, as- semble. oerfcfiretBen (120), to pre- scribe. oevfcOiuenben, to squander, waste. ccrfcljiuinben (144; fein), to disappear, vanish. t)Ci')prcd)en (iC7),to promise. ui'rftet)cn (:86}, to under- stand ; fid; — aiii (-}- ace), to be a judge (of). ucrftoiDcii, deceased. ucvfud;cii, to try. SSenuanbte, >«. and/, [adj. subst), relative. oerjei^eii (120 ; dat.), to par- don, excuse. SBerjeiOuiu], /. (-en), pardon, forgiveness; uiit — Dittcii, to beg pardon. uei-jiueifclii, to despair. Setter, in. (-'J ; -n), cousin. uiel ;.iici;i, ineift), much, many, a great deal of; luic — UI;r, what o'clock. uiel(cid;t', perhaps, posi:bly. uielmal, uielmal'j, many times, frequently, often. uier, four. Sicrtcl, «. (-§; — ■), fourth part, quarter. SSicrtelftiiii'be, y: (-n), quar- ter of an hour. DierjcOn, fourteen; — 2:age, a fortnight. aSioIouccU', n. (-e§; -e), vio- loncello. aSoflel, m. (-3; ^), bird. OoU {gen. or con), full. UCUeii''ocil,tofinish,complete. DOit (46), of, from, by, about, concerning. cor (65), before, of, in front of, ago ; — ad;t 'Jagen, a week ago. oorbei, over, past. oovDeicjcljen (188), to go by, pass by. BorDereitcn (fidi), to prepare (for, ouf + ace). corfc^ren (186 ; fetn), d-ive up to the door, etc. rorgefjeu (188; fein), to go (or be) fast (of a time- piece), Dov'gefiern, the day before yesterday. uor[)abeu, to contemplate, in- tend, 3}orhang, m. (-e3 ; ^e), cur- tain. uovij, preceding, last. oorloufi.5 {adv.), temporarily, for the present. oorlefcit (181 ; -f dat. of per' son), to read to. aSormiiiib, w. (-eS ; -"er), guardian. aSovrat, w. (-eS; ^e), stock, provision. O0rftd)tij, cautious, prudent. SBorftabt,/ ('e), suburb. tJOiftcUcu, to present, intro- duce. Dortcil^aft, advantageous. ooriiber, past. ooriibcvflicfecn (131 ; fein), to flow past. ooriiberge^eit (188; fein), to go past, pass by ; om ^aufe — , to go by, go past, the house, oorjiei^en (131), to prefer nja^fen (186), to grow. SBagen, m. (-<> ; — ) waggon, carriage. jodgen (131, B.), to weigh. rod^len, to choose, select. roafir, true, real; nid;t — ? am (I, etc.) not? is it not so? luafiren, to last, coi.tinue. rod^venb (^*«. ; 223), during; while. SBa^v^eit,/, (-en), truth. tDal)rfc^)einli(l& {adv.), pro- bably. '11 ' ¥' V.n 422 VOCAIJULARY. I SBaifcnr;au^, «. (e?; ^n), otj)han-asyluni. aajalb, »/. f-cQ; ^cr), forest, wood. SJanb,/ (■■e),^vall. aBanb(e)rer, >«. (-0 ; —I, tra- veller. wann '< when > il)avm( \n), warm, luartcn (mif + «-,-.), to wait for. luavum, why, wherefore. inaS, what, that which, which, that; — fiir ein, citie, ciii, what kind of a, what, toafctjen (186), to wash. Sffiaffer, «. (-.3 ; -), vsater; ill — , by water, roeben (131), to weave. iued}fel[)aft, changeable, toecfen, to wake, awake, waken. SaSed'ufii-, /. (-en), alarm- clock. • toebev, neither ; — . . . noc^, neither , . . nor. ffieg, »t. (-e'3; -c), way, road ; fic^ nuf ben — macfien, to set out, be off. iDCgen (^e». ; 223), on account of, because of, for the sake of, for. SBeib, «. (-C'i; -cr), woman; wife. WetCl)en(iiS), to yield, iffieibe, / (-11), pasturage, pasture. SSdl)ltnd;tCii, //., Christmas, tucil, because. ''Meiw, m. (-co ; -c), wine. tUCilteil, to weep, cry. aBeintartc, / (-it), wine- card, toeifc, adj., wise. Sa}eife,/.(-n), manner, mode, way ; aiif bicjc — , in this way. njetfcii (120), to point out., show. lueiji, whitp. lucit, .far. lucitcr, farther, further. aBei^cii, ,n. (-'3 ; -), wheat. U)cU(;er, luctdic, iuc(rf)c«, rel. pro'i., who, which, that; ititcrrogaih'e mij., which? w hat ? ; — , adj. {in exda- nnitions), what a ! wliat ! ~i^>i'It, / (-C11), world; a.if bi'v — , in the world. lucm, dat. 0/ uicr, to whom ? iuenbcii(y9), to turn; fid}—, to api)ly (to, <\\\ -f ace). lueni.ii, little, few. mciut, when, whenever, as soon as; if; — and), even if. IDCr, who; he who, who- ' ever; who? lUfibcn (159), to sue. merbcit (159), to become, grow; {as mix. of tfie pass- ive voice, 112-114), to be; — aiiS, to become of. luerfen (159), to throw. a.^CVt, «. (-e§ ; -c), work, lueffcii, whose ; whose ? luesr^alb, wherefore? why? better, «. (-0), weather; bet biefein — , in this weather, lutbcr {ace. ; 34), against, contrary to. luic, how; how?; — fclu' audj, however much, luicbcr, agani, once more. uiie'bcrfef)cii (181), to see again, meet again. ^ilMc'ooifcl;cn, «.(-o), meeting again ; oiif — , good-b •• till we meet again, luicgcu (131), to weigh. ilMlIjCim, m. (-3), William. aBillc, ;;;. (-no), will ; wish ; urn. . . uiilleit {gen.), for the sake of. i«iub, m. C-C'3 ; -;'j, wi'id. luinben (144), to whid. loinbtg, windy. 2Bi»ter, ;«. (-<5; •-), winter, lotr, we. unrflid), adv., really, truly. iLMrtiii, / (-nen), hostess; landlady, niifien (,96), to know {said of knowledge); \\\i)i bag id) luit^te, not that I know of -JvMiienfd)aft, f (-en), sci- ence, unffentlirf;, knowingly. U'OV where; where? llJod)c,y:(-n), week. U'Ol)!, pred. adj., well {of hciith); ntir ift nid)t — ju I'iiit, I do not feel well; — , adv., well, then, indeed, I suppose ; ja — , yes, to be sure. iuol;nen, to dwell, live, reside. ■i8oI)nnnci,/ (-en), dwelling, house, residence, uiollcn (196-202), to will, de- sire, wish, want, intend, mean, like; — Sje ein ®Iao SKaffev? will you have a glass of water ? luornii, whereon, on which, on what, of what, iporauf, whereon, on which, for which, on what. movauS, wherefrom, from what, of what. )UDvin, wherein, in which, in what. ilUu't, n. (-cS ; '=ei- and -e), word. nioriUu'i? about what? at what ? over what ? )inmbern (fidi), to wonder, be astonished (at, iibcv -j- acc.) ; c§ uuiiibert mid) {i>n/>ers.), I wonder. Siinfd;, m. (-eo ; ^e), wish. unlnfd)cn, to wish, desire, want ; (MM — , to congra- tulate, wish success. Muxm, m. (-e§; "cr), worm, VOCABULARY. 425 SBurjel, / (-n), root. 2But,/, rage, fury. roUtenb, furious. ja^len, to pay. 3a^n, Ml. (-co; "e), tooth. 3al)nroe^, n. (-eji), tooth- ache. ge^n, ten. Beicfjen, «. (-§ ; — ), sign. jeigen, to show. jeifien (120), to convict. Seit,/ (-?n), time ; ju nUen — en, in all ages. ^ixtxmo^,/. (-en), newspaper. ((crreigen (uS), to tear (to pieces). jerrinnen (158), to vanish, run away (of liquids). jie^cn (131), to draw; pull, take. 3immcr, «. (-§ ; — ), room. JU (46), to, at ; — meitiem Dn!el, to my uncle's ; — berfelben 3tit, at the same time; adv., too; closed, shut. jubringcit (99), to pass, spend (said of time). .^ucfer, m. (-6), sugar. uterft', first, first of all. ^ilfolge {gen. or dat. ; 223), in consequence of, accord- ing to. [fied. jufrieben, contented, satis- 3iig, m. (-e§ ; ''e), train. ^umac^en, to shut, close. jurudbringen (99), to bring back. jurUcfbkibeu (lao; felti), to remain behind; remain at home. jurildf ommen (i67),to return, come back. juriidlegen, to put by, lay up. jufaiumen, together. jufammenftogen (188), to col- lide. 5iif c^icteii, to send to (dat.). jufc^Uejjen (123), to lock up, fasten, shut. 3ioect, vt. (-eo ; -e), aim, ob- ject. jioei, two. jrocitenS, secondly. jioingen (144), to force. jroifdieti (65), between. jrodlf, twelve. ENGLISH — GERMAN. Note. — The government of verbs is given only where it differs from English usage. A. able, ftibig, gefc^icft ; to be — , fbnneii, ig6; tm Staiis be feiii. about, prep, (around), iitn, 34, 226, (a); (the person), bei, 46, 226, {d) ; ixdv., (nearly), ungefdl)v ; etiua, 226, (/'), {c)\ to be — to, im Segrtffe fcin. above, prep., iiber, 65. absent, abiuefenb ; — mind- edly, jerftreiit. abuse, v., miftljnii'bedt. accept, anne^meii, 167. accompany, begletten {tr.). account; on — of, luegen, 223 ', ^alb(eu), ^alber, 223 ; on that — , be§roegen, be5= l^alb. accusation, 2(nflage,y; (-n). accuse (of), auflagen {gen. of thing), befc^ulbigen {gen. of thing). accustomed, geiuofjut ; to be — , bie0eiDo{)n[)eit l)abcn. acknowledge, anerfennen, (99). acquaintance, ^Jefaniitfcbnft, f. (-en); to make the — of, (ennen lerncn. acquit (of), Ioofpred)en (1C7; gen. of thing). act; to — amiss, mi6'()anbe[n. add, abbiercii. address, subst., SMbreffc, f. (-n). address, v., aurebeii. admire, berounbern. advance, oorriicten {intr.). advantage, SSorteil, m. (-e3 ; advantageous, oor'tei(f)aft. advice, ^Itat, m. (-c§). advise, raten (t88; dat.). affair, Sac^e, /, (-n). afraid; to be — (of); ftcf) fiircf)ten (uor -f dat.). after, nac^, 46. afternoon, Ufac^niittag, m. (-e§ ; -e). afterwards, nnd^^er, ^ernac^, baranf. again, roieber, nod^matS. against, tuiber, gegen, 34. ago, Dor (prep, + dat), 65 j 424 VOCABULARY. many years — , nor t)ie[cn 3al)»'eii ; a week — to-day, [;eiiti' uov ac()t Tnu'". agreeable, ninjeiicf)m. ail, fcOtcii; what — s you? wivi fc()lt 3l)tuii? Ebs! ad) ! all(the), nlI,9Ulc«; aller, nlle, allco ; — tile same, ciiii'i'lci. allow, crliiiiOcii((/fA) ; Inficit, i88: to be — ed, hiirieii, 196. Almn (river), ?((mn, /. almost, fiift, bcimilje. alone, alk'iii. alonj?, [iiitij?, cntlniin (223, iS, 19). alphabet, 9llp[)abtt', n. (-eS; -c). already, fcfjon. also, lUld). always, immer. America, Jlmovifa, «. (-0). amiss; to act — , ini|yOnit= belli, 209, amontr, ruiioiigst, iiiitcv, 65. a, an, I'iii, ciiic, ciii. ancient, alt ; the — s, bit' 3(ltcii,/S/. and, imb. anecdote, Hiiefbote, _/. (-it), angry, Obfi' ; be — at, boie feiii niif (+ ncc). animal, Jicv, «. (-cj ; -c). another (a different one), ciit niibi'i't'v; (one more), iiocl) etii, cine, eiii. answer, subst., Slntiuort, /. C-cn). answer, v., aiitiuofteit(rf'rti'.); beaiitiuorteit {ace. of thing, dat. of pers.). answering (act of), Slittioofs ten, «. (-0). ant, 9lmctfe,_/ (-11). any {partitive, 2, 2); irgcnb, ein, cine, cin ; —thing, ir,- g?nb otti'aS, ction^;; — thing but, nid)t§ n)eiiti]cr aI3; pi., tt)el4)e, eintge; not —body, not —one, nfe» manci; not ~, teiit, feiite, feiii. apartment, GJemact), «. (-cS ; -■er). appear, frf;einen, crfdjeincn, apple, ?(ptel, m. (-5 ; -") ; — -tree, JlufcUmiini, in. (-C'3; e). apply to anyone, firf) an jcs nuiiibcit {ate ) lueiibcn, 99. appoint ^ns), cnteniien (99; approval, "ik'ifad, ;«. (-eS). A;n-il, ^^luviC, „/. (-,;,). architect, 3(rd)itoft', m. (-en; -en), arm, Jinn, m. (-C'3 ; -c) ; ~s, pL, ilBanen. army, 3lrmec, / (-n). arrival, "iXwXwmx , f (^e). nrrivc,(intoninten(i67; fi'in). ni-t, .«Mnf;./. ( e). article, Jlrti'fel, vi. (-S ; — ). artillery, Sri'ttHcvic, / ; 0c= fiOiilj, n. (-co). artist, .riiinfllcr, m. (-5 ; _), as(24T, 8-11), alS; mie; fo ; ba; — soon — , foOatb (mic) ; — a, al'3 ; — . . . — , (obeit)io . . . iDictir r.Ici. ascend, anfftetGcn, ftcincit, 120. ashamed ; to be — of, fief) frf)ameit {gen. or iidcr -f aec.). ask, francn (186) ; — for, bitten (181, iim);r)cr(an(icn (nndi). asking questions (act of), i^ra.icn, «. (-0). assert, bcF)niiptcti, assist, beifteOcn (186; fetn ; dat.). astonish ; to be — ed (at), fiit) iDiinbevit (iJDcr -|- ace.). astonishing, cvi'tannenb. at {of locality), in, an, auf, Jtt, 327 (fl) ; {oj time) unt, 511, lu't, 227, (^); {of price) urn, 22', {c); not — all, nai- nidit ; —my brother's, bet met n em syinber; — last, —length, eitblicO. att:ick, ?'., anu'cifen, 118. sri!>st. ,^'( M u'i fi w.(-e§;-e). attempt, suht., Sevfiicl), in. (-^'C ; -c). attendant, »e(ft, m. (e5; ^'e). Hoston, 'i^oftoii, «. (-S); the — train, bcr,!^u(] 0011 (nadi) 3(oftoii. boy, .rtnnOc, m. (-n; -it), brave, tnpfer. bread, ^hpt, «. (-c§ ; -e). break, (ucdjcu (167); — through, ciiiDrcdjcit. breakfast, v., friiEjftiicfcii ; sieist., '^■viil)ftiicf, tt. (-C5). , bridge, SlUiictc,/ (-U). | bring, efiiiiicn (99); f)o[eit; '' to — with one, — along, mttDriucicit; to— in, f)ev= 1 ciitDiiucicu; to — up, fjers j nufOriiis]cit. broad, breit. brother, 5hiibcr, m (-§; "). brother-m-law, ed)ioager, m (-0; -■■). build, bauen. ' building, (SeBaube, «. (-«; j — ); (act of), Sl^auen, «. I (-3). : bullet, ,niioe(,/(-n). burn, brciinen (99; /«/r.); ocrbrctiiien (99; /r. and intr.). business, 0efd)fift, n. (-c? ; -c). business -matter, Wefd)aft§» aitgelegeiif;eit,/ (-eu). but, aber; ndetii (241, i); foitben; {on/y after a tie- gative, 236, R. i). buttrti, .flnopf, m. (-e§; "e). buy, toufcn. buying (action of), .(Taufen, «. (-0). by, 228; (near by), bet (iil)ii, n. (-cS ; "or), cliild, Atiiib, n. (-CO' -or). _ Christinas, 'ilUMl)iuid)tcn, //. i chinch, .^Urdio, _/; (-11). Cinderella, ^.}(fdienputte(, «., ! (-.5). cily, rtilbt, y: ("0). claim to be, lliollcti, 196. clear, tdir. clever, iicfdiicft. climate, ,U(inia, n. (-•5). climb up, biiinufflcttoni. cloak, lUniitel, m. {-?,; "). cl(.ck, Uhr,/ (on), close, jiiiitiuhoii ; \A) iofton, Aiifdiliofjoii, 12;. cloth, ittd), «.(-co; -f or "or). clothes, Jlleiber, « //. {.:cc .Ulcib). cloud, liBolfo,/. (11). coachman, Ahitfrfior. m. (-<3 ; -). coal, Ao\)l(,/. (-1;). coat, ;)locI, m. (-rCi ; "c). coffee, Jluffoo, m. (-§). cold, fuU (-or); to catch — , (id) •ifcilten. I colour ofnrbo, /. ( lO. I combat,. ft a mpf, /«•( 00 ; "0). i come, fommoii (107; fotu); i — in, ^orciiifoiiimcii; — I here, l)ieii)eitomtiicn ; — down, bei .nitcrtommeii ; — out, 1)01- .U'jtoiiimon ; — back, uiriictfommen ; — again, uijooortommon; what isto— , bivriU'iiorftoljoiibi'. coming (a(t of), .Common, «. ! command, 7>., iH'feljleii (167 ; j dat.). • commandment, (^lol'Pt, >r., I (-05 ; -0). ' company, (iSoioKfdnift, /, (oil). complain, fhtai'ii (iilu'r 4- _ ace). complete, uoUi'tcinbii]. concert, .^tOllH'it', u. (-00 ; -0). condition, 'i:g). cool, adj., fill)(. copy, subst., (Srciuphu', «. (-ecS; -c); v., nbf^rcibcit, 120. corner, (S(te, /. (-ti). ] correct, adj., ricfitiii. i cost, v., toftoii (-f. ace. or dat. 0/ person). \ counsellor, STJatiieber, m. (-8; ! ~^- \ Count,j«/v^., Wraf, w. (-en; -en). Countess, (SJvafiii, / (-ncn). country, i*niib, >i. (-05; ^er); in the — , auf botn i'anbe ; man, ^yniior, m. (-u or -0 ; -11). couple, *Vniir, «. (-eo; -e). courtier, .sSijfliiid, m. (-eS ; -0). cousin, iyettev, m. (-0 ; -it), cover, v., bocfeii. create, fd)affen, i85. creditor, WfiiiidiiU'r, w. (-5 ; -). creep, friod)Cii, 123. crime, iPcrbrodien, n. (,-g ; ~). crop, crops, Ciritto, / cry (call), niton, 1,88; (weep), moinon. cup, Tcifjo,/ (-11). curtain, SBortinng, in. (-oo ; cut, )d)noibcn,ii8: — off, nbs fd)itoiboit ; to — one's hand, fid) iit bte .'giaiib fd)iioibon. D. danger, Wcfa[)r, / (-en), dangerous, i]ofaf)Vtid}. dare, fii6 unterfte^en, 186; biiu'on, 196. daughter, Joc^tor, _/; (-). day, Joii, m. (-e§; -e); in broad —light, bet ^eHem ^a.jo. dead, tot. deal ; a great — of, uiel. dealer, .^Miiihlor, m. (-g; -). dear, lieb, teuer. dearly-bought, teiier. VOCABULARY. 427 P decide, intr., \\ij enifd&Iiegen, 123 ; ~(\,aiij., cntjcfiiebdi. defence, aU'vtcibifiunn, /. (-en), definition, iCeftnition, /. (-en), deserve, Bcibienen. desire, 'JSerlanflen, n. (-^ ; -);fcuft,/re). desperate, oerjroeifett. devote, loibmcii. diamond, ^iamant', m. (-S or -in; -cn). dictionary, SBBrterbud^, «. (-e«; "er). die, fterben (159; feiii). difference, V.nterfc^ieb, m. (-eS; -c). difficult, fc^inev. dig, grabeii, 186. diligence, ^-leife, m. (-e§). diligently, fletfeig. dinner, WtttagSefi'en, «. (-S ; -). disagreeable, unaiigeiieljm. disappoint, ciUtdiifd)en. discover, etttbecten. discoverer, Gntbecfev, m. (-§; -). discovery, Gntbecfuug, /. (-en). disgrace, od^anbe, /. (-n). displeased, uiisufiii'beit. dissatisfied, unjufrieben. distant, cntfenit. disturb, ftoreit. diver, ^'andier, »«. (-§ ; — ), divide, teilen. divine, gottlid). do, tOnn (196); (make), ttia= dien ; {as aux. is jwi trans- lated by a separate form ; see 31, R. 3) ; how — you — ? roie ge()t eS ;:3l)nen? doctor, Softer, m. (-8 ; Softo'ren) ; (physician), Sliji, m. (-e-jj-e); that is Dr. B., ba8 ift ber JJoftor dog, .§unb, m. (-c9; -e). dollar, iDaler, tn. (-«; — ). door, Jf)iir(e), / (-en) ; at the — , «. (-8; — ). finish, oollcn'ben : to have — ed (with), fertig Jein (mit); —ed, fertig. I fire, Jeiier, n. (-6;—). I firs:, arij., ber, bie, bo3 crfte; I ail'., jiierft, erftenS ; —of all, jiicvft. fish, ^i)i[), ;«. (-C9 ; -e). fishing, AifujC", n. (-3). fit for, — to, gut ju. five, fiiiif. flatter, fcf)meid)e[n {dat). flatterer, 3d&mcicf)lcr, m. (-3; -). fleet, subsf., ^lotte, /. (-n). floor, rtiiB-'obeii, m. (-§ ; '-). flour, aWefjI, n. (-es). flow, v., flicfjeii, 123, jein. flower, iJhiine, / (-11). fly, flicgeii 131, fciii;— away, uiejfriciicit. follow, fo[.]Cii (iciii ; dat.). foot, Siifi, "I. (-C'j-; ^'c). for, 229, prep, {in behalf of), filr, acc.f 34 i (of purpose) JU, dat., 46; — rjadiug, auin Scfeii; {of past time) feit, (if/.,45; —three days (past), feit brei ingeit; {of fut. time) aiif, ace, 229, {b), 2 ; — three days (to come), nuf brei Sage. forbid, Dei-&ietcn(i3i; dat.). force, jioinjeii, 144 ; to be — d, obliged (to), miiffen, 196-202. ford, %\v:t, f. (-en), forest, SBnlD, m. (-e5; "ev). forgery, aSerfaifdjung, /. (-cii). forget, ocrgeffen, 181. forgive, oerge()cn(i8i; dat.). former, jencr, jene, jene^. fort, rt'cftc,/ (-11). fortieth (part), ajierjtgftel, « fox, ^ut^B, »»». (-e«;«e). Francs, jyranfreicf), «. (-8). Francis, Sronj, m. (-cn3). Fred(dy), ^^itu, m. (-en3). Frederick, J^itebric^, m. (-3) ; Frederick-Street, btc Jyriebridjftrafie. free, frei. freeze, 131, frieren. French, fronjofifc^; —(Ian- guage), i^ranaiififc^, „. (be3 Sranjdfifc^en). fresh, frifcf). Friday, ^reitog, m. (-eS; friend, (^reunb, tn. (-e8 ; -c). friendless, frciinbloS. friendly, frcunblid'. friendship, ^-rennbfc^aft, / (-en). frighten (terrify), erfdjrecfen ; tobe— ed, eifd;rccleii, 167. frog, eyrofd), w. (-co; "c). from {direction), uon, ou3 {dat. ; 46) ; {cause) m. hot, l)ei6. hour, Stuiibe, /. (-11) ; - -hand, Stiiiibenjeiger, m. (-S;-). house, .^aii9, «. (-e9 ; "ei); at your — , bei 5S')iH'it. how, luie ; — do you do ? iDie fle{)t e§ Sfjnen? luie 6efiiibeit Sie fid) ? however, obcr; jebod). howl, fjculcn. human, meiifcl)ltc^ ; — being, ajlcitfcf), «/. (-cit ; -en), hundred, l^uiibcvt ; sttisi., |»uiibert, ft. (-e^; -c). hjnger, ^^unacv, t/t. (-^;. hungry, l&uu(iiig; be — , ^imjer Ijobeit. huntur, OSi'iU'i', ;//. (-0; — ). hunting (act of), .^ageii, «; (-6); (chase) o«rti),/.; go — , nuf bie $^agb gcOcn. huntsman, ^'ifl^'^* ***■ (-^J -)• hurry, (Jile, y! ; I am in a — , id) ['ill in ber(£i(e, ic^ fjabc e3 citicj. hurt, v., uevle^en. husband, SWonn, w. (-C'3; ^er). hussar, ^ufar, >«. (-en or ~§; -en). I. ice, ©is, «. (-e3). idea, S^ee,/., Wcbante, »«. (-n«; -n). idle, fniit, tviige. idleness, idling, ^DhiBiggang, M. (-C'3). if, iwenn; (whether), ob. ignorant, uniuilfcnb. ill, tvanf ; — -health, frf)I?d)te ©efunbljeit,/ i illness, .(Iranfbeit, /. (-en), iniagiiiii, iiili ( . jumi), fpiingcn, 144; _ down, f)erunterfprtnflen, Ijiniintcrfpringeji. June, %\\'\\\, m. (-0). just, gerabc, eben ; — now, foeben, — as, ebcnfo. justify, redt)tfertigen. K. kick, ftogen, i83. kind ; what — of, nja9 filr (ein, einc, cin); of many — s, Jelcrlei; adj., gnt, rennblid); to be so — as ; to, )o gnt feiit unb. j kindue:,s, GJiite, OUtigfett, 5rcunblic{)fcit, / king, Mijnig, m. (-es; -e); King-street, bic flBnig^ ftvaf.e. kingdom, ^Bntgreid;, it. (-eo; -0. knife, TOeffer, «. (-s;— ). knock down, I)eninterfd)la= gen, 186. know {0/ acquaintance), fen; nen, 99; {of knmvledge acquired by mental effort) luiffcn, u)h\ — how, tLin= lien, 196. knowledge, JtenntniS, f. f-fe), SKiffenfdjaft,/ (-en). known, bctunnt. bio, biio|cU)e;in— , biiiin; lady, 35ame, / (-11); young for — , bnfiir ; of — , bn= uon , with — , bamit ; to - , bnjn. its, /oM. adj., fein, \X)x. itself, eS felbft. J. T .nius, ^^atob, m. (—j). January, viannav, m. (-0), Julu!, ^\0l!rtin'/ ;;,-, (Ci). journey, Sieife,/. (-11). — (Miss), j^rdiilcin, n. H;-). lake, ©ec, >«. (-§; -en), landscape, i.'anbfd)aft, f. (-en), language, Sprnc^e, / (-n). lantern, JiJuteine, f. (-n). large, gvoft (^er, iui3tit). last, te§t, I'orig; at — , enb» \\<^; v., bnueni. late, fpat. 'ately, neultc^, fUrijIic^. Latin, subst., fiatein', «. (-3). lattLT, the — , jeiicr. laugh, lncl)cn; — (at), lac^eii (gen. or iiber + ace.) ; he —8 at (makes sport of) you, er moc^t fic^ iibcr ®ie ?uftifl. lawyer, SMboolat', m, (-eii; -en), lay, legeii. lazy, fnul, trtiac lead, SOIci, «. (-e3). lead, v., fU()VCli. lead-pencil, SBkiftift, m. (-c^: -e). leaf, SBIatt, «. (-C9; "ei). learn, lenicii. learned, uifj., sii'lcljit. learning (action of), I'ernen, «. (-^). least; at — , luciiigfteiio. leave, laffcii, i88 ; — behind, .desert, abandon, oerlaffcn ; — out, aii'3(affeit. left, lint; be — , iibiii] blei= bcii. leg, tScm, ,t. (-eo; -c). lemonade, Simoiiabc,/ (-n). lend, lei^eit, 120. lesson, 2[ufflalu',/.(-n); Vcf^ tion, _/ (-C11). let, lofjen, 188, letter {0/ alphabet), «uc^i ftade, >«. (-110; -ti); (epis- tie), SBfief, «». (-C3; -e). liar, I'liancv, m. (-5; — }. library, 53ibltotf)et',/ (-ett). lie (be recumbent), (iegeii 181; — down, fief) tiinleiK tt. life, iiJcben, n. (-'o ; — ). liSiliten (flash), Dli^eii. hghtning, ^ri^, -.v. (-co ; -e). hke, mbijeii, 196-202 ; gefu hiUicii, 24; I should—, iff) mi.H()tc (ijcrn) ; to — to learn, gem !er!!!'it ; I — music, id) bill ciii rtvetmb UOil Dhlfif ; how do you — VOCABULARY. London ? tuie gcfdUt ^\\\\t\\ fionbjttV lily, fiilie, / (-n). Limburg, adj., iiimbmger, lion, SiiJipc, (-11; -11). listen to, anl)bi cu (/r.). literature, l.'itefatuv', f. little (of size), ilcin ; (0/ quautit}^ U'Cllig. live, lebcii; (dwell), looljneii. living, Ic'bciib, (ebeii'big. locality, QJogciib, /. (-en). London, i^ionboii, n. (-&); adj., iioiiboiiev. long, rtrt>'., laiii] ("ci); adv., laitfleC'r); have you been here — ? fiiib 2ie fc(}oit langc Ijiev 'i hj has not been here for a — time, ix tft (aiige utAt bier goiue; fen; three months — er, nod; brei llioimte ; no — er (///., not more), iiiibt iitebr. long for, v., fid) fcl)iieii luul). look for, fiidH'it, fiicbeii iiad); — like, aii':.fel;cii (uije or tliul)), iSi ; it — s (appears, seems) like rain, Cj fie()t nac^ ;)(egeit au'3 ; — up, f)inaiiffct)en, i8i. lose, Devlieren, i.^i. lost, uevloreit. loud, — ly, Uiut. Louisa, Snuifey: (-ltd), love, v., lieben. lower, iiiiter, niebev (adjs.) 431 M. magnificent, vrdd)tig. majesty, lliajcftdt', / (-eii^ make, Mad)eii. man, Dinnii, m. (-es; "ei); — (human being), aJJettfd), tn. (-en; -cii); —kind, i)!eilfd;, HI. ; men (soldiers), 3oIbiitcn ; little —,a«ami= lein, n. (-3; - -). manikin, \'.l(iiiinleiil, ;/. (-0; -)■ manner, ajeife; in that — , auf bie iCeife. many, uiele ; — a, — a one, titand;er, mand)c, miuic^e«. March, Didrj, m. (-e«). Margaret, TOaigmete, / I (-n«). market, iUJarft, m. (-eg; I '-'e). I marriage (-ceremony), Jruu. ling, /. (-rn). j married, ueibeiratct. i marry, f)Ctrateii, j)crbeiriUen ! (fid) mit). marsh, 5uinpf, >». (-es; "e). M.mmer. mile, Jlcilt,/.(-n), milk, SOi Ihi). /. mine, meiiier,ii!Mne,meine9; bcr, bie, bn« uieiiic; ber, bie, bn mciiiigc. minute, TOimite,/ (-n); — •hand, 5Jhiuitenjciijer, m. (-« ; --). misfortune, UiiijIUcf, «. (-Ci). Miss (young lady), Srauletn, '«•(-«; -). mistake, ^e^ler, vi. (-9; -). mock, fpottci; (^*/f. or iibn' ■\- ace). moisten, beiicjjcn. moment, *iluaciibU(f, m. (-c« ; -c). monarch, Wouorcf/, ;;/.(-en ; -en). Monday, OToMtiig, »«. (-5; -0. money, cyelb, «. (-ci; -cr). month, 5)ioiiat, m. (-cS ; -c) ; a — ago, oor cineiit liJo? iiat. more, tne^r; nod); one — , nof() eincf. morning, Worgen, m. (-e-J; — ); in the — , bc« DJiovs gcKO ; good—, niiteii *JJfoi-= oeii. mostly, nteiftenS. mother, Wiittcr,/ ("), mountain, SScnj, m. (-ci; -C). mourning, 3;rawer, /. Mr., .<:u'rr, m. (-n; -en), much, uiel; very — , feljr ; as—, cbcn fo uicl. music, '^\\\S\V,f. musician, iDin'fifer, m. (-3 ; -). must, tnijffen, 196-202. ta-jyposs. adj., mein, meine, tnein {also expressed by dat. of pert. pron. + dtf. art.). myself (I), (id)) felbft. N. name, subst., iHame, tn. (-n«; -n); ncnnin, v., 99; wh,,t is the — of.' uiie Oeifjt V wivtisyour— PiDicljeiBen Sic? nation, Dlntion, / ("-en). native town, ®£i.:titoflabt, / natural, nntilrltc^. naughty, unartij]. near, prep., neben (,/i. or ace.) \ in —of, bebilrfs 'ill (.gen.). neglect, v., uernarfjlciffiijen. neighbour, *}iiu()bar, /«. (-0; -11): ~{/em.), i«iuObariu (-neii). neither, lueber ; — . . . nor, lucber . . . nod), nest, SJcft, «. (-C3; -cr). never, nic; ntcmalS ; — yet, nod; nie. new, nen. news, -liadjridjt, / (-t n). newspaper, ,^citun!i,/. (- en). next, niidjft {see nnljc). Niagara Falls, bie 3Mn(joras niece, 9Jid;te, y: (-11). night, 9!iul)t,/; (-'c); at — , niu()tS, bed 9lad)t3. I no, adj., fcin, teinc, fein ; I adv., nein; —body, — j person, niemanb, tciuer, feinc, feinecS ; — more, - longer, nidjt nu'f;r ; — , thank you, tdj banfe {%\), nen). noble, ebel. noise, Sorm, m. (-e3). noon, mittag, »,. (-e9 ; _,). north, 'Jlorb, m. (-?«) ; («or« ben, m. (-0). not, nid;t; - a, tcin, feine, fein; — yet, noili nidjt; — at all, nnr nid)t; arc (you, etc.) — ? nicOtitjnfir? nothing, )iid)t9. notwithstanding, nnnenc^t-t, gen , 223. novel, subst., DJoman', m. (-CS; -c). Novenil)er, 5Wooember, m. (-0). now, je(}t. nowhere, nir.u'nb*. •>"t, yiujj,/(«c). O. oak, eic^e, /, (-n). obey, aol;oici)eii {dat.). oblige, neibiuben, 144; be — d or compelled (to), miiffen. occasion, subst., ©cfi'oenOeit, / (~i'iO; v., iH'iinfodjcit. o'clock, Uljv {invariable) ; what — IS it? luie oicl llljr ift e3 . of (231), uon, dat., 46, 231; {material) ani, dat., 46; {cause) nil, dat.; 2-^1, {d); the treaty — Paris, ber Sertniii jit'^SaiiS; the bat- tle — \Vaterloo,bieod)[ad;t bci sajnteiloo ; — the Alma, nu bcr ?Hma. off, nb otfcr, bieten, 131, dat. 0/ Pers.; niibietcn, 131, dat. of per s. officer, Dffijter, m. (-eS ; -e). often, oft (^cr), oftmaU, maitd'tnal. oh : C ! of; ! old, nit (-er). on, 232, nuf, nn, dat. or ace, 65; {.0/ time) on, dat. •VOCABULARY. 433 «3>. (a) ; (»0 ttBcr, ace, ^15. once, ciiimal. one, ciiiC; olii, elite, ein ; the small — , bcr, bic, hc.i Sllcinc ; — and the sanr", eiii5; — and a half, cits bevt()nl(i. only, nuv; (ly/ time) cut; not — . . . but also, iticOt nnr . . . foiibcvn auct). open, aifj'., offcit; v., nitfs inac()oii. opinion, ''.'■:iiiiiiiti,/ (-cii). opportunity, 0elciicnl)cit, /. (-CII). oppressive, briideiib. or, obcr; three — four, bvci bi4 oier; either ... — , entiocber . . . obcv; ~ else, foiift. orator, 9iebiicr, ?//. (-9; — ). order, v, (command), I'C' fehlcit, 167, {/(if. 0/ pers. ; (prescribe), ucicrbncii ; De» ftcUcii. othei, anbcr ; every — day, cinen ^ai] iitn bcii aiibcvii. otherwise, loiift ; niibcv§. our, adj., uiifer, uiifcre, imfcr. ours, pron., iinfer, iiiifere, uufcreS; ber, bic, baS inifcrc; bev, bic, ba^ unfriiic out of, au§ {dat. ; 46) ; (or at) the window, }unt [Veiiftcr [)iiinii'^. over, ilt>er {dat. or ace. ; 65); — there, — the way, briii ben. overcoat, ll'berroct, ;«. (-e6 ; ■'-c); il'&er}icf)ev, vi. (-5; own, adj., eii]cn. [ — ). paint, malcti ; to — (other than pictures), anftveic^en, ' 118. paincir, iUlnfcr, tn. (-9 ; — ). ijaint". g (art of), *J)(n[crci',/ paliice, Ijalnft', m. (-c«; "e)i Sc()lo(!, n. (-Cj; "cr). pale, Citciit). paper, t'lipicr, «. (-c6; -c)! news—, p)eitiiit;i,/ (-en). paradise, 'i'livabico', «. (-c5). pardon, 5Scncif)iiit;i,yi parents, (iUcnt,//. only. P,iri% '^.Savii', «.(ooit *:}.5.-,fic). Paris, adj. (= Parisian^ ^^aviicr. part, TcK, ;//. (-C'3, -o); for tlie most — , mciitoit'J, im-iflwitcili?. party, Cicfiiifdjnft,/ (-en). pass, v., tr., {of time, to spend, etc.), 5iiluui;,eu (09, 2); — (;ni ex;imina- tion), (icfte!;':ii, 1S6; iiitr., uer,ic!)Cit (1S8, 2, fci:;); uevflicfjcii (123 ; fciii); — through, biivdifcmmeit (167; fciii). passing, mij., uoriiberaeOcii. past, t)cviiaii;]eM, uoviiDci, uorbei ; to ;'o — the house, am .^iiufe uoriibevjcl)cii, iiovbeii]cI)cii. patient, jlrnnte, adj. subst., m. /. pay, [H"}a()(eii ( ■:<:£•. of thing, dat. offers.; ace. of pcrs. when pers. only is iiti^n- tioned) ; — attention, 2tcl)t (jeliCii; — a visit, eiiieit ^•Ik'f'ub imiiteit {dat. of pers) ; bchuflCll {ace. of pcrs. ). paying (action of), ^yejnljlen, «. (-0). peice, TiviebcCiO, »;/. (-ii5). pear, 'iUviio,/ (-!i). pcasai.t, 93nuer, m. (-it or -6; -11). pen, (vcbci',/,' (-it). people ipl.), Scute, pi. {no sing.)\ — {indef), mnn; — My, man fn^t ; — , na. tisn, ^>nlf, (-C9; "cr). pepper, "J'Kner, tn. (-«). perfect, — ly, (janj, uolI« font me It. perhaps, DlclU'idjt'. jirrmisfiion, CilfliibiiiS,/; permit, CVlnil' Clt {dat. of pers.). I person, ^cri.ii',/. (-en). personal, pcvfbnlid). philosopher, *V'f)il'>topl)', »«. (-C11; -en). physician, 3U'^t, w. (-eS; "e). picl< up, aiifl)cbcn, 131. I picture, iUlb, n. (-C'j ; -er); j (ycntiitbe, «, (-'5 ; — ). inece, Stiicf, {-<: ; -c). p.igeon, Xniibe, y; (-11). pinch, fiieifcii, iiS. pity, 7>., bcbinieni; it is a — , (.■j ift fdjcibe. place, jK^j/., ^I'lat',, ;//. (-c3; -e) ; Oit, VI. (-c6; -e or "ei); to tal . — , ftilttfili* bcu, 144; iu that — , ba, bajcUift, bciit(cii). place, v., ftcllcii, ic(5eit. plant, "lifhKtiC,/ {-w). plate, ^^cllcv, ;«. (-0 ; — ). play, I'., fviclcii. pleasant, an.jcneljut. please, iiefallcu {i?>^-, dat.)\ (if you) please, (idi) [littc, mciui '\A) bitten barr, ^e; falltiift. pleasure, ^criiitii.icii, «. (-'t'); — trip, (siiort) ex- cursion, ?(iioflii.!, in. (-C'3; -c); to take a (•;iort) — -trip, cinen Jfuofluj mas d)Clt. plum, '^^flaiime, f. (-11). poem, Gcoidjt, n. (-C'3 ; -e). poet, i)id)tcv, in. (-5 ; — ). point ; cardinal — (of the coir.pnf?.),.Cv;i!'.melS;^eiie!>.b, f. (-en); to be upon tiie — of, tin 43e(jrtfjc ''cin. 434 VOCABULARY. poison, j«^j/., @ift, „. (_es. -e); v., oergtf ten. policeman, ?!oliaetbtener, m. (-^; — ); Sc^ii^mnnn, m. (-e«; -leute). poor, arm ('er). position, Stette, / (-n); StcUuiig,/ (-en), possess, defi^cn, i8i. possible, mBgHd^. post, — -office, i!fiinb, w. (-ee). power, flraft,y: (-^e). praise, z-., [oben; preifen, 120. pray, v., h iitw; inter j., bitte! p-ecise, — ly, genau. prefer, uorjiefien, 13.; I — to walk, \^ ge^e Ueber. prei)are ; to - for, firf) i.or= t'Cieitcu aiif {ace). presence, (Bcgcnmavt,/ present, adj., gegenioavtig ; for the — , fur- J grftc. present, stibst., ©efcfjenf, « (-fS;-c). president, !J5iafibeiit', m. (-en ; -en), press, v., bringen, 144. pretty, Ijiibfcl), fdui,,; Wt;. (tolerably), jifuUii-l). P ^vent, uerl;inborn. price, *tirei«, ;«. (-en ; _e). prince, Jviivft, ;«. (-en ; -en) ; iU-inj, ;«. (-fii; _en). prison, ©cfangnis, «. (-fe>3 • -fe). probable, probably, lualn-- f^icinlidt); probably, luolit. professor, *;(rofcff or, ,„. (-§; | -en). I promise, v., nerfpvedien, 1(7. I propose, oorfc^Iagen, i86. proud (of), ftofs (auf -f (uc). proverb, 5pric^iuoit, „,. (-e^;"er). province, giiooinj',/ (-en), prudent, uorficbtig. Prussia, ^Prcufeen, n. (->3). Prussian, sttbst., *;(retific, ,«. (-it;-n). public, bffcMtlid). punish, beftrnfon, ftrafen. punishment, Strafe,/ (-n). pupil, edf)ii(cr, nt. (-0; _). pure, rein, put on (coat, etc.), anjietie'i, '3' ; (hat), anf» fegen. Q. quality, ©ige'tfctjaft, / (-en), quarrel, 7/., ftveiten, 118; fid) ftreiteit (mit). quarter, %wii\, «. (-0;— ); — of an hour, Syicrtefs ftunbe,/ (-11). queen, ^(pniijin, _/ (-nen). quick, —ly, fd;„ell; quickly, flugS. quit, v., oerlaffen, 188. quite, ganj. K. railway-station, SOafin^of, v (-eci; ^e). lain, sitbst., 3iegcn, m. (-0) : v., regneii. raise, fjebeii, 131. rather, eljer, Hebe;. raven, !7labe, m. (-n ; -n). [ read, lefen, 181 ; to — to. uorlefen {d,. ■.). reading (act of), Vefen, ,>. (-^.). ready, fertig, bereit; readily, leidjt. reason. (5)vnnb, m. (-e'3 ; "e). revive r.-x't^, -rfxUton, 188; bctoniiiicn, xu-j ; — (,,« a I I host), oufne^men, J67 ; 1 y receiving, bnrc^ ^JZehmen. recover (from illness), ge= tiefen (181 ; fetn). red, a«y., rot(-"er); subst., 9iot, n. Reformation, SHeformatton / (-en), refuse, tntr., fic^ lueigern. regard, anfef)en (181; fiir -f acc.)\ befrad^ten (alS). regret ; I regret, e5 tfiut mir leib. reign, .^Jegierung,/ (-en), relate, erjiibtcn. related, tierwanbt {dat. or mit). rely upon, fid) uerlnffen (i8S; niif+«a-.). remain, Meiben (120; fein); — at home, - behind, jiiJ riicfbleiben; — over, itbrig bleiben; — standing, fteOcn (186) bleiben. remarkable, mertiuiirbig. remember, fid) eriiinern {gen.) ; I wish to be — ed to him, idj laffe \\)\x grii= remind of, erinncm nn (-f rtnt, v., uermietcii. [ace). repeat, loieber^o'len. j reply, sid,si., Stntmoi;, f. \ (-CM). reply, v., antiuortcn, eru)i= bern, ucrfe^en. report, v. , Oertd^ten. representation, aJorftellnnii /■ (-en). resemble, dt^nli,^ fein (./rt/.); gleicfien {ii?\dat.). reside, ipotjnen. resist, luiberflc'geit (186; d,;t.). resolve, v., fid) rntt'ijiicficn, «23. rest; all the —, aX(f nnbern; retire to — . fid; fdifnfen (i^^s) legen. VOCABULARY. 435 return, oergelten (159); — ;;ood for evil, oergelte 935s fe« mit (Sutcm ; by — of post, mit umgeljenber ipoft, imiLjeOenb. reward, subst., So^it, m. (-65). rheumatism, ^heumatiSnuiS, M. (be?—), ribbon, Saiib, «. (-e§; ^er). rich (in), reicf) (ail + dat.). rid, lo?; to get — of, ID'S rocrbetl {-^ gen. or ace). ride, reiten (118); (in a con- veyance), ffl()roii (i,s6). riding (act of ; not in a con- veyance), Sik'itcii, ;/. (-<3). right (adj.), vcd)t; (correct), j vicf)tin; in the — way, aiif | bie nc(;ti(-|e aBciii", sudst., I 9Jcd^t,«. (-co;-0; to be (in ' the) — , j)(cc()t IjiUicn. ! righteous, aeredjt ; the — (man), bcr ©erod^tc. ring, j«/;j/., :1iiiiii, m. (-eS ; -e); — , v., luuteii (of a large bell), fliiirtctii (of a small bell) ; there is a — at the door, CO tliniielt. ripe, vcif. rise (get up), aufftohcii, (isr,; feiii); (ascei.d), auffteigeit (120; feiii). river, ^liig, w. (-cS ; "c). road, *3C(), ;«. (-eS ; -c); Stvafje,/ (-n). Roman, ;)iijmcr, ;«. (-'5; — ). room (apartment), Stiibe, _/. (-11); v^immer, «.(-o; — ). rose, iKofc, / (-11). row, v., luboiti. run, laiifen (1S8; feiii) ; — after, iiacf)(aufcii (iSS; fcili; dai.); — away, b;U i)on'hiiifi.'ii. Rus;ia, ;)hif;(aiib, «. (-0). "•u^si.an, subst., fliiiffe, »i. (-••■ «). 8. sad, tranrig. safe, fic^er. sailing-ship, Segelfd)iff, «. (-es; -e). sale ; for — , ju oerfaufeii. same, adj. and prcn., ber, bie, baSfelDe; ber, bie, bnSfeUnge; ber, bie, ba« ncimlirfie; at the — time, jii gleicfjer ,^eit; all the— , one and the — , etiierlei. j Sarah, Sara,/ (-g). j satisfied, ^ufrieben. Saturday, Somiabeiib, m. I (-c6; -f); Samotna m. j (-e§;-e). j save, retu'ii; I — d his life, id) rettete it)m baS 2cDcii. say, fagen; to hear — , fagen Ijbren; (assert, claim to be), iDoUeit (196-202); to be said, folleu (196-202). .scholar (i)upil), srfiiilcr, m. scliool, 3rt)llle,y:(-ll) ; —boy, «i.l)U(ei-, ;«. (-§; — ). scold, fdielteii, 159. Scotland, 5rf)0ttlailb, //. (-'3). .scream, fdivcieii, 120. I search (for), fiid)Cii. j seat one's self, sit down, fid) i fclu'ii. second, uuiit. ««(/'., jiucitf. second (of time), subst, Se= cimbc, /. (-11). secret, — ly, gcljtim, Ijeiiiis lid), .-^ee, idjeii, 181. seek, flld)Cll. seem, |.[)eiiteii, 120. .self, fi'Ibft. sell, uertaiifoii. send, fd;icteu; — to, ^u- fdiirfoii; — word to, bc= !li1d)iid)t!gen(f:;-j.); — for, boleii taffeii (188), f cf)icfeu nad;. September, September, ,//. (-«). servant, Dieiier, ;«. (-0 ; — ); Dieitftbote, >«. (-n; -n); gjhigb,/. ("e). serve, biciteii {dat.) ; — (of a meal), feroicren. set, tr. (of a time-piece), ftcU fen ; hitr. (of the sun), iir.'= tergcf)en (188; fein); — tree, befrcten. settler, 2tnftebler, in. (-S; -)■ seven, fiebcii. several, cinige; etlic^e; me^rere. shake, fd)iUtelii. shall, foHen (196-202). she, fie. shield, Sd)ilb, m. (-co; -e). ship, Scbiff, n. (-cO; -e). shoe, Scf^iif), in. {-i% -e). slioemaker, 2d)iifter, in. (0; — ); Sdiutjmaci^ev, m. (-5; -). shoot, fc^ie^en, 123. shop, I'aben, m. (-5; -'). shore, lifer, n. (-0; — ). short, tiirr, — ly, nncbftcnfs. shout, fdjreieii, 120. show, jetgen. sluitter, ilabcii, in. (-S; — ). shy, intr. (of horses), fd)Cit luerbcii, 159. sick, trant; the —(man), bcr .ftraiife. side, 2citc,/ (-11); on this — oi.prep., bieoieit {gen. ; 22,0 ; on that — of, /^/•/., icil)ott(^^«. ; jj,;; on this — , adv., bieofeito;oiitliat — , adv., jcitfcitO. sign, subst., ;^cid)Cii, «. (-0; — ); v., uiiteru'id/itoii. silence, Sd)iueiaen, n. (-S), silent, flumtit. .silly, eiiifiiltig. silver, oilbev, «. (-g). since (241, 12), prep., (eit, I i 436 dat., 46; adv., feltbem; conj., ba. sing, finncn, 144. singer, Sniicjcriit,/ (-ncn). single, etnjiij. sink, fiiifi'ii, 144. sister, Sd)iucftcr,/ (-n). sit, fi^eit (181; feiii); _ down, ftcf) fe(}j/., Stoct, m. (-e§; -c). still, adv., nod;, bod^; nod; inniii-. sting, ftec^en, 167. stockitig, Struntpf, «. (-e9; ■"e). stop, V. hitr., anfl;ijren. storm, .= ti:rnt, ;«. (-e3; H). story, «cfd;id;tc, /. (-n). stove, Cfcn, >«. (-§; ^). stranger, ^yrcmbling, m. (-e3; -c); ;^•l•ClnDc {adj. subst.). stream, Stiont, m. (-e§; ^e). street, Strafje, / (-n). strong, ftart (-ei). student, otubent', m. (-en; -CM). study, subst., Stnbinnt, «, (-S; etnbien); (room), 3tnbicrjimnu'r, «.(-.3;— ); ■v., ftubiercn; — (pre. pare) for, fid; DorOereiten lUif (+ ace), studying (act of), subst., 3tu« bicicn, 11. (-0). submit, fid) nntcnuci'fen,is9. subscribe, iintorfd^rei'ljcn, 120. succeed, gcliniicn, impcrs., 144; I — , C'j !icliMi]t mir. such, fold), |ord;er, fo[d;e§ ; fo. sudden, — ly, plbljlidj. suffer, (cibcii, 118. su.''nce, ijciuincn {dnt.). sufficient, r;inveid;ciib. summer, ®om)ncr, >«. (-§• -). sun, Sonne,/, (-n); — -dial, 2oMnc)uiI;v, f. (-en) ; — -set, 5onnonuntei-c)nng, m. (-00). Sunday, roiintug, m. (-e§; -0. support, untcrftu^'en. sure, fid;ci-; to be — , frets lid); i(iuar. Switzerland, bie 2d)iocij(ber ®d;tueij). T. table. Sif*, m. ^cS: -c), tailor, Sc[)neibcr, m. (-6; — ). take, nefjmen, 107; — a walk, VOCABULARy. 437 elnen ©pojicrgang ma* tf)eii; fpnjieren gefien, i88; — a voyaje, p ne Seercijc maclicii; — up, (()in)nufs neOmcn; — care, M) in Sld)t nel)mcn ; — place, ftattfinbcii, 144 ; — cold, fid) crf'^Iten. talk, fprc-.;eii (167; mit). tall, avofi (-er, stiperl. Qvogt). tea, Z\)Zt, m. (-§). teacher, Seljrev, m. (-§; — ). tear (to pieces), jerreilieit, 118. telegram, siibst., %z^t\i\t,f. (HI). tell, filiicn {dat. of per s. or Jii) ; Ci-}d()[eii {dat. of pers.). te'.ler, Gr,vif)[cv, m. (-§; — ). tempest, Stiivm, m. (-e^ ; ten, }el)n. terrible, --ly, fiircfjlcvlicl). than, nl'3; a IS bnfj. thank, bniitcii \dai.)\ no — you, id) banfc (Jljucit). that, demoHstr. adj., bicfcr, biefc, bicfco; jciici-, jcitc, jeneS; rel. proit., bcv, bic, bnS; inclrfjcr, luchtic, nH'[i[)C6; deiHonsfr. pron., ber, bic, bac; conj., bafj. the, bci", bic, baS; adv.,\t, bcfto; 11 in fo. their, iOr, il)vc, if)v. them {acc>,, fie ; {dat!) if)neit. then, baiin; since — , feits bem. there, bn ; — is, — are, eS ift, eS fiiib; C'j nicDt, 220. therefore, biinim. thereupon, liarauf. they, fic, C'J ; {hide/.), man. thief, Sled, m. (-eS; -c). thin, bitnn. think, bcnft'n, 99, 2; — of, benfen, gen. or an -f- ace. ; (believe), glaiiDen; I should ' —so, t^ foKte eS tnelnen; — highly of, esteem, etc., uiel (patten (188) oon. third, bvittc. thirst, Imrft, ;«. (-eS). thirsty, bnvftig ; to be — , 2;urft Oabcn. thirty, bvciSii]. j this, adj. and pron., btefer, I bicfe, bicjco. ■ those, biejcniijcn; bic; jene. though, obilcid). I thousand, tauienb ; subst., I 2:aiifciib, «. (-cS; -e). \ three, brci. I through, bnrd), ace. ; 34. I throw, vocrfcn, 159 ; fdnneis fecn, 118; — away, roei]; UH'vtcn. thunder-storm, Wciuittcr, n. (-« ; -). Thursday, ^onncrStag, m. (-co; -c). tie, Oinbcn, 144. till, bio, 34. time, ^cit, /. (-en); (occa- sion), Hial, «. (-c3; -c); what — is it? lotc oicl Ui)v ift C'J ? for the third — , 5nm bvittcn SJiale; at tha right — , vcd;t}citi!i ; at th'- same — , ju gleidjer 3eit. tired, miibc. title, Sitcl, VI. (-5 ; — ). to, 233, JU {d.it.\ 46); {with names cf places) nad) {dat.\ 46); an, anr, in {ace. ; 65, 233> 2); — tbc concert, inS Jtonjcrt; {before inf.) jn, 273-274 ; {of purpose) um jn, 273. to-day, Ocute. to-morrow, inoigen ; — mor- ning, niorgcu friif). too, jn; (also), flud;. top, Gipfcl, >«. (-'3; — ). tortoir.e, '2cl)il*)frotc, f. (-»). towards, gegeit {ace. ; 34). town, etabt,/(*e); --hall, SRntfiaue, «. (-e5; ^er). tragedy, Jvancrfpict, n. (-e§; -c); Xrag(3bie,/.(-n). train (on r. railway), 3ug, m. (-cS; ^'c); Boston — , ber 3ng Don (nadi) 3Jofton. translate, iiberfcj'en. transparent, bnrd)'fic^tig. travel, veifen (Onben, fein). traveller, iReifenbc, adj. subst. treasure, 'hi.)^%, m. (-e§; ^e). treaty, iBevtrag, m. (-c§ ; tree, SSaum, tn. (-cS; ^c) ; little — , 53aiimd)en, «. (-S; -). triumph, JriumpI)', ni. (-e^; -e). true, roa()r ; (faithful), treii {dat.). trunk (of a tree), SBoum* flamni, ;«. (-cS; "e). trust, v., traucn {dat.). truth, ^Ji?al)v!)cit, / (-en). try, vcrfudien. Tucsdav, 3ien§tag, >«. (-eg; -0. two, siuei; bcibo; — at a time, je jioci ; — and a half, britteljalb. U. umbrella, Sncgenfcftivm, m. (-co; -c). uncle, Cf)cim, >«■ (-c§ ; -e); Cnfcl, m. (-'3; — ). under, nntcv {dat. or aec. ; 65). understand, Dcgreifen, ii^' ; ocvftcljen, 186; to mak • one's self understood, fi i ticrftiinblid) inad;cn. undertaking, UnterncI/nTcii, «. (-0). unfortunate, ungriicfrid);—ly.. Iciocv. ur.'iindered, iingcl)inbert. 438 VOCABULARY. United States (The), bie i8er» ciitiiiti'n Staotcii. university, Uiitoerfitat', f. (-eii). until, conj., big (bafe). untruth, Unn)af)r()eit,/(-eii). upon, auf {dat. or ace. ; 65); upper, ober. up -stairs, obeii, ;tac^ oben, Ijiuauf. use ; of no — , uit'iiii^. useful, nil^ltd); the — , bn§ iJJii^ridK. utmost, tnoglidjft. V. vainly, in vain, Der^eblic^; uei-gebenS. valley, %\)oX, «. (-e§; "ev). venture, v., roageii. verse, aSevg, >«. (-eg; -e). very, fe^r; red^t; — much, fef;r. vex, argent ; be — ed (at), ftc^ argent (ilbcr + ace). victory, eieg, tn. (-e^; -e). vUlage, 3)orf, «. (-e3; ^ev). vinegar, G)|i(i, w. (-«; -e). violet, 3?cilcf)eii, «. (-3; — ). virtue, 2ngei:b, /. (-cii). visit, 58cfiid^, tn. (-eS; -e); to be on a — at any one's, betiemQnbauf«efud;feiii; v., befu($cn; ciiien S13efud^ nbftatti'it, marf;ett (dat. 0/ pers.). visitor; to have — s, ^Befud^ ^aben. voice, Stimme, y: (-ti). voyage, 9ieife,/ (-n), Sec= reife, / (-n). W. wait for, itarten auf (ace.,. waiter, ^eUuer, m. (-§; — ). Walk, subst., Spajiei-gaiig, w. (-c« ; "e) ; take a — , einenSpaaiergnngtttad^en; fpajieren geljeit, 188. walk, v., gci)en, tSg ; fpn» liereit ge{)en. walking (aci of), ©e{)eii, n. (-0); Spa^ierengeben, «. (-0). want, roiinfrf)cn; iuoUen(i96). wanting; to be — fchlen (dat.), mangeln(^rt^). war, flricg, m. (-co; -e). warm, — ly, iparm (-er). warning, SBavmiiig, / (-ea). waste, uerfcfiipcnbcn. watch, suhst., \\{)x,/. (-eit) ; SafdjcniiOr, /. (-en); 7,,, bciuadjcn. watchful, roadE)fam. watch-key, Ut)rfc£)IUffeI, m. (-S; -). water, aBaffer, «. (-§; — ). waver, fd)iuaitten. way, SBeg, vi. (-eg ; -e) ; (manner), ffieife, /. (-1,); in this — , auf biefe SHJeife. we, u>ir. weak (in), fdiiuac^ (an + dat.). wear, v. intr. (of clothes), fic^ ttageu, 186. weather, SSctter, «. (-§) ; in fine — , bei fd)ouem Sffict* tcr. Wednesday, SDHtttood;, m. (-S). week, SffiodK, / (-n) ; ac^t 2^afle; for a — past, feit ac^t 2:ngeu. weigh, hitr., luiegeit, 131. welcome, luilltom'men. well, pred. adj., tooE)l, gcs fuub; adv., gut; as —as, foiuol;! aV-i; — known, be. taunt. West, 'IBe(l(cn), m. (-§). wet, I'.aft C'cr). what, iiiterrog. prou., n)a§? inierrog. adj., tuelc^er, uieKi;i', iiiclctjc'jj _. j-j^^i of,u3a§ filr(ein, eine, etii); rel. pron. (= that which), ^^^\ ■- a! tnelc^! — b that in German ? tpte ^ei§t bo^auf Tcutfc^? when, interrog., roann? )U lueldjer 3eit ? conj., roenn; ala, 58. where, too, whether, ob. which, interrog. adj., xotlm c^cr, n)cld)e, racIc^eS; r«. «. j/>/_^. ; beven, /. si^ig. ; //. why, roarum? rocSEjalb? wide, breit. will, luoUen, 196-202. William, aBilbfltn, m. (-8). wilHng; to be — , rooUen," 196. wind, 2Binb, m. (-e9; -e). wind up, aufjictjen, 131. window, Senfter, «. (-3; _). windy, luiubig. wine, SBeiu, m. (-e3; -e), wing, iJIiigel, tn. (-9 ; _). winter, Sffiinter, tn. (-§; — ). wise, luetfe ; t(ug (-'er). wish (for), loUnfd^en. with, 234, mit (dat. ; 46) ; M I (dat.; 46). , without, obue (ace. : i^V i . . . ■ ■ "■""■ witty, iut(}ig. I wolf, iffiolf, m. (-e3 ; «e). woman, grau, / (-en). woiiHcr, Wimber, «. (-«; —); 1 — , e4 luunbert mic^, ic^ luunbcie mtd^ ; — of the world, aBeltroiiitber, «. (-9 ; -). wood, fflatb, m. (-c^ ; "er). word, Sort, «. (-e^; -e or "er); to send — , 5eiittc^j ri^tigen. work (Iabour),3libcit,/. (-en); (thing done), 2Beif, «. (-c?. ; -e); v., arbeiten. world, 2Bert,y: (-en); in the — , auf bcr SBelt. worth, «^'., toert; —while, beriUlii^eioert. wound, v., »ertpunben. VOCABULARY. wriiiR, riitr^cit, 144. write (to), fcf)reibcii (120; dat. or 6, 1, N. ; anbtnieit'S, 238 ; anbertljaU', 183, (/>), R.2. angcfid)t§, 223, 20. anftatt, 223, 14 ; governing an infin. or ba^ clause, 270. 'any,' how n iidercd in Ger- man, 2, 2, 157, ISO. Apposition, apjaositive sub- stantive, 289 ; participle, 280, (/.), 281, R. 3; ad- jective or participle, 290; clauses, 304. «av, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 0. Article, not used before words in partitive .sense, 2,2; de- finite, declen;ion, 4; agree- ment, 6, 1 ; repetition of, 5,2; use, 44; contraction with preps., 34, R., 40, R. 1, p. 83, O., 05, R.; with proper names, 44, 2, 3, 73, 70, 2, 5, 78; for poss. adj., 44, 6. Article, indefinite, declen- sion, 9; use, 44, 4, 5. Aryan languages, 322, 2, 3. 'as,' how rendered in Germ., 162, 4, 241, S-11. Associatives, how formed, 816, 2, (i). 29 INDKX. • afl, foreign substs. iu, de- clension, 22, 6. sat, foreign substs. in.declen- sion, 22, 2, 0. 'at,' of time of day, 184,3, (, idiomatic use of, 196, 9; c ,,j , 2.10, 237, R. 2. 238. auf, prep., 65; ith abs. superl. of .idvs., 190,G; of local,, >, 227. (a), 3, 230, (a), 232, ((•), 233, (r), 2 ; of future time, 229, (^), 2; after adjs. ai.d verbs, 245, 1,291,2, 7,10; after r '<:,\ive verbs, 215, l,(i). aitf Oiifi, 239, 3, (^■), 208, 3. an-i, prep., 40; of cause, 229, (c). aiifjcn, adv., 189, 3; com- liariso:;, i;JO. niifjcr, ; rcp., 40. niif!Ci-;!a!&, 223, 3. (iiificrji, with absolute superl, 127, 2, 190, 4 Auxiliary is verb in com- pound tenses, 20, 32. Auxiliary verbs of mood, see ' Modal Auxiliaries.' Auxiliary verbs of tense, 26, 53; place of, with Modal Auxiliaries,199, 3 ; omitted in dependeiit clauses, 287. bnib, compprison of, 190; fialb . . . Dalt>, 238. «bar, .suflix of adjs., 313, 1. 'be,' with p. part., how ren- dered in Germ., 112, R. 5. bes, insep. prefix, 85, R. 6, 204; meaning of, 314, 1. 6ei, prep,, 46; = 'with/ 44t • about,' 22b, (rf) ; of time, 227, (d), 3; idioms, 228, W, (6), 282, (rf); of bat- tics, 231, (aral)li-, 208; with double prefixes, 207, 213;, with miC., 209; with l)cr« and ()iiu, 210 ; from compound substs., 211. Concord, of Subject and Verb, 285 ; other concords, 288. Condilir.nal cliiu.ses, 59, 239, R. 1, 1!, 4, 267, 293, {a), 3, (/'), R. 4, N. I. 2; ellip- tical, 268, 2, X.,293,(,), R. 2 ; use of fo in, 69, N. ; 293, [h), R. 4, N. 2. CnM'Jitionnl conjunctions, 59, 239, R. 1, 2, 4. ( 'onditionnl mood, formation of tenses of, 25, 2, 3; .shorter forms, 111, 112, R. 1 ; in Modal Auxilia- ries, 199, 4 ; use, 263, 267. Conjugation of verbs; siv "Verbs," "Modal Auxili- aries." Conjunctions, 235-241 ; co- | oniuiating, proper, 236; | not counted, 293, (,M T^, I 2; adverbial, 237, -J(13, j {,/'), R. 2 ; correlativ.^, 238 ; place of, 298, 3. Conjunctive Mood, .see " Subjunctive." Consiilering, verbs of, 242, 3, 253. Consonants, pronunciation, P- 9» top; digraphs and tri^raphs, pp. 5, 8, ,^; doubling of, in verbs, 118, R. 1,123, R. 1, t«7, A.^ R. 2, 181,0.6. Construction of Sfntenwii, 292-806; i)rincii ai, 20. 26, 293, (/.), 294, {b), 295, 2, 297, R. 1, 2; de, pendent, 82, 85, 298, (t), 294, (0,295, 2, 297, R. 2, 306; direct interrog., 28, !J»3, (,0,i.294,(<,),295, 2, .'100; indirect statements, 87, 293, (r),R.l; indirect qn.'stions, 88 ; relative sentences, 98, 306 ; im- perative, 293, {a), 2 ; of clauses with bcim, 298, (c), R. 4; of incomplete clauses, 299; general re- marks, 301 ; compound and complex, 302, 803; see also "Clauses," "Condi- tional clauses." < ontracted form of strong de- clension, 70, R. A. Contraction of def. art. and pri ps., 34, 1^, 46, K. 1, p. S,, O., 65, R. Co;)i-dinating Conjunctions, I n-p'-r, 236, adverbial, 237, correlative, 238. Copula, 292 ; place of, 293, 301, 1. tcrrelative prons., 43, R. 3, 4; conjunctions, 238; clau- ses, 241. 9, 298, f/), R. 4, N.3. Countries, names of, gender, 80, 3, {c) ; see al.so "Places, names of." -b, suffix of substs., 812, 1. ba, adv., with prep, annexed, 38, R. 5,142; conj., 289, 3, {F) ; various uses of, 241, 12, id), 20; whh preps., representing an in- fin. or bn& clause, 277; re- places Engl. part, of time and cause, 884. bamit, conj., expresses pur- pose, 289, 3, (b), 268, 3. »a« Wow the verb fein, J 41 of a number of person" iv things, 162, 2. bag, conj., omitted, 81, 3, 241,3, 13, 266,R. 2;use, 2«9, (/;), 241, 3; express ing purpose, 268, 3. bag clauses governed b> preps., 224,2, (a); for in- fin., 272, R. 1, 235, 276, R. 2, 277. Date, how expressed, 18-(-, 2, («). Dative, use of, 8, 248; placr of, 296, 4; ethical dat,, 249 ;dat. after verbs, 250; after adjs., 251 ; after preps., 46, ol, 65, 2j?.> ; after reflexive verbs, 216, 2 ; after impersonal vevbs, 217, 2, (i), 219, If aficr fein and tucvbett, 2A7, 2, (c); after inti.TJections, 240, 4, {i). i)am.i)ten, see beudjteii, biiiu ten. »be, subst. suffix, Slil, 1. Declension ; see " Substan- tives," "A^ijectives," "Pro- nouns," "^lamemls." Definite Article; see "Arti- cle." Degrees of compajison ; see "Comparison." bcm after \dn, 250, (e), 268, G. Demonstrative proufiuns; see " Pronouns " benn, conj., 2«16; adv. conj., 237,239,241,7,18,293, (c), R. 4. bennod;, ad* . conj , 237. Dependent seiiteitces ; see " Construction,'' " .Sen- tences." Dependert iu?%5i.ons ; see " (:onstrn>»ijn," " Sen- tences," "Ircrci, subst. sufiix, 312, 5, N. 2. »ern, Adjs. in, not used a.i prtdlcttM, 160; ad). suT- fix, 818, 2. »cni, Verbs in, conjugation, Sfi, R 4; formation, 811,2. nfl, adv., idiomatic use, 105, 4. cvftciiS, adv., distill ^'uished from r-iftft, 196, . N. G;j=, subst. prefix, i. '5, 1. C^, neut. pron., usi -. uf, 80; omission of, 113, 2, N. j for a number of persons or things, 162, 2 ; as subject of impersonal verbs, 217, 220, 2, R. 2, N.; afte. adjs. governing gen., 24*. R. 1; representing a fol- lowing infill., 272, R. 2. e« ijiebt, e3 ift, etc., 220. efici- iModel, 181. Ethical dative, 249. ctlidic ; -co, see cinii]e. ctum, 187, III., 226, (c). etnufj, indef. pron., 146, 149; indef. minieral, 108, 177 ; before adjs., 122, 11. ' even,' rendered bv tiil>fl, 42, 3, R. ' ever,' after rel. prons. , 96, 6. Exclamatory clauses, 269, R. 6, 293, (i), R. 3, 300, N.2. = fact), sfaftis], form multipli- cative numerals, 182, (/'). faUcn Model, 188. faII3, subord. conj., 239,3, sftiltifl; see sfacf). Factitive accusative, 258. Factitive predicate, 25^, 254, 3. Family names, 74, 76,4,6. fcd)ten Model, 124. 'few,' how rendered in Ger., 145, 152, 168, 173, 175. ■fui',' how rei.u led iii Ger., 229; after verbs, substs. and adjs., 291, 2-4. IKDEX. 445 Foreign substs., accentua- tion, p. u), bottom; d;- clensioii, 22, fl, 37, 4, App. D.,. 57, 5, 08,3,;.; gender, 8f), 2, (.;. f>actioiial nin '>er.s, 188, (a), {(,). freilicl), 187, IV. ; docs not count as ,1 member . s a sentence, 293, (. i R. 2, N. Frequentative";, how formed, 31.1,2, (c). fricrcii Modi.1, l.'JI. 'from,' after verb';, 201, '/. fiir, prep., 84; uot usi;d of purpose, 22(>, {a) \ :.iter verbs of couiidcrin'j-. 25i{. Future T?nse, Iiow I ,rned, 23,2, use, 201; reiilacud ! • present, 2o7, 5. | Future-perfect I'cnse, how formed, £5, 3 ; uss, 2«-* ; . replaccdby perfect, 259, 4. ' gam, '• idef, numeral, 108. 170. (jCs, prefix of p. irt., 30 ; I when omiited, 3."j. R. 5, ti, j 109, 112, U. ?, ,:01; of verbs, 3.J, R. 0, 201 nil, 4 ; with Sep. verbs, 1 ' 7. 2, | 205,2; withmif;= 'ji) ; of ' substs., 815, 2; of adjs., 316 : declension of substs. ! beginning with gcj, 16,17, 2,80, 37. '■ gender, 89, 3, {d). geiicn, prep., ,'A. gegcintt'cr, 51, 4. gef)eii vith infin., 271, {<.■). nemiif;, 51, 5. lien, 50, 2. Gender of substs., a ording to meaning, 80, and form, 89; of compound substs., double gender, itl, App. J.; gene: ' remarks on, 90 ; exceptional gender, App. I. Genitive, use .f, 3, 243; af- ter .-^djs., 24 1 ; after verbs, 245; nch. !,!'!. f), 189, 2, 246; of, lace, 240; after redexiv- verbs, -.'15, 216; afti.-i Inper^, verh^, 219, 2, (,/); af.er interjcc- •ions, 240, J, (a): after preps., 222, 223 ; unin- flpcted a] [iositive geniiivc, 289, 3, N. 2 ; iiositi. of i'l a Sentence, 296, 4-7. fieiiUii, indcf. num. and adv., 108, 178 ; followed by inf., 273,3. uennan language, its rela- tions to l.nvlish, 32 'lis- torical sketcl), 322 .». Germanic lan;.Hia.e,es, 322. 323; diagram of, p. 3;'. !H.'ni, comparison if, l':,0, !; idiiiin.itic usj of, 195, ;>. 1 ' 'lerunds, or Infin. in -ing, ' ;. ' to be confoimded witl) pres. part., 277, R.3, 4,6 Gerundive, 282. giaitl'Cit, infin. ,\ r, 275, (](ei..), prep,, 51, (">. [R ' =glcid;cn, 4s, «7, 139. Graf Model, 55. Grimm's Law, 325. grof;, comi),irison, 125, -k 0i-unbfpvad!C, 322. ■ gut, comparison, 129; as adv., 195, ](), N.. -Mm, li'n, its u.se in com- potmds, 818,3, X.,a;ul4. i, prod'.K s Unil.i ■ 326. sid), substs. in, dtlcn-inn, 22,2; gender, 89, 1, (.,,. id)t, subst. suffix, 812, 18; adj. suftl\, ;!13, 4 = ic, foreign substs. •' : der, 89, 2, (e). iier, foreign substs. in, de- clension, 22, 6. stercii, foreign verbs in, talte no gCi in p. part., 35, R. 5; VLib sun <, 311, 3. 'if,' when rendered by od, 241, 4. 446 INDEX. •ifl, 8ub«ts. in, declension, 22,2; gnuler, 89,1,(0: adjs. In, not used as predi- cates, IflO; atlvs. in, super!, of, 100, 5; s'lffix of poss. prons., 110, (c:);8ubst. suf- fix, 812, 18; adj. suffix, 813, :>; before =tcit, 812, 10, N. ; after ,l)aft, 313, 3, N. ; produces Umlaut, 820, (/). 30n->, 49. »if, foreign substs. in, pmi- dt-r, 80, .', (c). tmniov, adv., 187, I., (ci; after rel. prons., })«, a. Imperative Mood, true forms of, 31, R. 4; endings, in vve.il< verbs, 35 ; in strong, 107 ; expressed by lafieii, 200, 7, (9. [190. Imperfect-Present Verbs, Imperfect Tense, formation, in weak verbs, 30 ; in strong, 104; endings, in weak verbs, 35 ; in strong, 107. Imperfect lndic;itive, use, 258; distinguiJied from Perfect, 259, 2, 3; replaced by present, 257, 3. Imperfect Subjunctive, fcjr conditional, 111, 203, 2, N.; in Iiypotlietical peri- ods, 2C7, 2; to express wish, 208, 2; to express possibility, 308, 5; origin of Umlaut in, 320, (^). Impersonal Verbs, 217 ; i on- jugation, 218; govern- ment, 219; 'there is,' etc., 220; impersonal use of passive voice, 113, 2. ' in,' how rendered in Germ., 230, 291. G, 7, in, prep., 05 ; rendered by •at,'227,(..f, 1, and4. »ln, substs. in, declension, 67, R. 3; g.^nder, 80, 2, (a); subst. suffix, 812, 11; produces Umlaut, 826, Indefinite article, see "Arti- cle, Indcf." [ISO. Indefinite numerals, 108- Indefinite pronouns, 145- 157. iittcin, iubord. conj., 23t< 241, IG; replaces Eii^:l. participle, 284, 1, (,?), (/>). inbiflon, conj., 237, 239, 241,15. Indicative mood, usr, 250; tenses of, 257-202; in in- direct statements, 200, R. 3; in hypothetical periods, 207, R. 5. Indirect statement, 87, 205; tense (if, 200; construction of, 293, (r), R, 1. Indirect or dependent cjues- tions, 88, 2«i3, (,); object- ive, with iiihn., 275, R. 4; use of Ob in, 277. R. 5. Indo-European or Iiido-Ger- manic languages, 322. Infinitive, [lice of, 20, 33, 295, ;;, 299 ; endings, 35 ; for p. i;art. in Modal Auxi- liaries, etc., 199, 2; with passive sense after (affcii, 200, 7, (<), N. ; for im- perative, 209, R. 5 ; as subst., 270; wiiliout \n, 271; with 511, 272 ; of purpose, 273 ; aftersubsts., 274; accusative with inf., not used in Germ., 275 ; in objective indirectquestions, 275, R. 4; governed liy preps., 270, 277; infin. in -ing, or gerund, 237, R. 3-6 ; ill elliptical construc- tions, 278: replaced by p. part., 281, R. fi, . T ; as part of predicate, 295. inc,' infinitive in, or gerund 277, R. 3-C. >iiiil, substs. in, declension, 22. 2; gender, 80, 1, («), subst. suflJi.v, 81J, 18. inmitteii, 223,21. tnnen, adv., 189,3; compa* rison, 180. iiiitcvOrtlt', 223, 4, and R. Inseparable prefixes, 86, R. «. 109, 203. 204, 207, 209, 212, 213; meaning of, 314. Interjections, 240. Inversion, inverted sentence, »01,2. N. ,,2. IiUerrogntive pronoii.is and adjs., 81-80. Interrogative sentences, con- struction, direct, 23; 293, (a), I, 294, (a), 295, 2, 300. 301, \. 2 ; ii, direct or dependent, 88, 275, R, 4, 277, R. 5,293, (0. Intransitive verbs, used only iniijersonallyin the passive, 113, 2; accusative after 254. lioit, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 89, 2, (.■). =itcii, verbs in ; see siereit. ii-i)ciiD, 157. '\\d), adjs. in, not used as predicates, ](J0; adi. suf. fix, 313, <•,. Italics, not u.sed in (Jerm., p. I-'. 'it,' when rendered by ct;, fie, 13. j, produces Umlaut, 826. ja, idiomatic use, 196, II. jn, iaiUD(;l, not counted ar member of sent., 293, (i), R. 2, N. je, before cardinal inimerals. 1G5, 9. je . . . b?fto, 120, 4, 289, 3, {i), 298, ^d), R. 4, .i. i. INDEX. 447 lc(maU), adv., 187. !..(#). lebcr, declension, 6j Indef. pron., 145, 168 ; indef. numeral, 168,171; jebeS, of a number of persons or thi'igs, 102, 2. |ebert..aiui, 145, 147. iebod), 287. jebioeber; see jcber. iegltd)cr; we feber. jemanb, 145, 148. jencr, declension, 6 ; use, 182, 184. 140,1, (c), 141, 142. jeiifeU(o), 228, 13, and R. jctt, 187, 1., {b). Icin, declension, 8 ; indef. numeral, 1(18, 172. feiitcv, indet. pron., 145; used for niemanb, 151. • fcit, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, ((j); subst. suffi.x, 312, 10. iCiim'ti, 196, R. 4, N. i flnabc Model, 54. fomint;n, with p. part., 281, R. Tj. fonneit, conjugation, 196- 199 ; use, 200, 2, 202. frnft, prep., 228. 7. •I, forms fractions, 183, (a). Iciig^, 228, 18, andR. 1. Language, German, histori- cal sketch of, 322-326. LaiiL^uage-names from adjs. , 122, R. 2. Languages, Indo-Gtrmanic, etc., 322, 2,3; Germanic, 328. la'icu, its use, for passive voice, 114, (/'); as Modal Auxiliary, 200, 7. Iniit, 228, 8. j Sautucvidiicbunij, 825. sU'i, fiiriiis varialive nume- , rals, 182, {c). »lt\c, substs. in, declension, 16, 17 ; gender, 89, 8, (rO; subst. suffix. 812, 3; produces Umlaut, 826, R. Letters, German, shape and ' pronunciation of, see In- j troduction, pp. 1-/2. ! leet, 130. .Icutc, plurals in, 68, 1. eticf), adjs. in, not used as predicates, 160; supcrl. of advs. in, 190, -5 ; suffix of advs., 189, 1,((^); of adjs., 813, 8. (iebor, compar. of c^crn, 190; j use, 195, .'i. ! sHiiil, substs. in, declension, 22,2; gender, 89. \,{a); subst. suffix, 312, 12. »liiii\0, suffix of advs., 189, : 1. (^)- lotu'ii, paradigm of, 'active, 31 ; reflexive, 41 ; passive, 112. -m, substs. in, decleui-.ion, 69; gender, 89,1, (,r). I'Jhlidt, irregular compounds of, 68, 2. -mn(, forms numeral advs., 182, {a). ■Dialer Model, 16, 17, App. A. man, indef. pron., for passive voir-, 114, {a); use, 145, IKJ ; r.i)laced by ciiicv, j 150; "itli imperative, 269, R. 2. j maucl)cr, indef. pron., 145, '• 154; indef. nuniernl, 168, I 174 ; before adjs., 122, 12. \ 'tuanit, substs. in, declen- I sion, 68, 1. Manner, advs. of, 189; their place in a sentence, 45, Rule 0. Materials, names of, take art., 44, 1, (3); plural of, 66, 'i. I 'may,' when expre«»ed by I bUrfcn, 200, .1, {!,), N. i 'meanwhile,' how rendered I in Germ., 241, l.j. ; Measure, expressions of, j 185; advs. of, 187, in. I nuijr, when used in comi)ari- I son of adjs., 126, 2, 161, I N. ; adv. of quantity, 129, N. I ; indef. numeral, 168, 179. I nti'hrcif, -c«(, indef. pron., I 145, 152: indef. numeral, 168, 176 ; before adjs., 122,12. niciii Model, 8. Middle High {}erman,824,2. aiiillioil, declension, 165, 10, Minutes of the hour, 184, Z, \n\\\-., verb-prefix, 204, 209, 814, 5; subst. prefix, 315. 3. mit, 40 ; after reflexive verbs, 215, 1, {a). mutcl, comparison, 130. tiiitti'Ift, see ocrmituift. Mixed declension, of substs., 60-03, 70; of adjs., 116, 121, II L -Modal auxiliaries, 196-202; peculiar forms, 190, R. 1- 3; paradigms, 198; fur. ther peculiarities, 1{,() ; idi- omatic use, 200-202. Modern High German, 324,3. iNloditication of vowels ; see Umlaut.. mbi]iii, conjugation, 190- 199; use, 200,3,202. MonosylLibleb, declension, 22, 1, 3, ;,, App. B., C, E., 37; gender, 89, 1, (rt). Month, day of, how ex- pressed, 106, 3. Months, names of, p. 104, top; gender, 80, 1, (3). Moods of the verb, then usc, 448 INDEX. 9M-21S, see also "Con- ditional," '* Indicative," etc. 'most,' with absolute super- lative, 127,2. Motion, neuter verbs i>{, con- jugated wiih feiit, 53, (i). miificit, conjugation, 196- 109; use, 200, 4, 202. ^hit, fLin. compounds of, App. I, p. 3SS; 511 SKute fein, lucr.on, 250, (e). Mutes, progression or shift- ing of, 325. nttcf), prep., 4«, 184, ;), (/;), 233, (,), . ; after adjs., 244 J after verbs, etc., 291 , 3; after reflexive verbs 215. 1, («). 9Jnc(;luiv Model, 62, 63. nacl;bem, subord. conj. clause with, replaces Engl. perf. part., 284, R. 1. «acl;ft, 51, 7. itttOe, compari.son, 129. Slnntc Model, 60. 61. Names, see "Materials," " Persons," " Places," "Proper Names." Jiamlidic, ber, 132, 137. nefcen, prep., 65. •ttbft, 51,8. neniicn, infni. with, 271, i,icf)tg, indef. pron., 145, 149 ; before adj.s., 122, 11. iiicf}t5boftouieniger, ciionl. adv. conj., 237. nid)ti roeniflcv al§, 241 lo N. nib, obsolete adv., compari- son, 180, iiu(miii.:,), 187, !.,(*). iiicfir, 130. iticmanb, 145, 148; re- placed by tcincr, 151, 1. iiimmer, 187, L,(c). =niS, substs. in, declension, 22,4; gender, 89,2, (r/), •", (c); subst. suffix, 312, 13; produce-' Umlaut, 826. (e). itod), adv., idiomatic use, 193, 7; conj., 237, 238. Nominative, use of, 3, 242. Niniiber, in .Substs., 3; cx- r-res.sions of, 185. Numerals, cardinal, Uttl, 105; ordinal, 164, 166 ;' Kiiman, Ikav rendered in I Germ., 166.2, N. ; indefi- nite, 168-180 ; derivative, I 182, 1'''8 ; nndtiplicative, 182, (d); variative, 182, (t); fractional, 185, (a), HUM, 195, 1. nuv, 1JJ5, 12. 8, 46, R. 3 ; 231 ; omitted before infm. clauses, 277, R. 1; after verbs, etc.. 291, S-ll. of)i;c, prep., 34; jjoverning infm. or baft clause, 224, •^, (/'), 276. oljitcbcm, 50, 3. tl)i- Model, 62, C3. Old High German, 324, 1. =on, foreign mascs. in, dc- clension, 22, fi, ■ on,' how rtiulered in Germ., 232 ; after verl.s, etc 291, 7. '"uc,' render. (1 Ly o:., 39, R. ''^l indef. , n;:.., U^^ n^^ 1«0; not r.x; icvsed after •"U^-, 122. -I. ^i^f, for.Jj^n substs. in, de- clension, 22,0, 63,3. Ordinal innncrals, 164, 166. Origin, genitive of, 243,1. Orthography, p. u; recent changes in, p. ,2. 0(1, prei)., 51,10; conj., 241, 4; when omitted, 239, R 4, 267, R. 0, N.; i„'i„; direct questions, 277 R. 5. 0;' lUtrf', 239, R. 3, 4. I'iH-it, adv., 189,3; com,)ari- son. 130. j iHicr(!iiU), 223, .5. olnjlcid), olifc()oit, obmobl 239, R. .3, 4. Object, direct, see "Accusa- tive"; indirect, see "Da- tive " ; renujte, with reflex- ive verbs, 216. 0'>jects placu (,f, 45, 296, 297, R. ^,•2. Objective clau.se before the verb, 306. Objective genitive, 248, 3. ooer, 2S6, 238. 'of,' how rendered in (iorni. Vacii- (cm), indef. numeral 173,3, X. P.iiticipia! const luctions, English, how rendered in Germ., 284; English pres. part, after 'come,' 281, k. ■"1; not to be confo nided with inf. in -ing, or ge- rund, -^77, R. ,"?. Participl. , past, how formed, in we.ik verbs, 30; in strong, 105 ; of Modal Auxiliaries, 199,2. Pa^tieipk^, i)lace of, 26,88, 283,4,295,1,3, and N., 2J(8, 299; endings, 80, S5; used as adjectives, 122, 1; assub.'-ts., 122,2; compari-son of, 126,4 ;iso. lated strong, 194, N. ; use of, 279-284; present part., 2SO; n..t used with 'to be,' 31, K. 3; past, 281; with INDEX. 449 Imperative force, 269, R. 5; fut. pass, part., or gerund- ive, 282 ; general remarlcs, 283; no perfect part, in Germ., 284, R. 1; apposi- tive particiiiles, 280, (5), 281, R. 3, 283, :J, 290. Partitive genitive, 243, 6. Parntive sense, words used in, take no art., 2,2. Passive voicj, 112-114; pa- radigm. 112; agent witii, R. 3; li.nitatioiis of, 113; subsiitutL^s for, 114; pass- ive of transitive verbs, 113, 1 ; of intransitive verbs, 118,2. Past participle, see " Parti- ciples." 'people,' indef. pron., 145, 146. Periphrastic forms of conju- gation, EnglLsh, 31, R. 3. Perfect participle, none in Germ., 284, R. 1. Perfect tense, formation , 26, 1; use, 259; replaced by present, 257, 4. Personal pronouns, declen- sion, 38; use, 39-42,44, 6, {b) ; place of, 45, Rules 3, 4, 294, (c), N., 296, 3, 4 ; replaced by demonstra- tives, 143 ; jifter i)tcid)cn, 48 ; after (jaUicn, roeiieii, 223, 1, 2, R. 3; omitted with imperative, 269, R. 1. Persons, before things, 45, Rule2, 29k , 5; names of, how decHned, 73, 74, 76, [ 2-7; article with names of, ^ 73, 1, 2, 76, 2, 5, 78. Place, advs. of, 187, 11.; positioi in a sentence, 11, 45, Rule 5, 297, 3, and R. i. Places, proper names of, 72, 76, 1; article with, 44,3. pluperfect tense, formation, 25, 1 ; plupf. ir,dicative, use, 260; plupf. subjunc- tive, used for conditional, 263, 267, 2, and R. 4; to express a wish, 268, 2. Plural, see " Concord," " Number," " Substan- tives." Possessive adjs., 43; agree- ment, 43, 5 ; replaced by def. art., 44, 0. Possessive case, rendered in Germ, by the genitive, 3, 243, 4. Possessive dative, 44, 6, 249. " pronouns, 119. Possibility, advs. of, 187, VI.; expressed by impf. subj , 268, 5. Prediciie, defuiition of, 292, 1,295; place of , 2' 5 ; fac- titive pred., 253, 254, 3. Prcdicati>'e nominative, 242. Predicative adj., not de- clined, 14, 100; place of, 18, 20, O. 3, 2(;5, 3, 296, 8; factitive, 254, '^. Prefixes, of verbs, 203-213, 314; inseparable, 35, R. C, 109, 204, 207, 208, 209, 212; meaning of, 814;sep.nrable, 117, 205- 208, 210, 295 ; s, -xuable and inseparable, 208; com- pound, 206, 2; double, 207 ; accent of, 204, 205, 3; place of, 117, 285, 3, and N. ; subst. prefixes, 315 ; adj. prefixes, 816. Prepositions, governing accu- s.-itive only, 34, 50: dative only, 46, 61; dat. ora:c., I 66 ; genitive, 222, 223 ; | contracted with def. art., j 84^R.,46, R.l,p.83,0., 65» R. ; general remarks j on, 224; joined to advs., \ 224; governing the infin., \ 224, 2. {d), 276, 277 : English preps, and their OLim. equivalents, 226- 234 ; 1 lace of, 48, 51, 223, 298, 2; after verbs, etc., 21; 1. Present \ ariiciple ; see " Particii i,,l Construc- tions, Enylish," and "ParticipLs." Present ten, j, endings, in weak verbs, 35, in -trong, 107; pres. indicative, 257, 267, R. 5 ; pres. subj., re- places imperative, 268, 1, 269, and R. 2. Preterite, see " Impi^rfect." Primary Form of strong declension, 70, R. 2. Principal assertive sentences, construction, 20, 26, 69, N., 293, (A), 294, (/.), 295,2,297, R. 1,2,301, 2, 302. R, 303. Principal parts of a verb, 28. Progression of mutes, 825. Pronouns, agreement of, 13; place of, 45, 286, 2-4; personal, decle;i:.ioii, 38; use of CO, 89; use in ad- dress, 40, 47, 49 ; dative of, replaces po.ss. adj., 44, 6, {b)\ reflexive, 41, 42; reciprocal, 42 ; interroga- tive, 81-83; relative, 92- 97, place of, 98; posses- sive, 119 ; demonstrative, 132-143 ; indefniite, 145- 157; remarks on, 162. Pronunciation, Introduction, pp. I-I2. Probability, expressed by future, 261, 2 ; by future- perfect, 262. Proper names, declension of, 66, 1, 72-74, 76. Proportional Clauses ; see " Comparative Clauses." Purpose, conjs. oi, 289, 9 450 INDEX. (b), expreMed by ju, M9, (a) ; by subj. with bag, etc., 268,3; by infin. with JU or urn . . , JU, 278, R. 1, 276, 1. Quality, genitive of, 248, 5. Quantity of vowels, pp. 9, 10. Quantity, expressions of, 185. Quarters of the hour, 184,3, («). Questions, dir, ct, construc- tion of, 23, 203, {a), i, 294, (a), 296, 2, 300; in- din ct or dependent, 88, 298, (c). Question-word, begins sen- tence, 23, O. 2, 298, (a), t, 294, (a). Reciprocal pronouns, 42. Reflexive pronoun ., 41, 42, 44, 6, (6), N. ; used in re- ciprocal sense, 42; place of, 294, (c), N. ! Reflexive verbs, paradigm of, i 41; for passive, 114, (d); \ use, 214 - 215 ; govern- ment, 21«. Relative clauses, replace Engl . part.,284, 2, (a);placeof, 805, 806, R. 3, and N., R. 4. Relative pronouns, 92-97 : ! place of, 98, 294, (c), 306 ; ! introduce dependent clau- ses, 98 ; not omitted in Germ., 96, 7, O.; concord of, 96, 1, (i>), 288, 2, N. Rilr.tive superlative, of adjs., 127; of advs.,190, 3. Roman numerals, how read in Germ., 166,2, N. •8, plurals in, 77, 6. »8, suffix of advs., 189, 1, 2, 821, 1, N. ; suffix in subst. compounds, al9, 1, N. 3, 3. •fal, subtti. In, declension, 22,4; gender, 89, 3, (c); subst. suflfix, 8k2, 14. • fant, adj. in, superl. of, 190, 5; adj. suflix, 818, 9. famt, 51, 9. •fcfjaft, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (a); subst. suffix, 812, 15. fdjtegen Model, 128. fc^Iaflcn Model, 186. fd^on, idiomatic use, 195, 6. Script, German, pp. 13-16. feOr, with absolute superl., 127, 2, 190, 4. feiii, 'to be,' use as auxilia- ry, 25, 4 ; conjugation, 62; verb- coi)ju;;ated with, 63; with past part., 112, R- 6, (^); m jBipersoual, 217,220; wkh dat.,250, (, Sand N., 808,4. ■ shail,' how rendered in Germ., 201. Shifting of mutes, 825. ' since,' how rendered in Germ., 241, 12. fingeM Model, 144. Singular, see " Cowwd,*' " Substantives." 'so,' renJc.\:aby c3, 89,3. fo, after conditional and ad- verbial clauses, 69, 239, R. 2, 267, R. 3, 293, (i), R. 4, N. I, 2, 294, id), R. 2; replaces folcf) before ein, 188, N. 2 ; adv. conj., 237. fo . . . fo, 241, 9. fo ein, followed by wte, 162, 4. fo.jav, adv. conj., 287, R. 2. 3o^n Model, 21 ; origin of Umlaut in, 326, R 2, (a). lo(if)(cr), demoDstr. pron., 132, 138 ; followed by luie, 162,4; before adjs., 122, 12. folfcii, conjugation, 196-199; use, 200, 5, 201, 202. 'some,' how rendered ii- Genn., 2, 2, 150, 162, 155, 168, 173, 177, 180. fo'ibcr, 50, 1. funbern, 286, R. 1. foioo[)I ... al% (ouc^), 288; 285, R. 6. S S INE>EX. 451 rfftnnen Model, 168. \pttdi)en Model, 167. ff/ i> P- S; i" verbs, 118, R. 2, 128, R. 1, 181, O. 1, 188, R. 3. ftott, see anftatt. »ft, subst. suffix, 312, 1. ftel^en, withinfin., 272, R. 2. Stem of verbs, 27. Strong declension; see " Sub- stantives, declension of." Strong conjugation ; see " Verbs, conjugation of." Subject, definition of, 292 ; place of, 294 ; in principal sentences, 20, 59, N. ; in direct questions, 23, O. 1; in dependent sen- tences, 33, N. ; inver- sion of, 801, 2, X. I, 2; expressed l)y noni. case, 3, 242, 1 ; agreement with verb, 285; repetition of, 286. Subjective clause, 306; rela- tiv 806, R. 3. Subjective genitive, 243, 2 Subjunctive Mood, use, 264- SSa, for conditional. 111, ^t$^ V. ; in indirect state- i»pnt^ «7, 265, 266; in indirect questions, 88 ; in hypothetical periods, 239, R. 1, 267 ; for imperative, 81, R. 4, 268, 1, 269; expressing a wish, 268, 2 ; of purpose, 268, 3; „fter a negative, etc., 208, 4; of possibility, 268, 5 ; origin of Umlaut in i;iipf. »ubj., 826, (^). Substantives, their declen- sion, '■MaUx Model, 16, 17; Sof)ii do., 21, (n), 22, App. C. ; jpuitb do., 21, (<^),5!2, App. E.;XLn!do., 86, 87; ^nabc, 0raf, aUiime do., 54 67, App. *. i 'JJome, ^ac^biu, Ctji do., 60-68, App. G. ; with double plurals, 64, App. G.*; Summary and tables, 70; essential parts, 71; anomalous, 66-69 ; substs. without plural, 66 ; without sing., 67; of measure, weight and number, 185 ; as verb prefixes, 206, 3, 212; ir- regular compound substs., 68; appositive subst., 289; derivation, by internal change, 310; by suffixes, 812 ; by prefi.ves, 315 ; composition, 319; see also under " Accentuation," " Compound Substan- tives," " Foreign Substan- tives," "Gender." Suffixes, of verbs, 311; of substs., 312; of adjs., 313. Superlative degree, of adjs., relative, 127, 1; absolute, 127, 2 ; of advs., 190, 3-7. st, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, (i); subst. suffix, 312, 1. stat, foreign substs. in, gen- der, 89, 2, (e). taiifeitb, 165, 8, and 10, (c). teil§ . . . teil'3, 238. Tense, in indirect state- ments, 87 ; in indirect questions, 88; auxiliariesof, use, 25, 53; place of with auxiliari -f mood, 199, 3. Tenses, simple, how formed | in w^»k V. rbs, 80 J in strong, 104 107, 110 ; endings <,f, in ..^k verbs, 85 ; in strong, |#S ; cum- poiiti*!, how Uirmtid, 25, lOH cibti-uction, 26, 83 ; ,j«quenc€ <3>f tendjs., 125, R. 1, in strong verbs, 186, 188, 192, R. 1; in Modal Aux- iliaries, 196, R. 1 ; in deri- vation, 308, N., 309, 311, 1, 2, 312, 2 4, 8, 11-13, 813, 5 ; orisin, 826. mis, subst. prefix, 315, 4. iiitb, 236. iiiifeni, 223, 23. sliltii, substs. in, gender, 89, 2, {a) ; subst. suffix, 312, 17. UliiU'iirf'lct, prep., 223, 15; conj. 239, 3, {b), 241, 21. units, before tens, 165, 7. 'unless,' how rendered in Germ., 241, 18. untcn, adv., 189, 3; com- parison, 130. UUtcv, prep., 66; prefix, 208. untcrbt'ffen.adv. conj., 237 ; subord. conj., 239,3, (/-), 241, 15. uittcrfialb, 223, C. uiiiueit, 223, 24. nr=, subst. prefix, 816, 5 »ur, substs. in, gender, S>9, 2, ie). Urfpvadie, 322, Variative numerals, 182, (c). tUTs, in.sep.verb prefix, 36, R. 6, 204 ; meanin;,;, 314, 6. Verlj, place of, 20, 32, 33, 87, 2, 88, 2, 266, K. 2, 267, R. 2,292, 2J(3, 301: English periphrastic fori is of, huw rendered in Ger., 31, R. 3; tenses of, 256- 262, 263, 266 (see also under the various tenses}; moods of, 266-278 (see also under the various moods); concord of, 285; when omitted, 269, R. 6, 287. Verbs, stem of, 27; principal parts of, 28; weak conjuga- tion of, 30, 31 ; cniiingsof simple tenses, 35 ; verbs conjugated with fciii, 53 ; neut., of motion, etc., 53 ; irrecrularweak, 99 ; strong, 103-108, App. L. ; bcificii Model, 118 ; tUeiDcit do., 120; lM)ic{icn do., 123 ; ' fccljicn do., 124; fi'icmt do., 131; fiii(]i'u do., 144 ; fpiiiiu'ii do., 158 ; Ijclfcn | do., 159; fprt'u)cudo.,167; ; offcii do., 181 ; fuiliv^cii ' do., 186; fallen do., 188; table of strong verbs, 192; passive voice, 112-114 ; j rellexive verbs, paradigm of, 41 ; use, 214-216; im- personal verbs, 217-220 ; compound verbs, inse])., 35, R. C. 109, 204, 207- 209, tlll-iU; -separable, 117. 205-208, 210; auxiliaries of tense, 25, 53 ; irregular strong, 194, li'6; auxiliaries of mood, 196-202 ; verbs with two nominatives, 242,2,3: with genitive, 245; with dative, 250; with accusative, 252, 263; verbs of choosing, 242, N.; of calling, coiv sidering, 253; verbs fol- lowed by the sujjjnnctive, 266; by the infin. without 3U, 271; with ,511, 272; prepositions after, 291 ; derivation of, withouf change, 308; «iih in- ternal clianre, 309 ; by suffixes, 811 ; by prefixes, 314. Dcvmittelft, 223, 9. ucnnlige, 223, 10. uiel, comparison of. 129 ; indef. pron., 145 ; indef. numeral, 168, 176;beforo adjs.,122, 11, 12. Vocative, 242, 1. UoU, prefix, sep. and insep., 208; adj., 244. uon, prep., 46, 228, {a\ 231, (/;,, 234; used for genitive, 46, R 3; with passive voice, 112, R. 3; with names of places, 72, 3, 4; with names of per- sons, 76, 6; replaces geni- tive of quality, 243, 5, N. ; after partitives, 243, 6, N.; after uoll,244 ; after verbs, 245,2 BOf, prep., 65, 184, 3, (b), 234 ; after vfcibs, etc., 291, 5, 11; after reilexivT verbs, 216, 1, (/.), Bont, adv., 189, .;;compari. son, 13(1. Vowels, niodiiied, pp. 3, 6, 12, 14, double, pp. 4, 6, 12, 14; importance of, p. 8, bottom ; long and short, pp. 9, 10; see also " Um- laut," touOrcnb, prep., 75,2, 228, 17; conj., £89,3, (/.), 241, 13; replaces Kiejl.jjarticipl* of time, 284, 1, ia). '.'Janii, 58, 187, \.,{d). ronriun, 83, R. 3, N. v> 'v tUi \v ID I Wl n)i nil '^^ tPaS, Sntarrog. pron., dedan- sion and use, 83; f.omc- times =- ' why,' 83, 6, 102, 3; used for etiuao, 149, 1; relative pron., 92, 96; followed by hai, 162, 1 ; of a number of persons or things, 162, "2 ; not gov- crrcd by prups., 83, 3, 96, 7 ; couitructio* of sen- tences with, 98, 3. iuQ§ far (ciii), 80. 'we,'indef., 146. Weak conjugation, see " Verbs " ; declensir-.i, see " Substantives," " Adjec- tives." roebcr . . . nodi, 238. lUCQCn, 75,1, 223,2, and R. 3. Weight, expiessionsof, 185. meil, 239. 3, (6), 241, 17. njcldjer intcrrog. pron, and adj., 6, 81, 82, 84, i^o; in exclamations, 85, 1,2; relative pron., 92, 94, 95; indefinite pron. and num- eral, used for ' some," 145, 135, 180; before adjs., 122, 13. wciii], comparison of, 129; iudef. pron., 145; indcf. numeral, 168, 176 ; before ddjs., 122, 12. rocnii, 58, 239, 3, (6), R. 1- 4, 267 ; omission of, 239, R. 2-1, 207, R. 2, 3, 6, N., 293, (a), 3, R. 4, N. 2, (c), R. 2, •!94, (i), R. 2. INDeX Won, 289, 5, (6), and R. 8, N. itjenn . . . nitht, 289, 3, (i), 241, 18. lucv, interrog. pron., 81, 83; relative pron., 92, 96,135, (3), N.; followed by bcv, 162, 1 ; replaced by ber, 306, R. 3, N'.; construc- tion of sentences with, 98, 3. toerbcit, jires. and impf, of, 19 ; conjugated with feiii, 53, (a); use as auxiliary of ten.se, 25,2; as auxili- ary of jiassive voice, 112, 118; con]u;.;ati()ii, 112; as impersonal verb, 217, 2,(c); wilhdat., 250, (,e). , 'when,' how rendered in \ Germ., 68. ' whether,' expressed by mbs i iien, 200, li, (c). ' while, whilst,' liosv rendered : in Germ., 241, 15. ' whole,' how rendered in Germ., 108, 170. ' itiibev, prep., 34 ; prefix, i ^04. luie, in comparisons, 126, •'!, ! 241, II, S: after joUl) ciii, ; fo oiii, 162, 4; subord. I conj., 239, 3, (l>) ; in com- I parative clauses, 806, R. 4, N. luicbev, prefix, 208, N. .-. loicuielfte, bcv, 164, 166, .h, N. 2. * will,' hc)\v rendeied in Germ., 201. Wish, exprebsed by the Sub- * 453 junctiv«, 2«S, 2; construc- tion of sentence.'* express- ing, 293, (a), 2. tuiffen, 196, and N. i. IDO, 187, II., (t); before preps., replacing interrog. prons., 83, 3, and relative prons., 95, 2, 96, 7. n)o()I, comparison of, 190; idiomatic use, 195, 10. luoilen. its conjugation, 196- 199. its use, 200, 1, 201 202. tuorbcn, for ijeioovben, in passive voice, 112, R. 2; when omitted, 112, R. 4. ' you,' how rendered in Ger., 40; indef. pron., 140. =Se^tl/ in compound num- erals, 165, 5. 5CVj, msep. prefix, 35, R. 6, 204; meaning, 314, 7. -\\Cj,, in numerals, 165, C. SU, prep., 46,227,00, 4, (^), 2, (.), 228, 0), 229, {a), 230,(.-),232,(/;), 233,(/;). (c), 2, (ii) ; with Infinitive, 272-277; place of, 109, 117, R. 2; wUh inscp. verbs, 205, 2 ; followed by rtl§ bajj or iiin ,^u, with verbs of choosing, 242, 3, N., 253; after adjs., 244. .Vicrft, 195, 5. "ifoliic, 223, 11, R. Vmiulift, 51, 7. iuuiiber, 51, 3. Ui'ci, declension of, 165, 2. jiDijrfien, prep., 65. I